Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract ...

Department of Natural Resources and Parks Wastewater Treatment Division

Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System

Contract C01465C20

Volume 2 of 3

Technical Specifications

July 2020

Department of Natural Resources & Parks

Wastewater Treatment Division

Brightwater Treatment Plant Digested Sludge Storage Tank Foam Improvements

Contract C01465C20

Divisions 26 and 40: ALEXANDER C. REED

Divisions 01, 02, 03, 09, 40, 43, and 46: DONALD SCOTT STALLMAN

05/29/2020

05/29/2020


Contract C01465C20

Division 07: JAMES KRESSBACH

6605 REGISTEREDARCHITECT

CH

>roi�

King County

Department of Natural Resources & Parks Wastewater Treatment Division

Department of Natural Resources & Parks



Contract C01465C20

Divisions 03 and 05: RONALD M. ROBERTS

05/29/2020

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BRIGHTWATER STORAGE TANK FOAM SPRAY SYSTEM

CONTRACT C01465C20

C01465C20 page 1 of 4 Table of Contents Rev. 6/14/2017

VOLUME 1

DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, FORMS AND TERMS AND CONDITIONS 00020 INVITATION TO BID 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120 NON-DISCRIMINATION, EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AND

SMALL CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS REQUIREMENTS AND APPRENTICESHIP REQUIREMENTS

00130 WAGE RATES 00300 FORM OF BID 00310 BID GUARANTY BOND 00410 FORMS AND DOCUMENTS 00420 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 00430 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 00440 QUALIFICATIONS INFORMATION 00500 AGREEMENT 00600 ADDENDA 00700 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 00800 SUPPLEMENTAL TERMS & CONDITIONS VOLUME 2

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 30 USE OF COUNTY FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 01 15 00 CONSTRUCTION TESTING 01 16 00 LABOR MANAGEMENT PLAN 01 19 50 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF PROPERTY AND WORK 01 29 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 31 19 CONTRACT MEETINGS 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 10 STANDARD FORMS 01 35 29 HEALTH AND SAFETY 01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01 41 26 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)


01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 67 00 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE 01 73 00 BRACING AND ANCHORING 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL MANAGEMENT 01 74 23 FINAL CLEANING 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 40 ASSETS ATTRIBUTE COLLECTION 01 78 41 ASSET TAGGING REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS 01 80 00 EQUIPMENT TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 02 21 00 SITE SURVEYS 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 16 13 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE LINING FOR STRUCTURES 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (SMALL JOBS) 03 60 00 GROUTING 03 83 00 CONCRETE CUTTING AND PATCHING DIVISION 4 – NOT USED DIVISION 5 – METALS 05 05 19 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS 05 05 23 METAL FASTENINGS 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 – NOT USED DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS



DIVISION 8 – NOT USED

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 06 90 SCHEDULES FOR PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 COATING SYSTEMS

DIVISION 10 – 25 – NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

DIVISION 27 – 39 – NOT USED

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS 40 05 01 40 05 17 40 05 23 40 05 24 40 05 40 40 05 41 40 05 42 40 05 44 40 05 47 40 05 57 40 05 62 40 05 65.20 40 05 93 40 06 70 40 06 71 40 06 72

PIPING SYSTEMS COPPER PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING STEEL PROCESS PIPE PIPING CONNECTIONS PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR PIPING EXPANSION JOINTS AND FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE PIPING APPURTENANCES ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES ECCENTRIC PLUG VALUES RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES ELECTRIC MOTORS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE ALARM SCHEDULE



40 06 73 DCS I/O SCHEDULE 40 61 13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 40 70 20 TRANSMITTERS CS 710-07 CONTROL STRATEGY – DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE DIVISION 41 – 42 – NOT USED DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT 43 05 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT 43 05 50 VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS 43 05 62 GENERAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING 43 13 48 DIGESTER GAS HANDLING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES DIVISION 44 – 45 – NOT USED DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 51 25 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE TANK PUMP MIXING SYSTEM DIVISIONS 47 – 49 – NOT USED

VOLUME 3

CONTRACT DRAWINGS

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 11 00 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section contains a summary of the work in this Contract and other known work in the vicinity of the Contract work.

B. The work to be performed under this Contract consists of furnishing all tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles; furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications; and performing all work or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract, in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. Provide work complete. Provide all work, materials, and services not expressly indicated in the Contract Documents that may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the work and administration of the contract.

C. The project work is located at Brightwater Wastewater Treatment Facility. The purpose of this project is to perform improvements to minimize issues with foaming experienced in the Digested Sludge Storage Tank (DSST).

1.02 WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

A. The work of this Contract includes: Procure new digested sludge storage tank mixing pump system (pump and nozzles) Replace the digested sludge storage tank mixing pump with a new chopper pump. Install a new nozzle mixing system in the storage tank and all install associated process piping. Modify existing digester gas line from storage tank. Replace hatch on the storage tank roof with an emergency pressure relief hatch. Connect the

hatch open switch to the distributed control system. Revise the DSST roof drainage system, install a new scupper drain, and route piping to sump in the

cleaning well. Reuse/re-install existing instruments and provide new instruments and instrumentation services to

complete the work. Provide a new variable frequency drive to provide power to the new chopper pump. Replace the

existing control panel at the pump with a new control panel. Reuse existing electrical equipment and provide new electrical equipment and services as required

to complete the work. Repair HDPE liner in Digested Sludge Storage Tank per existing HDPE liner manufacturer’s recommendations for all liner penetrations, nozzle extensions and any liner damaged during construction.

Provide required documentation. And all other work as defined in the Contract Documents.

B. Accomplishment of work in the Contract Documents shall meet all requirements of the Contract including timeframes specified by Section 01 14 00.

C. The above description is not intended to be complete. The work to be completed is provided for in the Contract Documents. The summary in this Section is not intended to relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for reading and understanding the Contract Documents.


D. Federal, State and Local Laws, Statutes and Regulations are not individually referenced. This provision incorporates by reference the latest version of statutes, laws and regulations. In case of conflict between the requirements of the specifications and requirements of the statutes and regulations, the contractor shall bring them to the attention of the Project Representative. Lacking a specific response, the more stringent shall control. In no case can this contract be interpreted to override statutes and regulations of governing authorities.

E. National and industry codes cited, such as IBC, NEC, NFPA, shall include amendments and supplements by the authority having jurisdiction whether stated or not.

1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER COUNTY CONTRACTS OR BY COUNTY STAFF

A. Isolating, draining and cleaning the digested sludge storage tank and any associated piping systems.

B. Isolating, purging and cleaning the existing digester gas line to be relocated.

C. Placing the digested sludge storage tank back into service following the completion of the project to upgrade the tank mixing system, prior to commissioning.

D. The County will provide programming and testing of the Ovation process control system.

1.04 OTHER RELATED CONTRACTS

A. Cooperate and coordinate with all agencies, trades, and contractors involved in the execution of these as well as work of others not listed but requiring coordination.

1.05 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE

A. Specifications are written mostly in imperative and streamlined form. Unless indicated otherwise, this imperative language is directed to the Contractor. Additionally, the words "shall be" shall be included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.

Examples: a. Aggregate: ASTM C33. b. Adhesive: spread with notched trowel.

B. Individual Specification sections may include a reference to other sections. Specification sections referenced are intended only to assist in identifying associated work and are not intended and shall not be considered to be all inclusive. The Contractor is responsible for performing all the work in the Contract Documents whether referenced in the specific specifications or not.

C. Whenever there is wording stating that an item is “as specified”, “as shown”, or “as indicated”, the reference is to all the Contract Documents. Stating “as specified”, “as shown”, or “as indicated” does not refer necessarily to a Drawing or Specification, but it refers to either.

D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to

supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.


If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified and shall be new and free of defects.

F. Requirements for UL or FM label shall mean UL or FM label or other OSHA/Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NRTL) agency when approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.06 REFERENCES

A. Whenever a Specification in this Contract references the specifications of WSDOT or other Jurisdiction Having Authority, it is to define the technical standards to be met for this Contract; only the technical standards are referenced. Administrative provisions such as Measurement and Payment of the referenced specification shall not apply to this Contract in any instance.

B. References to industry, association and governing codes and standards are to be interpreted as reference to the version current at the date of submission of the contract bids.

1.07 STANDARDIZED EQUIPMENT

A. Pursuant to King County Code 2.93, the Wastewater Treatment Division has conducted a process to standardize certain equipment to achieve overall system efficiencies. Equipment designated as ‘sole source’ or allowing ‘no substitutions’ or with similar designation have been selected and specified in accordance with this code provisions.

1.08 PRODUCT REGISTRATION

A. Register King County, Wastewater Treatment Division with the equipment manufacturer to receive manufacturer’s notices on product quality, defect or safety issues. Register to the Asset Manager, Wastewater Treatment Division, King County; 201 South Jackson Street; Seattle, WA 98104.

PART 2 PRODUCTS [NOT USED]

PART 3 EXECUTION [NOT USED]

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 14 00 - 1 WORK RESTRICTIONS

SECTION 01 14 00

WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies completion times, milestones, constraints, hours of work, and liquidateddamages.

B. Schedule and conduct all work in a manner consistent with the Contract, and comply with theconstruction scheduling requirements, Contract milestones and constraints on the Work as specified.

1.02 COMPLETION TIMES

A. Submission of the initial Digested Sludge Storage Tank Mixing System submittal within 21 calendardays after the effective date of Notice to Proceed.

B. Achieve successful completion of the Operational Test Phase of the Digested Sludge Storage TankMixing System in accordance with Section 01 80 00 within 248 calendar days after the effective date ofNotice to Proceed.

C. Achieve Substantial Completion within 281 calendar days after the effective date of Notice to Proceed.

D. Achieve Final Acceptance within the time specified by the Project Representative and stated in theCertificate of Substantial Completion per Section 00700.

1.03 MILESTONES

A. Submission of the initial Digested Sludge Storage Tank Mixing System submittal.

B. Digested sludge storage tank operational at completion of operational test phase/start of commissioning. The tank must be connected to the digester gas system and have the ability to accept digested sludge to be considered operational.

C. Substantial Completion

D. Construction Final Acceptance

1.04 CONSTRAINTS

A. Modifications to gas piping to install an isolation blank for the Digested Sludge Storage Tank mustoccur during an outage of the digester gas system. Shutdown of the digester gas system will becoordinated and implemented by the Brightwater operations group. Verify that the isolation, purging andcleaning of the digester gas line to be relocated is completed by KC, prior to initiating the work. Theinstallation of the piping isolation blank must be installed during a 30 minute shutdown of the digestergas system.

1.05 HOURS OF WORK

A. Unless otherwise specified, conform with applicable jurisdictions and other pertinent ordinancesregarding limitations on work hours or specific parts of the work.

Request work hour variations in writing and obtain written approval from Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (City/County of Snohomish) and the Project Representative prior to initiating work hours outside of the hours allowed by this Contract.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 14 00 - 2 WORK RESTRICTIONS

Work outside of the scheduled work hours shall be submitted and requires approval by the Project Representative 72 hours prior to the start of such work. If the Contractor works unscheduled hours and/or if the Contractor has not obtained Project Representative's approval at least 72 hours prior to the start of unscheduled work, the contractor shall be liable for the costs of King County's overtime inspection at the rate of $107 for each hour for each person performing such inspection for the County.

B. For modifications to the gas piping the following shall be provided.Primary and secondary 24-hour, seven-day contact information On call availability to mitigate problems with new construction overnight, weekends and holidays, during/after the applicable periods that these work elements are performed.

C. Hours of work may be further modified by Section 01 41 26.

D. Submit a schedule of working hours in accordance with Section 00700.

1.06 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. Liquidated damages for failure to achieve Substantial Completion: $1290 per day.

B. Liquidated damages for failure to achieve Final Acceptance: $520 per day.



END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 14 30 - 1 USE OF COUNTY FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 01 14 30

USE OF COUNTY FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for working in County facilities and use of County facilities andequipment.

1.02 COUNTY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Only County personnel will operate the existing facility.

B. Contact between County operating personnel and the Contractor shall be through the ProjectRepresentative.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01 33 00.

B. Documentation meeting the requirements for Contractor use of County equipment and special tools.

1.04 CONSTRAINTS

A. Per Section 01 14 00.

1.05 USE OF EXISTING PROCESS SYSTEM AND UTILITIES

A. No existing process or utility services shall be used without written permission from the ProjectRepresentative unless specified for Contractor use.

B. Equipment presently installed in the facility shall be available to County personnel at all times.

C. Locate all Contractor equipment and materials in an area that does not interfere with facility operation:coordinate with Project Representative.

D. If necessary to complete the work, coordinate and receive approval for all shutdowns of systems orequipment from the Project Representative. Provide a minimum of two weeks prior notice forcoordination.

E. Provide lockout/tagout for energy systems using energy isolating devices, i.e., electrical, mechanical,pneumatic, hydraulic, thermal. Coordinate Contractor lockout/tagout procedure for each specific type ofdevice with County procedure prior to implementation of the lockout/tagout. County will performlockout/tagout for existing operating facilities.

F. Do not adjust or operate County equipment or systems except as specifically required by this Contractthen do so only after approval of Project Representative.

1.06 USE OF COUNTY EQUIPMENT

A. If use of existing County overhead cranes or fixed location hoists is critically necessary for thecompletion of work, submit a request for use.

County cranes and hoists are operated and maintained under compliance with general industry requirements WAC 296-24 and do not comply with construction industry requirements WAC 296-155.


If required for construction, bring crane or hoist into compliance with and have it certified as in compliance with WAC 296-155 as a condition of use. If modification is required for use as a construction activity crane, provide a written description of the modification to the Project Representative and arrange for and make the modification only after approval of the Project Representative. Contractor’s operator shall be certified per the requirements of WAC 296-155.

B. The Project Representative will review all requests to use and operate County equipment and specialtools. To obtain approval, submit the following per Chapter 296-24 WAC, Chapter 296-62 WAC, andChapter 296-155 WAC:

Relevant Contractor's employee safety training records. Names of employees approved as “Authorized”. Names of employees approved as a “Competent Person”. Names of employees approved as “Qualified”. Names of employees who are “Certified”.

C. Prior to using County equipment, coordinate use and have qualified operator receive instructions onuse from the Project Representative.

1.07 SPACE CLASSIFICATION AND OCCUPANCY LIMITATIONS

A. Be responsible for compliance with regulations regarding classifications of areas and spaces infacilities. These may include:

Classified areas, as defined by the NFPA. Areas with occupancy limitations, as defined by the local applicable building code. Areas where there may be insufficient oxygen to sustain life. Areas defined as confined spaces in WAC Title 296-809. Hazardous areas as defined by the International Fire Code (IFC) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) where substances including, but not limited to, methane, chlorine, propane, hydrogen sulfide, and corrosive chemicals may be present. Areas of high noise exposure Other restricted or specially classified areas.

B. Conduct work using means and methods that are allowable and compatible with space classifications,occupancy limitations, WAC requirements, and all other health, safety, and hazard risks.

C. Work within this Contract and other contracts may involve areas with health and safety limitations.Notify the Project Representative of limitations at least 10 days before they are created. Indicate thetype, extent, duration, and other pertinent information regarding each limitation.

D. Ventilate and monitor all enclosed spaces, including excavations, areas when there is use of chemicalsand coatings, and spaces exposed to or adjacent to sewage or sewage solids, in accordance with WAC296-809 and NFPA 820. Ensure that no spaces present a hazard, , including, but not limited to:

Deficiency of oxygen.Methane, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide poisoning.Explosive gassesPer NFPA 820, monitor all spaces for methane and make sure all methane levels are below 10% ofthe LEL before the authorization of any Hot Work in the area.

E. Be aware that unforeseen toxic and/or flammable gasses and volatile liquids may be present in rawsewage in pipes, collectors, lift stations, and in the facility or be introduced without notice.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Take precautions to protect County operating equipment, power supplies, distribution equipment, andinstrumentation equipment from physical damage, and from exposure to weather, concrete dust, debris,dirt, and water.

B. Existing facilities and equipment are assumed to be in good working order. Damage or defects shall bereported to the Project Representative immediately prior to the start of work in the area.

3.02 SIGN-IN/SIGN-OUT REQUIREMENTS

A. Each day upon arrival at the Facility, report to the Administration Building to sign-in on the ContractorsSign-in/Sign-out Sheet. Sign-in is required for all Contractors and subcontractors.

B. Upon departure from the Facilities, Contractor and subcontractor personnel report to the AdministrationBuilding and sign-out on the Contractors Sign-in/Sign-out Sheet. Sign-out is required for all Contractorsand subcontractors.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 15 00 - 1 CONSTRUCTION TESTING

SECTION 01 15 00

CONSTRUCTION TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section is supplementary to the applicable testing and inspection program in Section 00700. Itdescribes the responsibilities of parties pertaining to testing and inspections. Additional specific testingand inspections are also specified in individual Sections.

1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the embedded standard referencedherein. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, therequirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASTM E329 Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualifications: Provide documentation demonstrating accreditation as specified in ASTM E329.

C. Testing and Inspection Plan:Identify tests and inspections, their timing and their frequency to meet the requirements of this Section for completion of the Work. Include a weekly listing of the status of all tests and inspections and status of their submittals to the Project Representative.

D. Test results.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:Independent testing company: a. Company and Personnel:

1) Meet the certification and experience requirements indicated in ASTM E329.

1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

A. County responsibilities:Independent acceptance testing of materials and materials as constructed in place as it deems necessary. Witness tests performed by the Contractor. Independent testing to verify Contractor test results as it deems necessary. Required Inspections for County obtained permits including Special Inspections as required by the SBC and local building officials.

B. Contractor responsibilities:Controlling the quality of its Work. Testing, demonstrating, and documenting compliance with the Contract requirements, Specifications, Drawings, codes, and referenced standards for constructed items.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 15 00 - 2 CONSTRUCTION TESTING

Demonstrating and documenting compliance with permits and regulatory agency requirements including requirements for Contractor obtained permits as required by the permitting authority. Obtain the services of a certified Independent Testing Company to conduct quality control tests. Testing company to conform to ASTM requirements. For County Acceptance Testing: a. Cooperate with testing personnel. Provide access to the work and to supplier's operations.b. Provide representative samples of materials to be tested in the required quantities.c. Furnish labor and facilities:

1) For access to work to be tested.2) To obtain and handle test samples at the Site.3) To facilitate inspections and tests.4) For storage and curing test samples until removed to the laboratory.5) To repair any test areas in order to match original conditions.6) For testing and inspection in supplier's facilities.

C. Required testing shall not be cause for claims for delay or extra work.

1.06 COSTS

A. Paid by the County:County testing and inspection, as required in this Section, except retests and re-inspections required due to defective work. Additional testing as directed by Project Representative.

B. Paid by the Contractor:Contractor testing and inspection and documentation, as required in this Section, to control quality and demonstrate and document conformance with the Contract Documents and applicable permits and codes. Retesting and re-inspection required because of defective work. Testing performed for the convenience of the Contractor.

1.07 CONFLICTING TEST RESULTS

A. In the event of conflicting test results, the test shall be re-run and compared.

B. Contractor and the Project Representative shall agree on the independent agency that will perform theretest.

C. Costs for the retest:If the retest shows that the Contractor’s initial test results were acceptable as per the requirements in this Contract, then King County will be responsible for the costs of the retest. If the retest shows that the Contractor’s initial test results were unacceptable as per the requirements in this Contract, then the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of the retest.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

01 16 00- 1 Labor Management PlanC01465C20 Rev(11/09/2015)

SECTION 01 16 00

LABOR MANAGEMENT PLAN

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the requirement for submittal of a Labor Management Plan onContracts with a Contract Price of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more at time ofContract Execution by King County.

1.02 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Contractor acknowledges that because this is a time of the essence contract,any work stoppage, strike, slow down, picket or other disruptive activity whichimpacts the timely and accurate completion of the Project may cause the Countysignificant economic damage.

B. Contractor shall comply with the provisions set forth within Section 00700 - GeneralTerms and Conditions, Article 10.5 - Notice to County of Labor Disputes.

1.03 LABOR MANAGEMENT SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit the following Labor Management Plan in accordance withSection 00700 - General Terms and Conditions, Article 4.4 - Submittals and Section01 33 00 Submittal Procedures within 20 days following the Notice to Proceed withWork.

B. Provide a copy of the Contractor's collective bargaining agreements, if any, and theirexpiration dates.

C. Provide Contractor's labor relations history for both County and non-County projectsof similar to types of work set forth in Contract Documents for this Project for the lastfive years. Include the following detail:1. Name and dates of the project;2. Description of the project.3. Final cost of the construction contract for the project.4. Description of any work stoppage, strike, picket, slow down or other labor

disruption that occurred on the project, if any.5. Description of impacts to contract price or schedule resulting from the labor

disruption that occurred on the project, if any.6. Description of the labor management methods used by the Contractor to prevent,

mitigate or eliminate a labor disruption on the project.D. Provide a description of any activities or events Contractor, or its Subcontractors,

reasonably believe may cause a potential or actual work stoppage, strike, slow downor other labor disruption on the Project which may either (a) impact worker'sperformance at the Site or (b) impact the Contract Time or Contract Price for theProject.

01 16 00- 2 Labor Management PlanC01465C20 Rev(11/09/2015)

E. Provide the plan(s) the Contractor and its Subcontractors will follow to prevent,mitigate or eliminate labor disruptions if they occur on the Project. Provide copies ofany policies and procedures which support this plan(s).

F. Identify individual(s) responsible for implementing this Labor Management Plan forthe Project. For each individual provide the following information.1. Name of individual and job title2. Description of individual(s) experience over the last 5 years implementing labor

management plans on projects of Similar Scope and Complexity to the Project.This should include,a. Name of project.b. Description of project.c. Final cost of the construction contract for the project.d. Description of any labor problems or disruptions that occurred on the project

and the impact the disruption had on the project.e. Description of the steps taken by the identified individual(s) to prevent,

mitigate or eliminate the labor problem or disruption for the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 19 50 - 1 OF PROPERTY AND WORK

SECTION 01 19 50

PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF PROPERTY AND WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies protection and maintenance of underground and aboveground utilities,structures, fences, parking strips, sidewalks, driveways, streets, and other improvements which may beaffected by the work.

B. This Section also specifies requirements for Contractor disposition of third party claims in a timelymanner.



Reference Title

Chapter 19.122 RWC Underground Utilities

WAC 296-155-657 Requirements for Protective Systems

WAC 296-24-960 Working on or Near Exposed Energy Parts

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Listing and schedule of all potholing.

C. Listing of all utilities/facilities to be physically protected and relocated.

D. Shoring for all affected structures and utilities.

1.04 LOCATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Not Used.

B. Not Used.

C. Call Utility Underground Notification Center, phone number 811 [older number 1-800-424-5555 stillworks], for the location of underground facilities. Call a minimum of five working days in advance ofexcavation operations. Those utility owners who do not locate their facilities in accordance withChapter 19.122 RCW are liable for costs incurred by the excavator. If the excavator discoversunderground facilities which are not identified, the excavator shall immediately notify the owner of suchfacilities, and the Underground Notification Center.

D. Coordinate efforts to locate existing utilities. Review with the Project Representative the locations ofexisting utilities in relation to the new construction and evaluate areas of conflict.

E. Be responsible to excavate and expose all major and minor existing utilities prior to new construction todetermine utility elevations in relation to the new facilities.


F. Not Used.

G. The following is a list of utilities that may serve the work area. The listing is provided for theContractor's convenience. The list shall not be considered to be comprehensive or complete. Theremay be other utilities in the area that are not listed and some of the names and telephone numbers inthe listing may have changed since the information was compiled. The County assumes noresponsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the information in the list. Contact the BrightwaterProject Representative for any Utility contact information.

Utility/Facility Owner or Agency Contact Person Telephone Number

Water City Public Works Dept.

Traffic City Transportation

Sewer King County WTD

Sewer City Utility

Storm Drainage City Utility

Communications Verizon

Communications Qwest

Communications ATT

Cable TCI

Gas Pipeline Washington Energy

Gas Pipeline Olympic Pipeline

Fiber Optics ATT

Fiber Optics Worldcom

Fiber Optics Electric Lightwave

Fiber Optics Sprint

Power Puget Sound Energy

Power BPA

Power Snohomish County PUD

H. Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Project Representative, protect, modify, and/or relocateall existing utilities required to complete the work.

I. In general, the locations of existing major utilities, whether aboveground or underground, are indicatedon the Drawings with the exception of overhead power or other aboveground utilities supported onpower/telephone poles. This information has been obtained from utility maps and field surveys. TheCounty does not guarantee the accuracy or completeness of this information, and it is to be understoodthat other aboveground or underground facilities not shown on the Drawings may be encounteredduring the course of the work.

J. Contact all utility owners or operators having underground facilities within the work area and request themarking of their utilities. Be responsible for damages resulting from any failure to contact utility ownersfor location, routing, and marking of a specific utility and its subsequent effects. Promptly notify theProject Representative prior to any work in the area of a utility where a utility owner fails to meet itsobligations under Chapter 19.122 RCW.

K. Not Used.


L. Protect, modify, and relocate all existing utilities and facilities required to accommodate Contractor'smeans and methods. Specific means and methods to be utilized by the Contractor are not known tothe County. Therefore, the County will not be liable for utility protection, modification, and relocation notshown on the Drawings required by the Contractor due to its means and methods. It is the Contractor'sresponsibility to determine the requirements of the work required by the Contract Documents and makeprovision for protection, modification, and relocation required to perform the work. Coordinate allprotection, modification, and relocation work through the affected utility. Work to be completed to theutility owners' requirements and standards.

M. Major underground utilities:Not Used.

N. Minor underground utilities:Not Used.

O. Not Used.

P. Not Used.

Q. Temporary Support Systems: submit detail drawings of proposed methods to support, protect, andbuttress utilities affected by the work. Methods proposed are required to be reviewed and accepted bythe affected utility prior to submittal per Section 01 33 00.

R. Storm and sanitary sewers:Existing live sewers shall remain in service. Adequate provision shall be made for disposal of existing sewage flow. Immediately repair construction damage to the existing sewer system and manholes to a condition equal to or better than that existing prior to the damage. Repair all damage which results from the disturbance of the existing sewer. Remove water accumulating during construction from the new sewers and prevent it from entering existing lines. Flush existing pipes which were affected by the construction to the point of the next upstream connection and repair any pipelines or manholes damaged by gravel, rocks, or other debris that has entered the existing system during construction. The physical connection to an existing manhole or sewer line shall not be made until so authorized by the Project Representative.

S. Aboveground electrical, cable, and communication facilities:Attention is called to all overhead items including, but not limited to, power and telephone lines, temporary traffic signals, traffic signal mast arms, overhead sign bridges, sign support span wires, signs, and street lights. Observe the location of these overhead facilities and plan and conduct work operations accordingly. Take precautions to protect and avoid damage to all overhead facilities. Relocate facilities as required to meet the means and methods to be utilized. Observe and investigate the presence of facilities that may be affected by the work. Consult with and rely on the information given by utility owners and operators to determine the extent of any hazards and measures required. Determine the extent of any hazard created by facilities in all areas and follow approved safety procedures during the work. Support poles at risk of being undermined by the work. Follow the requirements of WAC 296-24-960 for all energized primary conductors. For 50 kV lines and less, at no time shall personnel or equipment approach closer than 10 feet to any energized primary conductors. For greater than 50 kV, meet the requirements of WAC 296-24-960.

T. Underground electrical, cable, and communication facilities:Determine the protection necessary to proceed safely to protect these underground facilities.


U. Gas:As required by the appropriate utility owner, protect, maintain, support in place, or relocate all gas mains crossing the pipeline trenches. Provide a minimum of 12 inches of clearance, measured from edge to edge, between gas mains or gas service lines and new facilities. If relocating either utility is not practical, a protective wrap shall be provided for the entire distance where less than 12 inches of vertical clearance and less than 6 inches of horizontal clearance are provided. Wrapping material shall consist of either a split polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe or PVC wrapping of at least 0.04 inches in thickness, and shall be applied to either one of the pipes. All abandoned gas mains encountered in the trench area shall be removed. All temporary gas service slack lines shall be protected and maintained during pipeline installation. Notify Puget Sound Energy at least two full working days (minimum of 48 hours) in advance of excavation in the vicinity of the high pressure gas main.

V. Water:As required by the appropriate utility, protect, maintain, support in place, or relocate all water pipelines affected by the work. Maintain water service along the alignment of work at all times. Thrust blocks are not shown on the Drawings and shall be assumed to be present at all water line deflections of 12.5 degrees or greater.

4. Notify the Project Representative immediately of any such damage. Begin repairs immediately,and work continuously until water service is restored.

W. Roadways:Take adequate precautions to protect existing sidewalks, curbs, pavements, utilities, adjoining property, and structures, and to avoid damage thereto. Traffic signage, paint striping, and channelization shall be protected and replaced if necessary. Maintain the existing illumination pattern for signs and roads at all times unless otherwise specified. Install temporary roadway lighting as necessary. Access for emergency equipment shall be maintained at all times.

1.05 SHORING AND BRACING [NOT USED]

1.06 EMERGENCIES

A. Whenever work endangers the safety of life or property, including adjoining property or property in theimmediate proximity of the work, take all prudent actions to prevent loss or injury.

1.07 PROTECTION OF DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE TANK

A. Protect Digested Sludge Storage Tank roof in accordance with Section 07 54 00.

B. Take adequate precautions to protect the Digested Sludge Storage Tank interior HDPE lining systemduring work inside the DSST. Refer to Drawings and Section 03 16 13 HDPE Lining for Structures forrequirements.

C. Take adequate precautions to protect the Digested Sludge Storage Tank interior roof coating for anystructural attachments to the underside of the roof.

1.08 PROTECTION OF TREES AND VEGETATION [NOT USED]

1.09 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF THIRD PARTY PROPERTY [NOT USED]


1.10 DISPOSITION OF THIRD PARTY CLAIMS

A. The Contractor is responsible for all damage related to prosecution of the work. The County mayreceive notification of damages in writing from third parites as third party claims as a result of theprosecution of the work. When these third party claims are received by the County, they will betendered to the Contractor. The Contractor is required to contact the claimant within 30 days of receiptof the claim from the Project Representative. The Contractor shall report to the Project Representativewithin 45 days of receipt with the Contractor's proposed action on the claim. If the Contractor fails tocontact the claimant within the time stipulated above or disposition the claim within 90 days of receipt,the County may disposition the claim with the third party claimant and may withhold the amount of thesettlement from the disposition from the next Application for Payment.

B. During all the procedural requirements listed above, the Contractor shall keep the ProjectRepresentative informed of the plan and actual progress.

PART 2 PRODUCT [NOT USED]


END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 29 00 - 1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

SECTION 01 29 00

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Measurement is described under each bid item in this Section.

B. Payment for the various items on the Bidding Schedule, as further specified herein, shall include allcompensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, andmanufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of workbeing described, as necessary to complete the various items of the work all in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto and including all costs ofcompliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including safety and healthrequirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U. S. Department of Labor(OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the BiddingSchedule, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bidding Schedule for thevarious appurtenant items of work.

C. Indirect costs, such as supervision and overheads, profit, the general conditions specified in theContract, all shall be allocated to each bid item as applicable for work defined in the bid item. Noseparate payment will be made to the Contractor for these items.

D. Refer to Section 01 32 16 for Schedule of Values requirements.

1.02 BID ITEM MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. The Bidding Schedule contains a single Bid Item whose definitions follows. This Bid Item represents theentire scope of work covered by the Contract Documents.

B. Payment will be based on the percentage of completion of each item in the Schedule of Values.

C. Bid Item No. 1, Lump Sum:The lump sum bid price for Bid Item No. 1 shall include all work specified in the Contract Documents. Measurement shall be in accordance with a reasonable apportionment of the work as established in the schedule of values. Payment will be based upon the percentage of completion for each appropriate line item in the schedule of values.

PART 2 MATERIALS [NOT USED]


END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 31 19 - 1 CONTRACT MEETINGS

SECTION 01 31 19

CONTRACT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies Contract meetings prior to and during construction.

1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The Project Representative will chair a meeting of representatives of the Contractor, County staff, andother affected agencies prior to beginning construction. The purpose of the meeting will be to:

Establish lines of authority and communication within the Contract team. To discuss the administrative requirements of the Contract. Address project issues if needed. To define the duties and responsibilities of all parties.

B. Agenda:Schedules. Health and safety Mobilization plans. Equal employment regulations. Apprenticeship programs. Administrative procedures of the Contract. Permits, easements, community relations Other issues agreed between Contractor and County

C. Ensure that the Contractor’s Representative, superintendent, Safety Officer, and representatives of allmajor subcontractors are present at the meeting.

D. The County may elect to hold the meetings through tele-conference/web-conference. The Contractorshall have the ability to attend remote/virtual meetings with video conferencing and share screencapabilities.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. GeneralAttend weekly progress meetings to discuss the issues and progress of the project. Meetings may be more or less frequent depending on the progress and status of the work. Arrange for attendance of subcontractors as necessary to discuss job progress. Meeting time to be mutually agreed to between the Project Representative and Contractor Representative.

B. Attendance at Progress MeetingsAttendance may be required from: a. Project Representative and other County staff.b. Contractor's representative and other Contractor staff.c. Other contractors, as pertinent to agenda.d. Subcontractors, as pertinent to agenda.e. Contractor Safety Officer.f. Representatives of governmental agencies, other regulatory agencies, or utilities.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 31 19 - 2 CONTRACT MEETINGS

C. Agenda for Progress MeetingsIn general, the agenda for each meeting is to be agreed by Contractor and Project Representative and may include items such as: a. Review progress on action items from prior meetings.b. Review work progress since last meeting compared to the look ahead schedule.c. Look ahead schedule for upcoming period.d. Identification of problems that might impede planned progress.e. Construction deficiencies.f. Contract administrative deficiencies including:

1) RFI status2) Submittal status3) RCO status4) RCP status5) As-built status

g. Coordination of projected work with other contractors.h. Project Safety.i. Other items as required by the Project Representative or the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MEETING RECORD

A. The Project Representative will recordList of issues discussed Agreements Follow-on action items required by either the Contractor or the County Construction deficiencies noted Contract administrative deficiencies noted Project safety issues


END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 32 16 - 1 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

SECTION 01 32 16

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies requirements and procedures for preparing project schedules, schedule ofvalues, and reports.

B. Incorporate milestones and constraints including, but not limited to, those indicated on the Drawingsand in Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work, , Section 01 14 00 - Work Restrictions, and Section 01 4126 - Permits and Easements.

C. Purpose:Project Schedule: a. To assure planning to execute the work in the required Contract Time and avoid conflicts with

other concurrent construction.b. To establish and monitor the scheduling and progress of Contract work activities.c. To assist the Project Representative in monitoring progress and for the assessment of Contract

change impacts.d. To assist the Project Representative and Contractor in determining the completed work for

processing of the Application for Payment.Schedule of Values: To provide an allocation of the Contract Price for measurement of monthly progress and payment. Reports: To provide a qualitative and quantitative record of work progress, planned progress, project schedule changes, and monthly progress payment.

D. Use the scheduling technique known as the Critical Path Method (CPM). Use the PrecedenceDiagramming Method (PDM) in preparing the CPM diagrams and calculations.

E. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Section will be cause for delay in review and acceptanceof the Application for Payment. See Section 00700.

F. Failure to properly schedule the project and provide the required reports as set forth in this Section willadversely impact the ability of the County to manage its responsibility regarding time and costmanagement.

G. Use the scheduling software Primavera P6.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Float:See 00700-1.0.

B. Draft Project Schedule:The initial Critical Path Method schedule (CPM) for the Contractors work that includes the early start/finish and late start/finish dates for each contract activity, milestone, constraint, significant contract activities and procurement of critical materials specified in Division 1 through Division 46.

C. Baseline Schedule:Includes revisions from the review comments of the Draft Project Schedule submittal. A CPM cost loaded schedule that includes the Contractor’s complete plan and all the necessary activities to perform the Contract work within the Contract Time including milestones and constraints defined in the Contract.


D. Schedule of Values:Schedule of Values identifies the various activities of the Contract work and their values and quantities including the overhead and profit of each activity. Cost information presented in a tabular Microsoft Excel 2013 or newer format to be used as a tool to track status of each activity on a monthly basis.

E. Monthly Update Schedule:Updates to the Baseline Schedule show the current construction schedule that reflects actual progress to date, updating all changes to the Contract, and the schedule plan to complete the work within the Contract Time.

F. Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule:A three week detailed look at work activities planned for this Period. Scope of detail is to review the past week of progress and the future three weeks of planned work activities. Provide this schedule with greater detail than the CPM and prepare it in a format that includes references to appropriate CPM schedule activity numbers and work breakdown. The three week look-ahead schedule shall coordinate with the Monthly Update Schedule.

G. Cost Loaded Schedule:The Baseline and Monthly Update Schedule in which each individual schedule activity has appropriate cost information in order to develop the required cash flow reports and to coordinate with the monthly Schedule of Values for the Application for Payment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualifications: Submit within seven (7) days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed.

C. SchedulesSubmit all schedules in hardcopy and accessible electronic data files in the software format in which it was created. At a minimum, the data files shall provide the CPM Network Diagram; tabular report listing of each activity by Early Start and Total Float sorts; logic tie report providing the predecessor and successor for each activity; precedence diagram; and earned value projections. Draft Project Schedule: Submit at the Preconstruction Conference identified in Section 01 31 19. This submittal will be reviewed by the County as required in Section 01 33 00 to verify that the requirements of Specification Section 01 32 16 have been met and may require more than one submission by the Contractor to attain a Review Action of 1 (No Exceptions Taken) or 2 (Note Markings). When the Draft Project schedule receives a review status of 1 or 2, compile and note all comments and submit as the Baseline schedule. Baseline Schedule: Submit no later than 10 days after the dated return of the review comments from the County on the Draft Project Schedule. The Contractor is not entitled nor is the County required to make any progress payments for work until the Baseline Schedule has received a Review Action of 1 or 2. No more than one progress billing will be paid without an approved baseline schedule. Monthly Update Schedule: Submit with each Application for Payment. Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule: Submit during each progress meeting per Section 01 31 19.

D. Schedule of Values:Submit the initial Schedule of Values with the submission of the Draft Project Schedule. Submit the final Schedule of Values with the submission of the Baseline Schedule.

E. Reports:Daily reports: Submit on the first working day of the week for past weeks work. Monthly cash flow reports: Submit with each Application for Payment. Monthly production reports: Submit with each Application for Payment when requested by the Project Representative. Work Plan reports: Submit with when requested by the Project Representative.


Monthly progress reports: Submit with each Application for Payment. Recovery Schedule: Submit as described in paragraph 3.03 when requested by the Project Representative.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Submit names and qualifications of the personnel used for the preparation and maintenance of theschedule and reports. Demonstrate in the Statement of Qualifications that the individual(s) preparingthe Baseline and Monthly Update Schedules are experienced and proficient in the use of the schedulingsoftware. Changes in the person(s) named require submittal of the qualifications of the new person(s)to the Project Representative for acceptance.

1.05 SCHEDULES AND REPORT PREPARATION

A. The Project Representative may provide sample forms at the Preconstruction Conference forContractor's use.

B. Any schedule having an early completion date (less than the Contract Time) shall show the timebetween the early completion date and the Contract Time date as “float.”

C. Schedule format:Each Baseline and Monthly Update Schedule in CPM format clearly showing the Critical path. Work breakdown structure: a. Work breakdown structure is a project oriented tree subdivision of the activities required to

produce the end product.b. At a minimum, break the schedule down and band the activities together into the categories

listed in the bid schedule and into the following categories:1) For each Section in Division 1 through Division 46.2) Procurement of major materials, including buy-out/issuance of purchase orders.3) Required Milestones, if any.4) Listed constraints, including permitting.5) Preparation and submittal of all material and equipment as shown in the Specifications.6) Submittal and review per Section 01 33 00.7) Record drawing preparation and submission.8) Asset management data list submission.9) Cultural Resources Plan implementation and monitoring.10) Report and schedule preparation per this Section.11) Operations and maintenance manuals preparation and submission.12) Manufacture training for specified equipment.13) Start-up and testing.14) Commissioning.15) Closeout Activities.

c. Track fabrication and delivery activities of major items to be incorporated into the work.d. Include all data files created by the software with the schedule. This shall include, but not

limited to, all required reports.In preparing the schedule, allocate the work into discrete activities such that the duration of each activity does not exceed 21 calendar days and construction activity values do not exceed $50,000, unless approved otherwise by the Project Representative. Non-construction activities (e.g., submittals, procurement, fabrication, punch list, operations and maintenance manuals, training, etc.) may have durations in excess of 21 calendar days. Activity master list includes the following information from each activity: a. Activity Number.b. Activity Description: Adequately describes the activity as if it were looked at by itself.c. Performing Organization: Identification of company or firm performing the activity.d. Activity Value: Rounded to nearest hundred dollars. Prorated overhead and profit applied to

each activity.e. Major Activity Identifier: Code for activity relationship to the work breakdown structure.


Activities related to submittals and procurement shall reflect subsets showing submittal preparation, submittal and review time for shop drawings, product data, samples, fabrication and delivery time, as-built drawings preparation, and preparation of submissions of operations and maintenance manuals. Cost load for every activity: a. Each activity should have in its value as determined in the preparation of the activity.b. Certain activities have defined payment constraints in the specification.

1) Progress schedule and reports: Per Section 01 32 16.2) Record Drawings: Per Section 01 78 39.3) Asset Management form: Per Section 01 78 40.4) Operation and maintenance manuals: Per Section 01 78 23.5) Spare parts: Per Division 43 and 46 sections.6) Facility integration, testing and commissioning: Per Section 01 80 00.7) Mobilization and demobilization: Not greater than five percent (5%) of the Contract Price

allocated for combined Mobilization plus Demobilization expenses; paid at seventy percent(70%) mobilization and thirty percent (30%) demobilization.

Schedule shall include hours of work, identification of the holidays and non-work days applicable to the schedule, constraints and milestones defined in Sections 01 14 00 and 01 41 26, and other Sections within the Contract Documents. Prepare network diagrams on 11-inch x 17-inch or larger sheets. Network diagrams shall include the following contents for each activity: a. Number.b. Description.c. Duration.d. Early Start/Late Start.e. Early Finish/Late Finish.f. Predecessors.g. Successors.h. Float.Contractor warrants that the value in the activity accurately reflects the value of that work activity.Dates imposed on the schedule are not binding on the County and the Project Representativeunless specified in the Contract.Failure to include any element of work required for the performance of the Contract does notexcuse the Contractor from completing the work as described in the Contract.Requests from the Project Representative:a. When requested by the Project Representative, submit a written narrative of the Contractor's

determination of durations for critical and near critical activities. Include in such explanation thenumber of crews, crew composition, number of shifts per day, number of hours in a shift, thenumber of work days per week, production curves for major commodities (e.g., below gradepipe, concrete, piping, wire and cable), construction equipment and supplier and deliveryrequirements.

b. If required by the Project Representative, present documentation substantiating the costallocations of those activities considered, in the opinion of the Project Representative, to beunbalanced.

Monthly Schedule updates shall include: a. Activity dates and earned value:

1) Last Month Percent Complete.2) Current Percent Complete.3) Earned Value, rounded to the nearest dollar.4) Duration, in workdays.5) Actual Start.6) Expected Finish.7) Actual Finish.

b. Add or revise duration of activities and new activities to so that the Monthly Schedule Update(s)are consistent with executed change orders. Cost load the added activities. When revised ornew activities change the Contract Price, add these activities to the Schedule of Values.


1.06 DRAFT PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. Prepared by Contractor and submitted at the Preconstruction Conference. Schedule submittal toinclude the electronic information on the data files of the software so the necessary reports can beprinted out for assistance in reviewing the submitted data.

B. The Draft Project Schedule is the complete Contractor’s plan to perform the Contract in accordancewith milestones and constraints and within the Contract Time as defined in the Contract Documents.Draft schedule shall include all tasks defined in paragraph 1.05 of this Section.

C. The Draft Project Schedule shall include a print out of the cash flow forecast presented in the schedule.

1.07 BASELINE SCHEDULE

A. Work to be scheduled for completion within the amount of Contract Time specified. No claim for delayshall be allowed based on an early completion schedule.

B. Shows Contractor’s complete plan for the work in the Contract. Baseline schedule shall include all therequirements of paragraph 1.05 of this Section, including cash flow requirements. Include all data filesin the software so that necessary reports can be accessed.

C. Incorporate into the Baseline Schedule the Project Representative requests for clarification or additionalinformation from the review of the Draft Project Schedule. The Project Representative comments shallnot be construed as establishing the Contractor’s schedule.

D. Utilized as the initial schedule for the start of monitoring the progress of the work.

1.08 MONTHLY UPDATE SCHEDULE

A. The Monthly Update Schedule is the most current update and a requirement of the Application forPayment, defined in Section 00700. Monthly Update Schedule(s) shall comply with requirements ofArticle 7 and the following:

Include a status of all activities through the last day of the month being progressed. Include all executed change order work to date. Include all the requirements and information, as required in paragraph 1.05 of this specification. The latest agreed upon Monthly Update Schedule and the accepted Baseline Schedule will be used by the Project Representative to review requests for changes in contract.

1.09 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit Schedule of Values in a tabular Microsoft Excel 2013 or newer format, including the following:Contract Price allocated as specified in this Section. This is the activity value determined in paragraph 1.05C.6. Dollars earned and percent complete for prior month. Dollars earned and percent complete for current month. Dollars earned and percent complete-to-date. Balance Remaining.

B. Schedule of Values breakdown shall be taken from the task activities in the cost loaded schedule.

C. The total value of the activities shall be equal to the Contract Price.

D. Monthly Update Cost:Submit with the Application for Payment as a condition precedent to receiving payment for work accomplished each month. Update cost loading to reflect added activities in the new Monthly Update Schedule.


1.10 DAILY REPORTS

A. Submit daily reports including as a minimum, the day of the week, date, weather conditions,groundwater conditions (if applicable to the work), number and type of personnel working on theContract (including subcontractor personnel) by trade, major equipment on site, materials delivered andmaterials installed, for each of the Schedule activities worked on by personnel, and progress for theday.

B. Daily reports to be signed as a certification of the information by an authorized Contractor’sRepresentative.

C. Daily reports submitted to the Project Representative on first day of the next work week for the reportsof the previous week.

1.11 THREE WEEK LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULE

A. Prepare the Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule to show the previous week’s progress and the workplan for the next three weeks. The Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule shall have a direct tie to thecurrent accepted Monthly Update Schedule.

B. Distribute the three-week look ahead schedule to the Project Representative at each weekly progressmeeting.

1.12 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND MONTHLY REPORTS

A. Application for Payment is the Contractor’s notice of the progress performed since the previouspayment application. Cost of major materials or equipment may be included in the Application forPayment, as described in Section 00700. The progress on each activity performed since the lastrequest is submitted to the Project Representative for review. The Application for Payment will beprocessed as specified in Section 00700.

B. Include an updated network diagram, cash flow projection, narrative monthly summary, and scheduledata files. The update shall be as of the last day of the month being progressed. (Reference 1.03 Cabove).

C. Narrative Summary: Briefly describe the progress of the work. Describe how the work is progressingtowards its completion. Identify schedule activities and milestones completed, major equipmentdeliveries, problems arising during the month, changes to the Total Project Float and any anticipatedimpacts on the schedule. If the updated schedule is showing that the Contract Time Requirements willnot be met, describe the Contractor’s action plan to return the project to a timely completion. Describethe work anticipated during the upcoming month, including major equipment deliveries and submittals.

D. Identify any changes in logic ties to the CPM Schedule, explain why the changes are needed anddescribe the impacts resulting from these changes.

E. Cash flow reports:Cumulative (S Curve): This cash flow chart provides cumulative cash flow over the duration of the project, and will show comparisons between the Baseline Project Schedule and the Updated Project Schedule. The comparison curves illustrate the Baseline Early and Late Starts cash flow in comparison to the actual progress, and updated revised Early and Late Starts. Monthly Histogram (Column Type): This cash flow chart provides monthly cash flow projections over the duration of the project and shows comparison columns for each month on the chart. The comparison histogram illustrates the Baseline Early and Late Starts Cash Flow in comparison to the Actual Progress and Updated Revised Early and Late Starts. Monthly data report showing each scheduled activity with previous progress, progress this period and cost remaining for each activity.


F. Production and Work Plan report(s):Submit planned and actual monthly progress curve or chart depicting construction units installed for concrete, pipe, conduit, wire, and such other items as required by the Project Representative. Provide detailed Work Plan(s) as required by the Project Representative.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Submit Draft Project Schedule, Revised Draft Project Schedule, Baseline and Monthly UpdateSchedules as required. Include schedule data files. Work shall be completed by the Scheduler.

B. Submit schedule, reports, and updates by hard copy and electronic format.

C. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Section could be a cause for delay in the processing ofthe Application for Payment.

3.02 MONTHLY UPDATES

A. Prepare and submit a Monthly Update Schedule and graphic network diagram including cash flowreports with the monthly Application for Payment. When work is behind schedule, submit a written planfor completing the work within the milestones and Contract Time.

B. Include revisions in the Project Schedule’s logic, along with a written statement and rationale. Use thesame form and method employed in the Baseline Schedule.

C. Reflect the executed change order in both time and value in the next submission of the Application forPayment, the Schedule of Values, and schedule updates following the execution of the change order.Incorporate executed Contract Time changes and schedule revisions into the Monthly Update Scheduleand Schedule of Values for each work change executed in the change order.

D. Submit the various reports specified above in the required time frame.

3.03 SCHEDULE ADJUSTMENTS

A. If in the opinion of the Project Representative the Contractor’s progress is not in alignment with theProject Schedule, the Project Representative may ask the Contractor to make appropriate adjustmentsas required independently of the next Monthly Update Schedule and/or at the time of the next monthlyupdate.

B. If in the opinion of the Project Representative, the Contractor’s progress shows that the contractcompletion will be later than the current date of a Milestone, Substantial Completion and/or FinalAcceptance, the Project Representative may request that the Contractor provide the following:

The Contractor shall determine the cause of this slippage and inform the County in the current month’s narrative the cause for the delay. Once the Contractor identifies the cause for the delay and informs the Project Representative, the Contractor prepares a written Recovery Plan proposing actions to correct the delay and demonstrating how the corrective actions will complete the Contract work within the required Contract Time. This plan and its initial results shall be included in the Contractors next Monthly Schedule Update. The actions could include increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, and/or days of work, both on and off the site. Corrective actions will be shown on the following Monthly Update Schedule along with their effect on bringing the project back to timely completion of the work. The schedule and narrative shall describe these actions and the projected results.


If the Contractor fails to make necessary effort and does not demonstrate returning the project to completion within the Contract Time other actions, as defined in Section 00700, may be taken.

C. When the Contractor is preparing a change to the Contract and within this request for change asks foradditional time, the Contractor shall support this request as defined in Section 00700 of the GeneralTerms and Conditions of the Contract, along with the following information:

Include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Notice of Intent to submit a Request for Change Order and Change Proposal. Demonstrate that the Contract Time to extend the time of performance is not due to the fault, act, or omission of the Contractor, or anyone for whose acts or omissions the Contractor is responsible. Demonstrate that entitlement is due to a change in Contract Time because the progress of the Work on the Critical Path is delayed and completion of the Contract Work within Contract Time is delayed. Demonstrate that the delay is not a concurrent delay. Concurrent delays are defined in Section 00700 and are delays which impact the Critical Path and are caused by: a. The County and the Contractor,b. The County and an act of Force Majeure, orc. The Contractor and an act of Force Majeure.d. When delays are concurrent the Contractor shall only be entitled to a change in Contract Time.

No change to the Contract Price shall be allowed as a result of such concurrent delay.

D. A Request for Change Order or a Request for Change Proposal that includes a request for anadjustment in the Contract Time shall:

Be in writing and delivered to the Project Representative within the time period required in the Contract Documents. Include a clear explanation of how the event or conditions specifically impact the Critical Path and overall Project Schedule and the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time requested. Be limited to the change in the Critical Path of a Contractors’ Project Schedule and any updates attributable to the event or conditions, which caused the request for adjustment. No extension of time or compensation for damages resulting from a delay will be granted unless the delay affects the timely completion of all Work under the Contract or timely completion of a portion of the Work for which time of completion is specific. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the Project Schedule and any updates that the event or conditions: a. Had a specific impact on the Critical Path and was the sole cause of such impact;b. Could not have been avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives;c. Prevent the Contractor from completing the Project within the current Contract completion date.Demonstrate that all reasonable efforts were made to prevent and mitigate the effects of this delay,whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or otherwise.

3.04 PAYMENT

A. Payment for the work specified in this Section shall be shown as a dedicated activity in the BaselineSchedule and in the Schedule of Values with a minimum value of one percent (1%) of the ContractPrice. Progress items associated with this Section shall be distributed equally on a monthly basis overthe Contract Time for the work.

B. Progressing of the monthly application for payment will be contingent upon satisfactory submissions ofall reports. Payment for Monthly Update Schedule(s) could be denied and deducted if in the opinion ofthe Project Representative the information requested does not meet the requirements of Contractdocuments.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 32 33 - 1 PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS

SECTION 01 32 33

PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies photographs and videos to be provided prior to, during, and after construction.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Pre-construction photos and videos

C. Construction progress photos and videos.

D. Final Construction photos and videos.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The photographs and audio-videos are intended for use as indisputable evidence in ascertaining theextent of any damage which may occur as a result of the construction operations and are for theprotection of the property owner, the Contractor, and the County, and will be a means of determiningwhether and to what extent damage, resulting from the demolition operations, occurred during theContract work and requires immediate corrective measures.

B. Contractor shall maintain copies of site examination documentation for the duration of the work.

2.02 PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Color photographs shall be digital photos with a minimum 8 mega-pixel resolution.

B. Within 10 calendar days of each set of exposures, submit:The digital data for each photograph. Any copies of digital necessary to meet requirements of permits.

C. Photographs shall have the date, name of work, and location noted on each image.

2.03 VIDEOS

A. Color video shall be high-density in MP4 file format with 16:9 aspect ratio, stored at a resolution of1920×1080 (NTSC format) at 29.97 frames per second (FPS) with sound.

B. Within 10 calendar days of each recording, submit:One copy of each video Any copies necessary to meet requirements of permits.

C. The videos shall contain an audio track narrating the content and construction activities in the video;date, time and location.


D. All DVD's must display index counter and date and time of recording.

E. Both the disks and cases shall be indelibly labeled with the date, the name of contract, and the locationwhere the video was recorded.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The photographer and videographer shall be qualified and equipped to record both interior and exteriorscenes, with lenses ranging from wide-angle to telephoto. Supplemental lighting may be required.

B. No construction shall start until the preconstruction photographs videos have been completed andsubmitted by the County.

C. For pipeline projects, the work site will continue to move. Photographs and videos shall be annotated bystations or in such a manner that a reviewer can clearly understand precisely where the photo wastaken and what aspect or view of the work is presented.

D. Final payment will not be made to the Contractor until the County receives copies of the photographsand videos that reflect the final conditions.

3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION

A. Provide preconstruction photographs and videos record prior to commencement of work on the site.Photographs and videos shall be taken at locations disturbed or likely to be disturbed by construction orat locations designated by the Project Representative.

B. Do not take preconstruction photos more than 5 days prior to commencing work in any area unlessapproved by the Project Representative.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide construction photographs during the progress of the work. Take monthly exposures startingone month after the date of the preconstruction photographs and continuing as long as the work is inprogress.

3.04 POST CONSTRUCTION

A. Take the number of exposures specified until Final Acceptance of the work.

B. Take from the same points in the same direction as the preconstruction photographs.

C. Take video recordings from the same locations and in the same direction as the preconstruction videorecordings within 7 calendar days after the acceptance of the project by the County.


3.05 REQUIRED NUMBER OF PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS

A. For the work of this Contract, the minimum number of photographs and videos shall be provided asfollows:

Item Images Video

Pre-construction 50 1

Monthly 50 1

Post-construction 50 1

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 33 00 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies procedures and requirements for all submittals, substitutions, deviations, and theMaster Submittal List required by the Specifications.

B. Submittals shall be accompanied by a Submittal Form. The Submittal Form submitted by theContractor may be either the Submittal Form provided in SharePoint or the Submittal/Transmittal Form,Form 01 33 00-A, as directed by the Project Representative. An electronic blank copy of this form willbe provided by the Project Representative.

C. No fabrication or construction work shall occur on a specific submittal item without a submittal ReviewAction of “1” NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN or “2” NOTE MARKINGS. Any procurement or constructionactivity undertaken by the Contactor absent such a submittal Review Action will not be progress onproject schedule or schedule of values.

D. Unless specified otherwise in this Contract, preparation, and revisions of submittals is to be anincidental expense and not a pay item.

1.02 MASTER SUBMITTAL LIST

A. Prepare and submit within 20 days after the effective date of the Notice-to-Proceed, a Master SubmittalList listing of all items for which submittals are required by the Specifications. Organize the MasterSubmittal List by Specification Section number and include the following information for all listed items:

Item identification. Specification Section number. Planned submittal date Identification of those items that are substitutions or contain deviations from the Specifications. Identification of those items that require other jurisdictional agency review and approval. the List shall include columns for future use as information becomes available for the following items: a. Trade name, model, and catalog designation.b. The scheduled need dates for control purposes.c. Date submitted.d. The date approval is needed.e. The date on which material is needed.

1.03 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal. Thecost to review the initial submittal and the first revised submittal shall be borne by the County. The costto review all additional revised submittals shall be charged to the Contractor.

B. In addition to submittals required by individual Section specifications, submit information on itemsshown on the Drawings but not specified; and include proof of Professional Liability insurance for Work,which requires, either by Law or by Contract, the Submittal to be stamped by a licensed professional.

C. Submit information on all repair and corrective work required of or generated by the Contractor suchthat the acceptability of the quality of the repair or correction can be assessed before it is performed.


D. Submit descriptive information that will enable the Project Representative to assess whether theproposed materials, equipment, or methods of work are in general conformance with the Work and incompliance with the Contract.

E. Specifically identify and annotate any deviation or substitutions in the Submittal Form. If deviations orsubstitutions are not clearly identified or annotated, the original contract provisions shall prevail; if theitem has been installed without specific acceptance of the deviation or substitution it shall be removedand the contract required item installed in its place.

F. Coordinate and integrate all submittal dates with the Baseline Schedule and Master Submittal List.

G. Ensure coordination of submittals among the suppliers, related crafts, subcontractors, and with theplanned work. The Contractor will be held responsible for any cost or schedule impact caused by asubmittal coordination failure.

H. Submit a request for all substitutions using Substitution Request Form 01 33 00-B received from theProject Representative.

I. Document all deviations from the Contract on the Submittal Form transmitted to Project Representativeand note where applicable in the body of the submittal. Deviations are defined in Para. 1.04.

1.04 SUBMITTALS ON ITEMS DIFFERING FROM THAT REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Approved EqualDefinition: An item of material or equipment proposed by the Contractor that has the same function, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics equal to that named, that meets the requirements of the Specification, and is sufficiently similar so that no change in related work is required. The item of material or equipment shall reliably perform at least equally well for the function imposed by the design concept of the completed work as a functioning whole. In general, approved equal applies to manufactured items. Clearly note on the Submittal Form if any items are submitted as an equal Acceptance is at the Project Representative’s sole discretion and the decision regarding acceptance or rejection shall be final. If the Contractor disagrees, a Request for a Change Order shall be filed in accordance with contract provisions. Do not assume acceptance at any time prior to the rendering of decision by the Project Representative.

B. SubstitutionDefinition: An item of difference in materials, equipment, means, method, technique, dimension, sequence, or procedure which functionally meets the Contract requirements, but does not meet the Specification(s) and is equal to or better than the specified item. Substitutions requested by the Contractor shall conform to the requirements of Section 00700. A submittal shall be provided for each substitution request, must be submitted using Substitution Request Form 01 33 00-B, and shall address all items on the form. The request shall include complete specifications or means and methods for the item including procurement, operational and maintenance cost data. Substitution Request forms shall be numbered sequentially beginning with the number No. 1. Any Substitution not identified on a submittal is not accepted or approved regardless of any action taken on the submittal by the County. Action taken by the County on the submittal shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the original Contract requirements. Acceptance is at the Project Representative's sole discretion and the decision regarding acceptance or rejection of the substitution shall be final. If the substitution is rejected, proceed with the contract specifications without delay. Do not assume acceptance at any time prior to the rendering of a written decision by the Project Representative.


C. DeviationsDefinition: A minor change or omission to a specified material, procedure or product proposed by the Contractor that does not fully conform to the requirements specified, but conforms to dimensional, operational, and maintenance requirements and can be shown to accomplish the functional and operational and maintenance performance of the specified item. Annotate in the submittal all deviations from stated requirements in the Contract. Any deviation not identified on the submittal is not accepted or approved regardless of any subsequent action on the submittal by the County. Failure of the County to comment on the deviation shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the original Contract requirements. Acceptance is at the Project Representative's sole discretion and the decision regarding acceptance or rejection shall be final. Do not assume acceptance at any time prior to the rendering of a decision by the Project Representative.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. General:Submittals shall be transmitted via the Contract SharePoint Site in accordance with Section 00800, Supplemental Terms and Conditions. The Contract SharePoint site is a Microsoft Office web application platform developed and managed by the County for this Contract. The Project Representative will provide instructions to the Contractor’s representative on the use of the Contract SharePoint site for Contract document file storage, including submittals. See Section 00800 for further details. Submittals shall be accompanied by a Submittal Form and include all submittal materials. Asset numbers shall be listed on the Submittal Form for items being submitted. A separate form shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections for which a submittal is required. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package, or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review the group or package as a whole. No multiple-Section submittals will be allowed except where previously approved by the Project Representative and as indicated on the Master Submittal List. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: “XXX”; where “XXX” is the sequential number assigned by the Contractor. Resubmittals shall have the following format: “XXXY”; where “XXX” is the originally assigned submittal number and “Y” is a sequential letter assigned for re submittals, i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for example, is the second resubmittal of Submittal 25. Submit all proposed approved equals as a part of the submittal process. PDF documents shall be bookmarked and searchable PDF files.

B. Samples: Submit the number requested in the Specification Section with the Submittal Form. Productsamples and color samples shall not be transmitted electronically.

C. Certificates: Will be considered as information. No copy will be returned.

D. “Submit for information only”: No copy will be returned.

3.02 REVIEW PROCEDURE

A. Within the review and response timeframe specified in 00700 the County’s identified Review Action andany review comments will be transmitted to the Contractor on Form 01 33 00-C.


B. The returned submittal will indicate one of the following actions:If the review indicates that the submittal is in general conformance with the Contract, the submittal copies shall be marked "No Exceptions Taken" and given a Review Action of "1." In this case, implement the work covered in the submittal. If the review indicates that the submittal requires limited corrections, the submittal copies will be marked "Note Markings" and given a Review Action of "2." In this case, begin to implement the work covered in the submittal in accordance with the markings noted. Where submittal information is to be incorporated in O&M data, a corrected copy shall be resubmitted; otherwise, no further action is required. If the review reveals the submittal is insufficient and contains incorrect data and the comments are of a nature that can be confirmed, the submittal copies shall be marked "Comments Attached --Confirm" and given a Review Action of "3". A Review Action “3” does not allow implementation of the work covered by the submittal until the information requested to be confirmed in the submittal has been revised, submitted, and returned to the Contractor with a Review Action of either "1" or "2.” If the review reveals the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data and the comments require that the submittal be revised and resubmitted, the submittal copies shall be marked "Comments Attached --Resubmit" and given a Review Action of "4”. A Review Action “4” does not allow implementation of the work covered by the submittal until the information in the submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned to the Contractor with a Review Action of either "1" or "2.”." If the review reveals that the submittal is not in general conformance with the Contract, or if the submittal is incomplete, the submittal copies shall be marked "Rejected" and given a Review Action of "5." Submittals containing deviations or substitutions from Contract which have not been clearly identified by the Contractor fall into this category. A Review Action “5” does not allow implementation of the work covered by the submittal until the information in the submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned with a Review Action of either "1" or "2.”

3.03 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS

A. Review of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for errors or omission thereinand shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the County.

B. Unless Contractor specifically identifies and the County accepts a Deviation or Substitution on thesubmittal, no disposition of the submittal by the County changes the requirements of the Specificationand Drawings.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 33 10 - 1 STANDARD FORMS

SECTION 01 33 10

STANDARD FORMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Be responsible for completing the documentation forms for tests and evaluations required of theContract.

B. Contractor-generated forms as otherwise required to document the work shall follow the formatestablished on Form 01 33 10-A.

C. Electronic versions of some forms will be provided during construction.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Completed forms as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMS

A. The forms listed below are reference from other Sections of the Contract Documents and shall be usedto document the Contract work. Forms not included in this Section can be obtained from the ProjectRepresentative upon request on or after the Preconstruction Conference.

B. The following forms are included at the end of this Section.

Form No. Title

01 33 00-A Submittal/Transmittal Form

01 33 00-B Substitution Request Form

01 33 00-C Submittal Review Tracking Form

01 33 10-A Standard Form Format

01 35 29-A Monthly Contractor Injury Summary Report

01 41 26-A Construction Restoration Acceptance Form

01 67 00-A Shipping, Protection and Storage Form

01 74 19-A Construction and Demolition Material Diversion Plan

01 74 19-B Construction and Demolition Material Diversion Report

01 78 43-A Spare Parts Release Form

01 80 00-A Equipment Test Report Form

01 80 00-B Training Attendance Form

01 80 00-C Training Procedure Documentation Form

01 80 00-D System Testing Deficiency Documentation Form

01 80 00-E System Punchlist Documentation Form

09 90 00-A Daily Coating Inspection Form

26 05 00-A Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form

26 05 00-B Installed Motor Test Data Form


Form No. Title

40 05 01-A Pipe System Testing Data Form

40 05 93-A Motor Data Submittal Form

40 61 13-A Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form

40 61 13-H Transmitter Calibration Test Data Form

40 61 13-J Individual Loop Test Data Form

43 05 01-A Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form

43 05 01-B Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form

43 05 01-C Unit Responsibility Certification Form

Forms as required for full documentation of the work.


END OF SECTION

May2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 33 10 - 3 STANDARD FORMS

01 33 00-A SUBMITTAL/TRANSMITTAL FORM

Contract Number: C01465C20

KING COUNTY Submittal No.

WASTEWATER Date

TREATMENT DIVISION

Is this a Resubmittal? YES ☐ NO ☐

If resubmittal, prior submittal number

Does Submittal contain deviations (Per 00700 Section 4.4) from the specifications? YES ☐ NO ☐

If Yes, explain:

This Section to Be Completed By King

County

Item No. P/C Spec. Paragraph Contractor's Cat. or

Dwg. No. Description of Item

Copies Submit

Review Action

Contractor Deviation

Contractor certifies to review of submittal, verification of field measurements, and compliance with Contract document unless noted otherwise in the submittal.

Legend-Review Action

1 No exceptions taken 2 Note Markings 3 Comments Attached

– Confirm4 Comments Attached

- Resubmit5 Rejected

P – Partial C – Complete

Distribution: By (Print): Date:

By: Date:

Project Representative's review is for general conformance with the Contract. Markings or comments not specifically addressed in writing by the Contractor and accepted by the Project Representative in writing, shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract.

The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for

selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly and

for performing its work in a safe manner.

Project Representative

Returned To Contractor


01 33 00-B SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

TO: ___________________________________________________________

CONTRACT NO.: C01465C20 CONTRACT NAME: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System

We hereby submit for your consideration the following item instead of the specified item or procedure:

Section Paragraph Specified Item

________

Proposed Substitution:

Attach complete data, including laboratory tests, if applicable. Include complete information on changes to Contract Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution would require for its proper installation.

Fill in blanks below:

A. How will substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?

_____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

B. What effect does the substitution have on the Baseline or Update Schedule?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

C. State quality and performance differences between proposed substitution and specified item orprocedure.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

D. List the cost differences between proposed substitution and specified item or procedure. (Attachestimate/quote and indicate net change).

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________


01 33 00-B SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM (continued)

E. List manufacturer's name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

F. Other information as required by the Project Representative.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

G. The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution areequivalent or superior to those of the specified item and authorizes the payment to the County forall design changes including Project Representative, detailing, and County processing costs.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

H. The undersigned states that there is a waiver of all claims for additional costs related to thesubstitution which may subsequently arise during the work.

_____________________________________________________________________

I. Manufacturer's guarantees the proposed and specified items are:

_______ Same ______ Different (explain on attachment)

Submitted by: For use by Project Representative

_______________________________ ____ Accepted ____ Accepted as Noted Contractor Signature

____ Not Accepted ____ Received Too Late ________________________________ Firm

By: ________________________________ Address Date:

________________________________ Remarks:

Date: ________

NOTE: WHEN REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, ALL SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE STAMPED AND SIGNED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE STATE OF WASHINGTON.


01 33 00-C SUBMITTAL REVIEW TRACKING FORM


01 33 00-C SUBMITTAL REVIEW TRACKING FORM (continued)








01 33 10-A STANDARD FORM FORMAT Page of

Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System

Contract No: C01465C20 Date:

Form Title:

NOTE TO CONTRACTOR:

USE THE FOLLOWING SIGNATURE FORMATS AS APPROPRIATE

OR AS REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATION OR THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.

SIGNATURE FORMAT A:

Signature of Manufacturer’s Representative Date

Signature of Contractor Representative Date

Signature of Project Representative Date

SIGNATURE FORMAT B:

CERTIFIED Signature of Contractor Representative Date

WITNESSED Signature of Project Representative Date


01 35 29-A MONTHLY CONTRACTOR INJURY SUMMARY REPORT

Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Month: Contractor:

OSHA RECORDABLE CASES

WORK GROUP NUMBER OF CASES

Reporting Month Year-to-Date

Hourly Employees

Supervisory Personnel

TOTAL

LOST TIME ACCIDENTS

WORK GROUP NUMBER OF CASES LOST WORKDAYS

Reporting Month Year-to-Date Reporting Month Year-to-Date

Hourly Employees

Supervisory Personnel

TOTAL

TOTAL HOURS WORKED AT CONTRACT SITE

Reporting Month

Year-to-Date

INCIDENT AND SEVERITY RATE

Date of last lost-time accident: Number of hours worked since last lost-time accident:

Incident Rate = Total Number of OSHA Recordable Cases x 200,000

Total Hours Worked at King County Project Site

Severity Rate = Total Number of Lost Workdays x 200,000

Total Hours Worked at King County Project Site

RATES Reporting Month Year-to-Date

Incident Rate

Severity Rate

Monthly Incident Summary

DATE NAME TRADE COMPANY INCIDENT Contributors and Preventive Measures


01 41 26-A CONSTRUCTION RESTORATION ACCEPTANCE FORM

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT NO. C01465C20

EASEMENT NAME (Easement Name as identified in the Contract Documents)

EASEMENT GRANTOR:

EASEMENT AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE:

DATE CONTRACTOR ON SITE:

DATE CONTRACTOR OFF SITE:

EASEMENT REPRESENTATIVE’S APPROVAL OF RESTORATION

I/We, the undersigned Owner(s) or Representatives of property identified as

(Address or Property Description)

accept as complete the restoration work pursuant to the Easement requirements.

BY REPRESENTATIVE: DATE

BY REPRESENTATIVE: DATE

CONTRACTOR SGINATURE: DATE:


01 67 00-A SHIPPING, PROTECTION AND STORAGE FORM

To be filled out for all pieces of equipment maintained by the Contractor before it is turned over to King County WTD. Submit this form to the Project Representative after Substantial Completion.

Contract Name: __ Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System__________________

Contract No.: ____C01465C20_________________________________________________________

Contractor: __________________________ Project Representative: ___________________

Location of Work: ________________________________________________________________

Equipment Information

WTD Asset Number:

Asset Short Description:

MFR/Make/Model:

Install Date:

Warranty Start Date:

Description of Maintenance (e.g. lubrication of equipment, rotating bearings)

Task Performed Hours Date Performed

Performed by

Signature of Contractor Date



01 74 19-A CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL DIVERSION PLAN


01 74 19-B CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL DIVERSION REPORT


01 78 43-A SPARE PARTS RELEASE FORM Page of Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Place of Delivery: Date:

Pallet/Skid Number

Container/ Item No.

Equipment I.D. No.

Spare Part Description

Signature of Contractor Date


Signature of the Reliability Engineer Date Cc: Maintenance Supervisor: _______________________ Operations Supervisor: _______________________ Project Manager: _______________________


01 80 00-A EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT FORM Note: This example equipment test report is provided for the benefit of the Contractor and is not specific to any piece of

equipment to be installed. The example is furnished, as a means of illustrating the level of detail required for the

preparation of equipment test report forms.

Equipment Name:

Equipment Number:

Specification Reference:

Location:

PREOPERATIONAL CHECKLIST

MECHANICAL

Contractor Vendor Project Rep

Verified Date Verified Date Verified Date

Lubrication

Alignment

Anchor Bolts

Seal Water System Operational

Equipment Rotates Freely

Safety Guards

Valves Operational

O&M Manual Information Complete

Manufacturer’s Installation Certificate Complete

ELECTRICAL (Circuit Ring-Out and High-Pot Tests)



Circuits:

Power to MCC

Control to HOA

Indicators at MCC:

Red (Running)

Green (Power)

Amber (Auto)

Indicators at Local Control Panel

Wiring Labels Complete

Nameplates:

MCC

Control Station

Control Panel

Equipment Bumped for Rotation


01 80 00-A EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT FORM (continued)

PIPING SYSTEMS



Cleaned and Flushed:

Suction

Discharge

Pressure Tests

Temporary Piping Systems in Place

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS



Flowmeter Calibration:

Calibration Report No.

Flow Recorder Calibrated:

Against Transmitter

VFD Speed Indicator Calibrated Against:

Independent Reference

Discharge Over-Pressure Shutdown:

Switch Calibration

Simulate Discharge Over-pressure:

Shutdown

INITIAL OPERATION

MECHANICAL



Motor Operation Temperature Satisfactory

Pump Operating Temperature Satisfactory

Unusual Noise, Etc.

Pump Operation:

Measurement:

Flow

Pressure

Test Gauge Number

Alignment Hot

Doweled In

Remarks:


01 80 00-A EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT FORM (continued)

ELECTRICAL



Local Switch Function:

Runs in HAND

No Control Power in OFF

Timer Control in AUTO

Overpressure Protection Switch:

Functional in both HAND and AUTO

Overpressure Protection Switch Set at 75 psig

PLC Set at 24 Hour Cycle, 25 Minutes ON

OPERATIONAL TEST

48-hour continuous test. Pump cycles as specified, indicators functional, controls functional, pump maintains capacity, over pressure protection remains functional, hour meter functional.

RECOMMENDED Contractor Representative Date ACCEPTED Project Representative Date


01 80 00-B TRAINING ATTENDANCE FORM Page of Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Date: TRAINING PROCEDURES FOR Trainer: Company: Phone No.: Name Company Phone No.


01 80 00-C TRAINING PROCEDURE DOCUMENTATION FORM Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Date: TRAINING PROCEDURES FOR Trainer: Company: TOPIC DISCUSSION Familiarization Safety Operations Preventative Maintenance Repairs Parts Contacts Guarantees


01 80 00-D SYSTEM TESTING DEFICIENCY DOCUMENTATION FORM Page of Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Date: System:

Item No.

Dwg. or Spec. Reference

Description/Response


01 80 00-E SYSTEM PUNCHLIST DOCUMENTATION FORM Page of Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Date: Title:

Item No.

Date

Location

Description

King County Acceptance

Date


09 99 00-A DAILY COATING INSPECTION FORM Page of


Contract Number: C01465C20

Contractor:

King County Representative:

Location of Work:

Description of Work Performed:

Environmental Conditions: Taken every 4 hours during work

Time Activity Weather Surf Temp Lo/Hi (°F)

Wet Bulb (°F)

Air Temp (°F)

RH% Dew Point (°F)

Material Application:

Manufacturer Product

No. Batch Nos

Color Application

Method Gal. Used

Thinner No.

Time

Start Stop

Abrasive Blasting: Surface Profile Test Tape:

Abrasive Manufacturer:

Type:

Size:

Surface Profile (in mils):

(Place Here)


09 99 00-A DAILY COATING INSPECTION FORM (continued) Page of

Check Points: Check all that apply

Applies?

(y/n) Test Standard Result

Anchor Profile ASTM D4417

Moisture ASTM D4263

Holiday NACE RPO 188

Adhesion ASTM D3359

Salt Bresle Method

Prime Coat DFT -

Intermediate Coat DFT -

Final Coat DFT -

Ambient Conditions -

Recoat Time -

Comments: ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ Approved by: King County Representative: Contractor Representative:


26 05 00-A WIRE AND CABLE RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM

Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No.: C01465C20

Wire or Cable No. Date of test

Ambient temperature °F Insulation Resistance Location of Test (megohms) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

CERTIFIED Signature of Contractor Representative Date WITNESSED Signature of Project Representative Date


26 05 00-B INSTALLED MOTOR TEST DATA FORM Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No.: C01465C20 Motor Equipment Number Date of test

Equipment Driven Ambient temperature °F MCC Location a. Resistance: Insulation resistance, phase-to-ground, megohms: Phase A Phase B Phase C b. Current at Full Load: Phase Current, amps Phase Current, amps Phase Current, amps c. Thermal Overload Device: Manufacturer/catalog # Amps d. Circuit breaker (MCP) setting: e. Motor Nameplate Markings: Mfr Mfr type Frame HP Volts Phase Rpm **Service factor

Amps Hz Ambient temp rating °C Time rating **Design letter (NEMA 1-10.35) (NEMA MG-1.16) Code letter Insulation class **Required for 3-phase squirrel cage induction motors only. CERTIFIED Signature of Contractor Representative Date WITNESSED Signature of Project Representative Date


40 05 01-A PIPE SYSTEM TESTING DATA FORM Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Site Location: Test Date: PIPESPEC System Number: Piping Symbol/Service: Pipe Material: Test Fluid: Test Pressure: Test Duration: Leaks (Type, location): Repairs: Signature of Contractor Representative Date Signature of Project Representative Date


40 05 93-A MOTOR DATA SUBMITTAL FORM Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 Specification Section: Equipment Equipment Name: Number(s): Site Location: Project: Nameplate Markings Mfr: Model: Frame: HP: Volts: Phase: RPM: Service Factor: FLA: LRA: Freq: Ambient Temp Rating: °C Time Rating: Design Letter: Insulation Class: (NEMA MG1-10.36) (NEMA MG-1.19) (NEMA MG-1.66) KVA Code Letter: NEMA nominal efficiency: (NEMA MG1-20.9) (NEMA MG-12.58) The following information is required for explosion-proof motors only: Approved by UL for installation in Class: Div: UL frame temperature code: Group: Atmosphere: ____________ (NEC Tables 500-2 and 500-2(b)) Data Not Necessarily Marked on Nameplate Type of enclosure: Enclosure material: Rated for Inverter Duty? Yes ____ / No ____ Temperature rise: °C (NEMA MG1-12.42, 12.43) Weight: lbs Space heater included? Yes No; if Yes, watts volts Type of motor winding over temperature protection, if specified: Use the space below to provide additional information on other motor modifications, if specified:


40 61 13-A LOOP WIRING AND INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No.: C01465C20 Loop No.: List all wiring associated with a loop in table below. Make applicable measurements as indicated after disconnecting wiring. Continuity Resistancea Insulation Resistanceb Wire Panel Field Cond./ Cond./ Shield/ Shield/ Cond./ Shield/ No. Tie TB Cond. Shield Gnd. Cond. Gnd. Shield A — (A/SH) B (A/B) — C (A/C) — D (A/D) — etc.

A. Continuity Test. Connect ohmmeter leads between wires A and B and jumper opposite ends together. Record resistance in table. Repeat procedure between A and C, A and D, etc. Any deviation of +2 ohms between any reading and the average of a particular run indicates a poor conductor, and corrective action shall be taken before continuing with the loop test.

B. Insulation Test. Connect one end of a 500V meter to the panel ground bus and the other sequentially to

each completely disconnected wire and shield. Test the insulation resistance and record each reading. CERTIFIED Signature of Contractor Representative Date WITNESSED Signature of Project Representative Date


40 61 13-H TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM Contract Name: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No.: 01C465C20 Tag No. and Description: Make and Model No.: Serial No.: Input: Output: Scale: Range: Simulate process variable (flow, pressure, temperature, etc.) and measure output with appropriate meter. Percent Expected Actual of Range Input Output Output % Deviation 0 50 100 Percent Deviation Allowed:

CERTIFIED Signature of Contractor Representative Date WITNESSED Signature of Project Representative Date


40 61 13-J INDIVIDUAL LOOP TEST DATA FORM


Contract No.: C01465C20

Loop No.:

Description: (Give complete description of loop's function using tag numbers where appropriate.)

P&ID No.: (Attach copy of P&ID.)

A. Wiring tested:(Attach test form 40 61 13-A)

B. Instrumentation tubing/piping tested:(Attach test form 40 61 13-B)

C. Instruments calibrated:(Attach test forms 40 61 13-C through I)

D. List step-by-step procedures for testing loop parameters. Test loop with instruments, includingtransmitters and control valves, connected and functioning. If it is not possible to produce a real processvariable, then a simulated signal may be used with the Project Representative's approval.

CERTIFIED Signature of Contractor Representative Date

WITNESSED Signature of Project Representative Date


43 05 01-A MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FORM


Contract No: C01465C20 Specification Section:

Equipment name:

Contractor:

Manufacturer of equipment item:

The undersigned manufacturer of the equipment item described above hereby certifies that it has checked the installation of the equipment and that the equipment, as specified in the Contract, has been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and that the trial operation of the equipment item has been satisfactory.

Comments:





43 05 01-B MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION CERTIFICATION FORM


Contract No: C01465C20 Specification Section:

Equipment name:

Contractor:

Manufacturer of equipment item:

The undersigned manufacturer certifies that a service Project Representative has instructed maintenance and operating personnel in the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment designated herein.

Operations Check List (check appropriate spaces)

Safety procedures reviewed Start-up procedure reviewed Shutdown procedure reviewed Normal operation procedure reviewed Others:

Maintenance Check List (check appropriate spaces)

Safety procedures reviewed Described normal oil changes (frequency) Described greasing frequency Described preventive maintenance Described special tools required Described normal items to be inspected/reviewed for wear Others:





43 05 01-C UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION FORM Project: Brightwater Treatment Plant Storage Tank Foam Spray System Contract No: C01465C20 System: System Specification Section: System components comprising the system and specification sections: Name of Contractor: In accordance with Section 43 05 01 the contractor hereby certifies that it has coordinated the above listed components of this System to meet the operational specifications, assumes responsibility for the compatibility of the system components with each other and assumes responsibility for the system to perform as specified. Comments: Signature of Contractor’s Representative Date

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 35 29 - 1 HEALTH AND SAFETY

SECTION 01 35 29

HEALTH AND SAFETY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies procedures for complying with applicable laws and regulations related to workersafety and health. Adhere to applicable federal, state and local safety and health standards

B. It is not the intent of the County to develop, manage, direct, and administer the safety and healthprograms of contractors or in any way assume the responsibility for the safety and health of theiremployees.

C. It is not the intent of the County to list and identify applicable safety codes, standards, and regulationsrequiring compliance by contractor and subcontractor groups. Contractor shall be solely responsible foridentifying and determining all safety codes, standards, and regulations that are applicable to the work.

D. Wastewater conveyance and treatment systems are comprised of a vast array of structures andpipelines that carry a wide spectrum of residential and industrial waste substances and materials. Assuch, the Contractor's personnel may potentially be exposed to various hazards associated withwastewater sewerage systems and structures, including, but not limited to: active sewer flows,confined spaces, hazardous energy sources, fall hazards, flammable/explosive, toxic and suffocatinggases; petroleum vapors; industrial discharges, rodents, insects and infectious biological organisms.Contractor and subcontractors shall inform and educate all personnel as to the hazards and shallrequire the necessary personal safety precautions associated with construction around live sewersystems and structures.

E. This Section addresses the Accident Prevention Program (APP) required in Chapter 296-800 WAC.

F. This Section describes the requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Site Specific Health andSafety Plan (HASP). A HASP is a supplement to a Contractor’s APP, however, it need not duplicatematerial in the APP. The HASP identifies all real and potential hazards during each phase of executionof the Work and provides a specific plan to deal with each hazard. Essentially, a HASP is a Job HazardAnalysis (JHA) of the entire project. A JHA is sometimes referred to as Job Safety Analysis (JSA) orActivity Hazard Analysis (AHA). The HASP shall clearly define responsibilities for Contractor andsubcontractor employees per Chapter 296-155 WAC and WRD 27.00.



Reference Title

29 CFR 1910.146 Permit Required Confined Spaces

29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (lockout/tagout)

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction (OSHA)

Chapter 49.17 RCW Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)

Chapter 296-24 WAC DOSH / WISHA General Safety and Health Standards

Chapter 296-37 WAC DOSH / WISHA Safety Standards for Commercial Diving

Chapter 296-65 WAC DOSH / WISHA Asbestos Removal & Encapsulation

Chapter 296-67 WAC DOSH / WISHA Process Safety Management Standards


Reference Title

Chapter 296-155 WAC DOSH / WISHA Construction Safety

Chapter 296-800 WAC DOSH / WISHA Safety and Health Core Rules

Chapter 296-803 WAC DOSH / WISHA Lockout Tagout (Hazardous Energy Control)

Chapter 296-809 WAC DOSH / WISHA Permit Required Confined Spaces

Chapter 296-823 WAC DOSH / WISHA Bloodborne Pathogens

DD 1.70 DOSH Directive - General Coronavirus Prevention

DD 27.00 DOSH Directive - General or Upper-Tier Contractor (Stute) Responsibility

NFPA 70E Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 820 Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities

NFPA 51B Standard for Fire Prevention during Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work

RCW 39.04.180 Trench Safety Systems, Safety Systems Required

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualifications.

C. Company Accident Prevention Plan (APP):Update to reflect responses to Section 00440 review comments in the bid evaluation. Submit within five days of the effective date of the NTP. Submit revisions during the execution of the work.

D. Site Specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP):Submit specific to the scope of work prior to starting the related work. Revised HASP that addresses changes in the Work.

E. Accident/Incident Report(s): provide within 24 hours.

F. Minutes and list of attendees of the pre-job safety meeting: provide within three days of the meeting.

G. Minutes and list of attendees of weekly safety tailgate meeting: provide within three days of themeeting.

H. Monthly Contractor Injury Summary Report: provide each month on Form 01 35 29-A within ten days ofthe end of each month.

I. Weekly summary of the daily site safety walk-through

J. Notice and listing of flammable liquids and liquefied petroleum gases when they are planned to be usedon the Site.


A. Qualifications:Site Health and Safety Officer: a. Possess a minimum of five years progressive safety experience on projects similar in nature to

the work to be done on this Contract.b. Be knowledgeable concerning all Federal and State regulations applicable to safety.c. Completed the OSHA 40-hour Safety and Health Course (OSHA 500).d. Possess competent person certification in construction safety disciplines related to the work to

be performed and be able to identify competent persons required by State and Federal safetystandards for which they are not certified.

e. Training and current certification for CPR and First Aid.


f. Possess training and be capable of performing accident investigations and developing a concise report.

g. Possess training in the development and presentation of safety training meetings. Shift Safety Officers:

a. Possess a minimum of three years progressive safety experience on projects similar in nature to the work to be done on this Contract.

b. Be knowledgeable concerning all Federal and State regulations applicable to safety. c. Completed the OSHA 10-hour Safety and Health Course. d. Possess competent person certification in construction safety disciplines related to the work to

be performed and be able to identify competent persons required by State and Federal safety standards for which they are not certified.

e. Trained in and possess current certification for CPR and First Aid. Although not required, the following qualifications may be considered as contributing to the relevant

experience required. a. Certified Safety Professional (CSP) certification from the American Society of Safety Engineers. b. Degree from an institution of higher learning in Occupational Safety and Health. c. ASSE Certified Safety Technician (CST). d. Qualification as an instructor in CPR/First Aid or the OSHA 30 hour program.

B. Work shall meet the requirements of: 29 CFR 1926 Chapter 49.17 RCW

1.05 SITE SPECIFIC HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (HASP)

A. A comprehensive HASP covers all aspects of the Contractor's work activities related specifically and distinctly to the Work and site conditions. The HASP shall be based on a site-specific hazard analysis and shall explain how the APP elements and site-specific safety procedures shall be applied to the identified hazards in the work.

B. At a minimum, provide the HASP detailing the safe work procedures and the safety preventive measures to be taken to provide an appropriate work environment for its employees, as well as County staff on site.

C. The HASP shall be descriptive in nature, to provide the appropriate level of understanding for the potential hazards associated with the work to be performed at all stages and phases.

D. The HASP shall provide an appropriate work environment for all persons on Site including Contractor and subcontractor employees, County staff, and authorized individuals.

E. The HASP shall address all necessary personal protective equipment (PPE), atmospheric/air monitoring, safety equipment and tools, safety planning and coordination necessary to perform work safely.

F. During the work, update as an addendum to the HASP, changes in conditions or scope of work before continuing work.

G. Before beginning the work addressed in the HASP, meet the requirements of Section 01 33 00 that indicate a marking of a “1” or a “2”.

H. HASP organization: Organized and bound to readily accept revisions and additions. Outline form. Table of contents. Numbered pages.


I. For modifications to the gas piping the following shall be provided.Primary and secondary 24-hour, seven-day contact information On call availability to mitigate problems with new construction overnight, weekends and holidays, during/after the applicable periods that these work elements are performed.

J. Contractor and subcontractors are encouraged to use the consulting services of the State ofWashington's Department of Labor and Industries: Division of Safety & Health (DOSH/ WISHA). TheSeattle Field Office is located at:315 5th Avenue South, Suite 200Seattle, WA 98104-2607(206) 515-2800http://www.lni.wa.gov/wisha/Call or write for assistance with the requirements of this Section.

1.06 CONTRACTOR SAFETY QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Review the entire scope of work and applicable Contract requirements.

B. Inspect the work site location and adjacent structures and systems to ensure that all safetyconsiderations and requirements are addressed and planned prior to the start of work in the sitespecific HASP.

C. Ensure that all Contractor and subcontractor employees comply with the APP and HASP.

D. Designate a Site Health and Safety Officer on site with appropriate training, responsibility, and fullauthority to coordinate, implement, and enforce the Contractor's APP and HASP for the duration of theWork.

E. In the APP and HASP, provide the name and telephone number of the Site Health and Safety Officerand the resume reflecting experience and training for the position. If there will be an alternate oradditional staff with safety responsibilities, provide name and telephone number and qualifications inthe APP and HASP.

F. Ensure that safe work principles and practices are followed in completing work tasks.

G. Document a daily site safety walk-through noting observations and corrective actions.

H. If the Health and Safety Officer is to be changed during the Contract, submit Qualifications per thisSection of the proposed officer prior to implementation on the Contract.

I. Be responsible to correct hazardous conditions and practices. When more than one contractor isworking within a given area, identify which personnel have the authority to take action to preventphysical harm and property damage.

1.07 HASP CONTENT

A. The following describes certain minimum precautions for consideration in developing a HASP. Includein the HASP all of the items which may apply to the work. There may be other items not indicatedbelow which shall be addressed in the HASP. The items indicated below do not cover every possiblesituation or hazard. Items that are not needed shall be noted in the HASP as not applicable (N/A).

B. Construction COVID-19 Job Site Requirements:The submitted HASP will include project site-specific job site requirements that conform to the following guidance documents attached at the end of this section: a. Governor Jay Inslee’s Construction Requirements – Construction COVID-19 Job Site

Requirements: Implementation of Phase 1 Construction Restart – Proclamation 20-25

http://www.lni.wa.gov/wisha/

https://www.governor.wa.gov/sites/default/files/proclamations/20-25%20Addendum%20Implementation%20of%20Phase%201%20Construction%20Restart%204.29.pdf?utm_medium=email&utm_source=govdelivery


b. DOSH Directive 1.70 – General Corona Virus Prevention: General Coronavirus PreventionUnder Stay Home - Stay Healthy Order

c. Additional COVID19 Job Site Requirements as they are identified by WTD Safety.

C. Hazard Communication (Chapter 296-800 WAC):Contaminant gases that may be encountered include, but are not limited to: hydrogen sulfide, methane, carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide. Provide a written Hazard Communication Program and emergency management plan addressing these and other potential hazardous substances that may exist and be brought on site during the work. For work requiring use of hazardous materials and chemicals, provide a list and corresponding Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)/Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for hazardous chemicals to be used on site. If no hazardous chemicals are to be used, provide statement to that effect.

D. Confined Space (Chapter 296-809 WAC):All confined spaces identified in WTD wastewater treatment facilities, and in WTD structures and conveyance lines, are designated and classified as Permit Required Confined Spaces. The nature of the work may expose workers to permit required confined spaces having possible explosive, toxic, and oxygen deficient atmospheric conditions. Provide a written Permit Required Confined Space Safety Program that meets the requirements of Chapter 296-809 WAC (Feb. 5, 2018 version). Identify the trained and certified PRCS Program Administrator by name and title. Identify the trained and certified PRCS Program Competent Person(s) by name and title. Identify the trained and certified PRCS Program Qualified Person(s) by name and title. Identify the trained and certified PRCS Program Authorized Entrants, Authorized Attendants and Authorized Entry Supervisors by name and title. Identify the trained and certified PRCS Rescue Team or Rescue Service to be utilized for Entry Rescue when Non-Entry Rescue is not feasible.

E. Lockout Tagout (Hazardous Energy Control) (Chapter 296-803 WAC):The nature of the work may expose workers to hazardous energy sources that include, but are not limited to, electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, thermal, and computerized systems. Provide a written plan outlining safe work practices addressing hazardous energy control procedures that meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.147 and Chapter 296-803 WAC. When working in existing WTD facilities, the written plan shall be coordinated and be compatible with WTD’s existing program for Lockout Tagout (Hazardous Energy Control).

F. Fall Prevention and Protection (Chapter 296-24 WAC Part J-1 and Chapter 296-155 WAC Part C-1):The nature of the work may expose workers to fall hazards. Provide a written Fall Prevention and Protection plan outlining safe work practices addressing fall hazards that meet the requirements of Chapter 296-24 WAC Part J-1 and Chapter 296-155 WAC Part C-1.

G. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) (Chapter 296-800 WAC):The nature of the work may expose workers to miscellaneous injury hazards that include, but are not limited to: head, hands, feet, body, eyes, and ears. Provide a written PPE plan outlining safe work practices addressing the use of PPE and clothing that meet the requirements of Chapter 296-800 WAC.

H. Biological Hazards and Bloodborne Pathogens (Chapter 296-823 WAC):Wastewater systems carry a wide spectrum of disease-producing organisms. Provide a written hazard communication and biological/bloodborne pathogen program detailing the preventive measures to be taken to provide an appropriate work environment for all site employees as well as County staff on site. These may include, but are not limited to: a. Instruction in appropriate measures to avoid contamination.b. A preventative inoculation program (tetanus/diphtheria, etc.) available to all employees.

https://lni.wa.gov/dA/36e85758be/DD170.pdf

https://lni.wa.gov/dA/36e85758be/DD170.pdf


c. PPE and clothing to protect against infection, including rubber boots with full sole and heel steel insert-liners, safety glasses or goggles, and gloves.

d. Facilities for workers to clean up, wash, and maintain good personal hygiene practices.

I. Fire Protection - Hot Work and Hot Work Permits (HWP): NFPA 51B - Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work shall be

followed unless it does not meet the requirements of this section. An HWP shall be utilized in all WTD facilities and on construction sites where the potential for the

ignition of explosive gases, liquids and flammable/combustible materials, and oxygen-enriched atmospheres may potentially exist.

Identify any type of work that produces a possible source of ignition in the presence of a fuel and oxygen (Fire Triangle) including, but not limited to: sparks, static electricity, welding, torch cutting, flame heating, brazing, grinding, sanding, and drilling. These activities are considered extremely dangerous in areas where the potential for a Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) above 10% or oxygen-enriched atmosphere above 23% could be encountered.

An HWP is required for areas that are classified per the WAC or NFPA 820, as applicable. Permit-Required Confined Spaces. Process Safety Management (PSM) system areas. Class 1 Division 1/Division 2 hazardous locations. All other areas where the hot work would be in close proximity to combustibles or flammables. All sites under contractor control.

Document how contractor HWP is established. Employ a system for issuing and monitoring HWP use. An HWP is valid only for: a. The parties performing the work. b. The work shift when the work is conducted. c. Only for the conditions observed and evaluated when the permit is issued.

If the local Fire Department / Fire Marshall Jurisdiction Having Authority (JHA) require a HWP, the contractor shall be required to obtain a HWP. If not required by the JHA then the contractor shall use their own corporate HWP.

Torch applied roofing requires a HWP and a fire watch. a. Regular fire-watch inspections should be done throughout the day by a competent person and

for a minimum of two hours starting when the last torch is extinguished on a roof. Inspections should include the roof’s entire field, flashings and the underside of the roof deck.

Per NFPA 820, monitor all spaces for methane and make sure all methane levels are below 10% of the LEL before the authorization of any Hot Work in the area.

J. Process Safety Management (PSM) of Highly Hazardous Chemical Systems (Chapter 296-67 WAC): Where the Contractor’s work involves modifications to the digester gas systems, provide detailed

Management of Change (WAC 296-67-045) documentation, drawings and operating procedures. This will be reviewed by WTD – Process Safety Management (PSM) Committee at the affected treatment plant.

The County generates digester gas (methane) at the wastewater treatment plants. This potentially explosive gas is generated by anaerobic digestion of organic wastewater material and is lighter than air.

Work performed that involves working within a wastewater digester gas system area that is specifically classified as a PSM Area regulated under Chapter 296-67 requires the Contractor’s compliance with the safe work provisions outlined under WAC 296-67-029.

For PSM work, be responsible shall specifically include, but are not be limited to, the following per the Chapter 296-67 WAC requirements: a. Ensure that each employee is trained in the work practices necessary to safely perform their

job within areas regulated under Chapter 296-67 WAC. b. Ensure that each employee is instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, and toxic

release hazards associated with digester gas/methane gas systems, as related to their job and the process, and the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan.

c. Document that each employee has received and understood the PSM training required by this Section. Prepare a record which contains the identity of the employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify that the employee understood the training.


d. Ensure that each employee follows the safety rules of the facility including the safe work practices for working with digester gas/methane gas systems required by WAC 296-67-021.

e. Advise the Project Representative of any unique hazards presented by the Contractor’s work or of any hazards found by its employee’s work.

K. Underground Construction (Chapter 296-155 WAC Part Q): Requirements apply to all construction of underground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and

passageways, as well as cut-and-cover excavations that are physically connected to ongoing underground construction operations which are covered in such a manner as to create conditions characteristic of underground construction.

This subparagraph does not apply to excavation and trenching operations covered by Chapter 296-155 WAC Part N, such as foundation operations for aboveground structures that are not physically connected to underground construction operations, and surface excavation.

Provide a written program detailing how employees and County staff on the site will be protected from the dangers of underground construction. At a minimum, the program shall include the following where applicable to the work: a. Air Monitoring b. Emergency Procedures, including evacuation procedures and Check-in/check-out systems c. Ventilation d. Hazardous classification e. Illumination f. Haulage g. Communications h. Electrical safety i. Flood control j. Hoisting k. Mechanical equipment l. Designated person m. PPE n. Emergency lighting o. Use of explosives p. Ground support q. Fire prevention and protection r. Pneumatic and hydraulic safety s. Access and egress t. Rescue

L. Commercial Diving Operations (Chapter 296-37 WAC): Due to the hazards associated with commercial diving operations, specific safety protocols and

procedures are required to ensure worker and diver safety. Provide a comprehensive Safe Practices Manual for Diving Operations that complies with Chapter

296-37 WAC.

M. Flammable Liquids and Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPG): No propane, propylene, butane, isobutane, and butylenes shall be stored inside buildings. Provide a written list of any of these materials that will be used on Site.

N. Excavation, Trenching and Shoring (Chapter 296-155 WAC Part N): Due to the hazards associated with excavation, trenching and shoring, specific safety protocols and

procedures are required to ensure worker safety. Each worker in a trench shall be protected from a cave-in by an adequate protective system. A trench that is four feet or more in depth shall have a safe means for workers to get in and out of

the trench. A means of egress is required to be within 25 feet of lateral travel. When excavation operations approach the location of underground installations, the exact location

of the installations shall be determined by safe and acceptable means. Follow the requirements in Chapter 296-155 WAC Part N in developing an excavation, trenching

and shoring plan.

http://apps.leg.wa.gov/wac/default.aspx?cite=296-67-021


O. Heavy Equipment Operations, Staging:All vehicles shall have a service brake system, an emergency brake system, and a parking brake system. These systems shall be maintained in operable condition and may use common components. Before leaving a motor vehicle unattended the motor shall be stopped. The parking brake shall be engaged and the wheels turned into curb or berm when parked on an incline. If parking on an incline and there is no curb or berm, the wheels shall be chocked or otherwise secured.

P. Suspect Material:Unless otherwise indicated, promptly suspend work and notify the Project Representative of unusual conditions, including oily soil found on the Site. Work shall remain suspended until the Project Representative authorizes, in writing that the work may resume.

Q. Traffic Control Plan:The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians) within the highway, or on private roads open to public travel, including persons with disabilities, through a temporary Traffic Control zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. When the work requires the occupation of traffic lanes, parking lanes, parkways, or other public right-of way closures, it shall be per the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

R. Electrical Safety:Use either ground-fault circuit interrupters or assured equipment grounding conductor program to protect employees on construction sites covering all cord sets, receptacles which are not a part of the building or structure, and equipment connected by cord and plug which are available for use or used by employees. These requirements are in addition to any other requirements for equipment grounding conductors per WAC 296-155-447. In work areas where the exact location of underground electric power lines is unknown, no activity that may bring employees into contact with those power lines shall begin until the power lines have been positively and unmistakably de-energized and grounded. Where overhead electric conductors are encountered in proximity to a work area be responsible for ascertaining the voltage and minimum clearance distance required and maintaining the minimum clearance distance per WAC 296-155-428. Do not permit an employee to work in such proximity to any part of an electric power circuit that the employee could contact the electric power circuit in the course of work, unless the employee is protected against electric shock by de-energizing the circuit and grounding it or by guarding it effectively by insulation or other means. Work on energized equipment: a. Only qualified persons shall work on electric circuit parts of equipment that have not been de-

energized under the procedures of WAC 296-155-429(4). Such persons shall be capable ofworking safely on energized circuits and shall be familiar with the proper use of specialprecautionary techniques, PPE, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools.

b. Use of an Energized Electrical Work Permit shall be required to ensure all shock and arc flashhazard have been considered.

1.08 UTILITIES

A. Call the Utilities Underground Location Center (UULC) before you dig, phone number 811.

B. During the performance of the work, take appropriate precautions when working near, around, and withutilities, in order to protect the health and safety of the worker, the public, property, and theenvironment.

C. Provide a flagged warning line for all work conducted in proximity to power lines. Coordinate and meetthe requirements of the utility owner for this work.

D. Coordinate and meet the requirements of the utility owner and the Project Representative to obtainapproval to disconnect or reconnect utilities.

http://apps.leg.wa.gov/wac/default.aspx?cite=296-155-429



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY AND HEALTH COMPLIANCE

A. Implement the written APP as required by Chapter 296-800 WAC, submitted in the bid evaluation per Section 00440 and accepted at the conclusion of the bid evaluation.

B. The Project Representative reserves the right to audit the Contractor's APP and implementation of the HASP.

C. Ongoing work and hazardous situations that are considered a health and safety risk by the Project Representative shall be corrected immediately.

D. Be responsible to stop that portion of the work that is determined to be an imminent or immediate threat to worker health and safety.

E. Ensure that necessary air monitoring, ventilation equipment; protective clothing, hazardous energy control devices, fall prevention, and other specified supplies and equipment are made readily available to employees to facilitate implementation of the APP and the HASP.

F. WTD facility entry: Protocols shall be followed. Enter all facilities in teams of two or more. With written approval of the Project Representative, Contractor may enter alone only for short-term

walk through inspections that do not involve working on ladders, with electrical equipment, or entering confined spaces.

Any work beyond short-term work that involves Contractor working alone requires written approval of the Project Representative.

G. Incidents: Notify the Project Representative immediately of all near miss incidents and all incident accidents

involving personal injury and property damage. Provide a written report known as the Incident Report within 24 hours of any incident. Report for

each incident occurrence shall include: a. Description of the event. b. Names of personnel involved. c. Description of injuries and treatment required (short term and long term). d. Description of property damage. e. Site visits and inspections of other agencies as a result of an incident. Include names of the

persons, purpose of the visit, and any other pertinent information.

H. Conduct a pre-job safety meeting with Contractor staff and with all subcontractor staff. Submit list of attendees and minutes of pre-job safety meeting.

I. Conduct all weekly safety tailgate meetings. Submit list of attendees and minutes of weekly safety tailgate meetings.

J. Submit a Monthly Contractor Injury Report on Form 01 35 29-A in Section 01 33 10 consisting of a summary of the current month's injury accidents.

K. Use of intoxicants or of illegal or debilitating drugs while working on a County contract is prohibited.

L. Failure to comply with safety and health regulations may result in work suspension until adequate safety and health measures are implemented.


M. No Safety Officer shall be assigned that does not meet the requirements of this section.

N. Submit all safety related citations received for Contract work immediately upon receipt. If appealed tothe state of Washington, notify the Project Representative a minimum of every month updating thestatus of the appeal until resolved. Submit documentation of the findings when resolved.

3.02 SITE SPECIFIC HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN REVISIONS

A. In the event that the Project Representative, regulatory agencies, or jurisdictions determine the HASP,associated documents, or organizational structure to be inadequate to protect employees and thepublic:

Modify the APP and HASP to meet the requirements of said regulatory agencies, jurisdictions, and the Project Representative. Provide submittal for revisions to the APP and HASP within seven days of the notice of a required modification.

3.03 POSTING

A. Provide and maintain a copy of the most up to date APP and the HASP at the Contractor's site officeand at each of the subcontractors' offices.

3.04 COMPLIANCE

A. Failure to comply with this Section will result in work suspension until adequate safety and healthmeasures are implemented.

3.05 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

A. Technical assistance is available from:Wastewater Treatment DivisionSafety and Hazardous Materials Program Office201 South Jackson St.Mail Stop: KSC-NR-0515Seattle WA 98104

Contacts: a. Jim Faccone – WTD Safety and Hazardous Materials Program Manager

1) Phone (206) 477-5379b. Terry Fiber – WTD Construction Safety Coordinator

1) Phone (206) 477-5383

END OF SECTION

DOSH DIRECTIVE Department of Labor and Industries Division of Occupational Safety and Health Keeping Washington Safe and Working

1.70 General Coronavirus Prevention Under Stay Home - Stay Healthy Order

Updated: April 27, 2020 I. Purpose

This Directive provides enforcement policy when evaluating workplace implementation of social distancing, sanitation and sick employee practices as required under the Governor’s Proclamation: Stay Home - Stay Healthy Order. Under the Order, people are required to stay home except for essential activities, which include a wide range of economic and social functions necessary to maintain minimum living conditions. Employers who continue operations under the Order are required to maintain coronavirus prevention practices consistent with DOSH, OSHA and Department of Health guidance. Coronavirus is recognized as a very serious workplace hazard.

II. Scope and Application A. DOSH does not enforce the Governor’s Order directly. Under existing DOSH rules,

employers are required to protect workers from biological hazards and implement programs to address known hazards in the workplace.

B. DOSH staff will not determine whether an employer is engaged in essential activity. If there is no clear rationale for the business operating, this may be referred to the Washington State coronavirus.wa.gov page. (See the Governor’s site “What’s open and closed” at https://coronavirus.wa.gov/whats-open-and-closed).

C. DOSH staff will limit actions related to infectious disease only when there is an aspect of exposure that is specific to the relationship between employers and workers. DOSH will do so in a manner consistent with public health orders and issued guidance.

D. There are extensive recommendations for healthcare workplaces with specific guidance related to infectious disease prevention. Therefore, this Directive will normally not be used in specific healthcare delivery work task settings.

E. DOSH has updated this Directive to provide guidance on workplace safety practices for essential activity workers who may be permitted to work following potential exposure to COVID-19. This updated Directive supersedes DD 1.70, dated April 7, 2020.

III. References • Chapter 296-800 WAC, Safety and Health Core Rules

- WAC 296-800-11045 Protect employees from biological agents - WAC 296-800-140, Accident Prevention Program - WAC 296-800-22005, Keep your workplace clean. - WAC 296-800-23025, Provide convenient and clean washing facilities

https://www.governor.wa.gov/office-governor/official-actions/proclamations

https://coronavirus.wa.gov/whats-open-and-closed

https://app.leg.wa.gov/wac/default.aspx?cite=296-800&full=true

https://app.leg.wa.gov/wac/default.aspx?cite=296-800-23025

DOSH Directive 1.70 (Updated: April 27, 2020) Page 2 of 10

• Proclamation by the Governor: Stay Home - Stay Healthy Order • CDC Guidance: Infection Control in Healthcare Personnel • CDC Coronavirus (COVID-19) Page • Washington State Coronavirus Response (COVID-19) Page • OSHA Publication 3990: Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19.pdf (English) • OSHA Publication 3992: Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19.pdf (Spanish) • Washington State Department of Health Recommendations for Temporary Worker

Housing Facilities • CDC Interim Guidance: Implementing Safety Practices for Critical Infrastructure

Workers Who May Have Had Exposure to a Person with Suspected or Confirmed COVID-19

IV. Background Staff shall learn and consider the baseline expectations for employers to provide workers a safe workplace during the coronavirus (COVID-19) virus outbreak. Overt workplace specific practices by the employer must be made to implement the Governor’s Executive Order. There are four basic categories of prevention elements that must be addressed during the inspection/investigation. Employers must ensure social distancing practices for employees and control customer flow; ensure frequent and adequate employee handwashing and surface sanitation; and ensure sick employees stay home or go home if ill. Employers must also provide basic workplace hazard education about coronavirus and how to prevent transmission in the language best understood by the employee. DOSH staff will need to be thoughtful on how these four elements are addressed based on the challenges that the specific worksite tasks present, but all four elements must be addressed in each operating workplace. DOSH Staff shall ensure that employers and employees are made aware that it is against the law for any employer to take any adverse action (such as firing, demotion, or otherwise retaliate) against a worker they suspect for exercising safety and health rights such as raising safety and health concerns to their employer, participating in union activities concerning safety and health matters, filing a safety and health complaint or participating in a DOSH investigation. DOSH Staff will ensure workers are informed they have 30 days to file their complaint with L&I DOSH and/or with Federal OSHA.

Employers must institute these prevention program elements or equivalent protections to limit the spread of the disease within the workplace under DOSH rules and in connection to the Governor’s Order. These procedures are specific to COVID-19 prevention and the related virus. If a workplace has a concern about exposures to another pathogen, Technical Services must be consulted on procedures specific to that pathogen.

A. Basic Program Elements. The following bold program elements are essential to the program whenever feasible. Employers who can establish work rules consistent with this section are not required to have further active monitoring or ongoing assessment of their workplace.

https://www.governor.wa.gov/office-governor/official-actions/proclamations

https://www.cdc.gov/infectioncontrol/guidelines/healthcare-personnel/

https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-nCoV/index.html

https://www.lni.wa.gov/safety-health/safety-topics/topics/coronavirus

https://www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf

https://www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3992.pdf

https://www.doh.wa.gov/Portals/1/Documents/1600/coronavirus/TemporaryWorkerHousingGuidance.pdf

https://www.doh.wa.gov/Portals/1/Documents/1600/coronavirus/TemporaryWorkerHousingGuidance.pdf

https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/community/critical-workers/implementing-safety-practices.html



https://www.governor.wa.gov/news-media/inslee-announces-stay-home-stay-healthy%C2%A0order

https://www.governor.wa.gov/news-media/inslee-announces-stay-home-stay-healthy%C2%A0order


1. Educate workers (and customers) about COVID-19 and how to prevent virusspread.a. Post posters/information from the local health department, state Department

of Health, Center for Disease Control and Prevention, and other authorities.b. Inform workers about the steps being taken in the workplace to establish

social distancing, increased handwashing, and to prevent the spread of thevirus.

2. Maintain at least 6 feet of spacing at all times.a. Occupied workstations are separated by 6 feet or have physical barriersb. Only infrequent intermittent passing within 6 feet is allowed between

employees without wearing respiratory protection.c. Materials, produce, or work items are transported between workers by

mechanical means or by using staging points.

• Workers may be along a conveyor or production system carrying product.• Workers may go to a central point one-at-a-time to drop off or pick up

items that transfer between workers.• Workers may have mailboxes, bins, or other surfaces at the periphery of

their workspace where materials are left for them by other workers.• Provisions must be made to clean objects handled extensively by more

than one worker when the items are transferred. Physically wiping theobject so it is visibly clean (no obvious soiling, smearing, or streaks) issufficient.

• Social distancing must be maintained during breaks and at shift start andend, while workers are at the employer’s worksite.

• Meetings with workers are limited in less than 10 and maintain 6 footspacing of all in attendance.

3. Regular cleaning of area, frequent cleaning of common-touch surfaces.

a. A cleaning schedule must be kept to maintain general housekeeping toprevent buildup of dirt and clutter.

b. The first step in cleaning is to remove buildups of dirt and other materials onsurfaces. Water and soap or other cleaning fluids are used with wipes,clothes, brushes or other physical means of removing these materials so thatthere is no visible build-up, smears, or streaks on the surface. Disinfecting isthe second step and is primarily needed for high touch surfaces. Bleachsolutions or an EPA approved disinfectant must be used to make sure this iseffective. (See the list of approved disinfectants athttps://www.epa.gov/pesticide-registration/list-n-disinfectants-use-against-sars-cov-2).

Surfaces that are commonly touched with the hands but difficult to clean(fabric, rough surfaces, and so forth) may need to be covered to make surethe environment is hygienic.

https://www.epa.gov/pesticide-registration/list-n-disinfectants-use-against-sars-cov-2

https://www.epa.gov/pesticide-registration/list-n-disinfectants-use-against-sars-cov-2


c. Cleaning supplies need to be available to workers to do spot cleaning when necessary.

d. Surfaces that are regularly touched by workers must be cleaned regularly to maintain a visibly clean state (no obvious soiling, smearing, or streaks). • For surfaces touched by multiple workers, this can be on a frequent

schedule, or between workers. • For surfaces touched by a single worker, this needs to be done

periodically, at least once per shift or when unclean, as a minimum.

4. Workers must have facilities for frequent handwashing readily available, including hot and cold (or tepid) running water and soap. • Staff must pay particular attention to transient outdoor and delivery workers

and non-fixed worksites where there are no exceptions being granted. Portable wash stations are readily available.

• To facilitate more frequent cleaning, secondary handwashing or sanitizing stations can be provided with either hand sanitizer, or wipes/towelettes.

• Workers must be able to wash their hands after touching any surface/tool suspected of being contaminated, before and after eating and using the restroom, and before touching their face.

5. Sick Employee and Post- employee illness procedures. DOSH staff will ensure employers have a program to prevent sick employees from entering the workplace and when recognized, that ill employees are sent home. a. Ensure a system for preventing sick employees to be present at work. b. Establish a process for deep cleaning after any worker leaves the workplace

reporting a suspected or confirmed case of COVID-19. c. Thoroughly clean areas where the worker worked or would have stayed more

than 10 minutes. • Wipe all accessible surfaces • Clean up any visible soiling including any smears or streaks. • Sanitize common touch surfaces in the vicinity.

d. Do not allow other workers into these areas until the cleaning is complete.

B. Consider Possible Alternate Strategies. Some industries may have challenges with basic elements so one or more of the following alternatives may be used to provide protection for workers. 1. Engineering controls can be established and maintained to provide an effective

distancing of employees when it is not feasible to fully separate them. a. Barriers must block direct pathways from face to face between individuals, and

make it so any indirect air pathways are greater than 6 feet. Sneezes and coughs should not be directed into the air above someone within 6 feet.


b. Covers can be used on common touch surfaces that cannot be easily cleaned. The covers may create a cleanable surface, or be something that can be changed out between individuals.

c. Ventilation that provides a clean air supply to a worker’s breathing zone.

2. Job modifications may be necessary to facilitate appropriate social distancing. Although an operation may be overall part of an essential industry or service, there may be portions of the work which can be deferred until a later time. In some cases, reorganizing the work may be necessary to break up tasks in a manner that facilitates social distancing or other protective measures.

3. Health surveillance can be done to identify early signs of infection, and separate workers who may present a risk to others. a. There will usually be an initial screening and then periodic review (probably

daily with COVID-19).

b. Initial screening will involve some review of the worker’s history that may be relevant to their risk of contracting the disease. This may also include review of the worker’s susceptibility to the disease and an education element on the disease and prevention.

c. Periodic screening will involve tracking symptoms and ongoing risks for contracting the disease.

d. The employer should set up surveillance in consultation with a physician or occupational health nurse and consider having ongoing participation or review by the healthcare professional.

e. The employer needs to consult with health professionals and determine whether the program relies on self-reporting by workers or if someone will be actively reviewing worker health on a regular basis.

4. Personal protective equipment may be helpful to prevent transmission of the disease.

5. Face shields can prevent direct exposure to expelled droplets and provide protection from disinfectants.

6. Respirators require care in use and management under a program covered by the Respirator Rule, Chapter 296-842 WAC. Respirators are not normally recommended for social distancing purposes, but may be appropriate where workers must have close proximity to others.

7. Surgical face masks (loose fitting cloth covers over the mouth and nose) do not prevent respiration of fine aerosols and are not protective in close proximity. The primary purpose for these devices are to prevent exposures to others and may have a use when individuals enter the workplace with a cough or sneeze.


C. Evaluate Special Circumstances. There are situations where strict social distancing may not be generally feasible for employer provided housing and businesses with extensive public interaction. There are also situations where an essential activity worker may be permitted to continue work following potential exposure to COVID-19, to ensure continuity of operations of essential functions. The following sections provide additional considerations which are applicable in these situations. 1. Employer provided worker housing is provided by the employer in some

circumstances such as agricultural guest workers. a. Workers may have limited control over their environment in some worker housing

situations and to the extent that the employer controls conditions, the basic program elements should be maintained as feasible during non-working time.

b. Social distancing must be supported for occupants during the time workers are housed, which may require additional resources. This includes accommodation of social distancing during cooking, sleeping, and in transportation.

c. If strict social distancing is not feasible (including options for dedicated individual or family rooms or offsite accommodations) then health surveillance should be instituted (see above) prior to and during the housing period.

d. Housing occupants must be provided cleaners and equipment to maintain a hygienic living space.

e. Plans for ill employees must be in place. If a housing occupant becomes sick:

• Employers must provide them with accommodations that are separate from others.

- A separate building or room if available, or use barriers or distance to separate them from others.

- Separate food and bathroom access is also necessary. • Arrangement for medical access. - Telemedicine resources should be utilized first to determine appropriate care.

- Provide for transportation, if necessary in a manner that does not expose others.

- The employer needs to consult with a physician or public health authority to monitor the situation and provide guidance on treatment and continued housing of all workers.


2. Frequent customer/public interaction may be necessary in some places of employment. a. To the extent feasible, establish social distancing with physical systems.

• Set up tables that position people away from workers. • Place pay stations at a safe distance. • Install barriers between people. • Place markers and lane dividers to encourage appropriate distancing.

b. Have managers or floor leads observing individuals in the workplace and prepared to address behaviors that may put workers at risk.

c. Provide supplemental washing facilities to allow additional handwashing when workers handle objects after others, such as:

• Hand sanitizer stations • Wipes or towelettes • Tepid water and soap in portable containers.

NOTE: Gloves may be provided, but also must be washed regularly to prevent the spread of the virus. This may help for workers whose hands are bothered by frequent washing.

3. Essential activities workers with potential exposure to a suspected or confirmed COVID-19 case, coming to common workplaces. These workers may have an infection, but not yet be symptomatic. There is a risk that they could spread the infection to other workers a. Generally, workers who have been exposed will be asked to self-quarantine.

CDC updated guidance allows essential activities workers to return to work to ensure continuity of operations of essential functions. • A potential exposure means being a household contact or having close

contact within 6 feet of an individual with confirmed or suspected COVID-19. The timeframe for having contact with an individual includes the period of time of 48 hours before the individual became symptomatic.

• Employers must determine whether it is appropriate for the worker to come to the workplace. Other alternatives, such as teleworking or reassigning duties should be considered. If the worker returns to the workplace, there is a potential for exposing other workers in the critical operation.

b. Employers of essential activities workers who have had an exposure but remain at the workplace must adhere to the following practices prior to and during each work shift:

• Pre-Screen: Determine the employee’s temperature and assess symptoms prior to them starting work. Ideally, temperature checks should happen before the individual enters the facility.


• Regular Monitoring: As long as the employee doesn’t have a temperature or symptoms, they should self-monitor. The employer’s occupational health program must supervise self-monitoring. If the employer does not have an occupational health program, they may consult with a physician or public health services for guidance on monitoring the worker’s health.

• Wear a Mask: The worker should wear a face mask whenever practicable while in the workplace for 14 days after last exposure. Employers can issue facemasks or can approve worker supplied cloth face coverings in the event of shortages.

• Social Distance: The worker must maintain 6 foot separation and practice social distancing as work duties permit in the workplace. Where duties do not permit social distancing, the employer must institute other controls as practicable to protect other workers. Barriers or fans may be effective in many circumstances.

• Disinfect and Clean Work Spaces: Clean and disinfect all areas such as offices, bathrooms, common areas, shared electronic equipment routinely.

c. If the worker becomes sick during the shift, they should be sent home immediately. Surfaces in their workspace should be cleaned and disinfected. Information on persons who had contact with the ill employee during the time the employee had symptoms, and 2 days prior to symptoms, should be compiled. Others at the facility with close contact within 6 feet of the employee during this time would be considered exposed.

d. Employers considering allowing potentially exposed workers to remain at the workplace should consider the following preparatory actions.

• Workers must not share headsets or other objects that are near the mouth or nose.

• Employers must increase the frequency of cleaning commonly touched surfaces.

• Workers and employers should consider pilot testing the use of face masks to ensure they do not interfere with work assignments.

• Employers should work with facility maintenance staff to increase air exchanges in room.

• Workers must physically distance themselves when they take breaks together. Stagger breaks and don’t congregate in the break room, and don’t share food or utensils.

DOSH Directive 1.70 (Updated: April 27, 2020) Page 9 of 10 V. Enforcement Policy

Inspection findings will be reviewed on a case by case basis. Conditions related to COVID-19 and the virus are still emerging. Public health recommendations and orders are being regularly revised, and so any compliance action must take into consideration current understanding of the situation and current rules and guides.

A. Accident Prevention Programs. 1. Employers are not expected to have comprehensive COVID-19 prevention

programs at this point. In conducting program reviews, DOSH staff must look at all documents used by the employer to communicate with workers to determine their overall program. Where the employer is clearly implementing recommendations of the public health authorities, they do not need additional documentation of their specific program. Where strict social distancing is not implemented, there needs to be clear communication to workers of the employer’s prevention expectations.

2. Violations of the sections of WAC 296-800-140, Accident Prevention Program, should be considered where the employer does not communicate workplace specific expectations to workers or is not effective in implementing those expectations.

3. Serious violations should specifically be considered in cases where the employer adopts practices or policies that clearly contradict the goals of coronavirus prevention practices published by DOSH, OSHA or public health recommendations.

4. Accident prevention program violations must follow instructions in the Compliance Manual.

B. Housekeeping. Where a workplace is not being cleaned and kept sanitary per public health guidance, a violation of WAC 296-800-22005, Keep your workplace clean, may be considered. A serious classification should be strongly considered.

C. Handwashing. 1. There is a requirement for handwashing facilities that applies to all workplaces at

all times. A serious and potential willful violation of WAC 296-800-23025, Provide convenient and clean washing facilities, will be considered whenever workers do not have basic handwashing facilities available at all or they are grossly inadequate in either number or maintenance.

2. Where employers cannot provide unlimited access to full handwashing facilities at all times, they must provide alternate means for frequent hand cleaning. A serious classification should be strongly considered if not adequate to achieve prevention. This is specifically necessary where workers regularly handle or touch objects or surfaces touched by others. Alternate hand cleaning may include: a. Portable wash stations with tepid water and soap. b. Wipes or towelettes with water and soap. c. Hand sanitizer stations.


D. Exposure to Biological Hazards. 1. Workplace conditions which have a direct potential for worker exposure to the

COVID-19 virus may be cited under WAC 296-800-11045, Protect employees from biological agents. This is the primary WAC code to be used for social distancing practice violations. This may include situations such as ineffective barrier or ventilation systems, or specifically allowing workers to be in close proximity, but where there is no written record of a policy or management decision.

2. Violations of this section are safe place violations in that they must be serious in classification and must follow the Compliance Manual instructions for safe place.

E. Temporary Farmworker Housing. Temporary worker housing in agriculture is covered under Chapter 296-307 WAC, Part L, Temporary Worker Housing and Cherry Harvest Camps. This rule has specific requirements for hygiene facilities and housekeeping. Employers must in general achieve adequate social distancing; frequent handwashing during work; sanitation practices during work; sufficient disinfection supplies in housing; and sick employee practices outlined above. Consult with Technical Services and Compliance Operations on application of these rules when there is a COVID-19 concern.

VI. Point of Contact

DOSH staff should contact Compliance Operations if there are questions about applicability of WISHA rules to an infectious disease in the workplace. Technical Services may be contacted with technical questions about workplace practices.

VII. Review and Expiration DOSH will review this Directive, and it will remain effective until superseded or canceled.

Approved: Anne F. Soiza, L&I Assistant Director Division of Occupational Safety and Health

Gov. Jay Inslee’s Construction Working Group

Recommendations 4/23/2020

Phase 1 Construction Restart COVID-19 Job Site Requirements

Phase 1: Low-risk construction work resumes.

Any existing construction projects complying with the points below may resume only those work activities that do not require workers to be closer than six-feet together. If a work activity requires workers to be closer than six-feet, it is not considered low-risk and is not authorized. Adherence to the physical distancing requirement and the health and safety points below will be strictly enforced.

Prior to recommencing work all contractors are required to develop and post at each job site a comprehensive COVID-19 exposure control, mitigation, and recovery plan. The plan must include policies regarding the following control measures: PPE utilization; on-site social distancing; hygiene; sanitation; symptom monitoring; incident reporting; site decontamination procedures; COVID-19 safety training; exposure response procedures; and a post-exposure incident project wide recovery plan. A copy of the plan must be available on each job site during any construction activities and available for inspection by state and local authorities. Failure to meet posting requirements will result in sanctions, including the job being shut down.

All Contractors are required to post at each job site written notice to employees, subcontractors and government officials the Phase 1 work that will be performed at that job site and signed commitment to adhere to the requirements listed in this document.

All contractors have a general obligation to keep a safe and healthy worksite in accordance with state and federal law. Failure to follow these requirements will be considered a violation of these duties and be penalized accordingly. Under RCW 49.17.060, “each employer shall furnish to each of their employees a place of employment free from recognized hazards that are causing or likely to cause serious injury or death to his or her employees and shall comply with the rules, regulations, and orders promulgated under this chapter.” The Washington State Department of Labor & Industries’ Division of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH) is responsible for workplace safety and health, including inspections and enforcement, consultation, technical assistance, training, education and grants.

All contractors are also required to comply with the following COVID-19 worksite-specific safety practices, as outlined in Gov. Jay Inslee’s “Stay Home, Stay Healthy” Proclamation 20-25, and in accordance with the Washington State Department of Labor & Industries General Coronavirus Prevention Under Stay Home-Stay Healthy Order (DOSH Directive 1.70: https://www.lni.wa.gov/safety-health/safety-rules/enforcement-policies/DD170.pdf) and the Washington State Department of Health Workplace and Employer Resources & Recommendations at https://www.doh.wa.gov/Coronavirus/workplace:

https://www.lni.wa.gov/safety-health/safety-rules/enforcement-policies/DD170.pdf

https://www.lni.wa.gov/safety-health/safety-rules/enforcement-policies/DD170.pdf

https://www.doh.wa.gov/Coronavirus/workplace



COVID-19 Site Supervisor

1. A site-specific COVID-19 Supervisor shall be designated by the contractor at every job site to monitor the health of employees and enforce the COVID-19 job site safety plan. A designated COVID-19 Supervisor must be present at all times during construction activities, except on single-family residential job sites with 6 or fewer people on the site.

COVID-19 Safety Training

2. A Safety Stand-Down/toolbox talk/tailgate training must be conducted on all job sites on the first day of returning to work, and weekly thereafter, to explain the protective measures in place for all workers. Social distancing must be maintained at all gatherings.

3. Attendance will be communicated verbally and the trainer will sign in each attendee.

4. COVID-19 safety requirements shall be visibly posted on each jobsite.

Social Distancing

5. Social distancing of at least 6 feet of separation must be maintained by every person on the worksite at all times.

6. Gatherings of any size must be precluded by taking breaks and lunch in shifts. Any time two or more persons must meet, ensure minimum 6 feet of separation.

7. Identify “choke points” and “high-risk areas” on job sites where workers typically congregate and control them so social distancing is always maintained.

8. Minimize interactions when picking up or delivering equipment or materials, ensure minimum 6-foot separation.

9. To the extent practical allow only one trade/subcontractor at a time on a jobsite and maintain 6-foot separation social distancing for each member of that trade. If more than one trade/subcontractor must be on the job to complete the job then at a minimum all trades and subcontractors must maintain social distancing policies in accordance with this guidance.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) – Employer Provided

10. Provide personal protective equipment (PPE) such as gloves, goggles, face shields and face masks as appropriate, or required, for the activity being performed.

11. Masks, in accordance with Washington Department of Health guidelines, or as required by Washington Department of Labor & Industries (L&I) safety rules, must be worn at all times by every employee on the worksite.

12. Eye protection must be worn at all times by every employee while on worksite.

13. Gloves must be worn at all times by every employee while on worksite. The type of glove worn should be appropriate to the task. If gloves are not typically required for the task, then any type of glove is acceptable, including latex gloves.

14. If appropriate PPE cannot be provided, the worksite must be shut down.



Sanitation and Cleanliness

15. Soap and running water shall be abundantly provided on all job sites for frequent handwashing. Workers should be encouraged to leave their workstations to wash their hands regularly, before and after going to the bathroom, before and after eating and after coughing, sneezing or blowing their nose.

16. When running water is not available, portable washing stations, with soap, are required, per WAC 296-155-140 2(a) – (f). Alcohol-based hand sanitizers with greater than 60% ethanol or 70% isopropanol can also be used, but are not a replacement for the water requirement.

17. Post, in areas visible to all workers, required hygienic practices, including not to touch face with unwashed hands or with gloves; washing hands often with soap and water for at least 20 seconds; use hand sanitizer with at least 60% alcohol; cleaning and disinfecting frequently touched objects and surfaces such as workstations, keyboards, telephones, handrails, machines, shared tools, elevator control buttons, and doorknobs; covering the mouth and nose when coughing or sneezing as well as other hygienic recommendations by the U.S. Centers for Disease Control (CDC).

18. Make disinfectants available to workers throughout the worksite and ensure cleaning supplies are frequently replenished.

19. Frequently clean and disinfect high-touch surfaces on job sites and in offices, such as shared tools, machines, vehicles and other equipment, handrails, doorknobs, and portable toilets. If these areas cannot be cleaned and disinfected frequently, the jobsite shall be shut down until such measures can be achieved and maintained.

20. When the worksite is an occupied home, workers should sanitize work areas upon arrival, throughout the workday and immediately before they leave, and occupants should keep a personal distance of at least 10 feet.

21. If an employee reports feeling sick and goes home, the area where that person worked should be immediately disinfected.

Employee Health/Symptoms

22. Create policies which encourage workers to stay home or leave the worksite when feeling sick or when they have been in close contact with a confirmed positive case. If they develop symptoms of acute respiratory illness, they must seek medical attention and inform their employer.

23. Have employees inform their supervisors if they have a sick family member at home with COVID-19. If an employee has a family member sick with COVID-19, that employee must follow the isolation/quarantine requirements as established by the State Department of Health.

24. Screen all workers at the beginning of their shift by taking their temperature and asking them if they have a fever, cough, shortness of breath, fatigue, muscle aches, or new loss of taste or smell. Thermometers used shall be ‘no touch’ or ‘no contact’ to the greatest extent possible. If a ‘no touch’ or ‘no contact’ thermometer is not available, the thermometer must be properly sanitized between each use. Any worker with a temperature of 100.4°F or higher is considered to have a fever and must be sent home.



25. Instruct workers to report to their supervisor if they develop symptoms of COVID-19 (e.g., fever, cough, shortness of breath, fatigue, muscle aches, or new loss of taste or smell). If symptoms develop during a shift, the worker should be immediately sent home. If symptoms develop while the worker is not working, the worker should not return to work until they have been evaluated by a healthcare provider.

26. Failure of employees to comply will result in employees being sent home during the emergency actions.

27. Employees who do not believe it is safe to work shall be allowed to remove themselves from the worksite and employers must follow the expanded family and medical leave requirements included in the Families First Coronavirus Response Act or allow the worker to use unemployment benefits, paid time off, or any other available form of paid leave available to the worker at the workers discretion.

28. Any worker coming to work on a construction site in Washington from any state that is not contiguous to Washington must self-quarantine for 14 days to become eligible to work on a job site in Washington.

29. If an employee is confirmed to have COVID-19 infection, employers should inform fellow employees of their possible exposure to COVID-19 in the workplace but maintain confidentiality as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). The employer should instruct fellow employees about how to proceed based on the CDC Public Health Recommendations for Community-Related Exposure.

Job Site Visitors

30. A daily attendance log of all workers and visitors must be kept and retained for at least four weeks. The log must include the name, phone number, and email address of all workers and visitors.

No jobsite may operate until the contractor can meet and maintain all requirements, including providing materials, schedules and equipment required to comply.

These Phase 1 COVID-19 job site safety practices are required as long as the “Stay Home, Stay Healthy” Gubernatorial Proclamation 20-25 is in effect or if adopted as rules by a federal, state or local regulatory agency. All items minus numbers 28 and 30 are subject to enforcement action under L&I’s Division of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH).

Workplace safety and health complaints may be submitted to the L&I Call Center: (1-800-423-7233) or via e-mail to [email protected]. General questions about how to comply with construction safety practices can be submitted to the state’s Business Response Center at https://app.smartsheet.com/b/form/2562f1caf5814c46a6bf163762263aa5. All other violations related to Proclamation 20-25 can be submitted via at: https://bit.ly/covid-compliance.

https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/php/public-health-recommendations.html

https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/php/public-health-recommendations.html

mailto:[email protected]

https://app.smartsheet.com/b/form/2562f1caf5814c46a6bf163762263aa5

https://bit.ly/covid-compliance

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 35 43 - 1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 35 43

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies environmental controls and requires plans that describe how the Contractor willmanage environmental mitigation and controls during the Work.


A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following embedded standardsreferenced herein. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listeddocuments, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

Chapter 173-201A WAC Water Quality Standards for Surface Waters of the State of Washington

Chapter 173-60 WAC Noise Levels

Chapter 173-303 WAC Dangerous Waste Regulations

27.44 RCW Indian Graves and Records

27.53 RCW Archaeological Sites and Resources

68.50 RCW Human Remains

68.60 RCW Abandoned and Historic Cemeteries and Historic Graves

KC Policy LUD 16-1 Cultural Resources Procedures

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Environmental Mitigation Binder (EMB) and its revisions.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL MITIGATION BINDER (EMB)

A. Develop and maintain for the duration of the Contract an EMB that comprehensively incorporates plans for implementing all required environmental controls, including but not limited to the requirements of this Section and other referenced Sections.

B. The EMB specified in this section shall constitute the “Environmental Mitigation Plan” required in Section 00700.

C. The following plans and subsequent revisions shall be submitted as a part of the EMB.1. Spill Prevention and Spill Response Plan2. Construction and Demolition Material Management Plan (Section 01 74 19)3. Noise Control Plan4. Light Control Plan5. Access and Haul Plan (Section 01 52 00)6. Traffic Control Plans

D. Appoint a person who is qualified, authorized, and available 24 hours per day to supervise and enforce compliance with the Plans. Provide the person’s name, affiliation, and 24-hour-access phone number. Coordinate with the Project Representative to designate a temporary substitute if required.


E. Unless otherwise specified, complete the entire EMB prior to initiating the work.

F. In the event that the County, regulatory agencies, or jurisdictions determine any of the Plans in the EMB or the Contractor's activities to be inadequate to protect the environment: 1. Stop the work in progress until adequate environmental protection measures are implemented. 2. Modify the Plans to meet the requirements of regulatory agencies, jurisdictions, and the County. 3. Submit and receive acceptance of modifications to the Plans prior to restarting the work.

1.05 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN [NOT USED]

1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN [NOT USED]

1.07 LOCAL JURISDICTION(S) STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN(S) [NOT USED]

1.08 WATER MANAGEMENT PLAN [NOT USED]

1.09 TREE AND VEGETATION PROTECTION PLAN [NOT USED]

1.10 SPILL PREVENTION AND SPILL RESPONSE PLAN (SPILL PLAN)

A. Prepare and submit a specific Spill Plan as a part of the EMB, to be used for the duration of the Work. The Spill Plan shall address the following requirements: 1. Spill Prevention:

a. Identify personnel responsible for managing and implementing the spill plan. b. Provide a site plan showing:

1) Staging areas, chemical storage areas, fuel tanks, and refueling locations, and their relationship to drainage pathways, waterways, and other sensitive areas.

c. Identify spill prevention and containment methods to be used. d. Identify security measures, inspection procedures and personnel training procedures as they

relate to spill prevention, containment, response, management, and cleanup. e. Address: equipment maintenance, refueling, and cleaning activities and on site storage areas

for hazardous materials. 2. Spill Response:

a. Outline spill response procedures including assessment of the hazard, securing spill response and personal protective equipment, containing and eliminating the spill source, and mitigation, removal, and disposal of the material.

b. Include the following: 1) Methods for immediately containing all visible floating oils with booms, dikes, or other

appropriate means. 2) Methods for immediately containing all visible oils on land using dikes, straw bales, or other

appropriate means. 3) Identification of the equipment and materials to be maintained on each Site to carry out the

responsive measures. 4) Location of disposal of waste materials at a legal site that accepts the waste. 5) List of 24-hour response numbers for agency notification in the event of any oil or product

discharges into public water, or onto land with a potential for entry into public waters.

B. If a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) or similar stormwater management plan is required by the Department of Ecology or a local jurisdiction having authority, the Spill Plan shall be included within the SWPPP or similar plan.

1.11 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Include the accepted C&D Material Management Plan submitted per Section 01 74 19, and subsequent updates, in the EMB.


1.12 NOISE CONTROL PLAN

A. Prepare and submit a Noise Control Plan, to be included in the EMB, which identifies measures to mitigate noise generated by the work.

B. At a minimum, the Noise Control Plan shall include the following: 1. Hours of work operation, including daytime and nighttime hours. 2. Identification of noise-generating equipment. 3. Layout of equipment, including anticipated changes in layout. 4. Hours of operation of each piece of equipment. 5. Noise mitigation measures for each piece of equipment. 6. Any additional mitigation measures not related to a specific piece of equipment.

C. Update and modify identified mitigation measures whenever major activity changes or different noise-generating equipment is mobilized on the Site from the equipment previously submitted.

D. List mitigation measures for each Site and for each change in major activities to be performed at the Site.

E. The Noise Control Plan shall meet applicable noise codes and standards in the areas of work: 1. Hours, of work at site: Section 01 14 00 2. Noise Variances:

a. Noise variances are prohibited for this project without additional approval

F. Since Contractor means and methods are not known to the County, the following represents a list of potential noise mitigation measures: 1. Use electric or hydraulic tools and equipment. 2. Adjust noisy operations with the hours of work. 3. Use noise walls on part or all of the Site. 4. Use sound blankets, noise attenuation enclosures, and barriers. 5. Install individual noise barriers or enclosures around equipment. 6. Use the best available equipment and technology that assist in meeting noise requirements. 7. Close gates of screening walls, where applicable. 8. Provide equipment with properly sized and maintained mufflers and silencers as appropriate. 9. Use broad-band alarms on equipment with back-up alarms. 10. Limit engine idling time of vehicles, including delivery and haul trucks, to five minutes maximum.

1.13 LIGHT CONTROL PLAN

A. Prepare and submit a plan, as part of the EMB, for controlling light on the site during the work.

B. At a minimum, the Light Control Plan shall include the following: 1. Hours of work operation, including daytime and nighttime hours. 2. Hours during which lights will be used to illuminate the work, including seasonal changes. 3. Layout of existing and temporary lights to be used. 4. Mitigation measures to minimize light pollution at the site.

C. Update and modify identified light control measures to address deficiencies, to adjust for seasonal changes, and as appropriate when there are major changes in the work.

D. Since Contractor means and methods are not known to the County, the following represents a list of potential light control measures: 1. Shielding. 2. Glare control. 3. Specific lamp types. 4. Choosing downcast rather than upcast lights. 5. Subdividing light control into specific work zones.


1.14 CULTURAL RESOURCES PLAN [NOT USED]

1.15 ACCESS AND HAUL PLANS

A. Include the accepted Access and Haul Plans submitted per Section 01 52 00, and subsequent revisions, in the EMB.

1.16 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS

A. Include the accepted Traffic Control Plans, and subsequent revisions, if required in the EMB.

PRODUCTS [NOT USED]

EXECUTION

3.01 PERSON RESPONSIBLE

A. The person responsible for implementation of the plans in the EMB shall be given the authority to take appropriate actions to safeguard the environment during the work. The materials, equipment, and supplies necessary to implement the plans shall be readily available at all times.

3.02 SITE MAINTENANCE

A. In addition to the requirements of this Section, comply with the requirements of Section 00700 regarding site maintenance, site cleanup, the lawful handling of Hazardous Materials, and Contractor responsibilities.

B. Maintain lids on all refuse containers.

C. Handle paints, solvents, fuel, oil, and other construction materials with care to prevent entry of contaminants into storm drains, surface waters, or soils.

D. Remove materials and equipment from the site when they are no longer necessary. Do not allow waste material to remain on or adjacent to the site. Collect, carry off the site, and legally dispose of such materials as specified in Section 01 74 19.

E. Potentially contaminated soils (suspect soils) which require further analysis may be temporarily stockpiled on the site per the Project Representative’s requirements.

F. Be responsible for obtaining necessary permits or approval for the Contractor's disposal sites.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, restore ground surface to its pre-construction condition. Restore disturbed areas by replanting or repaving as soon as practical after construction.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19.

3.04 STREET CLEANING

A. Use sealed trucks for the removal of contaminated or flowing running spoils from the Site.

B. Prevent dirt and dust from escaping trucks departing the work site by covering dusty loads, washing truck tires before leaving the site, using crushed rock at entrances, or other reasonable methods.


C. When working dump trucks and other equipment on paved streets and roadways, clean the streets no later than at the end of each day's operations and at such additional interim periods as required. Clean the area using a vacuum sweeping truck. Cleaning equipment shall be available 24 hours per day, while haul routes are in use.

D. Contractor may use power washing trucks to clean street surfaces only after receiving approval from the Project Representative and only if following the best management practices to prevent exceedance of state or local Water Quality Standards.

E. All streets in the construction area used by the Contractor's trucks or any other equipment hauling material to and from the area, whether within the Contract limits or adjacent thereto, shall be kept clean and shall be continuously serviced by the Contractor's use of sprinkling trucks to control dust.

F. Violations of the above requirements are sufficient grounds for the Project Representative to order the streets in question to be cleaned by others with all cost withheld from the Application for Payment.

G. Flush no untreated solid material or soils or water containing solid material or soils into receiving waters including catch basins, ditches, streams, lakes, or wetlands.

3.05 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL [NOT USED]

3.06 WATER QUALITY PROTECTION

A. Conform to the regulations and requirements of legally authorized surface water management agencies. Do not allow water discharges to exceed the state or local Water Quality Standards.

B. If water quality standards or permit conditions are violated, shut down work causing the violation until protection and remediation is completed. Be responsible for all associated impacts.

C. Be responsible for the overflow of any storm drains resulting from the addition of flow from Contractor's activities and any damages associated with such overflow.

D. Conduct operations in such a manner as to prevent sediment, construction equipment wash water, and other pollutants from reaching existing sewers, storm drains, wetlands, and surface waters.

E. Prevent additional construction wastes such as paper, wood, garbage, sanitary wastes, and fertilizer from leaving the site and entering waterways. Dispose of all debris on land in such a manner that it cannot enter a waterway or cause water quality degradation.

F. Water in contact with uncured concrete is toxic to aquatic life. Do not discharge water contaminated with fresh concrete into surface water bodies or storm or sewer pipes. Water in contact with concrete may only be discharged when it complies with WAC 173-201A and is permitted by the authority having jurisdiction.

3.07 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Do not discharge smoke, dust, and other contaminants into the atmosphere that violate the regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction. Prevent smoke, dust, engine exhaust fumes, and other contaminants from entering building spaces by directing them away from building intake plenums, building doors, or openings.

B. Maintain construction vehicles and equipment in good repair. When exhaust emissions are determined to be excessive, repair or replace equipment.


C. Do not allow internal combustion engines to idle for prolonged periods of time. Unless otherwise needed for functioning of equipment, the Contractor shall not allow gasoline or diesel powered machines or equipment to idle longer than five minutes. Examples of this exception may include; testing, servicing, repairing, and reaching operating temperatures and safe operational conditions. 1. Communicate this restriction to employees on a regular basis. 2. The Contractor shall provide a written report on the fuel burn of each piece of heavy equipment to

the Project Representative on a monthly basis.

D. Use electrically-powered equipment where practical.

E. Minimize dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping, sprinkling with water, or other means. The use of water in amounts which result in mud on public streets is not acceptable as a substitute for sweeping or other methods. Make equipment for this operation available at all times.

F. Protect existing facilities and equipment from dust generated from the Contractor’s activities.

3.08 TREE AND VEGETATION PROTECTION [NOT USED]

3.09 SPILL PREVENTION AND SPILL RESPONSE

A. Implement the Spill Plan as accepted. Modify as required.

B. All pollutants that occur on-site during construction shall be handled and disposed of in a manner that does not cause contamination of storm water or ground water.

C. Prevent, contain, and be responsible for spill clean-up of pollutants. Pollutant discharge into state waters or onto adjacent land is not permitted and violates state Water Quality Standards.

D. Store solid chemicals, liquid chemicals, paints, petroleum products, caustic solutions, and waste materials, including batteries and electronic components, to prevent entry of contaminants into all waters including groundwater.

E. Spill prevention: 1. Store liquid and solid Hazardous Materials and other pollutants on durable impervious surfaces and

within manufactured secondary containment vessels capable of containing 110 percent of the largest single container stored in the containment vessel. Plastic sheeting is not an acceptable product for use in a containment system for long term storage of chemicals or equipment with fuel tanks.

2. Store waste liquids under cover, such as tarpaulins or roofed structures, to prevent entry of rainwater into the containment vessel.

3. Place equipment with fuel tanks in secondary containment vessels, or if the equipment is moved often, attach spill pads under the fuel tank.

4. Segregate non-compatible or reactive chemicals to prevent possibility of mixing 5. Clearly designate all waste storage areas, whether for waste oil or hazardous waste, as such and

keep segregated from new product storage. 6. Label all containers with the type of material being stored and post Material Data Sheets (MDS)

near the storage areas. 7. Store all “empty” containers not cleaned in an upright secure manner. Label the containers:

“Empty.” 8. Locate materials, refueling locations, and equipment away from drainage pathways, waterways,

and other sensitive areas to the maximum extent possible. 9. Identify and implement reasonable steps to be taken to prevent releases of liquid products from

malicious tampering or vandalism. 10. Inspect secondary containment vessels, fuel hoses, lubrication equipment, hydraulically-operated

equipment, oil drums, and other equipment and facilities regularly for drips, leaks, or signs of damage, and maintain and store properly to prevent spills.


F. Spill response: 1. Maintain at each work site, and restock as necessary to ensure an adequate and continuous

supply, a spill kit containing the following materials at a minimum: a. Oil-absorbent booms: Four each, five feet long b. Oil-absorbent pads or bulk material, adequate for coverage of 200 square feet of surface area c. Oil-skimming system, if appropriate d. Sand bags e. Oil absorbent material, such as kitty litter or sawdust, for material spills on land f. Gloves for use when performing the work g. Plastic bags to collect the used material h. Place spill kits near locations of chemical storage, fuel tanks, and fuel refilling stations. Identify

the locations of spill kits on the ESC Plan. i. In the event of a spill: Immediately contain all visible pollutants on the water with booms, or

other appropriate means. j. In the event of a spill: Immediately contain all visible pollutants on land using dikes, sand bags,

or other appropriate means and remove using sand, ground clay, kitty litter, sawdust, or other absorbent material.

k. Remove oil sheens from water in secondary containment vessels prior to discharge into state waters.

l. Temporarily store cleaned up waste materials in drums or other leak-proof containers after clean-up and during transport to disposal. Dispose of waste materials properly at a legal site.

m. In the event of any oil or other chemical discharges into public waters, or onto land with a potential for entry into public waters, immediately notify the following agencies at their listed 24-hour response numbers: 1) Washington Department of Emergency Management: (800) 645-7911 2) U.S. Coast Guard National Response Center: (800) 424-8802

3.10 NOISE CONTROL

A. Implement the Noise Control Plan as accepted. Modify as required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated through a noise variance, comply with local controls and noise level rules, regulations and ordinances, which apply to work performed.

C. Schedule noisy activities to minimize their duration.

D. Notify residents and businesses near active construction areas of upcoming noisy construction activities.

E. Each internal combustion engine, used on the job or related to the job, shall be equipped with a muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer. No internal combustion engine shall be operated without said muffler.

F. Provide notification of special circumstances or emergency conditions that require work beyond the hours specified as follows: 1. Notify the Project Representative and local authority in advance of any proposed extended work

hours for preauthorization. Include a written request for authorization per Section 01 14 00 to perform work specified and the circumstances that warrant this request. Include any additional measures to mitigate noise generated by this construction activity if deemed necessary by the Project Representative.

2. If an emergency situation occurs that warrants extended hours, notify the Project Representative immediately upon determining the need for this work.

G. Noise complaints received by the Project Representative during the work will be shared with the contractor. Work with the Project Representative, as required, to resolve noise related complaints. Modify the Noise Control Plan to reflect major changes.


3.11 VIBRATION AND SETTLEMENT CONTROL [NOT USED]

3.12 LIGHT CONTROL

A. Minimize light cast beyond the site by focusing existing and temporary site lighting on construction activity, providing shielding, or other appropriate means.

3.13 CULTURAL RESOURCES [NOT USED]

3.14 FINES

A. Be responsible for all fines incurred from non-compliance with regulations of governing authorities.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 41 26 - 1 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS

SECTION 01 41 26

PERMITS AND EASEMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies permit, easement and right-of-entry agreements requirements.

1.02 PERMITS

A. The County has acquired the following permits: Snohomish County Building Permit (Tenant Improvement).

B. Copies of the permits obtained by the County are listed in 1.02 A of this Section and included in Attachment A to this Section. Unless otherwise indicated the terms, conditions and requirements of all permits listed in Part 1.02 A are requirements of this Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for all terms, conditions, fees and responsibilities of each permit.

C. The following lists permit terms, conditions and requirements of the County obtained permits which are not the responsibility of the Contractor:

None

D. In addition to the permits obtained by the County and included in this Contract (if any), the Contractor shall obtain from the Authority Having Jurisdiction all other permits required to perform the Contract Work. The Contractor shall obtain the needed permits in accordance with Section 00700.

E. The Contractor must include the in the Baseline Schedule (as required in Section 01 32 16) a dedicated activity for the Contractor to obtain each of the permits required to perform the Contract Work.

F. At a minimum the Baseline Schedule must include an activity for each of the following permits: Mechanical/Plumbing Permit Electrical Permit

G. The County will provide to the Contractor the following permits after execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of each permit as required in Section 00700. For the purposes of bidding the Contract shall assume the following requirements for each permit.

None.

1.03 EASEMENTS AND RIGHT-OF-ENTRY AGREEMENTS [NOT USED]

1.04 PERMITS, EASEMENTS AND RIGHT-OF-ENTRY AGREEMENTS OBTAINED BY CONTRACTOR [NOT USED]

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Permits, permit applications, easements and right-of-entry agreements obtained by the Contractor.

C. All permit, easement or right-of-entry agreement compliance reports.

D. Approvals when work is complete for permits obtained by the Contractor.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 41 26 - 2 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS

1.06 POSTING PERMITS AND EASEMENTS

A. Permits and easements, including those obtained by the Contractor, shall be posted at the site of the Work.

1.07 CONSTRUCTION RESTORATION ACCEPTANCE FORM [NOT USED]



END OF SECTION

ATTACHMENT A

PERMITS

Snohomish County Planning & Development ServicesBuilding OfficialMike McCrary

Your permit is issued! Read below to find out what is next!

First - Please print your Issued Permit, Inspection Card, and Approved Documents that have

been uploaded. Plans must be printed in color and in original size and may be larger than your home printer is able to accommodate. These must be kept at the project site and made available for inspections.

Then - Review your documents

Read the permit conditions on the Issued permit

Review your Inspection Card. If there is a “Preconstruction Meeting” listed then you will need to schedule the inspection prior to beginning work

Review the approved documents and plans for comments from County staff

To schedule an inspection Go to https://mybuildingpermit.com/

Select “Schedule Inspections”

Search by jurisdiction and permit number

(A video tutorial for scheduling inspections can be found at https://youtu.be/Aggjjef9RXs)

Inspections can be scheduled for any of the next 3 business days

Currently we cannot provide a specific time that the inspection will occur during the day

To contact your inspector on the day of inspection Go to https://mybuildingpermit.com/

Select “Scheduled Inspections” from the right-most margin and select Snohomish County as the jurisdiction

Search for your permit, your inspector’s name and phone number will be listed (You can call or text this number)

To see the results of your inspection Go to https://mybuildingpermit.com/

Select “Check Status” and enter your permit information.

Information will be within the drop down box marked “inspections”.

Was this form useful? Feedback can be sent to [email protected]

Commercial Building Permit

3000 Rockefeller Ave. MS 604

Everett, WA 98201

1-800-562-4367

425-388-3311

Snohomish County Planning & Development ServicesBuilding OfficialMike McCrary

Ref#:

PROPERTY OWNERS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING ALL PROPERTY LINE LOCATIONS AND RELATED EASEMENTS. ______ I certify that I am exempt from the requirements of state contractor's registration under Sec. 3, Chap. 126, Laws of 1967. ______ I certify that the information furnished by me is true and correct to the best of my knowledge and all work will conform to applicable Snohomish County Code. Signature______________________________________________________________________ Date _________________________

Subdivision:

Darlene Gaziano

KING COUNTY

13

270526-003-037-00 E20-14469

WOODINVILLE, WA 98072-6010

22505 STATE ROUTE 9 SE

Alteration

Commercial Building Permit

3000 Rockefeller Ave. MS 604

Everett, WA 98201

1-800-562-4367

425-388-3311

Assessor Tax#: Permit# 20 106542 CBPSite Address:

Type:Permit Description:

Expires:

EPERMIT Description of Work: Improvements to the digested sludge storage tank (DSST) at the King County Brightwater Treatment Plant

Work Proposed:

Applicant:

Contractor:

Owner:

Front Setback:Side Setback:Rear Setback:Sec Twn Rng: 26-27-5 16th: Lot:

All permit documents, including but not limited to, the permit card, the inspection card, the approved plans, and the approved documents shall be printed and provided on-site for ALL inspections. Plans shall be printed on full size plan sheets-plan sheet size is provided on the approved plans.

201 S JACKSON STREET SEATTLE, WA 98104 (206) 263-0562

201 S JACKSON ST 0505 SEATTLE, WA 98104 (206) 263-0562

11/21/2021

Tenant Improvement

Issued:

Type of Sprinkler System Alarm System Required?

Valuation $ 1111000 Primary Usage Utility Heat Source None

N/A No Type of Construction n/a

Inspection Area 7 Building Code Edition 2015 IBC

Type of Sprinkler System Alarm System Required?

Valuation $ 1111000 Primary Usage Utility Heat Source None

N/A No Type of Construction n/a

Inspection Area 7 Building Code Edition 2015 IBC

05/21/2020By: SCDSLS

490-B

490-D

320-P

320-R

710-J

1

E 1500

E 1500

N 1

500

E 800

N 2

500

E 800

E 800

N 2

500

E 1500

N 1

500

E 1500

E 1500

Co

ncre

te_

CIP

74

42

49

_1

13

38

86

14

1

1

STOP

STOP

STOPSTOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

5832

9_11

3873

0435

4412

5_11

3873

0435

5832

5_11

3873

0435

5832

1_11

3873

0435

4412

5_11

3873

0435

4412

5_11

3873

0435

5831

7_11

3873

0435

4412

5_11

3873

0435

4412

5_11

3873

0435

5831

3_11

3873

0435

4406

9_11

3873

0435

5568

9_11

3873

0435

4412

5_11

3873

0435

4411

2_11

3873

0435

4408

7_11

3873

0435

4406

9_11

3873

0435

4407

8_11

3873

0435

4406

9_11

3873

0435

4405

1_11

3873

0435

4406

9_11

3873

0435

4406

9_11

3873

0435

4403

3_11

3873

0435

4406

0_11

3873

0435

70

0-A

4403

3_11

3873

0435

4404

2_11

3873

0435

4403

3_11

3873

0435

4403

3_11

3873

0435

4402

3_11

3873

0434

70

0-D

70

0-B

70

0-C

70

0-J

70

0-E

70

0-G

70

0-F

1

70

0-H

70

0-K

3

2

4

5

6

420-A

8.1

5.7

6.6

7.3

320-N

1

8.7

5

10

4

320-S

300-L

400-H

320-M

310-J

310-K

400-F

400-G

400-D

400-E

400-C

400-B

2

1

710-A

9

5

3

6

7

4

8

10

710-B

710-C

1

710-E

710-D

710-F

710-G

710-H

4

750-A

2

750-C

3

750-D

750-E

750-B

750-G

750-F

790-A

790-B

790-C

490-C

490-A

2

1

3

2

2

1

3

625-A

625-B

LDS LDS

LDS

LDS

LD

S

LD

S

WEST ROAD

SOLIDS EAST ROAD

CENTRAL ROAD

EAST ROAD

EAST ROAD

105

SO

LID

S N

OR

TH

RO

AD

42

0

EA

ST

RO

AD

400PRIMARY CLARIFIERS

490HEADWORKSAND PRIMARY

ODOR CONTROL

300HEAD-

WORKS

320HEADWORKS

TRUCKLOADOUT

750ENERGYBUILDING

710DIGESTION

700SOLIDS

BUILDING 790SOLIDS BUILDINGODOR CONTROL

625ACIDIC

CHEMICALSTORAGEFACILITY

RAMP UP

BONE-YARD

AND

LANDSCAPING

STORAGE

SOLIDS EAST ROAD

SC

RE

EN

S

31

0

GR

IT R

EM

OV

AL

GALLERY

WASTE GASBURNER PAD

998ENERGY

TECHNOLOGYDEMONSTRATION

FACILITY

SOLIDSGALLERY

0 40 80

Scale In Feet

120

KEY PLAN

T 27 N, R 5 E, S 35

2 4 61 3 5

A

B

C

A6

B6

C6C5

B5

A5A4

B4

C4C3

B3

A3A2

B2

C2

MA

TC

HLIN

E -

SE

E D

WG

BW

0000-X

-XX

X

MA

TC

HLIN

E -

SE

E D

WG

BW

0000-X

-XX

X

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:

DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES & PARKS

WASTEWATER TREATMENT DIVISION

DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\G-G

EN

ER

AL

\BW

10

00

-G-2

99

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

La

yo

ut1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-04

:03

:34

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

WA

-ST

AL

LM

AN

-DO

NN

IE-S

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:

NO REVISION DESCRIPTION BY APVD DATE

E F G HB C DA

BRIGHTWATER TREATMENT PLANT

STORAGE TANK FOAM SPRAY SYSTEM

APRIL 2020

#M. Redmon C0XXXXCXX

19-1151223 GENERAL

OVERALL SITE PLAN

BW1000

G-299

1"=40'-0"

S. Plancic

D. Stallman

T. Thramer

S. Krugel

# 0

WORK AREA

BOUNDRY

PROJECT

STAGING AREA

55260

PERMIT REVIEW SETPARCEL #: 27052600303700

04/30/2020

THIS SET OFPLANS MUST BEKEPT ON THE JOBSITE.

PLAN SHEETS SHALL BE PRINTED ON THECORRECT PLAN SHEET SIZE AND SHALL BETO SCALE. MINIMIZED PLAN SHEETS WILLNOT BE ACCEPTED FOR INSPECTIONS. ANADDITIONAL INSPECTION FEE WILL BECHARGED FOR ADDITIONAL INSPECTIONS. 34" x 22"

SUBJECT TO FIELD INSPECTIONS, CORRECTIONS, ANDPROVISIONS OF PLAN CHECK

PLANS EXAMINER, BUILDING DEPARTMENT

SNOHOMISH COUNTY

05/20/2020 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 20 106542 CBP

SUBJECT TO FIELD INSPECTIONS, CORRECTIONS, AND PROVISIONS OF PLAN CHECK. Page 1 of 13 THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE KEPT AT JOB SITE

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED:

a. See sheet S-001 (Page 4 of 13 in the building plans)b. Concrete constructionc. Post installed anchorsd. Structural engineer observations

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

92

10

710-E

710-D

710-C

710-B

710-A

750-G

750-F

750-E

750-D

750-C

750-B

750-A

710-F

710-G

710-H

710-J

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"

OVERALL PLAN AT ELEVATION 300.50

DIGESTER 1

DIGESTED SLUDGE

STORAGE TANK

DIGESTER 2

DIGESTER 3

6

M-2

10

M-212

8

M-213

9

1. MECHANICAL PIPING NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.

2. HVAC AND ELECTRICAL NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.

GENERAL NOTES:

750 - ENERGY BUILDING 710 - DIGESTION1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\M-M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

\BW

71

00

-M-0

03

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

La

yo

ut1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-04

:11

:01

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

WA

-ST

AL

LM

AN

-DO

NN

IE-S

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

PERMIT REVIEW SET

DIGESTION

OVERALL PLAN AT ELEVATION 300.50

BW7100

M-003

1/16" = 1'-0"

S. Plancic

D. Stallman

T. Thramer

S. Krugel

# 0

7

M-2

11

M-2

01

1

M-2

01

1

55260

04/30/2020



SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

PLAN AT ELEVATION 300.50

MATCHLINE - SEE DWG BW7103-M-124

MA

TC

HLIN

E -

SE

E D

WG

BW

7103-M

-125

71

0-E

71

0-F

71

0-G

71

0-H

7

9

8

12" OF

18" OF

U-TUBE

EMERGENCY

OVERFLOWS

DIGESTED SLUDGESTORAGE TANK

T 710,390

KEY PLAN

1. HVAC AND ELECTRICAL NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.

2. COORDINATE PIPING WITH HVAC AND ELECTRICAL.

3. ALL TS, OF, AND DG PIPING SLOPED AT A MINIMUM

OF 1% UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

GENERAL NOTES:

INSTALL LSH 710,088 IN FLANGED CONNECTION

WITH FULL PORT BALL VALVE TO ALLOW REMOVAL

AND CLEANING OF PROBE DURING DIGESTER

OPERATION. SEE STANDARD DETAIL 170317.

SEE DETAIL A/BW7109-M-311 FOR PIT 710,086

INSTALLATION.

DS STORAGE TANK GAS DOME. SEE STRUCTURAL

DRAWINGS AND B/S-322.

ACCESS HATCH. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS.

CENTERLINE ELEVATION OF 6" DG PIPE IS 312.00.

CENTERLINE ELEVATION OF 12" 0F PIPE IS 310.00.

CENTERLINE ELEVATION OF 12" TS PIPE IS 309.04.

SEE DETAIL A/D-307 FOR LIT 710,022 INSTALLATION

FLUSHING CONNECTION. SEE DETAIL A/D-309.

DISCONNECT FLANGES AT TANK AND THREE-WAY

VALVE. REMOVE PIPE SECTION. COORDINATE

WITH PROJECT REP. REINSTALL AFTER CLEANING

BY COUNTY.

CONNECT 6" DG TO DS STORAGE TANK GAS DOME.

SEE DETAIL C/D-308 AND PHOTO D/D-308.

PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORT AT MARKED LOCATIONS.

SEE DETAIL A/D-308.

MODIFY EXISTING GAS PIPING. SEE DETAILS

A&B/M-307.

RELOCATE 6" BUTTERFLY VALVE, NIT VALVES, AND

CONNECTIONS, PER DETAIL A/D-308.

PENETRATION PER STD DTL 150210.

PROVIDE A 21"x21" BLOCKOUT THROUGH PARAPET

WALL.

PENETRATION PER STD DTL 150202.

PROVIDE 3' FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE. PROVIDE PIPE

ANCHOR TO DIGESTER WALL IN VERTICAL ABOVE

FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE. PROVIDE PIPE ANCHOR

TO DIGESTER CONTROL BUILDING BELOW

FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE. SEE STANDARD DETAIL

151003

INSULATING FLANGE.

1

KEY NOTES:

2

12" OF

PIT

710,086

LSH

710,088

6" DG

3

4

4

4

4

A B

D

FE

C

3" DG

6" DG 1

2

71

0-J

7

6

12" TS

5

6

7PSH

710,008 8

9

10

9

10

INSTALL VALVE OPERATOR

ON EXISTING 12" PLUG VALVE

LOCATION OF TEMPORARY

PANCAKE FOR DIGESTER

GAS SYSTEM OUTAKE

6" DG

11

12

12

135

14

11

12

14

15

16

17

15

16

17

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\M-M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

\BW

71

03

-M-1

26

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

La

yo

ut1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

4,

20

20

-08

:38

:46

am

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

WA

-ST

AL

LM

AN

-DO

NN

IE-S

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

PERMIT REVIEW SET

DIGESTION


AREA F

BW7103

M-126

1/4"=1'-0"

S. Plancic

D. Stallman

T. Thramer

S. Krugel

# 0

36" PRESSURE RELIEF HATCH

MOUNTED ONTO EXISTING HATCH

THIMBLE MODIFIED TO ANSI 150

FLANGE CONNECTION SEE

SECTION 2/S-126

9

9

13

17'-6"

4'-0"

3

M-2

05

11'-5"

3'-1"

33'-1"

STORAGE TANKVACUUM PRESSURERELIEF ASSEMBLY

ME 710,070

3

8

LIT

710,087

18

CONNECT 6" CS TO

EXISTING 6" FLANGED

TANK PENETRATION AT

INVERT EL. 311.75

8" CS

18

HVAC DUCT

1BW7109-M-231

NEW 12"x14"

DRAINAGE OPENING

PLACE HINGE SO

THAT HATCH OPENS

TOWARDS NEW

DRAINAGE OPENING

INSTALL NEW 6" 316 SS 150" FLANGE AT NOZZLE. INSIDE

DSST CUT BACK HDPE LINER AROUND NOZZLE. CHIP CRACK

CONCRETE APPROXIMATELY 1/2" DEEP TO ALLOW FOR

WELD. WELD FLANGED NOZZLE EXTENSION 6" SS NOZZLE.

REPAIR CONCRETE TANK WITH GROUT. REPAIR HDPE LINER

PER LINER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS.

316 SS PIPING INSIDE DSST.

TANK HAS HDPE LINER ON WALL AND ROOF.

APPROXIMATE NOZZLE PLACEMENT, PRECISE PLACEMENT

TO BE DETERMINED BY MANUFACTURER. NOZZLES TO BE

LOCATED 180 DEG. APART.

20

21

22

13

6" CS

FOAM SUPPRESSION

NOZZLE PIPING INSIDE THE

TANK AT ELEVATION 311.72

19

20

6" CS

22

19

23

23

21

21

KEY NOTES CONTINUED:

55260

04/30/2020



DESIGN CRITERIA

GENERAL INFORMATION

1. DESIGN DETAILS ARE INTENDED TO BE TYPICAL AND SHALL APPLY TO SIMILAR SITUATIONS OCCURRINGTHROUGHOUT THE PROJECT, WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE INDIVIDUALLY CALLED OUT.

2. VERIFY FINAL OPENING DIMENSIONS IN WALLS, SLABS, AND DECKS WITH OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGSPRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF THESE ELEMENTS.

3. FOR NUMBER, TYPE, SIZE, ARRANGEMENT, AND/OR LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT PADS, SEE OTHER DISCIPLINEDRAWINGS. COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER PRIOR TO PLACING SLABS, WALLS AND FOUNDATIONS.COORDINATE PIPING OPENINGS WITH OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGS.

4. DO NOT CUT OR MODIFY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, ETC, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DETAILEDOR APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE ENGINEER.

1. DESIGN CODE: 2015 WASHINGTON STATE BUILDING CODE (WSBC 2015) AS AMENDED BY SNOHOMISH COUNTY.

2. REFER TO THE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL AND SPECIFIC STRUCTURE LOADINGS AND REQUIREMENTS.

3. ALL LOADS SHOWN ARE ASCE 7-10 UNFACTORED LOADS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. APPLY THE ASCE 7 ORIBC 2015 LOAD FACTORS (ASD OR LRFD) AS NECESSARY.

4. DEAD LOADS:SELF WEIGHT

5. ROOF LOADS:ROOF SNOW LOAD 25 PSF

6. FLOOR LIVE LOADS:UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 100 PSF

7. WIND LOADS:ASCE 7 METHOD CHAPTER 28, PART 2 (ENVELOPE, LOW RISE)BASIC WIND SPEED (3-SECOND GUST) 115 MPHEXPOSURE CATEGORY BRISK CATEGORY IIICOMPONENT AND CLADDING WALL ELEMENTS ASCE 7-10 CHAPTER 30 PART 2

8. SEISMIC LOADS:RISK CATEGORY IIIIMPORTANCE FACTOR, Ip 1.50SS 1.302S1 0.507SITE CLASS DSDS 0.868SD1 0.507SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D

NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENT SUPPORTS HAVE BEEN ANALYZED USING THE EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCEPROCEDURES OF ASCE 7-10.

GRATING, SPAN DIRECTION INDICATED

GROUT

CONCRETE

SYMBOL LEGEND

STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS

REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

TYPEFREQUENCY REFERENCED

STANDARDSIBC REFERENCE

CONTINUOUS PERIODIC

CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 1705.3

1. INSPECT ANCHORS CAST IN CONCRETE X ACI 318: 17.8.2

2. INSPECT ANCHORS POST-INSTALLED IN HARDENED

CONCRETE MEMBERS

A. ADHESIVE ANCHORS INSTALLED IN

HORIZONTALLY OR UPWARDLY INCLINED

ORIENTATIONS TO RESIST SUSTAINED

TENSION LOADS.

X

ACI 318: 17.8.2.

B. MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE

ANCHORS NOT DEFINED IN 4.A.X

3. VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. X ACI 318: Ch. 19, 26.4.3, 26.4.4 1904.1, 1904.2, 1908.2, 1908.3

4. PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FABRICATE

SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP

AND AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE

TEMPERATURE OF THE CONCRETE.

X

ASTM C172

ASTM C31

ACI 318: 26.4.5, 26.121908.10

5. VERIFY MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING X ACI 318: 26.4.7-26.4.9 1908.9

6. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND

DIMENSIONS OF THE CONCRETE MEMBER BEING

FORMED.

X ACI 318: 26.10.1(B)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. THE ENGINEER OF RECORD SHALL PROVIDE VISUAL OBSERVATION OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM, FOR GENERALCONFORMANCE TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, AT SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES AND AT THECOMPLETION OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM.

2. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION DOES NOT INCLUDE OR WAIVE THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BYWSBC SECTIONS 1705 OR OTHER SECTIONS OF THE WASHINGTON STATE BUILDING CODE.

3. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORTS SHALL BE ISSUED TO THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE AND THE BUILDING OFFICIALAT THE COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION.

STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-0

00

01

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-00

00

1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-04

:17

:34

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g;

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223 DIGESTION

NOTES AND SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

BW0000

S-001

NONE

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



3

DRILLED IN ANCHORS ARE NOT PERMITTED IN THEAREAS SHOWN CROSSHATCHED WITHOUTSPECIFIC PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE PROJECTREPRESENTATIVE. SEE DWG S-201 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION

3" (TYP ATANCHORAGE

ZONES)

TOP OF TANK ROOFSLAB @ PARAPET EQUAL EQUAL

1'-0"

1'-2"

NEW WALL PENETRATION. DO NOTOVERCUT CORNERS

1'-0"

TOP OF PARAPETELEV 320.38

71

0-G

8

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-1

00

01

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-10

00

1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-06

:09

:10

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

SCALE: NTS

PLAN---

SLUDGE STORAGE TANK ROOF SLAB PLAN

1

DIGESTION


PLAN AND SECTIONS

BW7103

S-126

NONE

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

4

1

3

2

N

POST TENSION

ANCHOR ZONE "N".

SEE S-201 FOR

TANK WALL

ELEVATION

2S-3

01

CENTER THE HATCH HINGE ON

LINE PERPENDICULAR TO LINE

CONNECTING CENTER OF TANK TO

CENTER OF HATCH

NEW 12" WIDE x 14" HIGH

WALL PENETRATION.

SEE DETAIL A/S-126

19.286° FIELD VERIFYTHAT THIS RESULTSIN THE SCUPPERBEING LOCATEDMIDWAY BETWEENVERT PT AS SHOWNON DETAIL A/S126

SCALE: NTS

DETAILS-126

NEW WALL PENETRATION

A

90°

NEW ELECTRICAL

BOX SUPPORT

BRACKET

AS-301

45° TYP

WALL CJ, TYP (4) PLACES

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



47'-6 3/16"

MEASURED AT CENTER OF TANK WALL

2'-7 11/16" 8 SPA @ 5'-3 5/16" = 42'-2 13/16"

12-STRAND TENDONS (VERTICAL)

2'-7 11/16"

A1

1

3

B1

A2

B2

A3

B3

A4

B4

A5

B5

A6

B6

A7

B7

A8

B8

2'-8"

2'-0"

2'-0"

2'-0"

2'-4"

2'-4"

2'-4"

2'-4"

2'-4"

3'-0"

3'-0"

3'-0"

3'-0"

4'-0"

4'-0"

3'-8"

2'-0"

(16)

12-S

TR

AN

D T

EN

DO

NS

SP

AC

ED

AS

SH

OW

N =

46'-0"

(NO

MIN

AL)

2

4

2

4

6"

(TY

P A

LL H

OR

IZO

NT

AL

TE

ND

ON

S)

DRILLED IN ANCHORS ARE NOT PERMITTED IN THE

AREAS SHOWN CROSSHATCHED WITHOUT

SPECIFIC PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE PROJECT

REPRESENTATIVE.

6" (TYP ALL VERTICAL

TENDONS, EXCEPT AT

ANCHORAGE ZONES)

3" (TYP AT

ANCHORAGE

ZONES)

EL 267.00

EL 312.88

TOP OF TANK ROOF

SLAB @ PARAPET

1'-0"

TOP OF PARAPET

ELEV 320.38

CJ W/ WATERSTOP

CJ W/ WATERSTOP

CJ W/

WATERSTOP

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-2

00

01

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-20

00

1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-06

:03

:42

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

SCALE: NTS

ELEVATION---

SLUDGE STORAGE TANK APPROXIMATE EXISTING P/T TENDON LOCATIONS

1

DIGESTION

POST-TENSION TENDON

APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS

SLUDGE STORAGE TANK ELEVATION

BW7109

S-201

NONE

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

NOTES:

1. THIS DRAWING IS PROVIDED FOR INFORMATION ONLY, TO SHOW THE EXTENT AND APPROXIMATE

DESIGN LOCATION OF THE EXISTING POST TENSIONING IN THE STORAGE TANK WALL.

2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE THE TENDONS AND REINFORCING USING X-RAY OR GROUND

PENETRATING RADAR PRIOR TO DRILLING INTO THE TANK WALLS.

3. THE "B" TENDON JACKING ANCHORAGES AT GRIDLINE 8 (ANCHORAGE 2 AND 4 FOR "B" TENDONS)

ARE SIMILAR TO THE JACKING ANCHORAGES AT GRIDLINE 710-G (ANCHORAGE 1 AND 3 FOR "A"

TENDONS). THE VERTICAL "NO DRILL ZONES" AT ANCHORAGES 2 AND 4 SHALL MATCH THAT AT

ANCHORAGES 1 AND 3.

4. SEE SHEET S-126 FOR ANCHORAGE ZONE ORIENTATION IN PLAN.

710-G

8 8

POST TENSION ANCHOR ZONE "N". SEE S-126 FOR PLAN VIEWN

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



EXIST. 36" DIA THIMBLE W/OPERABLE LID. CUT OFF ANDREMOVE LID 1'-2: ABOVE THE

EXISTING ROOFING.

NEW EMERGENCYRELIEF HATCH, SEEMECH

EXIST. 36" DIATHIMBLE W/

OPERABLE LID.REMOVE LID AND

REPLACE WITH NEWEMERGENCY

HATCH.

NEW ANSI CLASS 150, SSTFLANGE, SEE MECH

NEW SST FLANGEBOLTING, TO MATCHEMERGENCY HATCH

1'-2"

AB

OV

EE

XIS

TIN

GR

OO

FIN

G

45°

PASSIVATE AFTERWELDING

R=1/4"

2 1/2" @ CLOSESTPOINT TO THIMBLE

SST WT8x13 x 12", CUT TO FIT OD OFTHIMBLE. DRILL TO MATCH FLANGE

BOLTING (3) BOLTS MIN.

1/2" SST BOLTS(2) REQ'D

3 3

/4"

1 5/8" x 1 5/8" x 24" LONG, 12 GA, SSTFRAMING CHANNEL w/ PUNCHED

HOLES. SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION

6"

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-3

00

01

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-30

00

1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-06

:04

:44

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:

IMG

_2

02

00

10

8_

10

55

47

.jp

g;


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223 DIGESTION

MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS

BW7109

S-301

AS NOTED

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

SCALE: NONE

PHOTOS-126

EXISTING LID REMOVAL

A

SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"

SECTIONS-126

NEW EMERGENCY HATCH

2

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



EQUIP ANCHOR ROD QUANTITY, SIZE AND LAYOUT AS

REQ'D BY EQUIP MANUFACTURER.

#4 @ 6" O.C.

ALL SIDES

4"

UN

LE

SS

OT

HE

RW

ISE

NO

TE

D O

N

PLA

N

ROUGHENED SURFACE COATED

WITH EPOXY BONDING AGENT6" MIN, TYP EDGE DISTANCE

8"

AN

CH

OR

RO

D

EM

BE

DM

EN

T S

HA

LL B

E

WIT

HIN

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL

SLA

B B

ELO

W E

QU

IPM

EN

T

PA

D

PROVIDE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE

ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE. IF ANCHORS ARE

EPOXIED BEFORE PAD IS CONSTRUCTED

NEW CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD

EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB

12"#4 @ 6" O.C. EW

REPAIR EXISTING EPOXY FLOOR

COATING AROUND NEW PAD PER

SPEC SECTION 09 90 00

NOTES:

1. LOCATE EXISTING REINFORCING AND POST TENSIONING PRIOR TO

DRILLING. ADJUST THE LOCATION OF THE ANCHOR TO MISS ALL EXISTING

REINFORCING AND POST TENSIONING. SEE NOTES ON DRAWING S-201

FOR ADDITIONAL RESTRICTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS REGARDING

DRILLING ANCHORS IN THE SLUDGE STORAGE TANK WALLS.

2. NUT, WASHER AND METAL SLEEVE MATERIAL TO MATCH BOLT MATERIAL.

3. ALL ANCHOR BOLTS, DRILLED-IN CONCRETE ANCHORS, THREADED-ROD

ANCHORS SHALL BE TYPE 316 SST PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 05 05 23

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

4. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 05 05 23 FOR THE ACCEPTABLE USE FOR

EPOXIED THREADED-ROD ANCHORS AND DRILLED-IN CONCRETE

ANCHORS.

5. THESE TYPICAL DRILLED IN CONCRETE ANCHOR DETAILS ARE FOR

ANCHORING ALL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PIPING, CONDUITS AND/OR

EQUIPMENT.

6. FOR ANCHORS ON THE EXTERIOR OF THE TANK, DO NOT DRILL MORE THAN

4" DEEP INTO THE STORAGE TANK WALL. FOR ANCHORS ON THE INSIDE

OF THE TANK DO NOT DRILL MORE THAN 6" DEEP INTO THE STORAGE TANK

WALL.

7. DO NOT DRILL IN THE AREAS MARKED AS "NOT PERMITTED" ON DRAWING

S-201 WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.

8. FOR ANCHORS ON THE INSIDE FACE OF THE TANK, USE AN ANCHOR DETAIL

FOR "ANCHOR PENETRATING TANK HDPE LINER. BED THE ATTACHED ITEM

IN SILICONE SEALANT.

THREADED ROD ANCHOR, SIZE

AS SHOWN OR AS REQ'D BY

EQUIP MANUFACTURER.

PR

OJE

CT

ION

AS

RE

Q'D

BY

EQ

UIP

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

4"

MA

X A

T E

XT

WA

LL O

F T

AN

K.

EPOXY ADHESIVE

DRILLED-IN CONCRETE

ANCHOR, SIZE AS SHOWN

OR AS REQ'D BY EQUIP

MANUFACTURER.

PR

OJE

CT

ION

AS

RE

Q'D

BY

EQ

UIP

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

THREADED ROD ANCHOR DRILLED-IN CONCRETE ANCHOR

THREADED ROD ANCHOR, SIZE

AS SHOWN OR AS REQ'D BY

EQUIP MANUFACTURER.

PR

OJE

CT

ION

AS

RE

Q'D

BY

EQ

UIP

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

AS

RE

Q'D

BY

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

,

6"

MA

XIM

UM

EPOXY ADHESIVE

DRILLED-IN CONCRETE

ANCHOR, SIZE AS SHOWN

OR AS REQ'D BY EQUIP

MANUFACTURER.

PR

OJE

CT

ION

AS

RE

Q'D

BY

EQ

UIP

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

AS

RE

Q'D

BY

EQ

UIP

MA

NU

FA

CT

UR

ER

,

6"

MA

XIM

UM

THREADED ROD ANCHOR

PENETRATING TANK HDPE LINER

DRILLED-IN CONCRETE ANCHOR

PENETRATING TANK HDPE LINER

BED ATTACHED ITEM IN

SILICONE SEALANT BED ATTACHED ITEM IN

SILICONE SEALANT

4"

MA

X A

T E

XT

WA

LL O

F T

AN

K.

EXISTING

HDPE LINER

EXISTING

HDPE LINER

SST EXPANSION ANCHORS AS REQ'D

BY NOZZLE MANUFACTURER.

#4 @ 6" O.C.

ALL SIDES

4"

6" MIN, TYP

EDGE

DISTANCE

8"

NEW NOZZLE SUPPORT PAD

EXISTING STORAGE TANK SLAB

12"

#4 @ 6" O.C. EW

CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD NOTES:

1. CONCRETE PAD SIZE SHALL BE MINIMUM INDICATED OR AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS OR AS

REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND APPROVED BY THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.

2. THE SIZE, NUMBER, TYPE, LOCATION, AND THREAD PROJECTION OF THE ANCHOR RODS

SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER AND AS APPROVED BY THE

PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE. ANCHOR RODS SHALL BE SLEEVED IF PLACED BEFORE

CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD PLACEMENT.

3. ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES SHALL PROVIDE MINIMUM ANCHOR BOLT MOVEMENT OF 1/2" IN

ALL HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS.

4. ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM INTERNAL DIAMETER 1" GREATER THAN

BOLT DIAMETER AND A MAXIMUM INTERNAL DIAMETER 3" GREATER THAN ANCHOR BOLT

DIAMETER. SLEEVES SHALL BE FILLED WITH CEMENTITIOUS NON-SHRINK GROUT AFTER

BOLTS ARE ALIGNED.

5. EQUIPMENT BASES SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL. WEDGES, SHIMS, OR LEVELING NUTS

SHALL BE USED TO SUPPORT THE BASE WHILE GROUT IS PLACED. WEDGES AND SHIMS

SHALL BE REMOVED AFTER GROUT HAS SET. PACK RESULTING VOIDS WITH

CEMENTITIOUS NONSHRINK GROUT.

6. SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR THE LOCATION AND SIZE FOR ALL

EQUIPMENT PADS. CONFIRM PAD REQUIREMENTS WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER

PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTING PADS.

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-4

00

01

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-40

00

1

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-06

:05

:49

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g;

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

SCALE: NTS

DETAILVAR

CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD

A

SCALE: NTS

DETAILVAR

DRILLED IN CONCRETE ANCHOR DETAILS

C

DIGESTION

CONCRETE PADS AND ANCHORS

TYPICAL DETAILS

BW7109

S-401

NONE

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

SCALE: NTS

DETAILVAR

NOZZLE SUPPORT PAD

B

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



CUT FLUSH

FILL ALL OVERCUT AT

CORNERS WITH MORTAR

CH

IP A

ND

RE

MO

VE

3/4

" M

IN

PREPARE AND PRIME SUBSTRATE

PER GROUT MANUFACTURER'S

RECOMMENDATIONS

POLYMER MODIFIED,

CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR. FINISH

TO MATCH SURROUNDING SLAB

SLOPE, SURFACE AND TEXTURE.

TOC

REPAIR EXISTING EPOXY FLOOR

COATING ON AND AROUND

EQUIPMENT PAD REPAIR PER

SPEC SECTION 09 90 00

ROUGHENED JOINT

W/ BONDING AGENT

VA

RIE

S

SAWCUT 3/4" DEEP

AROUND (4) SIDES

CUT FLUSH

CH

IP A

ND

RE

MO

VE

3/4

" M

IN

REMOVE EXISTING

EQUIPMENT PAD

TOC

3/8" THICK SST RING

PLATE 2" DIA LARGER

THAN CORE DRILLED

HOLE

PIPE DIA PER

MECHANICAL

SST PIPE SLEEVE. SCHEDULE 40

WITH MIN ID = OD PIPE + 1" (+/-)

AND MAX ID = OD PIPE + 2" (+/-).

SEE MECH OR ELECT DWGS FOR

SIZE AND LOCATION

FILL ANNULAR SPACE

AROUND PIPE SLEEVE

WITH EPOXY NON SHRINK

GROUT OR CONTENTIOUS

NON SHRINK GROUT

CORE HOLE 2" LARGER THAN

NOMINAL PIPE SLEEVE DIAMETER

TOP OF ROOFING. SEE

ARCHITECTURAL DWGS FOR

ROOFING AND INSULATION

REPAIRS AND FLASHING.

3/16

4"

MSS SP-58 FIGURE 212 PIPE

CLAMP, SST

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-4

00

02

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-40

00

2

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-06

:06

:56

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g;

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

SCALE: NTS

DETAIL---

TYPICAL EQUIPMENT PAD REMOVAL

A

SCALE: NTS

DETAIL---

TYPICAL EQUIPMENT PAD REPAIR

BSCALE: NTS

DETAILM-205

TYPICAL NEW ROOF SLAB PENETRATION

C

DIGESTION

CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD AND SLAB

MODIFICATIONS & RESTORATION DETAILS

BW7109

S-402

NONE

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



BANDING

BAR

REUSE EXIST. GRATING

SUPPORTS

NEW GALVANIZED GRATING

BEARING BAR

ATTACH GRATING TO

EMBEDDED ANGLE TO

MATCH EXIST.

NEW GRATING

BEARING BARS TO

MATCH EXIST.

BEARING

MATCH EXISTING

DIMENSION,

1/4" PL TOE STOP

ALL AROUND OPENINGS,

WELD TO GRATING

GRATING

PENETRATION, 12"

DIA MAX

WELD ALL BEARING

BARS AND CROSSING

BARS TO PLATE

4"

NEW GALVANIZED

GRATING

8'-1"

+/-

NE

W

GR

AT

ING

EXIST. GRATING

TO REMAIN

2'-4 1

/2"

+/-

NE

W

GR

AT

ING

AS

RE

Q'D

FO

R P

IPE

PE

NE

TR

AT

ION

AS

RE

Q'D

FO

R P

IPE

PE

NE

TR

AT

ION

AS

RE

Q'D

FO

R P

IPE

PE

NE

TR

AT

ION

2'-6" TRENCH WIDTH,

FIELD VERIFY

MA

TC

H

EX

IST

ING

MATCH EXIST.

AS REQ'D FOR

NEW PIPING

2'-9 1/2" +/- NEW

GRATIN

G

AS REQ'D FOR

NEW VALVE

AS REQ'D FOR NEW

VALVE

2'-6

" T

RE

NC

H W

IDT

H,

FIE

LD

VE

RIF

Y

3'-0" +/- NEW GRATING

AS REQ'D FOR PIPE

PENETRATIONEXIST. GRATING TO REMAIN

AS REQ'D FOR

NEW PIPING

GENERAL NOTES:

1. GRATING SPAN SEE PLAN.

2. INDIVIDUAL GRATING SECTIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED

3'-0" IN WIDTH, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE.

GRATING SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM WIDTH OF 1'-3"

UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE.

3. SHOP DRAWINGS BASED ON FIELD DIMENSIONS

SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE PROJECT

REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO FABRICATION.

4. ALL NEW GRATING SHALL MATCH EXISTING

GRATING SIZE, SPACING, STYLE, MATERIAL AND

FINISH.

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-20

15

R0

-Dsiz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1"

0

\\b

cse

afp

01

\pro

jects

\Kin

g C

ou

nty

\15

12

23

KC

BW

Slu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-SH

EE

TS

\S-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

-S-4

00

03

.dw

g | L

ayo

ut:

BW

71

0-S

-40

00

3

PL

OT

TE

D:

Ap

r 2

3,

20

20

-06

:08

:14

pm

B

y jjm

ille

r

XR

EF

S:

11

51

22

3-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g;

RO

BE

RT

S S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TA

MP

.dw

g

IMA

GE

S:


E F G HB C DA



APRIL 2020


19-1151223

SLUDGE STORAGE TANK

GRATING MODIFICATION

DETAILS

BW7109

S-403

NONE

R. Roberts

R. Roberts

T. Thramer

S. Harper

0

SCALE: NTS

DETAILS-403

GRATING SUPPORT

A

SCALE: NTS

DETAILS-403

PIPE PENETRATION THRU GRATING

B

SCALE: NTS

DETAILVAR

GRATING MODIFICATION FOR NEW PENETRATION

D

SCALE: NTS

DETAILVAR

GRATING MODIFICATION FOR NEW PENETRATION

C

BS-403

BS-403

AS-403

AS-403

(TYP)

(TYP)

PERMIT REVIEW SET

04/30/2020



1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:

DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES & PARKSWASTEWATER TREATMENT DIVISION

DATE:

SHT NO / TOTALREVNO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-2015R

0-D

siz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1

"0

\\bcseafp

01\p

roje

cts

\Kin

g C

ounty

\151223 K

C B

W S

ludge T

ank F

oam

\_C

AD

\2-S

HE

ET

S\M

-ME

CH

AN

ICA

L\B

W7109-M

-231.d

wg | L

ayout: L

ayout1

PLO

TT

ED

: A

pr

23, 2020-0

5:2

8:3

9pm

B

y jjm

iller

XR

EF

S: 1151223-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

g; W

A-S

TA

LLM

AN

-DO

NN

IE-S

.dw

gIM

AG

ES

: P

HO

TO

1 M

-231.J

PG

;


E F G HB C DA

BRIGHTWATER TREATMENT PLANTSTORAGE TANK FOAM SPRAY SYSTEM

APRIL 2020


19-1151223

PERMIT REVIEW SET

DIGESTION

DRAIN PIPE UPGRADE

BW7109

M-231

NONE

S. Plancic

D. Stallman

T. Thramer

S. Krugel

# 0

SCALE: NONE

PHOTOM-126, 201

DSST ROOF DRAIN PIPE ADDITION

1

NEW SCUPPER OPENING 12"x14"

REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

ROUTE NEW

PIPE TO

CLEANING WELL

8" RWP

COORDINATE ROOF DRAIN PIPE SUPPORT

LOCATIONS WITH PRESTRESSED TENDONS IN

TANK WALL. SEE ELEVATION 1/S-201.

SEE SECTION 07 62 00 FOR STAINLESS STEEL

SCUPPER AND DOWNSPOUT.

1

KEY NOTES:

1

2

2

55260

04/30/2020



1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:

DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES & PARKSWASTEWATER TREATMENT DIVISION

DATE:

SHT NO / TOTALREVNO:

BO

RD

ER

FIL

E E

DIT

ION

: K

CW

TD

-2015R

0-D

siz

e-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E1

"0

\\bcseafp

01\p

roje

cts

\Kin

g C

ounty

\151223 K

C B

W S

ludge T

ank F

oam

\_C

AD

\2-S

HE

ET

S\A

-AR

CH

ITE

CT

UR

AL\B

W7103-A

-126.d

wg | L

ayout: L

ayout1

PLO

TT

ED

: A

pr

23, 2020-0

5:0

8:4

0pm

B

y jjm

iller

XR

EF

S: 1151223-T

B-B

ord

er.

dw

gIM

AG

ES

: W

A-S

UB

-KR

ES

SB

AC

H-J

IM_S

IGN

ED

.jpg;


E F G HB C DA

BRIGHTWATER TREATMENT PLANTSTORAGE TANK FOAM SPRAY SYSTEM

APRIL 2020


19-1151223

PERMIT REVIEW SET

DIGESTION

UPPER ROOF PLAN

AREA B (PARTIAL)

BW7103

A-126

1/8"=1'-0"

S. Plancic

J. Kressbach

T. Thramer

S. Harper

# 0

EXISTING PARAPET

DIGESTED

SLUDGE

STORAGE TANK

DN

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

TANK ROOF PLAN

GENERAL NOTES:

1. DEMOLISH PORTION OF EXISTING CRICKET AND

RECONFIGURE DRAINAGE TO NEW SCUPPER.

2. CUT OUT EXISTING MEMBRANE AS REQUIRED.

3. PROVIDE A NEW CURB TO DIRECT DRAINAGE TO NEW

SCUPPER.

4. INSTALL NEW MEMBRANE OVER ALL AFFECTED

AREAS.

RETAINING WALL

AT GRADE

NEW 12"W x 14"H

SCUPPER OPENING,

SEE STRUCTURAL

NEW 14"W x 10"H x 10"D

COLLECTION BOX WITH 6"

DIA DS, SEE MECHANICAL

DRAWINGS FOR DS ROUTING

SEE DET C/A-301

EXISTING TANK LID

SLOPES 1/2"/FT WITH

2" RIGID INSULATION

AND IPO MEMBRANE

CUT OUT CRICKET

AND RECONFIGURE

SLOPE TO NEW

SCUPPER

6" HIGH CURB WITH CANTS

FROM FOAM INSULATION

SEE DET B/A-301

EXISTING SCUPPER AND DS

EXISTING

SCUPPER AND DS

NEW HATCH

RIDGE OF

EXISTING CRICKET

RIDGE OF

EXISTING CRICKET

KEY PLAN

A B

D

FE

C

APPROXIMATE

BOUNDARY OF

ROOFING WORK



4'-6

"

CONC PARAPET - SEE

STRUCT

1

2

3

4

5

DESIGNED/DRAWN:

PROJECT ENGINEER:

PROJECT ACCEPTANCE:

DESIGN APPROVAL:

CONTRACT NO:

DRAWING NO:SCALE:

PROJECT FILE NO:



DATE:

SHT NO / TOTAL REV

NO:

BO

RD

ER

F

IL

E E

DIT

IO

N: K

CW

TD

-2

01

5R

0-D

size

-T

B-B

ord

er

1

2

3

4

5

E F G HB C DA

CHECKED:

RE

FE

RE

NC

E

1"

0

P:\K

in

g C

ou

nty\1

51

22

3 K

C B

W S

lu

dg

e T

an

k F

oa

m\_

CA

D\2

-S

HE

ET

S\A

-A

RC

HIT

EC

TU

RA

L\B

W7

10

9-A

-3

01

.d

wg

| L

ayo

ut: L

ayo

ut1

PL

OT

TE

D: A

pr 2

8, 2

02

0-1

0:4

6:5

4a

m B

y S

Pla

ncic

XR

EF

S: 1

15

12

23

-T

B-B

ord

er.d

wg

IM

AG

ES

: W

A-S

UB

-K

RE

SS

BA

CH

-JIM

_S

IG

NE

D.jp

g;


E F G HB C DA

PRELIMINARY ISSUE DRAWING

INFORMATION ONLY

90% REVIEW



APRIL 2020

#

M. Redmon C0XXXXCXX

19-1151223

PERMIT REVIEW SET

DIGESTION

ROOF AND PARAPET DETAILS

BW7109

A-301

AS NOTED

S. Plancic

J. Kressbach

T. Thramer

S. Harper

# 0

SCALE: NONE

DETAIL

-

PIPE PENETRATION

A

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

NEW CURB DETAIL

A212

B

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"

SCUPPER EXTERIOR ELEVATION

*

C

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"

SCUPPER SECTION

-

1

GENERAL NOTES:

1. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR NEW SCUPPER LOCATION.

2. SEE MECHANICAL FOR PIPE PENETRATION

LOCATIONS.

3. FABRICATE SCUPPER LINER, COLLECTION BOX, AND

DOWNSPOUT PER SMACNA MANUAL RECOMMENDED

DETAILS.

CUT OUT MEMBRANE

AND INSULATION AS

NECESSARY

REPLACE IN KIND

SS PIPE SLEEVE

SEE STRUCTURAL

MEMBRANE FLASHING

SS PIPE CLAMP

SEALANT

SS CLAMP

MEMBRANE BOOT

6"

OVERLAP

6" MIN

OVERLAP

EXISTING TANK LID

3"

12"

2"2"

10"

16"

14"

10"

10"

14"

6"

EXISTING MEMBRANE

NEW 6"H x 12"W CURB FROM FOAM INSULATION

ROOF MEMBRANE

EXISTING

MEMBRANE

-

1

OPEN

EXISTING INSULATION

EXISTING COUNTER FLASHING

EXTEND MEMBRANE

BEHIND COUNTER

FLASHING

TERMINATION

BAR

SS SCUPPER

LINER

STAINLESS STEEL

SCUPPER BOX

6" DIA STAINLESS

STEEL DS

EXISTING FLASHING AND

COUNTERFLASHING

ROOF MEMBRANE

FLASHING STRIP

APPLY MEMBRANE

TO PARAPET

NEW MEMBRANE

NEW OPENING IN

PARAPET

WRAPAROUND MEMBRANE

OVER SCUPPER LINER

SS SCUPPER LINER

WOOD BLOCKING

TERMINATION BAR

AND SEALANT

SLOPE

2"NEW

INSULATION

EXISTING

INSULATION

SS ROOF

EDGING

WRAP MEMBRANE OVER END OF WOOD

4"

EXISTING PARAPET



May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 42 19 - 1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01 42 19

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies reference standards abbreviation and other acronyms to assist the Contractor.


A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trades, or federal standards, comply withrequirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are required by applicable codes orspecified herein, in which case the more stringent requirements shall prevail.

B. Comply with referenced standards that are current at the date of receipt of bids.

C. The contractual relationship of the Contracted parties shall not be altered by mention or inferenceotherwise in any reference document.


Reference Title

AA Aluminum Association (www.aluminum.org)

AAC Aluminum Anodizers Council (www.anodizing.org)

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (www.aabchq.com)

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (www.aamanet.org)

AAN American Association of Nurserymen

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (www.transportation.org/aashto/home.nsf/FrontPage)

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (www.aatcc.org)

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (www.abma-dc.org)

ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association (www.abma.com)

ACCA Air Conditioning Contractors of America (www.acca.org)

ACI American Concrete Institute (www.aci-int.org)

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (www.concrete-pipe.org)

ACPPA Asbestos Cement Pipe Producers Association (www.asbestos-institute.ca/pvc.html)

ADC Air Diffusion Council (www.flexibleduct.org)

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (www.aeic.org)

AGA American Gas Association (www.aga.org)

AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association (www.agma.org)

AI Asphalt Institute (www.asphaltinstitute.org)

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (www.aisc.org)

AIST Association for Iron and Steel Technology (www.aist.org)

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (www.steel.org)

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (www.aitc-glulam.org)

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association (www.amca.org)

ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association (www.anla.org)

ANSI American National Standards Institute (www.ansi.org)

APA The Engineered Wood Association (www.apawood.org)

http://www.aisc.org/

http://www.ansi.org/


Reference Title

API American Petroleum Institute (api-ec.api.org)

APWA American Public Works Association (www.apwa.net)

AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-way Association (www.arema.org)

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigerating Institute (www.ari.org)

ASA Acoustical Society of America (asa.aip.org)

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (www.asce.org)

ASE American Standard Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (www.ashrae.org)

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers (www.asme.org)

ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing (www.asnt.org)

ASQ American Society for Quality (www.asq.org)

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (www.asse-plumbing.org)

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (www.astm.org)

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (www.awinet.org)

AWPA American Wood Preservers Association (www.awpa.com)

AWS American Welding Society (www.aws.org)

AWWA American Water Works Association (www.awwa.org)

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (www.buildershardware.com)

BIA Brick Industry Association (www.brickinfo.org)

BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International (www.iccsafe.org)

CABO Council of American Building Officials (www.iccsafe.org)

CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association (www.cemanet.org)

CGA Compressed Gas Association (www.cganet.com)

CI Chlorine Institute (www.chlorineinstitute.com)

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (www.cispi.org)

CLMFI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (www.associationsites.com/clfma)

CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America (www.mhia.org/cmaa)

COE Corps of Engineers (www.usace.army.mil)

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (www.cpsc.gov)

CRA California Redwood Association (www.calredwood.org)

CRD-C Corps of Engineers Standard Specification (www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook/handbook.htm)

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (www.crsi.org)

CEMA Conveyor Manufacturers Association (www.cemanet.org)

CRI TM Carpet and Rug Institute (www.carpet-rug.org)

CSA Canadian Standards Association (www.csa.ca)

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (www.cti.org)

CWHSSA Contract Work Hours & Safety Standards Act

DASMA Door and Access System Manufacturers Association (www.dasma.com)

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (www.dhi.org)

DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (www.dipra.org)

DOE Department of Ecology (www.ecy.wa.gov)

EEI Edison Electric Institute (www.eei.org)

EIA Electronic Industries Association (www.eia.org)

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (www.eifsfacts.com)

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (ww3.ejma.org)

EPA United States Environmental Protection Agency (www.epa.org)

http://www.astm.org/


Reference Title

FS Federal Specifications (apps.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fedspecs/index.cfm)

FED-STD Federal Standards (apps.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fedspecs/index.cfm)

FHWA Federal Highway Administration (www.fhwa.dot.gov)

FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (www.fmglobal.com)

FSUP Forestry Suppliers (www.forestry-suppliers.com)

FCCCHR Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research (www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr/)

GA Gypsum Association (www.gypsum.org)

GANA Glass Association of North America (www.glasswebsite.com)

GSI Geosynthetic Institute (www.geosynthetic-institute.org)

HEI Heat Exchange Institute (www.heatexchange.org)

HI Hydraulic Institute (www.pumps.org)

HMI Hoist Manufacturer's Institute (www.mhia.org)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (www.hpva.org)

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (www.iapmo.org)

ICC International Code Council (www.iccsafe.org)

ICAC Institute of Clean Air Companies (www.icac.com)

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association (www.icea.net)

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (www.iec.ch)

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (www.ieee.org)

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (www.iesna.org)

IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute (www.industrial-fasteners.org)

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (www.igmaonline.org)

IMC International Mechanical Code (Published by IAPMO)

IMSA International Municipal Signal Association (www.imsasafety.org)

IPC Institute for Interconnecting and Packaging Electronic Circuits (www.ipc.org)

ISA International Society of Automation (www.isa.org)

ISO International Organization for Standardization (www.iso.ch)

ISS Iron and Steel Society (www.issource.org)

ISSA International Slurry Surfacing Association (www.slurry.org)

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (www.mbma.com)

MHI Material Handling Industry (www.mhia.org)

MS Military Standards (MIL-SPEC) (www.dodssp.daps.mil)

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (www.mss-hq.com)

MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration (www.msha.gov)

MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov)

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer (www.naamm.org)

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (www.naima.org)

NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers (www.nace.org)

NBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (www.nationalboard.org)

NBS National Bureau of Standards (now National Institute of Standards and

Technology)

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (www.ncma.org)

NDA National Drilling Association (http://www.nda4u.com)

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (www.nebb.org)

NEC National Electric Code (www.nfpa.org/codes/)

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (www.nema.org)

NESC National Electric Safety Code (http://standards.ieee.org/faqs/NESCFAQ.html)


Reference Title

NESHAP National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (http://www.epa.gov/region4/air/asbestos/)

NFLPA National Fluid Power Association (www.nfpa.com)

NFPA National Forest Products Association (www.forestprod.org)

NFPA National Fire Protection Association (www.nfpa.org)

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (www.natlhardwood.org)

NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html)

NICET National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies (www.nicet.org)

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (www.nist.gov)

NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association (www.paint.org)

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (www.nrca.net)

NRMCA National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association (www.nrmca.org)

NTIS National Technical Information Services (www.ntis.gov)

NWWDA Window and Door Manufacturers Association (www.wdma.cpm)

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act (www.osha.gov)

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (www.pci.org)

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute (www.pdionline.org)

PFI Pipe Fabrication Institute (www.pfi-institute.org)

PPFA Plastic Pipe and Fittings Association (www.ppfahome.org)

PPI Plastics Pipe Institute (www.plasticpipe.org)

PPIC Plumbing and Piping Industry Council

PSCAA Puget Sound Clean Air Agency (www.pscleanair.org)

RCW Revised Code of Washington (www.leg.wa.gov/rcw)

RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association (www.rma.org)

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers (www.sae.org)

SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association Group of Associations (www.associationsites.com/clfma)

SDI Steel Deck Institute (www.sdi.org)

SDOI Steel Door Institute (www.steeldoor.org)

SJI Steel Joist Institute (www.steeljoist.org)

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (www.smacentral.org)

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (www.smacna.org)

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute (www.spri.org)

SSPC Society for Protective Coatings (www.sspc.org)

STI Steel Tank Institute (www.steeltank.com)

SWI Steel Window Institute (www.steelwindows.com)

TCA Tile Council of America (www.tileusa.com)

TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association (www.tema.org)

TPI Truss Plate Institute (www.tpinst.org)

UBPPA Uni-bell PVC Pipe Association (www.uni-bell.org)

UL Underwriters Laboratories (www.ul.com)

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code (Published by IAPMO)

USBR Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. Department of Interior (www.usbr.gov)

WAC Washington Administrative Code (www.leg.wa.gov/wac)

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (www.wclib.org)

WDOE Washington Department of Ecology (www.ecy.wa.gov/ecyhome.html)

WEF Water Environment Federation (www.wef.org)


Reference Title

WISHA Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (www.lni.wa.gov/WISHA/Rules/RCW49-17/)

WQA Water Quality Association (www.wqa.org)

WSDOT-APWA Washington State Dept. of Transportation and American Public Works Association, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (www.wwpa.org)

WWPI Western Wood Preservers Institute (www.wwpinstitute.org)

WAQTC Western Alliance for Quality Transportation Construction (www.waqtc.org)



END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 52 00 - 1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

SECTION 01 52 00

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the following Contractor temporary construction facilities and construction requirements: 1. Utilities: power, heating, ventilation, telephone, water, sanitary facilities and lighting. 2. Work site access control: concrete barriers, fencing, and security. 3. Miscellaneous items: parking, staging, cleaning, project signage, and Contractor office. 4. Roads: haul roads, haul routes, and access roads.

B. Unless otherwise noted, be responsible for all costs for utility usage and permitting associated with the requirements of this Section.

C. Unless otherwise noted, the County will not furnish any materials, facilities, utilities, or services.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Access and Haul Plan: 1. Transportation routes. 2. Haul locations. 3. Haul summary reports: weekly.

C. A plan to meet each of the requirements of this Section.

D. Cut sheets illustrating that the onsite Contractor’s Office is equipped with energy efficient light bulbs, all appliances including electronics are Energy Star rated and all water fixtures are WaterSense rated.

1.03 POWER

A. A power source from the plant will be identified for the Contractor’s use. Contractor to connect to the power source identified by the County.

B. Provide power requirements and coordinate with the County for power voltage and phasing requirements, transformers, and metering installation.

1.04 HEATING

A. Provide temporary heating of the buildings and enclosures as necessary to protect Work and material against damage by dampness and cold, and to facilitate completion of the Work. Supply the fuel, equipment, and materials required for temporary heating.

1.05 VENTILATION

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gasses.


1.06 TELEPHONE

A. Provide for Contractor's own use, telephone service at the Contractor’s site office.

B. In order that the Project Representative can coordinate with the Contractor on a local exchange, provide a telephone number contact where long distance does not apply for Project Representative’s calls to field personnel.

1.07 WATER

A. Provide necessary piping and connections to an existing water supply at the plant identified by the County for the Contractor’s use.

1.08 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide toilet and wash-up facilities for the work force at the site. Comply with applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to the public health and sanitation of dwellings and camps.

1.09 CONCRETE BARRIERS

A. Erect and maintain concrete barriers to limit access to excavations, hazardous areas, and to protect existing facilities from damage during construction and demolition operations and at locations shown on the Drawings.

1.10 FENCING

A. Maintain at all times during the construction period, fences which shall enclose the areas of construction and prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas. Fences shall be chain link and a minimum of 6-feet high. Gates shall be provided at access points where required and these shall be kept locked during off-work hours. A key lock shall be given to the Project Representative.

B. Provide fencing as shown on the Drawings in addition to the requirements of this Section.

C. If fencing is not shown on the Drawings, at a minimum, provide construction limit fencing on the construction limits or private property lines where easements have not been obtained prior to the Work.

D. Fencing: 1. Eight feet high chain link fence. 2. Fence posts shall be installed to allow no movement. 3. Attach a fabric screen that does not allow one to see through the fence. 4. Maintain the construction limit fencing vertical at all times. 5. Chain link fence fabric with minimum breakload of 740 lbs or approved equal.

1.11 TEMPORARY SIDEWALKS AND BOARDWALKS

A. Unless noted on the Drawings, the Contractor shall maintain sidewalks and boardwalks to provide safe pedestrian access around work sites.

1.12 CONTRACTOR'S SECURITY

A. The project site is generally secured by existing fencing and security gate. The County is not responsible for security of the Contractor’s tools and materials on site. Provide security and facilities to protect the Work, all temporary and existing facilities from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.


1.13 HAUL ROADS AND LOCATIONS

A. Provide as necessary for the Work.

B. Submit all haul locations for all types and classification of material to be removed from the Work site. If haul locations are to be added or location of material haul location is changed, submit new haul location and types and classification of material.

C. Submit weekly in the haul summary report the type, amount, and location of disposal of material removed from the site.

D. Repair any damage to roadway surfaces from the direct or indirect result of the Contractor's operation to the requirements of the responsible agency.

E. Obtain all necessary street use permits in connection with Contractor's operations. 1. When hauling is done over highways or city streets, the loads shall be trimmed and the vehicle

shelf areas shall be cleaned after each loading. The loads shall be watered after trimming to minimize dust.

2. Maintain traffic patterns in the existing structural filled areas which preserve the stability of the soil under all future structural foundations or paved areas.

F. Haul roads: 1. Construct haul roads required to transport materials on site. 2. Select haul road alignment to avoid interference with facility operations. 3. Remove haul roads after completion of embankment construction.

1.14 RESTORATION OF ROADS

A. Clean and repair roads used by the Contractor as required during and completion of the Work.

B. Unless otherwise noted, resurface paved roadways, and bring to original grade and section roads which are not paved, where the surface is removed, broken, damaged, caved, or settled during the Work.

1.15 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

A. Conduct the Work to interfere minimally with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian.

1.16 PARKING AND STAGING AREA

A. Be responsible for obtaining and maintaining parking and staging areas unless otherwise specified.

1.17 CLEANING

A. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

B. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

C. Clean the exposed surfaces of piping, ductwork, or equipment which has become soiled with dirt, mortar, or other materials before covering with insulation, painting, or enclosing in the building structure.


1.18 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE

A. Maintain a suitable office near the site of the Work to be the headquarters of the representative authorized to receive drawings, instructions, or other communication or articles.

B. Communications given by the Project Representative or delivered at the site office in the Contractor's absence shall be deemed to have been delivered to the Contractor.

C. Copies of the Drawings, Specifications, permits, APP and HASP per Section 01 35 29, regulatory required items, and other Contract Documents shall be kept at the site office and available for use at all times.

D. If the Contractor’s Office is located on the jobsite the office shall be equipped with energy efficient lighting, Energy Star rated appliances and electronics, and WaterSense rated water fixtures.

E. Use double sided copying as standard practice in the Contractor’s office.

1.19 TRANSPORTATION ROUTE

A. Select transportation route for hauling materials and equipment without creating traffic congestion.

1.20 ROAD CLOSURES

A. Temporary detours and road closures due to Work of others shall be anticipated by the Contractor. Contractor is responsible to plan and coordinate all its operations to Work with possible temporary detours and road closures.

B. Be responsible for all additional costs resulting from temporary road closures.

1.21 PRIVATE ACCESS (GENERAL) [NOT USED]

1.22 CONSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Commercial or advertising signs shall not be allowed on the site.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Ensure all subcontractors, suppliers and individuals associated with Contract activities use approved routes.

B. Provide required signage and Contractor oversight for approved route to ensure compliance with traffic routing requirements. If Contractor fails to abide by the approved haul routes, Project Representative will assign City off-duty police officers for enforcement of haul route restrictions at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Inspect haul routes daily to assure compliance with Section 01 35 43.


3.02 IMPROVEMENT, MAINTENANCE AND RESTORATION OF HAUL ROUTES

A. Be responsible for any improvements, maintenance and restoration of haul routes related to construction use.

B. Share haul routes with business traffic and maintain in good condition. Haul routes shall remain smooth, level and suitable for owner or the public to drive passenger cars on without damage to vehicles. If pavement damage is minor due to Contractor's Work, plane existing asphalt and resurface. If pavement damage is major due to Contractor's Work, remove existing asphalt and replace with a minimum of 4 inches of asphalt.

C. Restore haul routes to their initial condition after they are no longer needed for construction purposes.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 67 00 - 1 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE

SECTION 01 67 00

SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for shipment, protection, and storage of all equipment, products, and materials.

B. When the shipment, protection, and storage recommendations and requirements vary between the manufacturer or supplier and the individual specifications, the more stringent recommendations and requirements shall be followed.

C. Equipment, products and materials shall be shipped, handled, stored, and installed in ways that will prevent damage to the items. Damaged items will not be permitted as part of the Work except in cases of minor damage that have been satisfactorily repaired and are acceptable to the Project Representative.

D. All items shall be protected from the elements.


A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the embedded standard referenced herein. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

WAC 296-155 Washington Administrative Code -- Safety Standards For Construction Work

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedure: 01 33 00

B. Provide the following submittals: Unloading plan. Accelerometer data for special monitoring. Proof of lubrication and maintenance in the O&M manual. Use Form 01 67 00-A Certification of equipment condition


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE

A. Pipe and appurtenances shall be handled, stored, and installed as recommended by the manufacturer, but shall, as a minimum include the prime coat and lining as specified in Section 09 99 00 and Division 40. Pipes with paint, tape coatings, linings or the like shall be stored to protect the coating or lining from physical damage or other deterioration. Pipes shipped with interior bracing shall have the bracing removed only when recommended by the pipe manufacturer.


3.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Package and Marking: All equipment shall be protected against damage from moisture, dust, dirt, debris, handling, or other

cause during transport from manufacturer's premises to site and shall be shipped in sealed, weather-tight, enclosed packaging, covers, and containers.

Bearing housings, vents, and other types of openings shall be wrapped or otherwise sealed to prevent contamination by grit and dirt.

Each item or package shall be marked with the number unique to the specification reference covering the item and contact information (phone and name) from sender and receiver.

Stiffeners shall be used where necessary to maintain shapes and to give rigidity. Parts of equipment shall be delivered in assembled or sub-assembled units where possible.

B. Shipping: Damage shall be corrected to conform to the requirements of the Contract before the assembly is

incorporated into the work. Contractor shall bear the costs arising out of dismantling, inspection, repair and reassembly.

Each item of equipment shall be shipped to the site of the work with the manufacturer's shop applied prime coating.

Products shall be shipped in the orientation required by the manufacturer with accelerometers as required.

C. Unloading: Prior to unloading equipment over 150lbs and for critical lifts as identified by WAC 296-155-702, a

detailed unloading plan shall be submitted and reviewed by the project team. This plan shall include:

a. Weight and dimensions of the equipment. b. Description of how the equipment will arrive on-site. c. Where the equipment will be stored/placed before installation. d. Details regarding how the equipment and moving parts will be secured when it is unloaded

and/or stored. e. Details of any necessary rigging, heavy machinery or equipment used to unload/move the

equipment. This information must include the weight ratings for any rigging or heavy machinery.

D. Storage: During the interval between the delivery of equipment to the site and installation, all equipment, unless

otherwise specified, shall be stored in an enclosed space affording protection from weather, dust, and mechanical damage and providing favorable temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions to ensure against equipment deterioration. The building may be a temporary structure on the site or elsewhere, but must be accepted by the Project Representative. Maintain temperature and humidity in the building within the range required by manufacturer.

Equipment and materials to be located outdoors may be stored outdoors if protected against moisture condensation. Equipment shall be stored at least 6 inches above ground. Temporary power shall be provided to energize space heaters or other heat sources for control of moisture condensation. Space heaters or other heat sources shall be energized without disturbing the sealed enclosure.

All equipment: stored fully lubricated with oil, grease and other lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.

Moving parts: rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal galling or “welding”. Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least one half of operating load once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that it does not deteriorate from lack of use. Keep written records of maintenance and rotation which is performed prior to start up.


E. Protection of Equipment After Installation: All equipment shall be protected from damage from, including but not limited to, dust, abrasive

particles, debris and dirt generated by the placement, chipping, sandblasting, cutting, finishing and grinding of new or existing concrete, terrazzo and metal; and from the fumes, particulate matter, and splatter from welding, brazing and painting of new or existing piping and equipment. As a minimum, vacuum cleaning, blowers with filters, protective shielding, and other dust suppression methods will be required at all times to adequately protect all equipment.

All grease fittings and similar openings shall be covered. Electrical switchgear, unit substation, and motor load centers shall not be installed until after all

concrete work in those areas have been completed and accepted and the ventilation systems installed.

During the period between installation and Substantial Completion: a. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and at intervals recommended by

the manufacturer. b. New lubricants shall be put into the equipment at the time of Substantial Completion. c. Provide maintenance as required and recommended by the manufacturer and their warranty. d. Submit proof of lubrication and maintenance in the O&M manual in Section 01 78 23. Use

Form 01 67 00-A.

F. Prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected during the storage and installation period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested, and accepted in a minimum time period. The manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective and shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

3.03 SPECIAL MONITORING

A. Shipment of variable frequency drive equipment shall be on special vans with air suspension and accompanied by recording accelerometers designed to record the magnitude of sudden impacts in three directions on a continuous trip chart with both time and "g” force scales. The recorder shall be fixed to one of the shipping crates or truck bed. Upon arrival of each shipment, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Project Representative. The accelerometer shall be removed in the presence of representatives of the Project Representative and Contractor. If the magnitude of the maximum acceleration exceeds 3.0g, the equipment in the shipment shall not be unloaded from the carrier until the carrier dispatcher makes a determination as to the next step. The direction given by the carrier dispatcher shall be recorded on the driver's Bill of Lading and signed by the Contractor and driver. The manufacturer shall be notified and the equipment returned to the factory for inspection and repair or to the nearest service center at the discretion of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall certify in writing that the equipment is serviceable and shall be returned to the jobsite, again, with an accelerometer in place to record the travel conditions.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 73 00 - 1 BRACING AND ANCHORING

SECTION 01 73 00

BRACING AND ANCHORING

GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the seismic anchorage and bracing requirements for mounted and suspended equipment over 200 pounds.

B. This Section specifies engineered design requirements for seismic anchorage and bracing for installation of equipment over 400 pounds.



Reference Title

IBC International Building Code

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Building Structures

SMACNA Seismic Restraints Manual

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Request for weight of County furnished equipment. List of freestanding equipment weighing 200 pounds or more. Anchorage details for equipment and freestanding items weighing between 200 and 400 pounds. Sway bracing for elevated or suspended items such as ceiling systems, ducting, conduits, cable

trays and piping. Engineered design: No less than four weeks in advance of equipment installation, for items

weighing over 400 pounds submit required anchorage and bracing drawings and calculations bearing the stamp of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington; show the criteria used to determine seismic coefficients and forces applied to the equipment.

1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. In accordance with IBC or local code, whichever is more stringent, all equipment shall be anchored and braced to resist seismic forces prescribed in the code and ASCE 7, Chapter 13. All equipment includes equipment which is free standing, supported by stand-frames, suspended, anchored to walls, and anchored to floors or slabs.

B. Seismic anchorage and bracing for equipment shall be designed by a State of Washington Registered Engineer using the site-specific seismic criteria.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 73 00 - 2 BRACING AND ANCHORING

1.05 SITE SEISMIC CRITERIA

A. See seismic criteria on S-001.

B. Minimum criteria: Component Amplification Factor: ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1. Component Response Modification Factor: ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1. Overstrength factor: ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1. If more restrictive criteria or additional design criteria are required per ASCE or other industry

standards, the more restrictive or additional criteria shall be used.

PRODUCTS [NOT USED]

EXECUTION [NOT USED]

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 74 19 - 1 MATERIAL MANAGEMENT

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL MANAGEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The Section specifies the County’s requirements to divert Construction and Demolition (C&D) material from landfill disposal.

B. For C&D material generated from construction of the Project, the requirement is to divert a minimum of 80 percent of the total weight of the C&D material from landfill disposal.

C. Resources: King County Solid Waste Division Construction & Demolition Recycling website: http://your.kingcounty.gov/solidwaste/greenbuilding/construction-demolition.asp for general information on King County’s construction recycling program, program contact and online resources.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternative Daily Cover: Cover material other than earthen material which is placed on the surface of the active face of a municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and scavenging. ADC is considered a waste and does not count as recycling or beneficial use.

B. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Material: Includes all non-hazardous solid materials resulting from construction, renovation, alterations, repair, and demolition activities. Includes packaging, construction office materials, and materials that are recycled, reused, salvaged, or disposed of as nonrecyclable C&D waste.

C. C&D Material Management Plan: Project specific plan for the collection/handling, disposition, transportation and tracking of C&D material.

D. C&D Material Diversion Report: Report documenting execution and status of C&D material included in the C&D Material Management Plan.

E. Comingled C&D Recycling: The process of collecting mixed recyclable materials in one container on-site. The container is taken to a Designated C&D Material Recovery Facility where materials are separated for recycling. Diversion rate varies by facility and reporting period. Comingled C&D recycling containers shall not include items for which current recycling markets do not exist. Non-recyclable materials shall be placed into a separate Nonrecyclable C&D Waste container and disposed of at a Designated C&D Waste Transfer Facility as Nonrecyclable C&D Waste.

F. Dangerous Waste: Any solid waste designated as dangerous waste by the Washington state Department of Ecology under chapter 173-303 WAC, Dangerous waste regulations. This includes adhesives, aerosol cans, paint, solvents, solvent-soiled rags, asbestos, mercury-containing thermostats or switches, cleaners, thinners, treated wood.

G. Disposal: Removal of C&D Material to a Designated C&D Waste Transfer Facility.

H. Disposition: Specific diversion method or disposal of the C&D Material.

I. Diversion: Consisting of reuse, recycling and salvage of C&D Material.

http://your.kingcounty.gov/solidwaste/greenbuilding/construction-demolition.asp


J. Designated C&D Material Recovery Facility (MRF): Commingled/mixed C&D Material processing facilities that comply with King County Ordinance 18166. An updated list for King County is available at: http://your.kingcounty.gov/solidwaste/greenbuilding/rates.asp.

K. Designated C&D Waste Transfer Facility (WTF): Non-recyclable C&D waste processing facilities that comply with King County Ordinance 18166. An updated list for King County is available at: http://your.kingcounty.gov/solidwaste/greenbuilding/rates.asp.

L. Nonrecyclable C&D Waste: Any C&D waste that is not recyclable C&D waste. For the purpose of this Section, nonrecyclable C&D waste does not include excess material from vegetative land clearing or earthwork.

M. Recycle: To remove a C&D material from the site for repurposed use or for use in the manufacture of a new product.

N. Reuse: Making use of a C&D material without altering its form to be used on-site.

O. Salvage: Recovery of C&D materials for off-site use.

P. Universal Waste: Batteries, lights and lamps, and mercury-containing equipment as defined in WAC 173-303.



Reference Title

KCC 18.17 Green Building Program

King County Ordinance 18166 King County Construction and Demolition Recycling Ordinance

Chapter 173-303 WAC Dangerous Waste Regulations

Chapter 173-345 WAC Recyclable Materials – Transporter and Facility Requirements

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. C&D Material Management Plan: Submit and receive a submittal review disposition of “1” or “2” per Section 01 33 00 within 30 days after pre-construction meeting or prior to demolition and/or clearing activity.

C. C&D Material Diversion Report(s): Submit monthly with application for payment (or as required by the Project Representative). Submit final report prior to Final Acceptance.

1.05 PACKAGING FOR CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Include a C&D Materials reduction provision in material purchasing agreements for construction materials requesting that materials and equipment be delivered in packaging made of recyclable material, that the amount of packaging be reduced, and that packaging be taken back for reuse or recycling. Require Subcontractors to have the same waste reduction provisions in material purchasing agreements.

http://your.kingcounty.gov/solidwaste/greenbuilding/rates.asp

http://your.kingcounty.gov/solidwaste/greenbuilding/rates.asp

http://www.kingcounty.gov/council/legislation/kc_code/21_Title_18.aspx


1.06 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (PLAN)

A. General: Use the C&D Diversion Plan, Standard Form 01 74 19-A located in 01 33 10.

B. C&D Material Identification and Disposition: List each type of C&D Material and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, reused, or disposed of in a WTF. Include handling and transportation procedures.

C. Salvaged Materials: Include list of recipient’s organization, contact person, and delivery location indicated in Section 02 41 00.

D. Recycled Materials: Include list of facilities likely to be used and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. This may be the Designated Facility, specific recycler(s) of source separated materials, or combination thereof.

E. Reused Materials: Include list of reused C&D Material as indicated in Section 01 78 40, and where the material will be reused.

F. Disposed Materials: Indicate where Nonrecyclable C&D Waste will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each disposal location or WTF intended to be used.

G. Handling and Transportation Procedures: If source separation is used, include method that will be used for separating recyclable materials from waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and location where materials separation will be performed.

H. All non-recyclable C&D materials must be placed in a separate Nonrecyclable C&D Waste container, destined for a WTF in accordance with WAC 173-345-040.

1.07 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL DIVERSION REPORT (REPORT)

A. General: Use the C&D Diversion Report template 01 74 19-B as provided in Section 01 33 10 or Project Representative approved equivalent.

B. The Report shall include the following for each material: The total amount of the material, in tons or cubic yards. The receiving party. For commingled materials, include the quarterly commingled C&D diversion/recycling rate of the

receiving facility. This rate is available on-line at: http://www.seattle.gov/util/ForBusinesses/Construction/CDWasteManagement/RecyclingRequirements/CertifiedFacilities/index.htm.

Manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices, including: a. Disposal Receipts: Copy of receipts issued by a WTF for C&D waste that is disposed in that

WTF. b. Recycling Receipts: Copy of receipts issued by recycling facilities or Designated Facilities for

commingled materials. Include weight tickets from the recycling hauler or material recovery facility and verification of the recycling rate for commingled loads at the facility.

C. Note that material used as Alternative Daily Cover does not count as diversion within King County.

D. Diversions rates and tonnage: Total tons of material. Total tons of diverted material. Material diversion percentage excluding site specific materials:

a. Land clearing debris b. Rock and gravel c. Sand or soil



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL MANAGEMENT

A. General: Provide handling instructions, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement C&D Material Management Plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Designate a C&D material diversion management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of the Plan and Diversion Report(s).

C. Containers for C&D Materials to be recycled and/or diverted clearly labeled with a list of acceptable and unacceptable materials:

The list of acceptable materials must be the same as the materials recycled at the recycling processor or Designated Facility.

Container labels, including list of acceptable and unacceptable materials shall be in language(s) and/or pictures understood by all the Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ workers.

Protect and manage containers and their contents in accordance with the requirements of the MRF, WTF, or recycling processor.

Commingled materials must only be those intended for recycle. All non-recyclable C&D materials must be placed in a separate Nonrecyclable C&D Waste

container destined for a WTF.

D. Training: Train employees, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper C&D Material Management procedures. Distribute C&D Material Management Plan to all on-site employees, subcontractors and suppliers

before starting the Work. Review Plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, reuse and disposal with new employees.

E. Conduct regular visual inspections of recycle containers, and remove any Nonrecyclable C&D Waste, Dangerous Waste, or Universal Waste.

END OF SECTION

May 2020

Contract No. C01465C20

Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 74 23 - 1 FINAL CLEANING

SECTION 01 74 23

FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the final cleaning on the work performed or areas affected during performance of the work prior to completion of punch list items.

1.02 PURPOSE

A. The purpose of the cleaning is to clean up from the construction which occurred during the work of this Contract.

B. The site shall be maintained at the highest level of readiness and cleanliness. Take due care that materials purchased under this contract remain undamaged and free of dust and dirt at all times.

1.03 CLEANING REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform a wipe down with a wet towel and cleaning solvent as appropriate for the item being cleaned.

B. Clean all items affected by the work and ensure they are free of litter, trash, dust, dirt, stains, damage, or defects.

C. Wash, sweep, polish, or otherwise clean all new and existing finished wall surfaces, floors, windows, hardware, mirrors, lighting fixtures, and items of equipment.

D. Replace damaged, defaced, or marred items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Use cleaning materials and processes recommended by the manufacturers of the surfaces to be cleaned.

B. Use non-toxic clean agents when possible.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TIMING

A. Upon approval of schedule by the Project Representative, clean all rooms' materials, and equipment within the rooms including, but not limited to, all fixtures, equipment, flooring, piping, conduit, handrailing and tanks.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Use experienced workers or professional cleaners.

B. Remove dirt, stains, labels and foreign materials.

C. Repair and touch-up marred areas.

May 2020


Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 74 23 - 2 FINAL CLEANING

D. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds; vacuum, polish and mop floors.

E. Remove snow and ice from access to buildings.

F. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.

G. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated without filters during construction.

H. Clean inside of electrical panels.

I. Touch up any scratches on equipment per Section 09 90 00.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 78 23 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies operating and maintenance (O&M) information and manuals.



Reference Title

WAC 296-67 Safety Standards for Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals

OSHA 29 CFR 1910.119 Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals standard

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide O&M Information from the OEM (original equipment manufacturer) at these project development phases.

Provide preliminary O&M information with the original equipment product data submittal for all assets listed on the Asset Data Form 01 78 40-A (Section 01 78 40). The preliminary submittal shall conform to Section 3.01.

Prior to beginning Component Testing per Section 01 80 00, provide Initial O&M submittal including all components in the system being tested. The Initial O&M submittal shall conform to Section 3.02.

After completion of commissioning but prior to final acceptance provide complete Final O&M manuals for all components. The Final O&M submittal shall conform to Section 3.03.

1.04 CONTENT

A. Where specified, provide O&M information for equipment and material. Provide the following items of information:

Names and addresses of the manufacturer, the nearest representative of the manufacturer, and the nearest supplier(s) of the manufacturer's equipment and parts.

Bill of materials (BOM): including complete list of parts and their respective manufacturer, model, part numbers, part name or part description, and quantity per Form 01 78 23-A.

Significant design criteria including pertinent calculations used in designing, selecting, or verifying the suitability of the installed equipment.

Performance data and curves: manufacturer's certified performance data and curves when specified in the Contract; otherwise, manufacturer's catalog performance data and curves.

Control diagrams: include diagrams for internal and connection wiring and (as applicable) the associated native control program.

Installation and startup procedures: manufacturer's recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, troubleshooting.

Operating procedures: manufacturer's recommended step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping the equipment under the normal, emergency, and stand-by modes of operation.

Copy of the specified Control Strategies with any modifications required at the time of the submittal.


Preventive maintenance procedures: manufacturer's recommended steps and schedules for maintaining the equipment.

Lubrication information: manufacturer's recommendations regarding the types of lubricants to be used and lubrication schedule to be followed.

Overhaul instructions: manufacturer's directions for the disassembly, repair, and reassembly of the equipment, parts and any safety precautions that must be observed while performing the work. a. Exploded view or plan and section views: detailed plan and section views of equipment shall

be provided when exploded views are not available. All views shall have detailed part callouts matching those callouts of the manufacturer's overhaul parts list. Exploded or cut views of equipment shall be provided, if available, as a standard item of the manufacturer's information.

Specific information: as necessary where items of information are not included in the above list but are required for operation and maintenance.

Functional Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA), if available.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BINDER MATERIALS

A. Binders for final bound O&M manuals: 3-post. Durable covers with metal piano hinges and locking slide bar assembly. Capable of extending to a maximum 5-inch thickness.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Binders: Specialty Loose Leaf Inc. Model 98086. Oxford Esselte C6193. Avery Style 98086 Approved Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY O&M INFORMATION SUBMITTAL

A. Provide OEM information adequate to ensure the equipment: is packaged and shipped correctly, is stored and maintained properly per manufacturer’s recommendations, is installed per manufacturer’s recommendations, is maintained properly prior to commissioning is fully tested and started per manufacturer’s recommendation, Is maintained properly until accepted by the County.

B. Maintain and provide all records documenting the maintenance provided by the Contractor prior to commissioning.

3.02 INITIAL O&M SUBMITTAL

A. Manufacturer's standard brochures and OEM manuals, used to describe the equipment and the O&M procedures, shall be modified to reflect only the model or series of equipment used. Extraneous material shall be crossed out neatly or otherwise annotated or eliminated.

B. Facsimile or photocopies of manufacturer's standard brochures and manuals will not be allowed.


C. Disposition of O&M information will be noted on the returned submittals. Only O&M information with a disposition of “1” or “2” shall be included in the O&M final bound sets.

D. Operational Testing shall not start on any equipment until Initial O&M information for that equipment is submitted and receives a disposition of "1" or "2".

3.03 FINAL SUBMISSIONS

A. Following the installation, testing, and commissioning of an equipment item, incorporate any and all changes to the items instructions or procedures to reflect field changes or additional field data.

B. Provide: Two complete individually bound sets of the O&M information. A complete electronic copy of the approved, bound O&M information in a bookmarked and

searchable PDF file distributed through a web link, Share Point site, or other cloud based file sharing site. Bookmarks shall be the same as the items in the Table of Contents.

Each bound set shall include a new USB drive containing the electronic copy of the O&M document. The USB drive shall be labeled with the project name and contract number and contained in a plastic sleeve in the front of the binder.

The information shall be organized in the binders in numerical order by the Specification Sections. All brochures and manuals contained therein shall be appropriately labeled with the applicable asset name and asset number as it appears in the Contract Documents, and shall also indicate the Specification Section.

Each complete bound set and electronic file shall contain a table of contents and spare parts information and shall be provided with tab sheets to permit easy location of the desired sections of the manual.

Each complete bound set and electronic file shall contain an index that includes a complete equipment list in alpha-numerical order by the asset numbers assigned in the Contract Documents with the information required in Section 01 78 40. Each asset number shall be cross-referenced to the applicable Specification Section tab located in the manuals.

Provide both paper copy and electronic copy of the as-built Control Strategies in the Operation and Maintenance manuals. Control programs and configuration files should be provided in a loadable native electronic format.

3.04 PAYMENT

A. One percent (1%) of the awarded Contract Price shall be reserved for preparation and submittal of the final O&M manual. Payment will not be considered until the final O&M manual submittal is reviewed per this Section and Section 01 33 00 requirements.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 78 39 - 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies providing as-built drawings and other record documents and information.

B. For this Contract, the terms as-built documents and record documents are considered interchangeable and synonymous.

C. As-built or Record documents refer to the sum of all drawings, documents, and information specified.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. As specified: For manually produced drawings: Full size 22x34 As-Built drawings; For CAD produced electronic files of as constructed information; Documentation specified for programmable or configurable components; Portable Document Format (PDF); Application software and configuration files in native file format; Electronic files distributed through a web link, FTP site, or cloud based file sharing site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Marked-up Contract Documents: Continuously maintain, update and correct mark-up information per 3.01.A on full sized Contract Documents to reflect the "as constructed" conditions. As-Built documents and information shall be continuously updated to show:

Work accomplished in the prior month to verify payment due. Field changes of dimensions and details made by the Contractor. Changes made by Change Order, responses to Request for Information or Field Directives. Dimensional location of all embedded, buried and concealed features as placed by contractor

including mechanical pipe, electrical conduit, and structural embedments, and items not located or shown on the Drawings but placed by Contractor shall be recorded and provided to the County as prescribed in this Section. Conduit, structural embeds and piping shall be dimensioned relative to visible features whenever possible.

2.02 SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACTOR PRODUCED DOCUMENTS

A. When technical specifications require Contractor to produce information supplemental to that in the contract drawings, produce and submit per the following CAD Construction Detail Drawings and Records requirements:

Submit Hard copy as well as electronic format copy: a. Drawings shall be AutoCAD 2019 or newer “.dwg” format files. b. Drawings on 11-inch by 17-inch paper. c. Information prepared by the Contractor for construction or installation which is supplemental to

the information and detail on the Contract Drawings and as required in the Specifications. d. Reference appropriate Contract Drawings which show the work.


B. Drawings shall be in the specified format for the following: All electrical and instrumentation drawings required to perform and document the work and/or

additional information including: a. Fabrication or Equipment Arrangement Drawings with keyed Bills of Materials and List of

nameplates and description of engravings b. Elementary Drawings c. Wiring Diagrams d. Loop Diagrams or Drawings e. Connection Diagrams f. Interconnection Diagrams g. One-line Diagrams h. Block Diagrams

Schematics of internal wiring of supplied equipment. Provide electronic drawings of all internal wiring of supplied equipment; utilize the equipment supplier’s drawings when preparing as-built drawings for connection.

Interconnection diagrams for each conductor or cable, scheduled or unscheduled, in the Contract Documents.

Prepare schematic diagrams for each control circuit. Obtain example formats of diagrams from the Project Representative. Diagrams included in the Contract Documents may be used for documenting As-built conditions. All additional information such as raceway number, cable number, wire numbers, wire colors, and

pair numbers shall be added electronically by the Contractor and submitted. Application software and configuration files documentation for all programmable or configurable

components. All mechanical drawings required to perform and document the work including:

a. Contractor- or supplier-prepared fire protection sprinkler and alarm systems and other alarm systems accurately showing the location, size, and arrangement of piping, cable appurtenances, and controls.

b. Details not shown on the Contract Documents or submitted documents but required for constructing and maintaining the facility including structural, mechanical, duct, and piping layouts.

c. Piping vendor fabrication drawings including fittings, spool pieces etc. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MARKING DEVICES

A. For mark-ups to the Contract set of Documents use waterproof felt tip pens as required to maintain as-built drawings described in this section using the following color coding:

Red: Document changes Blue: Dimensional and other notations Green: Work deleted

3.02 ELECTRONIC MEDIA DRAWINGS

A. All drawings provided in electronic format shall be provided in AutoCAD, Release 2019 or newer, "dwg" and in “PDF” format files with borders and title blocks clearly identifying the Contract and drawing number. Each file shall include the drawing number and drawing title in the filename. The equipment and the scope of the drawing shall be as required in the specifications.

B. Drawing quality and size of presentation legible at a 50 percent reduction of such drawings; reduced drawings will be used for insertion in operations and maintenance manuals.

C. Text size: 0.125 inch for 22 x 34 inch drawings, 0.063 inch for 11 x 17 inch drawings.

D. When requested by the Contractor, the Project Representative will provide electronic copies of the original Contract Drawings in AutoCAD “dwg” format or Contract Specifications as developed by the design Team in “Word” of “Excel” format.


3.03 RECORDING

A. Record information concurrently with construction progress. No work shall be concealed until the required information is recorded. Be cautioned against ordering concrete until items concealed by the placement of the concrete are recorded on the drawings and as specified in this Section. Payment for concrete, earthwork or structure element placed without recording location of the concealed items may not be made for the concrete, earthwork or structure or the concealed item until the information is documented to the satisfaction of the Project Representative.

B. Survey and surveyor shall meet all requirements of Section 02 21 00.

C. The following actual construction items shall be recorded on the Drawings: Elevation of foundation using elevation datum specified on the Contract Drawings. Reference horizontal and vertical locations of underground or concealed utilities and

appurtenances to permanent surface improvements. Minimum requirements for accuracy specified in the following table.

for each item show appropriate: a. CL = centerline b. I.E. = invert elevation c. t.o.c. = top of concrete

Description Horizontal location

Vertical location (elevation)

Notes

Pressurized piping CL +/- 1 ft CL +/- 0.1 ft Includes water and process lines (except irrigation sprinkler systems listed below)

Gravity storm drains and sewer lines

CL +/- 1 ft I.E. +/- 0.01 ft Recalculate slope if shown

Irrigation sprinkler systems including lines, valves, risers and drains

Plotted to scale or dimensioned +/-1 ft

(see Notes)

Nominal depth of cover

Dimensions required when location cannot be established on surface by valves and risers

Sewer interceptors and trunks (alignment and profile drawings)

Coordinates, stations, and

offsets +/-0.01 ft

I.E. +/- 0.01 ft Recalculate actual slopes

Conduits, cable and duct banks at beginning and end of straight runs

CL +/- 0.25 feet Nominal depth of cover to final grade or t.o.c. elevations

+/-0.5 ft

Show actual conduit arrangement cross-sections and encasement width and height for encased duct banks

The actual arrangement and routing of embedded conduit and piping relative to visible structural

items. Conduit, structural embeds and piping shall be dimensioned off of walls, columns, or other similar features.

Precise survey measurements (as defined in the table above): a. Taken on all final locations of buried or concealed items. b. Coordinates and elevations of starting and ending points and at directional changes. c. List coordinates from the survey on the As-Built drawings. d. Complete survey and recording before any burial by earthen, concrete or other materials.

3.04 DELIVERY TO PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

A. As-Built drawings will be used to verify and document progress as stated in progress payment request per Section 01 32 16. Work not included in the As-Built drawings is not documented as performed and will not be included for payment in progress payment requests.


B. Prior to request for notice for substantial completion of any area or system on the project, transmit document including Contract title, date, Contractor's name and address, index with title and number of each record document, statement indicating completion of record information for specific areas or, if for project close-out, that the documentation is completed and in compliance with Contract requirements attested by the signature of the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.

C. Commissioning will not begin until draft copies of electronic and hard copy As-built documents are received and approved by the Project Representative. Revise As-built documents as a result of any changes made or discovered during commissioning.

3.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS PAYMENT

A. Two percent (2%) of the awarded Contract Price shall be assigned for preparation and submittal of As-built documents. A maximum of one percent of the awarded Contact Price shall be progressed if the As-Built and information is up to date. The remaining one percent of the awarded Contract Price shall be retained and progressed only after all required documents are submitted to the Project Representative and are determined to be accurate and complete.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 78 40 - 1 ASSETS ATTRIBUTE COLLECTION

SECTION 01 78 40

ASSETS ATTRIBUTE COLLECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies providing asset data as specified in Part 3 for equipment, instruments, and sewer piping installed under this contract.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Completed Asset Data Form 01 78 40-A readable with Excel submitted via email, SharePoint or on external USB memory device as specified herein.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Asset Data Form 01 78 40-A: A listing of data required to be provided is included in Part 3. The Project Representative will provide an electronic version of Form 01 78 40-A to the Contractor

prepopulated with asset numbers requiring collection of attribute data. Contractor shall provide all collected attribute data in electronic format on Form 01 78 40-A with a

single 100% completed submittal no later than the beginning of Operational Testing. Coordinate with the Project Representative to add or remove assets from Form 01 78 40-A as soon

as possible to capture changes throughout the project.

B. Removed Asset Data Forms: When removing any equipment from the system with an assigned asset number, follow reporting

requirements in Form 01 78 40-A.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRONIC DATA FORM 01 78 40-A

A. Asset Data Collection with Form 01 78 40-A: Obtain the electronic form from the Project Representative. DO NOT ALTER THE FORMAT of the

original Form 01 78 40-A. Form 01 78 40-A contains 12 color coded and titled sections. The Asset Initialization Section,

columns 1-13 will be populated by King County and shall not be changed or altered by Contractor. For each asset listed, Contractor shall populate Asset Details Section, columns 14-23 and the applicable equipment section that pertains to that asset type using the following instructions: a. If the asset is a pump, blower, or compressor, Contractor shall populate ASSET DETAILS

section, Items 14-23 with all applicable attribute data and the PUMP/BLOWER/COMPRESSOR section, Items 24-36.

b. If the asset is a valve, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section, Items 14-23 and the VALVE section, Items 37-47.

c. If the asset is a motor or generator, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section, Items 14-23 and the Motor/Generator section, Items 61-74.

d. If the asset is a VFD, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section, Items 14-23 and the VFD section, Items 75-80.

e. If the asset is any electrical equipment other than a motor/generator or VFD, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section, Items 14-23 and the Electrical Equipment section, Items 81-92.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 78 40 - 2 ASSETS ATTRIBUTE COLLECTION

f. If the asset is any instrumentation or control equipment, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section, Items 14-23 and the Instrumentation/Controls section, Items 93-104.

g. For all mechanical assets not having a designated section, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section, Items 14-23 and the All Other Mechanical Equipment section Items 48-60.

h. If the asset is Sewer Infrastructure, Contractor shall populate Asset Details section Items 14-23 and the Sewer Infrastructure section, Items 124-137.

i. If the electrical or mechanical equipment/component consists of multiple assets listed in Pass 1, Item 2, the Contractor shall populate the Manufacturer’s List Price, Items 19, for each asset listed with individual component costs.

3.02 SUBMIT TO PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

A. Prior to Operational Testing, submit a fully populated Form 01 78 40-A to the Project Representative for validation. Operational Testing may proceed during the County's review of submitted data and any required resubmittals.

B. Commissioning shall not commence on any asset until Form 01 78 40-A submittal data for that asset has received a Review Action of either “1” (No Exceptions Taken) or “2” (Note Markings) as specified in Section 01 33 00.

C. Prior to Final Acceptance, update Form 01 78 40-A for any review markings and asset changes during testing or commissioning and submit the final version in electronic format. Final Acceptance for the contract shall not be granted until the final Form 01 78 40-A submittal has received a Review Action of “1” (No Exceptions Taken) as specified in Section 01 33 00.

3.03 ASSET DATA PAYMENT

A. One percent (1%) of the awarded Contract Price shall be assigned in the Schedule of Values for preparation and submittal of asset data information. Seventy-five percent (75%) of this amount shall be paid upon receipt of an acceptable initial Form 01 78 40-A per paragraph 3.02A containing the required information for the entire contract asset list; this may be prorated if the facility is commissioned in phases. The remaining twenty-five percent (25%) of this amount shall be retained and progressed on satisfactory submittal of updated documents per paragraph 3.02C before Final Acceptance.

END OF SECTION

May 2019 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Improvements 01 78 40 - 3 ASSETS ATTRIBUTE COLLECTION

New Assets

Asset Number

Equipment Description Asset Type Plant Identifier

Noun Modifier Contract Number

Specification Number

Drawing Number

Asset Location

BW-CHV710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE

E - Equipment RN VALVE CHECK BW-710

BW-ME710390B

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK OVERFLOW HATCH

E - Equipment RN HATCH NULL BW-710

BW-MTR710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP MOTOR

E - Equipment RN MOTOR

AC BW-710

BW-P710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP

E - Equipment RN PUMP CIRCULATION

BW-710

BW-PLV710396A

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP SUCTION VALVE

E - Equipment RN VALVE PLUG BW-710

BW-BV710397A

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP SUCTION DRAIN VALVE

E - Equipment RN VALVE BALL BW-710

BW-BV710397B

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP DISCHARGE DRAIN VALVE


BW-PLV710395B

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE


BW-BV710397C



BW-BV710397D



BW-BV710397E



BW-BV710397F



BW-BV710397G



BW-PLV710396B

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING VALVE 1



Asset Number

Equipment Description Asset Type Plant Identifier

Noun Modifier Contract Number


Drawing Number

Asset Location

BW-PLV710396C

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING VALVE 2


BW-VFD710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP VFD

E - Equipment RN DRIVE VARIABLE FREQUENCY

BW-710

BW-ZSO710090B

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK OVERFLOW HATCH OPEN POSITION SWITCH

E - Equipment RN SWITCH

POSITION CLOSED

BW-710

BW-TB710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP TERMINAL BOX

E - Equipment RN BOX JUNCTION BW-710

BW-TSH710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP TEMP

E - Equipment

RN SWITCH

TEMPERATURE

BW-710

BW-ICS710395

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP HAND STATION

E - Equipment RN CONTROLLER

HAND BW-710

BW-PLV710710300Z

DIG 3 INTERCONNECTION ISOLATION VALVE


BW-BV710302Z

DIG 3 INTERCONNECTION DRAIN VALVE


Removed/Retired Assets

Asset Status Asset Number Equipment Description Final Deposition of Asset

Maintenance Strategy

DEL BW-P710395 DIG STORAGE MIXING PUMP Salvage

DEL BW-MTR710395 DIG STORAGE MIXING PUMP MOTOR Salvage

DEA BW-MS710395 DIG STORAGE MIXING PUMP MTR STARTER Leave in Place

DEL BW-V710798 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/SUCTION/ISOLATION

Salvage

DEL BW-V710001 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/SUCTION/DRAIN Salvage

DEL BW-V710002 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/DISCHARGE/DRAIN

Salvage

DEL BW-V710003 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/DISCHARGE/CHECK

Salvage

DEL BW-V710004 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/DISCHARGE/ISOLATION

Salvage




DEL BW-V710016 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/CENT.FEED LOOP PUMP/DISCHARGE /ISOLATION

Salvage

DEL BW-V710017 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/CENT.FEED LOOP PUMP/DISCHARGE /ISOLATION

Salvage

DEL BW-V710799 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP/SUCTION/FLUSHING

Salvage

DEL BW-TB710395 DIG STORAGE MIXING PMP MOTOR BOX Remove

DEL BW-TSH710395 DIG STORAGE MIXING PMP MTR TEMP Remove

DEL -- DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK HATCH COVER Remove

Assets to be Reused



Reuse BW-PIT710091 DIG SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

Reuse as Digested Sludge Storage Tank Mixing Pump Discharge Pressure Transmitter

Reuse BW-TE/TIT710098 DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE TANK TEMPERATURE ELEMENT/TRANSMITTER

Reuse as Digested Sludge Storage Tank Temperature Element/Transmitter

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 ASSET TAGGING REQUIREMENTS Brightwater Storage Tank Spray System 01 78 41 - 1 AND SCHEDULE

SECTION 01 78 41

ASSET TAGGING REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies County asset tags requirements for vendor and owner furnished equipment.

B. The general requirements specified in this Section are applicable to all assets listed on form 01 78 40-A.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedure: 01 33 00.

B. Asset tag schedule including: accompanying tag information, tag material, tag dimensions, inscribing method, and text size.

C. Product data on adhesive tape used to attach laminated phenolic plastic asset tags.

D. Sample of stainless steel asset tag.

E. Sample of laminated phenolic plastic asset tag.


A. The Project Representative reserves the right to refuse any tag or nameplate that does not meet the requirements of this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT ASSET TAGS

A. Asset tags shall be provided on all equipment as specified in this section.

B. Asset tag intended use: 316 stainless steel asset tags shall be the default material used for all equipment furnished under

the project including use in corrosive environments, within chemical systems, indoor spaces, and outdoor spaces exposed to inclement weather conditions.

Where stainless steel tags cannot be used or cannot easily be affixed to the equipment, conform to the requirements for laminated phenolic plastic tags.

C. Asset tag materials and text: Equipment and valve asset tags shall conform to the following shape, material, and size

requirements. All text shall be legible, appropriately sized, and centered on the tag. Approved fonts shall be

Tahoma. All text shall be capitalized. Italic text shall not be permitted. Asset tags shall not exceed 1/16-inch thickness. Print style shall be dependent on the asset tag material. Annealed, stamping, and hand written text

on tags shall not be permitted. a. Stainless steel tags shall be inscribed using laser etching and printed on a silver background

with black text. b. Laminated phenolic plastic tags shall be engraved and printed on a black background with

white text.


SHAPE MATERIAL TAG SIZE, (W X L)

Rectangular

316 Stainless Steel*

3/4" x 2-1/2”

1” x 3”

2-1/2” x 3-1/4”

Laminated phenolic plastic

3/4" x 2”

1” x 3”

2-1/2” x 3-1/4”

2” x 6”

Circular

316 Stainless Steel

1-1/2” dia Laminated phenolic plastic

*All rectangular 316 stainless steel tags shall have 1/32-inch chamfer edges

D. All asset tags shall convey the complete equipment asset number as shown on the 01 78 40-A form, including the FIRS identifier if the asset is located within the conveyance system (e.g., WW*EBI.W10-113).

E. Supplemental asset tag information to be noted on asset tags shall be dependent on the function and intended use of the equipment. Contractor to select tag type from the table below based on the required tag information as identified on the 01 78 40-A form and the Drawings. Supplemental asset tag information shall be limited to the following:

Primary Process (influent, effluent, etc). Asset type or functional description (i.e. pump, screen, exhaust fan, etc.). Sequence Number if asset is part of a sequence (i.e. 1, 2, 3, etc.). ‘Fed From’ or ‘Power To’ information

F. Use of screws, self-tapping screws, welds, magnetic strips, Velcro, and/or rivets shall not be permitted as an asset tag fastening method.

G. Asset tag adhesive products: 3M VHB Adhesive Transfer Tape F9469PC 3M Adhesive Transfer Tape 9472LE 3M Adhesive Transfer Tape 9485PC Approved equal

H. Asset tag fastening: Rectangular and circular 316 stainless steel asset tags shall be fastened using wire of the same

material. Adhesive tapes shall not be used on stainless steel asset tags. Rectangular laminated phenolic plastic asset tags shall be fastened using an approved adhesive

tape. Circular phenolic plastic asset tags shall be attached using plastic zip ties.

I. Deviations from this section including use of abbreviations, change in font style, tag materials, engraving method, asset tag information, text size, and fastening method must receive approval from the Project Representative prior to manufacture.

J. Additional identification requirements for piping identification and markers can be found in Section 40 05 01.


ASSET TAG TYPE ASSET TAG SPECIFICATION EXAMPLE

Asset tag type 1:

For use when asset number and/or FIRS number needs to be

conveyed

Rectangular

316 Stainless Steel or Phenolic Plastic

3/4" x 2"

Min. asset number text height: 1/4"

Asset tag type 2:

For use when asset number, FIRS number,

short description, and/or fed from information needs

to be conveyed

Rectangular


1" x 3"


Min. asset description text height: 1/4"

Asset tag type 3:

For use when asset number, FIRS number,

short description, and/or fed from information needs

to be conveyed

Rectangular


2-1/2" x 3"-1/4"


Min. asset description text height:1/4"

Asset tag type 4:

For use when only the asset number needs to be

conveyed

Circular


1-1/2" DIA.



ASSET TAG TYPE ASSET TAG SPECIFICATION EXAMPLE

Asset tag type 5:

For use on main control panels, motor control

centers, variable frequency drives, and large pieces of

equipment

Rectangular

Phenolic Plastic

2" x 6"


Min. asset description text height:1/2"

2.02 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL ASSET TAGS

A. All electrical, instrumentation and control, and communication asset tags shall conform to the requirements outlined in this Section unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings.

B. Asset tag material shall be limited to laminated phenolic plastic for use on all electrical or I&C equipment. Stainless steel tags shall not be permitted.

C. Additional identification requirements for electrical equipment are found in Section 26 05 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL ASSET TAG REQUIREMENTS

A. Asset tag placement: Asset tags shall, where possible, be affixed to an accessible and visible area adjacent to the piece

of equipment that would remain fixed, should, for example, the piece of equipment be removed for maintenance. Examples: a. Mount asset tag for pumps and motors on the base plate. b. Hang the tag for an inline pump with a tie near the electrical connection at the pump. c. Hang the tag for a valve on the piping adjacent to the valve.

For assets that are overhead, out of reach, or out of sight of staff, an asset tag shall be placed on the equipment itself as well as in an accessible, visible location on the panel used to control the equipment.

Fastening of the tags and nameplates shall not interfere with normal operation of the equipment, or lock out tag out procedures. Tags shall not be placed in a location that covers manufacturer information.

Do not insulate or paint over asset tags.

B. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, debris prior to the fastening of the asset tags.

3.02 SUBMIT TO PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

A. Prior to Operational Testing, submit asset tag schedule and product information to be installed on the asset equipment. Operational Testing may proceed during the County's review of information on the required resubmittals.

B. Commissioning shall not commence on any asset until asset tags are installed on equipment and submittals for asset tagging has received a Review Action of either “1” (No Exceptions Taken) or “2” (Note Markings) as specified in Section 01 33 00.


C. Prior to Final Acceptance, update asset tags for any asset changes during testing or commissioning and submit the final version of the asset tag schedule. Final Acceptance for the contract shall not be granted until the final asset tag schedule submittal has received a Review Action of “1” (No Exceptions Taken) as specified in Section 01 33 00.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. King County construction management Staff in partnership with asset management staff will inspect equipment tags for correct identifying asset information according to the information in this Section, the 01 78 40-A form, and the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 78 43 - 1 SPARE PARTS

SECTION 01 78 43

SPARE PARTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section summarizes the requirements for turnover of spare parts. More specific information pertaining to types and quantities of the spare parts is provided in the individual Sections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Form 01 78 43-A

1.03 STORAGE

A. Until turnover required by Section 01 78 43, be responsible for the delivery, storage, and protection of spare parts and equipment required in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Store on pallets or shipping skids, and identify as follows: The pallets or skids shall be sequentially numbered, by Contract number. Each pallet or skid shall

have a single, unique numerical designation. Items or containers on each skid shall be alphabetically ordered and identified by a tag with the

following information. The containers or items on each pallet or skid shall always begin with "A", and proceed in alphabetical order. (Example: If pallet #007 has five items on it, the items would be individually tagged and identified as 007-A, 007-B, 007-C, 007-D, and 007-E.)

The information recorded on the tags shall be in the same order in which the spare parts are turned over. Any reorganization of parts or containers on pallets must be reflected in accurate identification tags. Pallets, parts, or equipment with inaccurate, incomplete, or missing tags, will not be accepted.

Spare parts subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical components shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. The quality of protection shall be equal to that required for shipment overseas and storage in humid, tropical climates.

Those spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2'-0" W x 1'-6" H x 3'-0" L shall be stored in a heavy-duty wooden crates, with a hinged wooden cover. The hinges shall be heavy-duty strap types. Paint and identify boxes with stenciled lettering indicating "Spare Parts". A neatly typed inventory of the parts contained within shall be taped inside in a heavy-duty plastic protective sleeve to the underside of the cover. The crates shall be identified as per Section 01 78 43, and the parts description shall reference the typed inventory list taped to the cover.

Provide access to spare parts for inspection while in storage.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TURNOVER OF THE SPARE PARTS

A. Provide 2 weeks written advance notification of intent to turn over all spare parts. The written notification shall be accompanied by a completed Spare Parts Release Form 01 78 43-A as provided by the Project Representative.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 78 43 - 2 SPARE PARTS

B. Provide for the delivery and off-loading of spare parts at a County location, as determined by the Project Representative.

C. Jointly inspect spare parts with the Project Representative and verify condition and quantities. Mutual agreement and signoff on the Spare Parts Release Form shall constitute turnover of the spare parts.

D. The spare parts may be delivered only upon completion of the operational testing phase of the work, and prior to issuance of Substantial Completion. The only exception shall be the acceptance of spare parts for that portion of the work accepted for Possession and Use prior to issuance of Substantial Completion.

3.02 DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide an electronic copy of the Spare Parts Release Form in Microsoft Excel software 2010 or newer and one hard copy to the Project Representative with the spare parts.

B. Include the Spare Parts Release Form in the final bound operations and maintenance (O&M) manual. Include mention of the Spare Parts Release Form in the Table of Contents.

3.03 PAYMENT

A. Spare parts payment shall be considered separate from the equipment being supplied. This amount shall be a minimum of five (5) percent of the equipment line item(s) on the schedule of values. No payment for spare parts will be released until the spare part is submitted and accepted per this Section.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 EQUIPMENT TESTING, TRAINING, Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 01 80 00 - 1 AND COMMISSIONING

SECTION 01 80 00

EQUIPMENT TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for achieving, verifying, and documenting the working condition of the facility, according to its planned function and operation, including the training of operating and maintenance personnel. This process includes, but is not limited to, documentation and procedures, pre-installation and component testing, system and operational testing, commissioning, and possession and use by the County. The process is applicable to process, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation systems and completed portions of the work, functioning as integrated systems of a completed operational facility.

B. Provide: power, fuel, compressed air supplies, chemicals, temporary facilities and all other necessary items and work required to complete the tests and inspections specified herein, unless otherwise specified as provided by owner.

C. If, under test, a portion of the work fails to meet the Contract requirements and is adjusted, altered, renewed, or replaced, tests on that portion, together with other portions of the work affected, shall be repeated within a reasonable time and in accordance with the specified conditions.

D. Test results to be within the tolerances set forth in the Specifications. If no tolerances have been specified, conform to tolerances established by recognized industry practice.

E. Where, in the case of an otherwise satisfactory installed test, doubt or dispute arises between the Project Representative and the Contractor regarding the test results or the methods or equipment used in the performance of such test, then the Project Representative may order the test to be repeated. The repeat test using such modified methods or equipment will be paid per the following:

If the test results confirm the satisfactory installed test results, costs for the repeat test will be paid by the County.

If the test results of an installed test fail to comply with the Contract requirements, all costs associated with the repeat tests and equipment necessary to achieve the Contract requirements are at the Contractor's expense.

1.02 REFERENCED STANARDS


Reference Title

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

HI Hydraulic Institute Standards

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

ISA Instrument Society of Automation

B. Install testing equipment and apparatus with personnel trained in the trades and professions required to assure competent workmanship.

C. Supervise the installation of specific equipment testing items specified to be accomplished by factory-trained installation specialists furnished or certified by the equipment manufacturers.


D. Document the skills and training of workers engaged in the installation of testing equipment furnished by the Contractor.

E. Qualifications of Test Engineer: The Test Engineer shall have the following minimum qualifications: Shall be an employee of a company regularly engaged in testing and commissioning of systems of

similar scope and complexity. Shall have demonstrated a history of successful testing and commissioning of systems of similar

scope and complexity. Shall have completed work on at least three systems of equal or larger size that were similar in type

and scope to those tested herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide a listing of all individual component and system testing to be performed within 30 days after Notice to Proceed.

C. Submit Qualifications of Test Engineer(s) meeting the requirements in paragraph 1.02E.

D. Testing, Training, and Commissioning Plans: Submit a minimum of one complete plan commensurate with the scope of work of this Contract. Test phase plan submittals:

a. Pre-installation test phase. b. Component test phase. c. System test phase. d. Operational test phase: An update of System Test Phase documents with Operational Test

Phase results and evaluations as related to other Systems, facilities, or contracts Commissioning submittals

a. Commissioning plan of action b. Commissioning schedule c. Commissioning documentation

Test result report submittals. a. Component tests b. System tests c. Operational tests

Training Program submittals a. Listing of all individual equipment and systems b. Training Plans c. Documentation of training performed

Roles and responsibilities of test participants (or entities) defined. Test Plan shall include applicable requirements also specified in Divisions 01 through 46 applicable

to the systems to be tested. Format:

a. Title page, Table of Content or Index, with page numbers on each page. b. Space for comments and notes. c. Hard bound and in native electronic and PDF format. d. Attachments or Appendices in native electronic and PDF format. e. Sequentially and/or alphanumerically organized, step-by-step procedures. Bulleted items not

allowed, no exceptions. f. Organized, and spare to include annotations as needed, to facilitate stopping and restarting of

any part of the test, at any time during testing. g. Either in 8-1/2”x11” and/or 11”x17” format.


1.04 TEST ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Designate the Test Engineer(s) approved in the bid evaluation and submitted per Section 00440, if applicable or submit the qualifications of designated Test Engineer(s) showing competence to perform the responsibilities.

B. The Test Engineer(s) shall be responsible for the following: Review and approve all functional and performance tests, test results, and testing documentation

for all equipment and systems. Develop schedules for all testing, integrate testing into the master construction activity schedule,

and coordinate all required testing. Develop test procedures and forms for documentation of all equipment tests, system functional

tests, and cross system functional tests. Test procedures shall be in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations, where applicable. Test procedures shall fully describe system configuration and steps required for each test. The test procedures reflect actual procedures used. The test procedures shall be appropriately documented so that another party can repeat the test to verify test results.

Complete test procedure schedule, procedures, forms, and other documentation and submit for approval six months prior to starting any testing required by Division 40.

Coordinate directly with all subcontractor and vendors specific to their responsibilities and contractual obligations.

Observe the start-up and initial testing of equipment and then all final test of equipment and systems.

Coordinate all cross system testing. Some examples of cross system testing are process instrumentation and controls (including, but not limited to contractor and vendor furnished systems), electrical, HVAC, fire alarm, life safety, Owner-furnished systems (when included in the project), etc.

Note and document any inconsistencies or deficiencies in system operations and ensure system compliance or recommend modifications to system design which will enhance system performance.

Coordinate the participation in the required testing and approve procedures, after verifying that pretests have been satisfactorily conducted and the systems are ready for final tests.

Review as-built drawings provided by the various subcontractors and vendors for verification with as-built conditions.

Obtain all documentation of equipment and systems' tests and assemble a final test report. Oversee training for the systems specified in the Specifications. Participation in commissioning tests, document that the facility is completely tested and within contract limits or identify non-compliant elements.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Temporary Facility: Systems necessary to allow the existing facility or component to be removed from service while maintaining the required functional capacity.

B. System: A defined part of the Contract requirements, consisting of an arrangement of items, such as

Equipment, structures, components, piping, wiring, materials, or incidentals, so related or connected to form an identifiable, unified, functional, operational, safe, and independent part of the Contract.

Systems include, but are not limited to, the following main process equipment elements and associated a. Control valves b. Operators c. Monitoring equipment d. Switches e. VFD f. Supervisory Process Control System (SPCS, currently Emerson Ovation), and/or PLC I/O and

Logic g. Local control


h. Operator Interface System (OIS) i. Alarms and Annunciators j. Specific systems may include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Temporary Facilities such as a) Temporary power. b) Temporary motor control center. c) Temporary control panel. d) Temporary Pumping. e) Temporary Odor control.

2) Motor operated valves. 3) Flow meters. 4) Level monitoring equipment, including level transmitter, high level switches and low level

switches. 5) Level monitoring equipment, including bubbler system, level transmitters, high level

switches and low level switches. 6) Non-potable water. 7) Seal water system. 8) Instrument air system. 9) Gas monitoring systems. 10) Stand-by power system. 11) HVAC systems. 12) Washdown pump system. 13) Overflow metering system. 14) Other systems per Contract Documents.

C. Test Phases Pre-installation Test Phase:

a. Factory testing as specified in individual Specification Sections. b. Standard factory tests of manufacturer and standard industry practice. c. Delivery acceptance tests and inspections.

Component Test Phase: Installed component tests and inspections. System Test Phase: Complete Systems tests and evaluations to demonstrate the components of

the system interact and operate as specified. Operational Test Phase: Testing of the entire facility and interlocks. The full operation of the

facility for a specified period that assures that all systems and processes operate to defined design criteria. Unless specified otherwise, this is clean water testing.

D. Commissioning Phase: The commissioning phase is for the specified continuous days of successful operation of the facility in service under designed operating conditions and environment. The facility is operated by County personnel with the Contractor providing maintenance, repairs, replacements and correction of deficiencies as required. During Commissioning, the facility may be operated throughout its specified ranges and modes of operation to demonstrate required performance is met.

1.06 TESTING - GENERAL

A. Testing and performance criteria are described in the Contract documents, manufacturer's literature and industry standards

B. Prepare and submit test procedures, and schedules

C. Document and submit test results

D. Completely test and document the performance of temporary facilities before removing existing operating facilities.


1.07 TRAINING

A. Submit Master schedule and training program for operations and maintenance staff training: Procedures: per Section 01 33 00. Submit schedule 30 days prior to start of system test phase for first training presentation. Schedule to include:

a. Target date and time for each operating and maintenance training presentation for each system, both field and classroom.

b. Target date for initiation of Commissioning period. c. Do not schedule training on weekends or holidays observed by County. d. Coordinate training scheduling with applicable County staff work schedule. e. After each training presentation, submit completed Form 01 80 00-B and Form 01 80 00-C

received from the Project Representative.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Comply with the requirements of this Contract and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.

B. Provide test gauges, meters, recorders and monitors as required to supplement or augment the instrumentation system provided under this Contract to properly demonstrate that equipment fully satisfies the specified requirements. Specifically select devices employed for the purpose of measuring the performance of the facility's equipment and systems to be consistent with the variables to be monitored. Instruments are to be recently calibrated.

C. Demonstrate through re-calibration the accuracy of instruments employed for testing purposes.

D. Calibration procedures are in accordance with applicable standards of ASTM, ISA, and IEEE to ensure the adequacy and calibration of gauges, meters, recorders and monitors.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install test equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Notify the Project Representative of any conflicts between a manufacturer's installation recommendations and the specific requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Install test equipment provided by the County as designated under this Contract, in accordance with the details shown and Specified in the manufacturer's requirements. Notify the Project Representative of conflict between a manufacturer's installation recommendations and specific requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. For modifications to the gas piping the following shall be provided. Primary and secondary 24-hour, seven-day contact information On call availability to mitigate problems with new construction overnight, weekends and holidays,

during/after the applicable periods that these work elements are performed.

3.03 TESTING

A. General requirements: Test and inspect equipment and partially completed or fully completed portions of the work to prove

compliance with the Contract requirements. Unless otherwise noted, pay all costs of testing, including temporary facilities and connections.


Receive Project Representative approval for the application of all tests only after Project Representative inspection of equipment for conformance with the Specifications.

Tests and inspections, unless otherwise specified or accepted, are in accordance with the recognized standards of the industry. Allow for up to two additional setpoint changes during testing.

Procedures: a. Design testing procedures to duplicate, as nearly as possible, conditions of operation to ensure

that the equipment is not damaged. Once the testing procedures have been reviewed and approved by the Project Representative, organize by system into test packages and include the proper checkout, alignment, adjustment, and calibration signoff forms for each item of equipment and system.

b. Jointly use forms with the Project Representative to ensure that documentation for each electrical, mechanical, and instrumentation equipment item has been properly recorded for installation and testing. Failure to follow the Project Representative approved procedure will result in non-acceptance of the equipment.

c. Fulfillment of the test and inspection requirements are by either of the following: 1) Tests and inspections carried out in Project Representative's presence, or: 2) Certificates or reports of tests and inspections carried out by Project Representative

approved persons or organizations. d. Maintain the systems test packages, which contain tests and sign-off forms including, but not

limited to, piping, equipment, electrical, and instrumentation. Submit test packages to the County for inspection upon request.

Testing Temporary Facilities a. Prior to removing the existing operational system or component from service, complete testing

through the Operational Testing Phase for the required Temporary system or component. b. Upon successful completion of the Operational Testing Phase for the Temporary facility,

remove the existing facility from service and maintain the Temporary facility in operation c. Following the completion of temporary system testing, modifications to the facility may begin.

3.04 TESTING BY PHASES

A. Pre-installation Test Phase: As specified. Test items at the place of manufacture during or on completion of manufacture. Tests

are comprised of hydraulic pressure tests, electric and instrumentation subsystem tests, performance and operating tests and inspections.

Perform in accordance with the relevant standards of the industry if not specified in the Contract Documents. Tests other than those specified are in accordance with Section 00700.

When items are delivered to the site, remove all coverings, containers, or crates in order to permit the Project Representative to conduct the inspection to determine if the items are of the specified quality and workmanship, and are visually in good order and condition at the time of delivery. Should the Project Representative find, in its opinion, indication of damage or deficient quality of workmanship, provide the necessary documentation or conduct such tests to demonstrate compliance.

B. Component Test Phase: General:

a. Obtain approval of operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 78 23 prior to testing.

b. Equipment to be tested to the specified requirements before a system is placed into operation. c. Incorporate requirements of the Specifications into the installed tests and inspection

procedures and proceed in a logical, step-wise sequence to ensure that the installed equipment has been properly assembled, serviced, aligned, adjusted, connected, and calibrated prior to operation.

d. Perform all changes, adjustments, or replacements required to make the Equipment operate. Component testing is required for all equipment, piping, electrical, instrumentation, controls, safety,

security, including, but not limited to: a. Equipment: Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 46 b. Piping system pressure testing and cleaning: Division 02, 22, 23, 33, 40.


c. Electrical System testing: Division 26. d. Instrumentation System testing: Division 40. e. County supplied equipment as specified f. Provide and complete a checklist to verify discrete and analog inputs from field devices update

PLC memory registers. g. Provide and complete a checklist to verify PLC discrete and analog outputs are connected to

field devices. h. Test, check and correct deficiencies of:

1) Power, control and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source. 2) Voltage of all circuits. 3) Phase sequence. 4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems. 5) Alignment of connected machinery. 6) Vacuum and pressure of all closed systems. 7) Lubrication. 8) Valve orientation and position status for manual operating mode. 9) Tankage integrity using clean water. 10) Instrumentation and control signal generation, transmission, reception and response. 11) Tagging and identification systems. 12) Proper connections, alignment, calibration and adjustment.

i. Calibrate all safety equipment. j. Manually rotate or move moving parts to assure freedom of movement. k. Bump electric motors to verify power and direction of rotation. l. Perform other tests, checks, and activities required to make component ready for System Test

Phase. m. Complete Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form No. 43 05 01-A in Section 01 33 10

following all testing. n. Complete forms per Section 01 33 10, as applicable to the project, following all testing.

System Test Phase: a. General:

1) After the Project Representative has approved the Component Test Phase for each component within a system and has not found deficiencies in that portion of the work, test and operate all individual systems under operating conditions to determine as comprehensively as possible whether the equipment and system meet the requirements of the Specifications.

2) Except as otherwise specified, employ potable water in the testing of all water and wastewater systems. For other systems use the intended fluid or a compatible substitute. Disposal of test media must be in compliance with laws and regulations and with proper permits. Submit disposal manifest to the Project Representative.

3) When testing requires the use of auxiliary systems such as electrical power, compressed air, control air, or instrumentation which have not yet been placed in service, provide acceptable substitute sources, capable of meeting the requirements of the machine, device or system. County facilities are not available for this purpose.

4) Maintain temporary facilities until permanent facilities are in service. b. Following system testing:

1) Recheck machines for proper alignment; re-align if necessary and dowel in place. 2) Check equipment for loose connections, unusual movement or other indications of

improper operating characteristics. 3) Correct deficiencies to the requirements of the Project Representative. 4) Disassemble and inspect equipment which exhibits unusual or unacceptable operating

characteristics. Repair or remove from the site and replace with new. Test until the equipment meets the requirements of the Specifications.

c. Field test to verify performance requirements: 1) As part of system test phase, completely field test each Equipment item specified in

Divisions 21 through 46 over the entire range of operating conditions. 2) Record flow, suction pressure, and discharge pressure in field testing report. 3) Perform vibration tests where specified in individual equipment specification. Vibration

tests shall be in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards and Section 43 05 50.


4) Provide necessary pressure and flow measuring equipment. Calibrate prior to use. 5) Provide a complete field testing report on each equipment item and include in system Test

Package. d. System test procedures include, but are not limited to:

1) Provide and complete a checklist to demonstrate discrete and analog points are displayed on all local graphical Operator Interface(s) (OIs) and on the SPCS system at main control.

2) Provide and complete a checklist to demonstrate entries via Control System interface for the Equipment and Systems as described in Division 40.

3) Actuate all alarms from field devices by physically changing state of field device to cause alarm. Do not simulate conditions. Provide and complete a checklist to demonstrate that all alarms are received on the SPCS.

4) Test systems to the Project Representative requirements prior to proceeding to Operational Test Phase.

Operational Test Phase: a. General:

1) Unless otherwise specified or impractical, Operational Testing for wastewater processing and handling equipment is performed with clean water. Testing for other equipment is performed with the service medium.

2) Provide one week notice to Project Representative prior to starting Operational Test in order than County staff may be coordinated to observe and provide support as needed.

3) Coordinate activities to ensure the County's operation is not compromised. 4) After completion of the System Test Phase and approval by the Project Representative that

systems and equipment comply with the requirements of the Specifications, configure all systems for complete automatic operation as required by Division 40.

5) Coordinate and schedule flows prior to starting Operational Test. 6) Repeat the operational testing until the specified operating modes have been accomplished

without interruption. Should the operational test mode be halted for any reason related to the facilities or the equipment constructed under this Contract, or the Contractor's temporary testing of systems, the operational testing mode shall be repeated until it has been accomplished without interruption.

7) Bring process units to full operating conditions, including temperature, pressure, and flow. 8) Test in a step-by-step method, in accordance with the Contractor's approved written testing

procedures. Accomplish the testing work in an orderly, systematic testing of equipment, systems, structures, and the complete Facility as a unit. Project Representative to witness each individual step in the procedures.

9) Operate Equipment and Systems during the operational testing phase, to the greatest extent practical, at conditions which represent the full range of operating parameters as defined in the Contract Documents.

10) A time period of 30 days is to be allocated for the operational test phase. Unless otherwise noted, the facility shall perform through its complete design range for a period of ten consecutive 24-hour days. Operational testing shall be sequenced in coordination with the criteria specified in Section 01 14 00 and this Section.

11) Provide potable water, fuel, power, and chemicals required during the operational test phase.

12) Supply operational manpower for testing during the required 24-hour operations. 13) Submit operations phase test results in three compiled volumes (original and two copies)

within 14 days of completion of this testing phase.

3.05 COMMISSIONING

A. After completion of the Operational Test Phase and certification by the Project Representative that System and Operational tests meet performance requirements, that the required training is complete and that all required documents are submitted, the transfer to fully functional facility may begin and the County will begin operating the facility for the Commissioning Period. Note, any time wastewater is being conveyed or processed, the process operation must be under the direction of the County staff.

B. Prior to start of Commissioning, remove temporary piping, plugs and other apparatus that may have been in use during the operational tests.


C. Provide required support to the County to ensure the facility attains its fully operational mode.

D. During commissioning the County's operations personnel will be responsible for operation of the facility or portion thereof. The facility will be required and capable of operating in its intended service and perform the intended process. The facility shall be fully operational, capable of accepting design flows and performing functions as designed.

E. The County is responsible for costs of continuous normal operation including, but not limited to supplies, electricity, and chemicals.

F. Be responsible for all costs of necessary maintenance, repairs or replacements required to keep the facility operational. Failures of equipment will require restart of Commissioning Period.

G. Be available to provide immediate assistance 24 hours per day, seven days per week, in case of failure of a portion of the system being operated.

H. The Commissioning Period is defined as 30 continuous days or full operation without equipment failures for all systems being commissioned. During this period the facility may be required to operate throughout its specified operating and performance ranges.

3.06 TRAINING

A. Conduct all personnel training after completion of Component Test Phase for the equipment for which training is being conducted, but no later than five (5) working days after System Test Phase begins:

Personnel training on individual Equipment or System will not be considered completed unless: a. All training deliverables are received and approved before commencement of training on the

individual equipment or system. b. No system malfunctions occur during training. c. All provisions of field and classroom training are met. d. Training not in compliance with the above shall be performed again in its entirety by the

Contractor. e. Training for Temporary Pumping Station variable frequency drive and custom engineered

submersible non-clog pumps shall occur prior to start-up of the pumps. f. Field and classroom training requirements are defined in the specific Specifications, as

required: 1) Hold classroom training on-site. 2) Training instructor: Factory trained and familiar with giving both classroom and hands-on

instructions. 3) Training instructors: Be at class on time. Session beginning and end times to be

coordinated with the Project Representative and to be indicated on the master schedule. Normal time lengths for class periods can vary, but brief rest breaks shall be scheduled and taken.

4) Organize training into separate maintenance and operation sessions and identify on schedule.

5) Plan for minimum class attendance of 12 people at each session and provide sufficient classroom materials, samples, and handouts for those in attendance.

6) Instructors to have a typed agenda and well prepared instruction material. The use of visual aids, e.g. films, pictures, and slides is recommended for use during the classroom training programs.

7) Provide Equipment required for presentation of films, slides and other visual aids. 8) Maintain a classroom training log including: instructors, topics, dates, time, and

attendance. g. Make available experienced factory-trained representatives of the manufacturers of the various

pieces of equipment to train the County's personnel in the operation and maintenance thereof. The time required for this training is as specified for each piece of equipment and as specified in this Section.


h. Notify the Project Representative of the time of the training at least ten (10) days prior to the day of the training.

i. Training sessions may be recorded by King County staff.

3.07 PAYMENT

A. Payment for work specified in this Section shall be listed as a line item in the Schedule of Values as not less than 2 percent of the Contract Price and paid monthly as completed portions of the system testing and training work are completed. Submit a representative breakdown of the 2 percent by system testing and training to the Project Representative for determining appropriate progress payments to be made monthly as work is completed.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 02 21 00 - 1 SITE SURVEYS

SECTION 02 21 00

SITE SURVEYS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies survey work requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualifications of the surveyor.

C. Survey field notes and all survey calculations.

D. Record drawings stamped by a State of Washington licensed surveyor.

E. Licensed surveys as required by the Project Representative.

1.03 SURVEY BY KING COUNTY

A. Control point(s) for vertical and horizontal control are indicated on the Drawings. Base all work on the Contract control points as listed in the Drawings.

1.04 SURVEY BY CONTRACTOR

A. Using the Contract control point(s), develop and make such additional surveys as needed for construction, such as control lines, slope stakes, settlement markers, batter boards, stakes for pipe locations, and other working points, lines and elevations. Re-establish any benchmarks and survey control points destroyed.

B. Complete the layout for the work and be responsible for all measurements that may be required for the execution of the work to the location and limits prescribed on the Drawings. Perform survey work under the supervision of a land surveyor licensed in the State of Washington.

C. Perform all survey monument referencing for tie-out prior to the work in the right-of-way and prior to pavement restoration. Check and restore monuments and their casings at completion of work.

D. Maintain and preserve all stakes and other marks established until authorized by the Project Representative to remove them.

E. The Project Representative may require that work be suspended at any time when location and limit marks established by the Contractor are not reasonably adequate to permit inspection of the work.

F. Comply with the survey requirements for all monitoring as specified in other Sections.

G. Provide new replacement monuments and boxes when removed or damaged during construction.

H. Re-establish all permanent survey control monuments prior to final inspection.

I. Provide all requirements of the Record Documents per Section 01 78 39.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 02 21 00 - 2 SITE SURVEYS

1.05 SURVEYOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. Surveyor shall be a Professional Land Surveyor who is licensed in the State of Washington.

B. The Project Representative reserves the right to disallow the person(s) selected by the Contractor for surveying. If in the Project Representative's opinion, the person is not qualified to do the work, select another surveyor and submit qualifications until a qualified person is approved.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Perform surveys based on control points as shown on the Drawings. Use surveys to establish base lines, line and grade hubs, stake elevations, and other reference and construction points.

B. Replaced monuments shall be set by a licensed land surveyor, registered in the State of Washington.

3.02 FIELD NOTES

A. Keep in standard bound survey field notebooks using a clear, orderly manner consistent with standard surveying practice. Include titles, numbering, and indexing.

B. Keep a copy of all field notes including references to monuments and property corners. Submit if required by the Project Representative.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 02 41 00 - 1 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies demolition, equipment salvage, cutting, and patching.

B. For documentation requirement, refer to Section 01 74 19, Construction and Demolition Material Management; and Section 01 78 40, Assets Attribute Collection.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Schedule of work planned, schedule to avoid interference with facility operations.

C. Shop drawings for items to be repaired or replaced.

1.03 SALVAGE DISPOSITION, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Salvage Equipment: Refer to Section 01 78 40 for the identification and documentation procedures for equipment

identified for salvage. As designated in Section 01 78 40, equipment to be removed from the project shall be: a. Delivered to the County’s possession or b. Removed by the Contractor for Contractor’s possession and recycling. c. Final disposition of the asset will be documented on form 01 78 40-A.

B. Materials disposal: Unless otherwise identified, all materials removed from the project become the property of the

Contractor and shall be recycled per Section 01 74 19.

C. Delivery of Salvage Items to the County Remove, as a unit, items designated for removal and salvage or reuse. Clean, condition, tag, and protect from damage. Deliver to King County facility Brightwater Treatment Plant, 22505 WA-9, Woodinville, WA 98072

between the hours of 8:00 AM and 4:00 PM, Mondays through Friday, except for County holidays.

D. Recycled by Contractor: Removal and recycling of equipment and materials shall not occur until the Project Representative

has been notified of this work. Refer to Specification 01 74 19 for coordination and documentation of recycled equipment and

materials. Upon completion of review, promptly remove from site. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site.

1.04 SALVAGED EQUIPMENT LIST

A. See Section 01 78 40 for the list of equipment to be removed from the project and disposition of that equipment. Any changes or additions to this list shall be relayed to the Project Representative before removal. Final disposition column will be completed /verified by Contractor and form submitted to the Project Representative prior to Commissioning.


1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection: Remove salvaged equipment in a manner that protects adjacent equipment and piping. If chipping of concrete is required, perform work in a manner that contains and exhausts concrete

dust to a bag filter or other means of complete containment and capture. Repair or replace property that is damaged. Typical enclosure required for dust control shall be as shown on Drawings.

B. Proper Approval: Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for work which affects existing exit ways, exit

stairs, means of egress, or access to or exit from such areas. Review with and obtain approval of authorities for temporary construction which affects such areas. Special attention is directed to approvals by fire authorities.

C. Special Requirements: Clean as required and cut in pieces pressure vessels and closed containers which may have

contained hazardous or contaminated materials. Disposal of equipment shall not occur until the Project Representative has approved.

1.06 VERIFICATION OF ASSET REMOVAL

A. Document disposal or salvage of assets removed from the project by completing the Final Disposition column for removed assets in Form 01 78 40- A. The finalized form shall be submitted to the Project Representative prior to final acceptance.

B. Document salvage of assets per Section 01 78 40.

1.07 VERIFICATION OF DEMOLITION MATERIALS

A. Document salvage, reuse, disposal, and recycling of demolition materials per Section 01 74 19.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Notify the Project Representative prior to beginning salvage work so that the proper salvage items are identified and the condition of the salvage item and adjacent equipment, piping and structures can be documented. Refer to prepopulated form 01 78 40-A provided by Project Representative for assets to be removed. Notify the Project Representative if there are any changes to, additions to, or discrepancies in the list.

3.02 OPERATION PROCEDURES

A. Start and complete work in order of precedence as established by approved schedule. The sequence of work may be adjusted with prior approval by the Project Representative, as long as the work does not infringe upon or violate the schedule.

B. Execute work to protect County employees, County Representatives and the public from injury. Provide protection to persons and property. Conduct work to ensure minimum interference with roads, walks, entrances, exits, and other adjacent occupied facilities as approved by the Project Representative.


C. Where temporary partitions are required in public areas, construct partitions of clean, painted, minimum 1/2-inch thick, plywood. In interior areas, adequately braced 1/4-inch pre-finished paneling may be used. Provide the following:

Passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas of work. Substantial barricades and safety lights as required. Temporary dust proof partitions as necessary to prevent infiltration of dust into occupied areas or

the atmosphere. Temporary weather protection as necessary to prevent damage to existing facilities and discomfort

to persons in occupied areas.

3.03 CUTTING AND REMOVAL

A. Neatly cut and remove materials and prepare openings to receive new work.

B. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.

C. Provide shoring, bracing, and other supports to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of remaining or adjacent wall areas, structure, or facilities. Arrange shoring, bracing, and supports to prevent overloading of structure.

D. Take precautions necessary to prevent damage to existing remaining work or to adjacent facilities. Execute work using methods that will prevent interference with use of remaining and adjacent facilities by the County, utilities, or the public.

E. Properly disconnect salvaged items to retain their full salvage value, remove from their foundations when applicable, and carefully store at location(s) specified.

3.04 MATCHING AND PATCHING

A. Where items are removed from existing walls, ceilings, floors, or partitions to remain, repair wall, ceiling, floor, or partition disturbed by removal.

B. Where walls, ceilings, floors, or partitions are removed, repair abutting walls, ceilings, or floors disturbed by removal.

C. Where existing construction is cut or otherwise disturbed to permit installation of new work, match and patch existing disturbed construction.

D. Use methods and materials identical in appearance and equal in quality to areas or surfaces being repaired.

E. Remove areas, surfaces, or items which cannot be satisfactorily matched, patched and replaced as approved by the Project Representative.

3.05 CLEANUP

A. Remove debris, rubbish and materials resulting from cutting, demolition or patching operations.

B. Transport materials and legally recycle or dispose of offsite.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 03 16 13 - 1 LINING FOR STRUCTURES

SECTION 03 16 13

HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE LINING FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section as listed below in paragraphs 1.02 through paragraph 3.03 specifies material and performance criteria for the existing HDPE liner system installed on the inside tank walls and roof of the Digested Sludge Storage Tank. The Existing liner HDPE material is: Studliner as manufactured by GSE (now Solmax). As part of the construction required inside of the Digested Sludge Storage Tank, the contractor will be required to protect the existing liner from damage and repair the liner where penetrations and nozzle extensions are required. Repair procedures shall be as recommended by the existing HDPE liner supplier, GSE (now Solmax). The following provisions shall be required as part of this contract:

Contractor to contact the HDPE liner manufacturer to get manufacturer’s recommended procedure for repair of the HDPE lining at penetrations, nozzle extensions and other areas of liner damage: a. Solmax

GSE Environmental, LLC 19103 Gundle Road Houston, TX 77073 Ph: 800-435-2008

Contractor to provide submittals for HDPE lining repair per section 01 33 00. Submittal information to include: a. Liner repair procedure. b. Drawing or details of lining repair. c. Testing requirements to test integrity of any lining repairs.

Contractor to protect the existing HDPE liner inside the Digested Sludge Storage Tank per the recommendations and procedures provided by the liner manufacturer, GSE (now Solmax).

Contractor to repair the existing HDPE liner inside the Digested Sludge storage Tank per the recommendations and procedures provided by the liner manufacturer, GSE (now Solmax).

Contractor to provide for field inspection of all liner repairs to the Digested Sludge Storage Tank, by a qualified inspector from the lining manufacturer, GSE (now Solmax).

B. Related Sections: Not used.

C. Schedule supplement: Not used.

D. Performance Requirements: Liner system and any repairs to the liner system will be used to protect the concrete surface from damage and corrosion caused by exposure to gas above the liquid-gas interface. The liner system and any repairs to the liner system shall provide a complete gas and liquid leak-free seal between the structure contents and the structure where the liner is applied. The leak-free seal shall be maintained at all structure penetrations.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this Section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the Contractor shall point out the conflict to the Project Representative; lacking a definitive answer otherwise, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASTM D412 Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension

ASTM D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics


B. Factory Tests: Testing: Inspect liner sheets for holes using electrical spark test set at 20,000V. Repair holes

found in liner sheets in shop and retest prior to shipment. Standards: Tensile specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM D412 using

Die B.

C. Storage: Liner material shall not be subjected to prolonged ultraviolet light exposure during storage or installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01300.

B. Items to be Submitted for This Specification: Certified test results on physical property, chemical resistance, and quality control test data, as

specified in this Section. Individual samples, 1 foot by 1 foot, of liner sheet and miscellaneous materials used during

fabrication, including joint strips, sealing tape, weld strips, and adhesive. Manufacturer’s installation instructions with specific details modified and tailored to each structure

and portion of structure to be lined, including attachments to wall penetrations. A complete liner layout and application sequencing plan. Include scaled drawings that show

individual sheet dimensions, details of liner openings, and attachments to formwork; design details showing continuous termination at all edges to prevent migration of sludge, water, or gas between liner surface and concrete; and order of application. This plan shall be approved by the Project Representative and the manufacturer before starting work in this Section.

Manufacturer's certification of the proposed installer used for the lining installation work and the installer’s installation plan, as described above.

Letter from liner manufacturer stating that installer has notified manufacturer of proposed installation and that manufacturer is in agreement with the intended application.

Welder qualification testing procedure. Factory testing information either as standard from the manufacturer or as specifically required in

this Section. Statement of qualifications:

a. HDPE lining system manufacturer. b. HDPE lining system manufacturer’s representative. c. HDPE lining system installer.

Installer’s Information: a. Include list of technical personnel who will perform work on the liner. b. Technician certification, indicating that technicians have completed required training for

welding, fabricating, and installing liner. Manufacturer’s certificate of proper installation, including written reports of each test and inspection.

1.04 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Requirements: HDPE liners shall be specifically designed to withstand constant, long-term exposure to

temperatures up to 140 degrees F. The lining shall withstand a 40 psig backpressure applied to the undersurface of the lining without

losing anchorage and without rupture. Materials furnished under this Section shall be suitable for exposure to municipal wastewater

sludge containing some industrial wastes, municipal wastes, and sludge gases. Wastewater sludge may contain gross waste solids, vegetable parts, sand silt, petroleum products, industrial solvents, animal fats and oils, methane, hydrogen sulfide, and carbon dioxide.

Materials furnished under this Section shall be suitable for exposure to wastewater gases. Wastewater gases may contain carbon dioxide, oxygen, nitrogen, methane, hydrogen, and hydrogen sulfide. Wastewater gases may condense on the liner surface to yield sulfuric acid and other strong acid compounds.


The expected wastewater sludge temperature range is 50 to 140 degrees F. The pH may range from 5 to 8.5. Lining material shall be impermeable to sewage gases, sewage liquids, and sewage treatment chemicals, and nonconducive to bacterial or fungus growth.

Digester lining shall protect concrete surfaces and provide long-term liquid and gas-tightness. Installation shall prevent migration of sludge, water, or gas through liner or between the liner and substrate.

All HDPE liner sheets, joints, corners and welding strips shall have the following physical properties when tested at 77±5 degrees F:

Property High-Density Polyethylene

Density 0.90 g/cm3

Tensile strength at yield, ASTM D638 2,900 psi minimum

Elongation at yield, ASTM D638 12 percent minimum

Resistance to pullout 6000 lb/ft2

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. HDPE Liner Manufacturer: Successful use of sheet material similar to the applications of this specification for a minimum period of five years.

B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained and experienced in the technical application, installation, operation, and maintenance of the lining system and all of its components, with full authority by the manufacturer to issue the certification of proper installation.

C. HDPE Lining System Installer: Recommended and certified by the HDPE liner manufacturer to perform the work.

D. Welder Qualifications: Each liner welder shall pass a qualification-welding test before any field welding is performed on

the project. Requalification may be required at any time deemed necessary by the Project Representative.

All qualification welds shall be made in the presence of the Project Representative and liner manufacturer’s technical representative. Weld samples shall be fabricated as follows: a. Provide manufacturer’s recommended method for welder qualification samples, including

sample size and overlap, before welder qualification begins. b. Samples shall be prepared and welded in accordance with the manufacturer’s specific

recommendations for field production welding. c. Three specimens shall be cut from the weld sample and test in tension across the weld by the

liner manufacturer’s Quality Control Laboratory by methods approved by the Project Representative. Weld tensile strength shall be 2,000 psi, minimum, with no separation of the weld material.

d. If one specimen fails to pass the tensile test, a retest will be permitted. The retest shall consist of testing three additional specimens cut from the original welded sample. If all three samples pass the test, the weld will be considered satisfactory.

e. Provide certification form from liner manufacturer indicating welder has passed qualification tests. Certificate shall name the welder(s), date sample was prepared, liner manufacturer’s signature indicating witness of test sample preparation, and test results with liner manufacturer’s Quality Control Laboratory representative signature.

1.06 MOCKUP

A. At the beginning of the liner installation project, the first section of liner will be installed, welded, and tested to serve as a reference and standard for the remaining work.


B. Mockup shall consist of approximately 500 square feet of complete liner installation, including joint welding and patch repairs, installed at a location mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and Project Representative. Mockup may be part of larger lined area, but must, at a minimum, be applied in the field using the Contract-specified concrete.

C. Liner mockup shall include terminations, at least 10 linear feet of horizontal corner (wall to roof slab or floor intersection), and one penetration. Provide at least five weld tab extensions, minimum of 2 inches long, to allow pull tests.

D. Welders shall be qualified prior to installation of the liner mockup.

E. Installation and welding shall be observed by the liner manufacturer’s technical representative.

F. Completed liner shall be tested as follows: 100 percent holiday testing with the specified holiday tester set at 20,000V. 100 percent inspection of the weld seams and patches by probing with a putty knife or similar tool. Pull tests of at least 10 welds. A 10-pound pull will be applied to each tab, applied perpendicular to

the face of the structure by a spring balance. Liner adjoining welding strip will be held against the concrete during the application force. There shall be no separation between the weld and the liner when the tabs are submitted to the pull test.

Test pull-out strength of locking tees or studs (liner extensions) using equipment and procedures approved by the project representative. Test method shall include cutting a section of liner along a tee or between studs, folding the cut liner along the cut, and attaching a test apparatus to apply and measure force. Test force shall be a minimum of 100 pounds per linear inch, applied perpendicular to the face of the sheet for 1 minute. Test shall be made at a temperature between 70 and 80 degrees F. There shall be no rupture or pull-out of the liner extensions.

G. Any deficiencies in the application process shall be identified, and procedures developed in conjunction with the liner manufacturer’s technical representative to resolve deficiencies before additional lining material is installed.

H. After completion of the testing, repair all damaged surfaces and retest welds on patched areas prior to installation of any other HDPE lining for structures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Lining system specified in this Section shall be the products of: Studliner as manufactured by GSE (now Solmax)

B. The manufacturer’s standard models or products may require modifications to conform to specified requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Composition: Lining sheets and accessory strips shall be made of high-density polyethylene. Copolymer resins

are not permitted. The lining material shall be white, grey, or black in color, compounded of inert synthetic resins,

pigments, and plasticizers to make permanently flexible sheets. The sheets shall be formed with T-rib extensions or stubs on one face for casting with the structure and shall not rely upon an adhesive bond for adherence to the concrete surface.

B. Chemical Resistance: HDPE lining systems shall be suitable for exposure to raw sewage and sewage sludges and sewage gases, with a pH between 5 and 8.5; methane, hydrogen sulfide, hydrogen, and carbon dioxide gases; and dilute sulfuric acid.


C. HDPE lining systems, including sheets, strips, joints, and covers, shall be no less than 0.120-inch thick.

D. HDPE lining systems shall be free from cracks, cleavages, or other defects. Liner sheets shall be impact resistant, flexible, and capable of being repairs at any time during the life of the structure.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufactured welding strips, joint strips, profile strips, and inside and outside corner profiles for all joints as required.

B. Minimum width of accessory strips or profiles shall be 4 inches. The minimum thickness shall be 0.115 inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: In accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Protect installed lining from construction equipment and materials. Provide accessory strips and miscellaneous accessories for a complete liner system. Flash all pipes, conduits, and sleeves passing through the lining, in accordance with manufacturer’s

written instructions. A manufacturer's representative shall be present during installation and field welding of

thermoplastic lining.

B. Application to Cast-in-Place Concrete Structures. Lining sheets shall be closely fitted and properly secured to the inner forms prior to any concreting

operation. On vertical surfaces, liner sheets shall be placed so that locking ribs run vertically. Where liner sheets terminate on vertical surfaces, double termination ribs shall be in the horizontal

direction. All joints shall be protected and made mortartight. During placement and consolidation of concrete, the Contractor shall exercise caution not to

damage the lining and the joints. After all forms have been removed, nails, form ties and protruding wire or metal objects shall be cut

back from the surface and holes filled with grout and pointed flush, then weld strips applied. All work shall be done in strict conformance with the specifications and instructions and

recommendations of the lining manufacturer. All pipes, conduits, and sleeves passing through the lining shall be flashed as shown or as

recommended and demonstrated by the manufacturer. Lining shall be arranged to minimize the number of welding joints.

All defective joints, wrinkles, and areas that do not anchor into the concrete shall be repaired as directed by the Project Representative.

All sheets and jointing strips shall be warmed to allow easy placement of liner against forms. Sheets shall be stretched over formed surfaces and secured to forms using nails or staples within 0.2 inch of edge.

Concrete shall be poured and compacted to ensure a dense, homogenous concrete securely anchoring the locking extensions or stubs into the concrete.

C. Protect lining when removing forms. Do not use sharp instruments to pry forms from lined surfaces. Mark areas of abrasion, damaged surfaces, and form tie holes before ties are broken off.


D. Patching: All hot-air welded strips and repair patches shall be made using qualified welders conversant with

approved methods and techniques. Joints shall be continuously welded until joint is complete. Adequate ventilation shall be provided during all welding operations. All welds shall be made using

hot air welding guns to provide clean effluent air at constant pressure with temperature range in accordance with liner manufacturer's requirements. Contractor shall ensure welding gun is compatible with liner system.

3.02 FIELD TESTING

A. In addition to any testing herein, perform all testing for this product or system consistent with the requirements of Section 01660, the applicable codes, and the manufacturers’ current quality assurance program.

B. After the installation is complete, all surfaces covered with lining, including welds, will be tested with an approved electrical holiday detector in the presence of the Project Representative. The electrical holiday tester shall be set at 20,000V. The full length of all welds shall be physically tested by nondestructive proving methods recommended by the liner manufacturer and approved by the Project Representative. The Contractor, at its expense, shall have an independent laboratory perform the visual inspection and physical testing of the full length of all welds. The independent laboratory and the inspection and probing procedures shall be approved by the Project Representative. The independent laboratory shall also witness the holiday testing and any repairs performed by the Contractor. Inspectors employed by the independent laboratory to test the welds shall have passed the qualifications welding test as specified within this Section. Repair discontinuities and retest. The Contractor shall provide access for all inspection activities.

C. In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: The independent laboratory shall check the quality or work (i.e., probe the welds) of each welder

after they have completed 100 linear feet of welding, but before 200 feet have been completed. The findings shall be immediately reported to the Project Representative.

The specified field tests shall be performed within 30 days after installation of the liner material at each location.

Repair of defective weld joints shall extend a minimum of 3 inches beyond the defect. If the number of defects in each weld strip exceeds an average of one per linear foot, the entire

weld shall be considered defective and repaired accordingly.

D. Upon completion of the all liner testing and inspection, the Contractor shall submit certification by the independent laboratory that all installation and weld joints have been tested and inspected and are in compliance with the Specifications. This certification shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to correct defective work. Acceptance of the work is subject to inspection by the Project Representative.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s technical representative at the site as follows: During welder qualification tests. For a minimum of two days during initial production and mockup installation. A minimum of four additional site inspection visits, each for a minimum of one day, or more, as

required to observe liner in formwork, patching, field welding, and field testing, and as necessary to provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.

As required to resolve field problems attributed to or associated with manufacturer’s product.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 03 30 01 - 1 (SMALL JOBS)

SECTION 03 30 01

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (SMALL JOBS)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in-place reinforced concrete, including embedded material and formwork.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title


ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 308.1 Specification for Curing Concrete

ACI 309R Guide for Consolidation of Concrete

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C685 Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing

ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection

CRSI Manual of Standard Practice

B. Testing: Perform materials testing to demonstrate conformance with the specifications Perform Quality Control per Section 01 15 00.

C. Be responsible for controlling the quality of the materials and work.

D. Obtain services of an independent testing laboratory to perform required tests to document compliance with the Contract requirements.

Testing Lab: Meet the standards published in ASTM E329.

E. Perform work of this section in accordance with the Referenced Standards.

F. Be responsible for results of the cured concrete specified and placed per the requirements of this Section, and perform required repair and remediation to meet the Contract Documents.


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Concrete-Mix Designs.

C. Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Placement Drawings.

E. Submit manufacturer’s data on specified products showing compliance with requirements.

F. Submit manufacturers' data on Contractor-selected products showing quality and suitability for the application. Contractor selected products are to be standards typically used in the industry for similar applications.

G. On a project-wide basis, provide the following: Total cement used, in pounds Total cement substitutes used, in pounds

1.04 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS

A. Compressive Strengths: unless otherwise specified, provide the following as minimum: Concrete compressive strength at 28-days: 4000 psi.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with the following as minimums: Bars - ASTM A615, grade 60, unless otherwise shown, using deformed bars for Number 3 and

larger. Bending - ACI 318.

B. Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes and dimensions, within fabrication tolerances stated in the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice.

C. Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects: Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for this work. Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Minimum Requirements: Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II. Aggregate, General:

a. ASTM C33 uniformly graded and clean. b. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage.

Aggregate, Coarse: crushed rock or washed gravel with maximum size between 3/4-inch and 1-1/2 inches.

Aggregate, Fine: natural washed sand of hard and durable particles varying from fine to particles passing a 3/8-inch screen, of which at least 12 percent shall pass a 50-mesh screen.

Water: clean and potable.


2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as selected by the Contractor.

B. Form Release Agent: Material: Release agent shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and shall

not impair subsequent treatments of the concrete surfaces. A ready-to-use water based material formulated to reduce or eliminate surface imperfections, containing no mineral oil or organic solvents. Release agent shall be environmentally safe, and shall meet the requirements of the referenced standards.

Acceptable Products: a. BASF: MasterFinish RL 211. b. Cresset Chemical Company: Crete-Lease 20-VOC. c. W.R. Meadows: Duogard II. d. Approved Equal.

C. Bonding Agent: Epoxy resin bonding compounds shall be used to bond all fresh concrete to existing concrete

unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Epoxy Bonding Systems shall comply with ASTM C881, Type V Grade 1 or Grade 2. a. Prepare existing concrete by roughening, cleaning and applying bonding agent in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Corners: Filleted, rigid plastic type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected meeting approval of the Project Representative.

3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Electrical Conduit: Locate to maintain maximum strength of the structure. Increase the thickness of the concrete if the outside diameter exceeds 30 percent of the thickness

of the concrete. Obtain written approval of the Project Representative prior to increasing the thickness of the concrete.

Aluminum conduit is prohibited for embedment in concrete.

B. Set and secure bolts, inserts, and other required items in the precise locations needed so they are not displaced. Take photos to document locations of embedded items.

C. Prior to concrete placement, assure the actual locations of embedded items are noted on the as-built set of drawings.

3.03 FORMS

A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to safely support vertical and lateral loads, which will be applied until such loads can be supported safely by the concrete structure.

B. Construct forms to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure.


3.04 MIXING CONCRETE

A. On Site Mixing of the concrete shall be in accordance with provisions of ACI 301. Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685.

B. Transit Mixers: Concrete mixing shall be in accordance with ACI 301. Ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C94.

C. Do not use concrete that has stood for over 30 minutes after leaving the batch plant, or concrete that is not placed within 90 minutes after water is first introduced into the mix.

D. Do not add additional water to the concrete mix after it has left the batch plant unless prior approval is obtained from the Project Representative.

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Preparation: Remove foreign matter accumulated in the forms. Rigidly close openings left in the formwork. Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cracks; wet other material sufficiently to maintain

workability of the concrete. Use only clean tools.

B. Conveying: Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete, which is being integrated with fresh concrete

is still plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location so as to avoid separation due to re-

handling and flowing. Do not use concrete, which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet required quality

control limits, or has been contaminated by foreign materials. Remove concrete from the work site that does not meet specifications.

C. Placing Concrete In Forms: Deposit concrete in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches, and avoid inclined construction

joints. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete has reached the elevation of the spreaders. Bring concrete surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge, and then strike off. Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving the surface free from bumps and hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the concrete surface prior to start of finishing operations.

D. Place all concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

3.06 CONSOLIDATION

A. Comply with recommendations of ACI 309R.

B. Consolidate concrete while placing by use of internal concrete vibrators and supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

C. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement.

D. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms.


3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following finishes at the indicated locations. Float finish: apply to surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes specified

hereinafter. Trowel finish: apply to surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown. Non-slip broom finish: apply to equipment pads.

3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308.1. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep

continuously moist for specified curing period by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, saturated burlap, or special blankets designed for curing concrete and maintaining moist condition.

Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry.

E. After completion of curing process, finished surface where indicated shall be protected by use of protection boards from workman, equipment, scaffolding, and any other form of damage throughout subsequent construction. Size, thickness, and material of board shall be determined by Contractor. Contractor is responsible for maintaining integrity of slab finish throughout construction.


A. Be responsible for Quality Control of Work for materials, placement, curing, and finishing.

B. Perform tests of concrete and concrete materials to ensure conformance with specified requirements per ACI 318. County may perform spot checks. County testing does not relieve the Contractor for quality control and documentation of its Work.

C. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of concrete placed per day.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 03 60 00 - 1 GROUTING

SECTION 03 60 00

GROUTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies non shrink grout and epoxy grout for use in applications including but not limited to grouts for leveling machine bases to equipment pads. Epoxy adhesives for concrete applications including, but not limited to pressure injection of cracks and doweling of anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors and reinforcing bar dowels.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C40 Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM C117 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C289 Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method)

ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete


ASTM C1017 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

ASTM D2419 Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

CRD-C-621 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's Data for the following: Non-shrink cementitious grout. Epoxy grout. Admixtures for cement grout. Adhesive for pressure injection of cracks. Adhesive for doweling. Retardants. Bonding compounds.


C. Certified Test Reports: Before delivery of materials or grout, submit certified reports of the tests specified herein. Accompany the certified reports on previously tested materials with the manufacturer's certified statement that the previously tested material is of the same type, quality, manufacture, and make as that proposed for use in this Contract. Certified test reports are required for all cement grout constituents, including cement and aggregates.

D. On a project-wide basis, provide the following: Total cement used, in pounds Total cement substitutes used, in pounds

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Grout mixes and admixtures shall not contain more than 0.05 percent chloride ions.

B. Water for washing aggregate, for mixing, and for curing: Shall be free from oil and deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials Shall not contain more than 1,000 mg/L of chlorides as Cl, nor more than 1,300 mg/L of sulfates as

SO4. Shall not contain an amount of impurities that may cause a change of more than 25 percent in the

setting time of the cement nor a reduction of more than 5 percent in the compressive strength of the grout at 14 days when compared with the result obtained with distilled water.

Water used for curing shall not contain an amount of impurities sufficient to discolor the grout.

2.02 GROUT

A. Use grout specified on the contract Drawings or as specified in the equipment recommendations.

B. Non-shrink cementitious grout: Cementitious grout that conforms to ASTM C1107, CRD-C-621, "Corps of Engineers Specification

for Non-Shrink Grout", and the following requirements: a. Non-metallic aggregate. b. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) US SPEC, “MP GROUT” 2) BASF, “Masterflow 928” 3) Five Star Products, Inc., “High Strength Grout” 4) Approved Equal.

C. Epoxy Grout: Multi-component, 100 percent solids compound conforming to the following requirements:

a. Suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. b. Comply with ASTM C881. c. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Euclid Chemical Co., "E3-Flowable Epoxy Grout" 2) Sika Chemical Co, “Sikadur 42”, 3) BASF, "Masterflow 648". 4) Approved Equal.

D. Cement grout: A mixture of one part Portland cement, 1 to 2 parts fine aggregate, and with sufficient water to

impart workability but not such that the grout will flow. a. Cement shall be Portland cement, ASTM C150 Type II or Type V. b. Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and to the following requirements:

1) Non-reactive and washed before use. 2) When sources of aggregate are changed, provide test reports for the new material.

Perform the tests specified prior to commencing grout work.


3) Fine aggregate shall be hard, dense, durable particles of either sand or crushed stone regularly graded from coarse to fine.

4) When tested in accordance with ASTM C136, gradation of fine aggregate shall be such that 100 percent by weight will pass a standard No. 8 mesh sieve and no less than 45 percent by weight will pass a standard No. 40 mesh sieve.

5) Variation from the specified gradations in individual tests of fine aggregates will be accepted if the average of 3 consecutive tests is within the specified limits and the variation is within the permissible variation listed below.

6) Comply with ASTM C33 as modified herein.

U.S. Standard Sieve Size Permissible Variation, Percent

30 or coarser 2

50 or finer 0.5

7) Other tests shall be in accordance with the following specifications:

Test Method Test Requirements

ASTM C40 Organic Impurities Color lighter than standard

ASTM C117 Passing 200 sieve 3 percent max.

ASTM C88 Soundness 10 percentage max loss with sodium sulfate

ASTM C289 Reactivity Innocuous aggregate

ASTM D2419 Sand Equivalent Minimum 80

E. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be compatible with the grout and shall conform to the following requirements:

a. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.

b. Use admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and add separately to the grout mix.

c. Chemical admixtures for flowing concrete grout shall comply with ASTM C1017. d. Water reducing, retarding admixture:

1) The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494 Type D requirements and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.

2) Acceptable manufacturers: a) Euclid Chemical Co., "Eucon Retarder-75". b) BASF, "MasterSet R 100". c) Sika Corporation, “Plastiment". d) Approved Equal.

2.03 ADHESIVES

A. Adhesive for pressure injection of cracks in concrete: A two-component, moisture tolerant, low viscosity, liquid epoxy adhesive conforming to ASTM

C881 for load-bearing applications. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. BASF, "SCB Concresive 1380”. b. Sika Chemical Co, “Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV”, c. Euclid Chemical Co., "Eucopoxy Injection Resin". d. Approved Equal.


B. Adhesive for doweling of anchors and reinforcing bars in concrete: A two-component, moisture tolerant, epoxy gel conforming to ASTM C881 for load-bearing

applications. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Sika Corporation, " Sika AnchorFix-3001" b. Simpson Strong Tie., "Set XP" c. Hilti, “HIT RE 500 V3”, d. Powers Fasteners, Inc., “PE 1000+” e. Approved Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Mix, place and cure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. For grouting of equipment base plates, refer to manufacturer's instructions for appropriate procedures.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations, and all loose material or foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of grout or mortar.

B. Inspect base plate and anchor systems for rust, oil, and other deleterious substances that may affect the bond or performance of grout.

C. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured sufficiently to attain its design strength and limit further shrinkage.

D. Verify that temperature of cementitious or epoxy grout does not exceed manufacturer's recommendations.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Roughen all concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, chipping, or other mechanical means to

assure bond. Loose or broken concrete shall be removed. All grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious materials that may affect

bond that were identified in the inspection process shall be completely removed from concrete and bottoms of base plates. All metal surfaces should have a 2 to 3 mil peak-to-valley profile for epoxy grouts.

For cementitious mortars and grouts, concrete shall be saturated surface damp. Any standing water shall be removed prior to placing grouts.

For epoxy grouts, do not wet concrete surfaces with water. Instead, where required, wet surfaces with epoxy for horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical or overhead work prior to placing epoxy grouts.

B. Forms and Headboxes for Cementitious or Epoxy Grouts: Forms for grouts shall be built of material with adequate strength to withstand the placement of

grouts. Forms must be rigid and liquid tight. All cracks and joints shall be caulked with an elastomeric

sealant. All forms shall be lined with polyethylene for easy grout release. Forms carefully waxed with two coats of heavy-duty paste wax shall also be acceptable.

Forms shall be 4 to 6 inches higher than the base plate on one side of the base plate configuration when using head pressure for placement.


A sufficient number of headboxes shall be built to facilitate placement of grouts. Air relief holes a minimum 1/8 inch in diameter shall be provided when required by a base plate

configuration to avoid entrapping air underneath.

3.04 NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT

A. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with the grout manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not retemper grout by adding more water after stiffening.

3.05 EPOXY GROUT

A. Prime concrete in accordance with the grout manufacturer's instructions.

B. Epoxy grouts shall be mixed in complete units. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the mix.

C. Mix until aggregate is uniformly wetted. Over mixing will cause air entrapment in the mix.

3.06 DOWEL INSTALLATION

A. Install per adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Obstructions in Drill Path. Locate holes in existing concrete to miss existing reinforcing. Prior to drilling holes, field verify and

mark the location of existing reinforcing using a pachometer or other approved locating equipment. When reinforcing steel is encountered in the drill path, slant drill to clear obstruction. Drill shall not

be slanted more than 10 degrees. Where slanting the drill does not resolve the conflict the Contractor shall stop and notify the Project Representative and resolve the conflict to the satisfaction of the Project Representative. For threaded anchor rods intended to be installed plumb, drilled holes shall not be slanted unless approved by Project Representative prior to drilling the holes. For threaded anchor rods that encounter an obstruction, the solution shall be one approved by the Project Representative.

Abandoned dowel or anchor holes shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout and struck off flush with the adjacent surface.

3.07 CURING

A. Cementitious Grouts: Clean equipment and tools as recommended by the grout manufacturer. Cure Grouts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Keep grout

moist for a minimum of 3 days. The method needed to protect grouts will depend on temperature, humidity, and wind. Wet burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding, and, in extreme conditions, a combination of methods shall be employed.

Grouts shall be maintained above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until they have attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch, or above 70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from subsequent freezing.

B. Epoxy Grouts: Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and recommendations. Do not wet

cure epoxy grouts. Consult the manufacturer for appropriate cure schedule. In no case should any surface in contact

with epoxy grout be allowed to fall below 50 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement.


3.08 TESTING

A. To ensure compliance with the specified requirements for grout, provide the services of an independent testing laboratory that complies with the requirements of ASTM E329The testing laboratory will sample and test grout materials and submit results to the Project Representative.

B. During the course of construction, the Project Representative may take separate field samples of the following materials for confirming tests:

Cement. Aggregates. Cement grout mixture. Commercially manufactured grout products.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 03 83 00 - 1 CONCRETE CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 03 83 00

CONCRETE CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of work, including but not limited to the following:

Saw-cutting of new rectangular openings in existing concrete slabs and walls. Core drilling of new circular openings in existing concrete slabs and walls. Chipping of existing concrete to provide for construction of new concrete and/or placement of new

patching material for building up or resurfacing of existing concrete. Providing support for the cored and/or sawcut concrete, and removal and disposal of the cored

and/or sawed concrete, control of drilling water and cleaning all slurry and debris that results from the operations.

Cutting of existing reinforcing bars and/or anchors and patching over locations where bars have been cut.

Preparation of concrete surface to receive new patching material and installation of new patching material.



Reference Title

ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials

International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI)

110.1 - Guide Specifications for Structural Concrete Repair

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects the following: Structural integrity of the element. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture-resistant elements. Visual qualities of elements exposed to sight. Operations of the facility.

C. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 2 weeks before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

Extent: At each occurrence indicated on the Drawings, describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate what construction equipment will be employed to complete the work, and equipment to be used to locate embedded reinforcing bars, pipe, and conduits.

Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching

procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.


Method to control drilling water and spoils. Method to support and remove concrete cores and saw-cut debris. Project Representative’s Review: Obtain review of cutting and patching proposal before cutting

and patching.


A. Qualifications: Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching work. Contractor performing cutting and patching work shall have at least 3 years prior experience performing similar work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Acceptable products for patching and/or resurfacing of damaged surface areas on existing concrete slabs and/or defective and non-conforming work:

Transpatch High Strength Patching Compound as manufactured by US Spec Company. Sikagard 75 EpoCem epoxy/cement combination mortar as manufactured by Sika Corporation. Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the work and to: Fit several parts together, to integrate with other work. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. Restore existing surfaces exposed by removal of work. Uncover work to install or replace ill-timed work. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

B. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. Inspect all cut or cored surfaces to ensure that no electrical conduits or other piping (air, water, etc.) has been cut during the cutting or coring operation. Report any issues to the Project Representative immediately. For patching of existing concrete surfaces, comply with applicable recommendations of patching material manufacturer and ICRI Guide Specifications for Structural Concrete Repair, including preparation and roughening of the surface to receive the new material, and curing of the new material after it has been placed. As a minimum, conform to tolerances listed in ACI 117.

C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. When cutting rectangular openings in concrete slabs and walls, use method that will not overcut the opening dimensions at the corners of the opening. Acceptable methods may include the following:

Cut the opening with a concrete chain saw and avoid any overcut at the corners. Prior to cutting the opening, core drill each corner and sawcut only up to the cored opening, and

chip the remaining concrete at each corner.

D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. Integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction: completely seal voids.

F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish the entire unit.


G. Water, slurry and debris from the core drilling and saw-cutting shall not be permitted to flow away from the immediate area of the work.

H. Cut cores and sawed concrete sections shall be supported on scaffolding or similar means of support placed beneath the work. The cut sections shall not be permitted to drop free.

I. The concrete cores and debris shall be removed and disposed of offsite without damage to existing facilities.

J. The concrete slurry and debris shall be removed and disposed of offsite without damage to existing structures, paving, utilities, plantings or other improvements at the site.

3.02 NEW OPENINGS IN EXISTING CONCRETE SLABS AND WALLS

A. New rectangular openings in existing concrete slabs and walls shall be cut using the following procedure or a similar procedure proposed by the Contractor that will avoid overcutting at the corners of the opening:

Prior to sawcutting the opening in the slab or wall, a round hole shall be core-drilled at each corner of the rectangle to create a stopping point for the sawcut. The core-drilled hole shall be of sufficient diameter to allow the concrete saw to cut the slab to the hole without having the saw blade extend beyond the hole.

The sides of the opening shall be sawcut from hole to hole at all four sides of the rectangle, using care to stop the cut at the core-drilled hole so as to not overcut at the corners of the opening.

After removing the concrete that was cut in (ii) above, the remaining concrete at the corners of the rectangular opening shall be removed by chipping hammer to create the 90-degree corners required to complete the opening.

B. New circular openings in existing concrete slabs and walls shall be cut using standard core-drilling methods unless approved otherwise.

3.03 CUTTING OF EXISTING REINFORCING BARS

A. Existing reinforcing bars that become exposed due to demolition and/or removal of portions of existing concrete shall be treated as follows depending on the applicable condition:

Reinforcing bars designated to be saved and protected and incorporated into new concrete pours shall be protected from damage as much as practical. Bars shall not be field bent from their existing configuration in order to facilitate concrete removal unless approved by the Project Representative or noted on the design drawings.

Projecting reinforcing bars that are not to be incorporated into new concrete pours shall be cut off one-half inch below the concrete surface and the hole patched with epoxy grout.

Reinforcing bars that are cut through by saw-cutting operations and are flush with the cut surface of the concrete shall have the cut ends coated with two coats of an approved liquid epoxy coating material to prevent corrosion except for the following condition. If the cut ends of the bars are exposed on the top surface of a slab or on the exposed face of a wall, then the bars shall be cut or ground down one-half inch below the finished concrete surface and the hole filled with epoxy grout.

3.04 EXISTING ANCHOR BOLTS OR ANCHOR RODS

A. Existing anchor bolts or anchor rods projecting from the finished face of concrete due to removal of existing equipment or other installations and no longer needed shall be cut off one-half inch below the finished face of concrete and the hole filled with epoxy grout.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 05 05 19 - 1 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS

SECTION 05 05 19

POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies post-installed anchorage to concrete, complete with washers and nuts.

B. Post-installed concrete anchorage systems required to secure the various parts together and provide a complete installation are generally indicated on the Drawings. Where the anchorage design is absent, or insufficiently detailed to complete the installation, provide the anchorage design and submit for approval.

C. The tabulation of items herein is not intended to be all inclusive, and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide all metalwork and castings shown, specified, or which can reasonably be inferred as necessary to complete the project.



Reference Title

ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service, or Both


ASTM C882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear

ASTM D648 Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position

ASTM D695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics

ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

AC 193 Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements

AC 308 Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements

ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary

ACI 355.4 Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete and Commentary

IBC International Building Code, Current Edition

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's product data. Manufacturer's information showing the recommended installation equipment and procedures for

the following: a. Mechanical anchors (expansion, undercut, screw etc.). b. Adhesive anchor shall include instructions for the safe handling of adhesives.



A. The diameter and capacity of post-installed concrete anchors shall be as recommended or required by the equipment or machinery manufacturer, including any recommended or required adjustment for seismic conditions listed in Section 01 73 00. In case of conflicting or ambiguous recommendations or requirements, the most stringent shall apply.

1.05 EXPOSURE CONDITIONS

A. Dry: indoor spaces not subject to moisture, washdown, hydrogen sulfide gas or chemicals.

B. Wet and/or corrosive: outdoor areas, or indoor areas subject to moisture, washdown, hydrogen sulfide gas or chemicals.

C. Submerged: at or below a point 1.5 foot above maximum fluid surface.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, all non-submerged surfaces shall be considered wet or corrosive.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, materials shall conform to the following: Anchor bolts and anchor rods:

a. Stainless steel: ASTM F593 Alloy Group 2 (AISI 316), Condition CW1 or CW2 as appropriate. Threaded rod:

a. Stainless steel: ASTM F593 Alloy Group 2 (AISI 316), Condition CW1 or CW2 as appropriate. Nuts: (Heavy Hex)

a. Stainless steel: ASTM F594 Alloy Group 2 (AISI 316), Condition CW1 or CW2 as appropriate. Washers:

a. Stainless steel: ASTM A194 Type 316.

B. Fasteners: all components of mating fasteners, bolts, nuts and washers, of the same material and coated by the same process.

2.02 CONCRETE ANCHORS

A. Mechanical anchors: Mechanical anchors shall have an ICC Evaluation Service Report (ESR) indicating compliance with

the requirements of IBC for use in cracked and uncracked concrete for the anchor type and concrete strength conditions for which the anchor will be used. The ESR shall indicate IBC compliance for use under seismic loading conditions. The basis of the ESR shall be Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements (AC193)

Acceptable Manufacturers a. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., “STRONG-BOLT 2” (expansion) b. Hilti, Inc., Kwik-Bolt KB-TZ (expansion), and HDA (undercut) c. Powers Fasteners, Inc., “Power-Stud+ SD6” stainless steel anchors (expansion), and

Atomic+Undercut d. Approved Equal

B. Adhesive Anchors: Adhesive anchors shall have an ICC Evaluation Service Report (ESR) indicating compliance with

the requirements of IBC for use in cracked and uncracked concrete for the anchor type and concrete strength conditions for which the anchor will be used. The ESR shall indicate IBC compliance for use under seismic loading conditions. The basis of the ESR shall be Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements (AC308)

Do not use where fire or elevated temperatures exceeding 150 degrees F can occur, unless specifically shown otherwise.


Adhesive anchors installed horizontally or upwardly inclined shall be qualified in accordance with ACI 355.4 requirements for sensitivity to installation direction.

Epoxy Adhesive: a. Meet ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 3, Class A, B, or C. b. Two-component, 100 percent solids, non-sag, paste, insensitive to moisture, designed to be

used in adverse freeze/thaw environments, and gray in color. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and environmental conditions.

Mixed Epoxy Adhesive: Non-sag paste consistency holding the following properties: a. Slant Shear Strength, ASTM C881 and ASTM C882, No Failure in Bond Line, Dry/Moist

Conditions: 5,000 psi. b. Compressive Strength, ASTM D695: 14,000 psi minimum. c. Tensile Strength, ASTM D695: 4,500 psi. d. Heat Deflection Temperature, ASTM D648: 135 degrees F, minimum.

Epoxy Adhesive Packaging: a. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both epoxy components in

the proper mixing ratio and fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun. b. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes components and places

epoxy at base of predrilled hole. c. Mixing Nozzles: Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate sizes of anchor

rods. d. Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturer's name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product

expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions. Storage of Epoxy adhesive:

a. Store epoxy cartridges on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area. b. Control temperature above 60 degrees F and dispose of cartridges if shelf life has expired. If

stored at temperatures below 60 degrees F, test adhesive prior to use to determine if adhesive meets specified requirements.

Acceptable manufacturers: a. Simpson Strong Tie, “Set-XP” b. Hilti, "HIT-RE 500 V3” c. Powers Fasteners, Inc., "PE1000+" d. Approved Equal.

C. Post-installed concrete anchors shall be qualified for earthquake loading in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4.

D. Provide concrete anchors for the exposure conditions as noted below: Dry exposure: stainless steel. Wet or submerged exposure: stainless steel.

2.03 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENER LUBRICANT (ANTI-SEIZING)

A. Where stainless steel nuts and threaded fasteners are used, apply anti-seizing lubricant to the threads prior to making up the connections. Lubricant shall be manufactured and labeled for use with stainless steel and shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc, or copper.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All machinery or equipment with moving parts and all structural steel shall be anchored using adhesive or cast-in anchor bolts.

C. Cutting and welding: not permitted.


D. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators.

E. Provide beveled washers where mating surface is not square with the anchor bolt.

3.02 ANCHOR BOLT HOLES IN EQUIPMENT

A. Shall not exceed the bolt diameters by more than: Bolts smaller than 1-inch: 25 percent Bolts 1-inch and larger: 1/4-inch.

3.03 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall not begin until the concrete or masonry receiving the anchors has attained its design strength.

B. Prior to drilling for any post-installed concrete anchors, locate all reinforcing and post tensioning as required in the drawings.

For post-installed concrete anchors installed in the Sludge Tank walls locate by means of X-ray or ground penetrating radar.

Review the results of the X-ray or ground penetrating radar with the Project Representative for approval prior to drilling the Sludge Tank walls.

Adjust the area shown on the drawings as areas that drilling is not permitted to correspond with the post tensioning tendon locations found during the X-ray or ground penetrating radar testing.

Do not drill into any reinforcing or post-tensioning.

C. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Use manufacturer's recommended drills and equipment.

E. Unless otherwise specified, embedded length shall not include housekeeping pads or fill grout.

F. Adhesive anchors shall not be installed when the temperature of the concrete is below 35 degrees F or above 110 degrees F.

G. Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be performed by personnel certified by an applicable certification program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent.

H. Adhesive anchors installed in horizontal or upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension loads shall be continuously inspected during installation by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by Project Representative. The special inspector shall furnish a report to the licensed design professional and Project Representative that the work covered by the report has been performed and that the materials used, and the installation procedures used conform with the approved construction documents and the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII).

I. Furnish manufacturer's representative, for each type of concrete anchor used, to the jobsite to conduct jobsite training for proper installation, handling, and storage of each anchor system for personnel as required. Notify Project Representative of training session schedule.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 05 05 23 - 1 METAL FASTENINGS

SECTION 05 05 23

METAL FASTENINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies all metal fastenings, complete with washers and nuts, except cast-in concrete anchors and post-installed anchors.

B. Metal fastening systems required to secure the various metal parts together and provide a complete installation are generally indicated on the Drawings. Where the fastening design is absent, or insufficiently detailed to complete the installation, provide the fastening design and submit for approval.

C. The tabulation of items herein is not intended to be all inclusive, and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide all metalwork and castings shown, specified, or which can reasonably be inferred as necessary to complete the project.



Reference Title

ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM B695 Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel

ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

ASTM F959 Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicator for

Use with Structural Fasteners

ASTM F1136 Standard Specification for Zinc/Aluminum Corrosion Protective Coatings for

Fasteners

ASTM F2329 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to

Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners

ASTM F3125 Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat

Treated, 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

RCSC 2014 Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: 1. Detailed shop drawings. 2. Preparation and installation or application instructions, as appropriate. 3. Certificates of Compliance that products meet chemical and mechanical requirements of standards

specified.


4. Manufacturer’s inspection test report results for production lot(s) provided, to include: a. Tensile strength. b. Yield strength. c. Reduction of area. d. Elongation and hardness.

5. Certified mill test reports for bolts and nuts: a. Name and address of manufacturer. b. Bolts correctly marked. c. Marked bolts and nuts used in required mill tests and manufacturer’s inspection tests.

6. Direct tension indicators (DTIs): Provide manufacturer’s test report meeting requirements of ASTM F959.

7. Tension control (TC) bolts: Provide manufacturer’s test report meeting requirements of ASTM F3125.

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Protect fasteners from dirt and moisture. Do not remove lubricant from bolts and nuts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. High-Strength Bolts: 1. Conventional bolts: ASTM F3125 Grade A325, or Grade A490, as specified. Twist-off-type tension-

control bolts: ASTM F3125, Grade F1852, or Grade F2280, as specified. 2. Stainless bolts: ASTM F593, Allow Group 2, CW1. Nuts: (Heavy Hex)

a. Carbon and alloy steel: Nut grade and finish shall conform to ASTM A563. b. Stainless steel: ASTM F594.

3. Washers: a. Hardened steel washers: ASTM F436. b. Stainless steel washers: Type 316.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Bolt assembly furnish: 1. A325 bolt assemblies: plain, or hot-dip zinc coated per ASTM F2329, or Zn/Al inorganic per ASTM

F1136 Grade 3. 2. F1852 bolt assemblies: plain, or mechanically coated per ASTM B695. 3. A490 bolt assemblies: plain, or Zn/Al inorganic per ASTM F1136 Grade 3. 4. F2280 bolt assemblies: plain. 5. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly.

2.03 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENER LUBRICANT (ANTI-SEIZING)

A. Where stainless steel nuts and threaded fasteners are used, apply anti-seizing lubricant to the threads prior to making up the connections. Lubricant shall be manufactured and labeled for use with stainless steel and shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc, or copper.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install high-strength bolts per Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.

B. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators.

C. Provide beveled washers where mating surface is not square with the bolt.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF HIGH-STRENGTH BOLT

A. Tighten in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.

B. Hardened washers: 1. Provide at locations required by Washer Requirements section of AISC Specification for Structural

Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 2. Use beveled style and extra thickness where required by AISC Specification. 3. Use square or rectangular beveled washers at inner flange surfaces of American Standard beams

and channels. 4. Do not substitute DTIs for hardened flat washers required at slotted and oversized holes.

C. Connections not fully tensioned (N, X): Tighten to snug tight condition. Use hardened washer over slotted or oversize holes in outer plies.

3.03 MISFITS AT BOLTED CONNECTIONS

A. Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, immediately notify Project Representative for approval of one of the following methods of corrections: 1. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts and use oversize bolts. 2. Plug weld misaligned holes and redrill holes to admit standard size bolts. 3. Drill additional holes in connection, conforming to AISC Standards for bolt spacing and end and

edge distances, and add additional bolts. 4. Reject member containing misfit, incorrect sized, misaligned holes and fabricate new member to

ensure proper fit.

B. Do not enlarge incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins.


A. Inspect: 1. Marking identification and conformance to ASTM standards. 2. Alignment of bolt holes. 3. Placement, type, and thickness of hardened washers. 4. Tightening of bolts.

B. Bearing-type connections not fully tensioned (N, X): Snug tight condition with piles of joint in firm contact.

C. Fully tensioned bearing and slip critical connections: 1. Conduct pre-installed test. 2. Monitor installation and tightening of DTIs or TC bolts. 3. Monitor condition of faying surfaces for slip critical connections.

D. Pre-installation test: 1. Conduct jobsite test prior to start of work using a bolt tension measuring device. 2. Select representative sample of not less than three bolts of each diameter, length, and grade. 3. Include DTIs and flat hardened washers as required to match actual connection assembly. 4. Conduct test in accordance with Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.

E. Nondestructive testing (NDT) report: Prepare and submit a written NDT report identifying location of inspected bolted connections and summary of corrections as required to meet code acceptance criteria.

F. Defective connections: Correct and re-inspect defective and improperly tightened high-strength bolted connections. Retest fully tensioned bolts as necessary to demonstrate compliance of completed work.


3.05 GALVANIZING REPAIR

A. Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of the zinc coating shall be repaired in accordance with the recommendations of ASTM A780 as required by the Project Representative.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 05 50 00 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies fabricated metal items and other miscellaneous metalwork, stainless steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, or metals with coating systems.



Reference Title

NAAMM MBG 531-00

Metal Bar Grating Manual

ASTM A36 Structural Steel

ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless

ASTM A108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality

ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanize) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A312 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A479 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Pressure Vessels

ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A588 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 Ksi{345 Mpa} Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

ASTM A606 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A786 Rolled Steel Floor Plates

ASTM A793 Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel

ASTM A847 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

ASTM B695 Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel

ASTM F844 Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

ASTM F3125 Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy

Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel

AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specifications.

C. Detailed shop drawings.

D. Welding/welding operator AWS or WABO certificates and qualifications for the work being performed.

E. Welding procedures.


A. Shop and field welding shall conform to the requirements of: All carbon steel fabrications: AWS D1.1. All stainless steel fabrications AWS D1.6.

B. The use of salvaged, reprocessed or scrap materials will not be permitted.

C. All welding: by: All fabrications: AWS or WABO certified welders.

D. Observation of Work: The Project Representative shall have access to any fabrication site or shop for the purpose of observing fabrication of items, structures, equipment, piping, electrical and other components which will be used in or incorporated in the work.

E. Notification of Start of Work: Notify the Project Representative in advance of the start of fabrication. For fabrication sites within 50 miles of the project site, provide 48 hours notice. For fabrication sites greater than 50 miles from the project site, provide 7 days notice.

F. Notification of Finish Work: Notify the Project Representative in advance of applying finish. For fabrication sites within 50 miles of the project site, provide 48 hours notice. For fabrication sites greater than 50 miles from the project site, provide 7 days notice.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Sheets, plates and shapes: ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Square/rectangular tubing: ASTM A1085 Round tubing: ASTM A1085 Nuts: ASTM A563 galvanized Washers: ASTM F844 galvanized High-strength Bolts: ASTM F3125, Grade A325, Type 1, galvanized, unless noted otherwise.

B. Stainless Steel: Sheets and plates: ASTM A240, Type 316 or 316L Shapes, bars, and similar items: ASTM A276 or ASTM A479, Type 316 or 316L Pipe: ASTM A312, Type 316 or 316L

C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded AWS D1.6/D1.6M; for Stainless Steel


D. Metal Bar Grating: Metal Bar Grating shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 for galvanized

welded steel grating. All grating: banded unless noted otherwise. NAAMM MBG 531. Depth: Match existing grating being removed and replaced. Minimum rectangular bearing bar size: Match existing grating being removed and replaced. Cross bars: Match existing grating being removed and replaced. Finish: Match existing grating being removed and replaced.

2.02 ANCHORAGE

A. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication. Anchorage to concrete: in accordance with Section 05 05 23.

2.03 LIFTING LUGS

A. Individual equipment and/or each field disassemblable part weighing in excess of 50 pounds: fitted with lifting lugs for easy handling.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. As listed in Section 05 05 23.

B. Finish: unless otherwise indicated, carbon steel bolts, screws, nuts, washers and all other steel fasteners: mechanically zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 50.

C. Thread lubricant for stainless steel fasteners: where stainless steel bolts and threaded fasteners are used, apply anti-seizing lubricant to the threads prior to making up the connections. Lubricant: manufactured and labeled for use with stainless steel and shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc or copper.

2.05 PIPE SLEEVES

A. ASTM A312, Type 316 or 316L, Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves with continuously welded 3/16” thick seep ring with an outside diameter 3 inches greater than the sleeve outside diameter.

2.06 FINISH

A. Unless otherwise indicated: Steel items weighing 100 pounds or less: hot-dip zinc-coated, ASTM A123 or ASTM A153. Steel items weighing more than 100 pounds: coated as indicated in Section 09 90 00. Stainless steel: none.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify measurements at the site.

B. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

C. Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.

D. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates.


3.02 FABRICATION

A. All fabrications: conform to AWS D1.1 for carbon steel or AWS D1.6 for stainless steel minimum.

B. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt-tight, flush, and hairline. Remove all burrs and weld splatter. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

C. Punch holes 1/16-inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Whenever needed because of the thickness of the metal, subpunch and ream or drill holes.

D. Perform fabrication including cutting, drilling, punching, threading and tapping required for miscellaneous metal or adjacent work prior to hot-dip galvanizing.

3.03 FINISH

A. Welds and adjacent are to be prepared such that there are: No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld beads. No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted. No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead.

B. All embedded pieces of electrode or wire and the adjacent weld: removed and replaced with new welds.

C. Obtain Project Representatives approval before applying finish.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb, level and square, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Allow for erection loads and provide temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Fieldwork shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Drilling of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be allowed.

D. Protect encased or embedded dissimilar metals (both metals must be encased or embedded) from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators.

E. Place metalwork to be embedded in concrete accurately and hold in correct position while the concrete is placed or, if indicated, form recesses or blockouts in the concrete. Thoroughly clean the surfaces of metalwork in contact with or embedded in concrete. If accepted, recesses may be neatly cored in the concrete after it has attained its design strength and the metalwork grouted in place.

F. Seat angles, supports and guides: Set seat angles for grating and supports for floor plates so that they maintain the grating and floor plates flush with the floor.

G. Pipe Sleeves Provide a pipe sleeve wherever a pipe or similar item passes through concrete. If not otherwise shown in the drawings provide a caulking sealant or a mechanical seal to form a

watertight seal of the annular space between pipes and pipe sleeves.


3.05 FIELD REPAIR OF COATINGS

A. Galvanized: Maximum area to be repaired: no more than 1/2 of 1 percent of the surface area or 36 sq. in. per

ton of piece weight, whichever is less. Damage in excess of this requirement: repaired by stripping and recoating entire piece.

Clean damaged areas to SSPC-SP5. Repair with zinc-rich paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with ASTM A780, Annex A2. Minimum thickness requirements: in accordance with ASTM A123, Paragraph 6.2.3.

Use zinc-rich repair paint. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. ZRC Galvilite. b. LPS Cold Galvanize c. Approved Equal.

B. Painted: after installation, clean and touch up damaged areas of with the same materials used for the shop coat.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 07 54 00 - 1 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07 54 00

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, equipment and materials to install a Single-Ply Fleece-Backed roofing system over existing thermoplastic membrane totaling approximately 125 square feet.

B. Remove existing roof systems down to the concrete deck where slope revision is required to facilitate drainage.

C. Install specified insulation, cover board insulation, and roofing system: Prime existing concrete deck at a rate of 1 gallon per 100 sq. ft. Set new polyisocyanurate roof insulation and crickets in cold process adhesive. Set gypsum insulation cover board in cold process adhesive. Set Single-Ply membrane in cold process adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer. Seal seams by hot air welding.

D. Install specified flashings, coping, and sheet metal.

E. Repair or patch where the existing membrane roofing has been compromised by the work under this contract.


A. General: Obtain primary roofing materials from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as

recommended by manufacturer and warrantor of primary materials. Roofing materials, installation methods and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the

material manufacturer's recommendations, the NRCA 5th Edition Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, SMACNA manual, FM Global, Underwriters Laboratory and ASTM standards. The most stringent standards shall apply where these are in conflict or when the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings exceed those of the manufacturer.

Refer to Section 01 14 00 for weather constraints. Installation of the roofing system shall not begin until all moisture has been totally dried from the roofing area.

B. Qualification of Installers: Installers must specialize in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project and who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. Installers must have successfully installed at least 15 fully adhered single-ply roof assemblies or have 5 years of experience installing fully adhered single-ply roof systems of the same materials and methods specified for this project. Installation of roofing system shall be performed by a single roofing contractor completely familiar with the products specified and the roofing manufacturer's recommended methods of installation. Contractor must be approved by the manufacturer prior to contract award and throughout the installation and be able to present a copy of his/her certification upon request by the Project Representative.

C. Roofing Manufacturer/Supplier Must: Provide a list of at least 5 projects available for inspection employing same roofing system within a 200 mile radius of the site.

D. The contractor shall test the substrate prior to the installation of the roofing system. Using the ASTM D 4541-95 Test Method as amended herein, set a 50mm dolly in Type III asphalt at a location designated by the King County Representative.


E. Once the asphalt adhesive is cured the calibrated Type III self-aligning Adhesion Tester must reach a minimum of 150 psi prior to adhesive failure to assure proper adhesion to the roof deck.

F. Material Samples: During the course of the work, the Project Representative shall be allowed to secure samples of the materials being used from the containers on the jobsite and submit them to an independent testing laboratory for comparison. All non-approved material installed or stored shall be removed from the construction site until it has been tested. Installed materials that do not conform to the contract shall be removed at no additional cost to King County.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Materials Submit shop drawing showing layout, details of construction and identification of materials. Submit tapered insulation layout identifying insulation thickness, slopes, and average R-value. Submit four copies of the technical data on roofing materials, including material specifications,

Material Safety Data Sheets, and installation procedures. Roofing material manufacturer shall provide written verification that major roofing components, including but not limited to asphalts, coatings, cold process adhesives, roofing ply sheets, reinforcement fabric felts and mats, mastics, and sealants are all compatible with each other.

Submit four copies of the technical data on insulation, sheet metal, flashings, lumber, sealants, and fasteners specified in Sections 07 62 00, and 07 54 00.

Copy of material manufacturer’s 10-Year labor and material warranty. Refer to Section 07 54 00 Paragraph1.12.

Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system.

C. List of material manufacturer’s qualifying projects. Refer to Section 07 54 00 Paragraph 1.02C.

1.04 REGULARTORY REQUIRMENTS

A. 2015 International Building Code

B. FM Global 4470 approved materials using FM 1-90 for Wind Uplift.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. “Class A Roofing System”.

D. NFPA 820, Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities, refer to Section 01 35 29.


A. Manufacturer's Responsibilities: In addition to the field inspection requirements during construction the manufacturer’s technical representative shall be available within 24 hours notice during the entire course of the project for site inspection and consultation.

B. Contractor's Responsibilities: Keep manufacturer's technical representative informed of project schedule and status. Any deficiencies noted during inspections must be corrected by the Contractor and approved by the

Project Representative. Refer to 07540 3.13.

1.06 FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION [NOT USED]


1.07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. All King County and OSHA safety rules shall be adhered to in the execution of this work. The fumes of materials may be toxic to some workers. Adequate protection shall be provided, to prevent burns and skin irritation, in accordance with building owner safety requirements and Contractor’s Accident Prevention Program (APP) and Health and Safety Plan (HASP).

B. Refer to NFPA 820, Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities, and to Section 01 35 29.

1.08 ROOF TRAFFIC

A. After work on roof is started, no traffic will be permitted on the roof other than that necessary for the roofing application and inspection. Materials shall not be piled on the roof to the extent that design live loads are exceeded. Roofing materials shall not be transported over unfinished or finished roofing or existing roofs unless adequate protection is provided.

B. Provide temporary membrane protection on all roof surface areas adjacent the work areas. Protect any roof area used for handling or moving materials, staging and laydown areas, and any areas where work will occur. Protection should consist of: Sarnafelt NWP-HD (or equal), 1” XPS Insulation board, and ¾” Plywood (rounded corners). The roof protection should be layered in the listed order, with the Sarnafelt laid on the existing roof. See attachment A for detail. Restrict all foot traffic and material lay-down to the protected areas and existing walk pads.

C. The contractor and Project Representative shall go over the roof prior to the start of work to check the condition of the membrane. They shall identify and mark any existing punctures prior to placing the membrane protection down. The contractor is responsible for the repair of any membrane punctures caused by their construction activities.

D. Any damage to existing roofs shall be repaired as directed by Project Representative and at no expense to the County.

1.09 PROTECTION AGAINST SOILAGE

A. Surface of walls, walks, pavements, adjacent property, etc. shall be protected as necessary to prevent soiling or other damage resulting from the application of roofing or transporting of materials. If surfaces are stained or damaged in any way, they shall be restored by the Contractor at no cost to the County, in a manner acceptable to the Project Representative.

1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in new, dry, and unopened containers showing product name and manufacturer's name. Materials shall be delivered in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. Material received which is wet or is otherwise damaged shall be rejected. Any material which indicates 20% or greater (Wood Scale) moisture content on a Delmhorst moisture meter or is damp to the touch shall be deemed wet.

B. Storage should be either in a heated building or in a warehouse or similar type structure at ambient temperature and humidity. Conditions should be such that the moisture content of felts at time of use does not exceed the equilibrium moisture content (EMC) at 75% RH.

C. Storage under polyethylene or similar non-breathing film stock shall not be permitted. Rolls of flashing and felts shall be stacked on their ends and never in contact with the ground. Remove plastic packaging shrouds from insulation. Cover top and sides of all stored materials with a properly secured tarpaulin. Discard rolls which have been flattened, creased, or otherwise damaged. Store roll goods on level pallets. Do not stack pallets. Materials marked "KEEP FROM FREEZING" shall be stored in areas where temperatures will remain above 40ºF (5ºC).


D. Proper storage on or off the site shall be the responsibility of the roofing Contractor. The Contractorshall cover all materials when project is not in progress and maintain the ability at all times to cover thematerials when required.

E. Any unused roofing material remaining on the roof at the end of the workday shall be returned tostorage. Materials shall be handled in a manner to avoid bending, tearing, or other damage duringtransportation and installation. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not todamage existing construction or applied roofing.

1.11 WARRANTY INSPECTION

A. Upon completion, inspections shall be made by all parties to ascertain that the roofing system has beeninstalled according to the original roofing system warrantor’s published specifications and details, andwritten confirmation from the original roofing manufacturer’ representative that the original 10-yearwarrantee has not been compromised.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Comply with Quality Control, References, Specification and Manufacturer's data. Where conflict mayexist, requirements that are more stringent govern.

B. All components shall be products compatible with roof system and certified by the roofing materialmanufacturer as a single-source warranty roof system. All materials shall be certified as "asbestosfree".

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers:Seaman Corporation distributed by Salleeco, Inc (800-370-7821) Flex Roofing Systems Or Approved equal

2.03 ROOFING SYSTEM

A. Acceptable manufacturer:Kee-Elvaloy Reinforced Single Ply Fleece-back Membrane Roofing System

B. Must meet or exceed ASTM D4434 standard specification for poly vinyl chloride sheet roofing

C. Color: White

2.04 ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENT MATERIALS

A. Sheet MaterialsThermoplastic Field Membrane: a. Seaman Fibertite FB Membraneb. Flex FB Plus Elvaloy Membrandc. Or Approved Equal

Test Typical Value Test Method

Thickness .045 ASTM D 751

Breaking Strength 300 lbs ASTM D 751

Seam Strength 85% ASTM D 638 or ASTM D 751

Tear Strength 50 lbs ASTM D 4073

2. Or Approved Equal


Test Typical Value Test Method

Asbestos Content 0% EPA/600/R-93/116

Low Temp. Flex. -40 Degrees F ASTM D 2136

Dimensional Stability 1.0% max ASTM D 1204

Hydrostatic Resistance 400 psi ASTM D 751

Ozone Resistance Pass ASTM D 1149

B. Thermoplastic Base Flashing & Patching Membrane Seaman Fibertite Flex Or Approved Equal

C. Insulation Adhesive Seaman Fibertite FTR 601 Flex Deck Insulation Adhesive OlyBond 500 Or Approved Equal

D. Cover Boards: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X, 1/4 inch Thick.

"Dens Deck Prime" by Georgia Pacific. “Securock Primed Roof Board” by USG Or approved equal.

E. Urethane-polyester fleece membrane flashing system and related surface fillers and primers. Alsan Flashing System, Soprema (urethane coating, PolyFleece fabric, H80 primer) Parapro 123 Flashing System, Siplast (ProResin, ProFleece, ProPrimer) Or approved equal

F. Wood Blocking and Curbs: Lumber: American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) No. 2 grade Southern Pine; free from

warping and visible decay; pressure-treated according to AWPA Standard U1 for lumber and timber with copper azole, CA-B/CA-C or Standard P25-10 (SBX), to a retention of .1 lb/ft3 for above ground use.

Cant strips shall be ASTM C728-82, perlite, 4" x 4" cut on bias, and adhered per Section 07 54 00 Paragraph 3.07.

2.05 MECHANICAL FASTENERS

A. Wood to wood: No. 10 coated or hot dip galvanized screw compatible with SBX or CA pressure treated lumber and

long enough to penetrate underlay blocking 1-1/4 inches Acceptable manufacturers: Grabber Construction Products, Concord, CA.; ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL.;

or approved equal.

B. Wood to concrete: 1/4 inch diameter, Phillips flat head anchor long enough to provide minimum 1-1/2 inches

embedment Acceptable manufacturers: Construction Fasteners, Inc., Wyomissing, PA.; ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL.

or approved equal.

C. Termination bars or metal channels to masonry/concrete: 1/4 inch diameter, Phillips flat head anchor with EPDM washer long enough to provide 1-1/4”

embedment minimum Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1 inch wide, roll formed and prepunched


Acceptable manufacturers: Construction Fasteners, Inc., Wyomissing, PA.; ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL. or approved equal.

D. Roofing plies to wood: Nails: Spiral or annular ring shank, twelve (12) gage minimum, with integral 1 inch cap. Acceptable manufacturers: National Nail Corp., Grand Rapids, MI.; Simplex Nails, Inc., Americus,

GA. or approved equal.

E. Sheet metal to sheet metal: Stainless-steel rivets.

F. Drawband: Gold Seal stainless steel worm gear clamp by Murray Corporation, Cockeysville, MD., Power-Seal stainless steel worm drive clamp by Breeze Clamp Company, Saltsburg, PA., or approved equal.

2.06 INSULATION

A. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type II, 1.35-lb/cu.ft. minimum density.

B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope indicated, but not less than ¼ inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2.07 SHEET METAL

A. Refer to Section 07 62 00

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, seam calk, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions as satisfactory to receive work.

B. Do not begin roofing until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions.

C. Verify that work of other trades penetrating roof deck or requiring workers and equipment to traverse roof deck has been approved by the Project Representative and manufacturer.

D. Check projections, curbs, and deck for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, or unevenness that would prevent quality and execution of new roofing system.

3.02 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. The presence and activity of the manufacturer's representative or the Project Representative shall in no way relieve Contractor of contract responsibilities or duties.

B. Substrate: Free of foreign particles prior to laying roof membrane.

C. Traffic and equipment: Kept off completed plies until adhesive has set.

D. Wrapper and packaging materials: Not to be included in roofing system.


E. Entrapped debris: Not permitted within new membrane. Its discovery is sufficient cause for rejection.

F. Cut out and patch fishmouths/side laps which are not completely sealed. Replace all sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for protection of property during course of work. Lawns, shrubbery,

paved areas, and building shall be protected from damage. Repair damage at no extra cost to King County.

Provide at site prior to commencing removal of debris, a dumpster or dump truck to be located adjacent to building where directed by the Project Representative.

Roofing, flashings, membrane repairs, and insulation shall be installed and sealed in a watertight manner on same day of installation or before arrival of inclement weather.

Preparation work shall be limited to those areas that can be covered with installed roofing material on same day and before arrival of inclement weather.

Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing for storage, walking surface, and equipment movement. Move equipment and ground storage areas as work progresses.

Construct an enclosed chute from roof for removal of debris from roof area. Protect building surfaces at chute/set-up areas with tarpaulin. Secure tarpaulin. Remove dumpster from premises when full and empty at approved dumping or refuse area. Deliver empty dumpster to site for further use. Upon job completion, dumpster/chute shall be removed from premises. Spilled or scattered debris shall be cleaned-up immediately. Removed material to be disposed from roof as it accumulates.

At end of each day, contractor shall ensure that all roof areas are sealed with water stops along edges to prevent water entry.

Provide clean plywood walkways and take other precautions required to prevent tracking of aggregate/debris from existing membrane into new work area where aggregate/debris pieces can be trapped within new roofing membrane. Contractor shall instruct and supervise workers to ensure that aggregate/debris is not tracked into new work areas on workers shoes or equipment wheels. Discovery of entrapped aggregate/debris within new membrane is sufficient cause for its rejection.

B. Remove existing roofing Verify that roofing manufacturer’s technical representative is on site. Carefully remove existing membrane, and insulation to prevent damage to existing structures and

equipment. Remove counterflashing as indicated on drawings. Remove flashings to substrate. Remove perimeter edge metal as indicated on drawings. Reuse all existing lumber that is suitable for use in the new roofing system. Sweep clean roof deck.

3.04 CARPENTRY

A. Wood Blocking Repairs and Modifications: Reattach loose blocking; replace warped or damaged blocking. Fasten new continuous wood

blocking to the substrate with a minimum of two (2) fasteners per section. Countersink fasteners flush with blocking surface.

Blocking thickness: 2 inches nominal. Blocking width: Flush with edges.


3.05 THERMAL INSULATION

A. Prime existing concrete deck and vertical substrates with asphalt primer at a rate of 1 gallon per 100 sq. ft.

B. Adhere insulation and wood fiber cover board insulation in specified cold adhesive. Install insulation boards in courses parallel to roof edges.

Firmly butt each insulation board to surrounding boards without deforming boards. Offset joints of top layer 6 inches in both directions from joints of base layer. Maximum elevation variation between boards at joints: 1/8 inch. Cut and fit insulation boards where roof deck intersects vertical surfaces. Cut board 1/4 inch from

vertical surface. Immediately after placement, walk insulation boards into cold adhesive to achieve solid bond. Promptly spread any adhesive pools that may accumulate on insulation surface to achieve smooth

surface for roofing installation.

3.06 CRICKETS

A. Install crickets as per tapered insulation design using specified cold adhesive.

B. Install crickets with a minimum slope of ½” per foot.

C. Taper crickets to nothing.

3.07 PERLITE CANTS

A. Cant strips shall be adhered at all 90-degree angles where the horizontal installation of insulation meets the vertical sides of roof penetrations and walls using cold adhesive. Cants must be installed prior to application of membrane and flashings.

3.08 ROOF SYSTEM APPLICATION

A. Install the following prior to application of the roofing system: Wood blocking at roof edge, curbs, and penetrations. Thermal insulation. Cover Board

B. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. Extend roofing membrane up the parapet wall as noted in the drawings.

C. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

D. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

E. Cold Applied Adhesive: Apply an adhesive to substrate at temperature and rate required by manufacturer and install roofing membrane.

F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck if applicable.

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.


3.09 FLASHINGS

A. Flashing to Wood Blocking Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to

partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as

recommended by manufacturer. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end

laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed

edges of sheet flashing terminations. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination

bars.

B. Conduit and Pipe Penetrations Band top of preformed cone using a worm gear clamp. Apply specified sealant at top of cone.

3.10 SHEET METAL

A. Two-piece Counterflashing Install in accordance with Drawings, manufacturer’s instructions, SMACNA Manual, and Section 07

54 00.

3.11 DAILY WATERSTOP/TIE-INS

A. Remove embedded debris from along the termination. Width: 18 inches.

B. Install "deadman" insulation filler at insulation staggers.

C. Extend roofing plies at least twelve inches onto prepared area of adjacent roofing. Embed plies into Specified Interply Adhesive or Asphalt Mastic. Strip edges with twelve-inch wide ply sheet embedded completely in alternate uniform courses of specified Interply Adhesive.

D. At beginning of next day's work remove temporary connection by cutting felts evenly along edge of existing roof system. Remove "deadman" insulation fillers. Overlap previous day's work 24 inches.

3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair of deficiencies: Installations of details noted as deficient during final inspection must be repaired and corrected by applicator, and made ready for reinspection, within five (5) calendar days.

B. Clean-up: Immediately upon job completion, roof membrane and flashing surfaces shall be cleaned of debris. Clean drains, gutters, and downspouts of debris.


ATTATCHMENT A

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 07 62 00 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07 62 00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other sections but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the building.

B. Collection box and downspout.


A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

B. Perform the work in accordance with SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, as a minimum standard, and to normal good practice in the area except where in conflict with the Contract Documents, which shall govern.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data.

1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL

A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, except where harder temper is required for forming or performance.

Locations: Collection box, downspout, drip edge and support straps. Unless otherwise indicated, 0.0156 inch.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers, or Type 304 stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.

Use screws when fastening into wood or sheet metal. Use expansion anchors or drive pins when fastening into concrete.


B. Underlayment: No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt.

C. Sealant: Specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.03 REGLETS

A. Surface Mounted: 2-piece, snap-in type system. Match existing material and sizes. Acceptable manufactures:

a. Fry Reglet, Fry Springlok Type SM. b. C&J Metals, Tilt-Up/Surface Mount Reglet Set. c. Approved Equal.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Form components true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.

B. Fabricate collection box and downspout per SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details and as dimensioned on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces to be covered are smooth, clean, and free from holes.

B. Drive flush all projecting nails.

C. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Separate flashings from dissimilar materials by a heavy bitumastic coating on the flashing.

B. Reglets: Install level and true in forms a minimum of 7 inches above cant strip. Tape cut ends before installation. After roofing is applied install flashing by snapping into reglet without screws. Lap all joints and miter corners.

C. Install roof edge flashings at roof edge conditions.

D. Downspouts: Secure downspouts elbows and offsets to wall construction using downspout supports spaced no

more than 10 feet on center. Provide elbow at bottom of downspout to direct water away from wall surface.

E. Fastening: Whenever possible, secure metal by means of continuous clips or cleats without nailing through the

metal. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8 inches apart. Where exposed to the

weather, use neoprene washers. For nailing into wood, use 11-gage barbed roofing nails long enough to penetrate 3/4-inch. For fastening into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs. Penetrate 1 inch.


3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove damaged, defective or improperly installed materials. Replace with new materials, installed per requirements of this section.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions and maintain clean until Final Completion.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 07 92 00 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealers and joint backing for general construction.



Reference Title

ASTM C919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications

ASTM C920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D1056 Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System performance: Achieve moisture and airtight joint seals.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's product data demonstrating compliance with the Specifications.

C. Manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and application of sealants and primers.

D. Samples of material proposed for use showing color range available.


A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANTS

A. Unless specified indicated, use polyurethane sealant for all areas: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25, non-sagging or self-leveling as specified. Capable of withstanding movement up to 25 percent of joint width.


Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Sika Chemical Corporation, “Sikaflex”. b. Mameco International, “Vulkem”. c. Approved Equal.

B. Bituminous Based Sealant for contact with wastewater: Blend of refined asphalts, resins and plasticizing compounds, reinforced with fiber and asbestos-

free. Compatible with joint fillers. Pressure grade. Acceptable Manufacturer:

a. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikaflex-2C. b. Sonneborn, NP2 for non-sag or SL2 for self-leveling. c. Approved Equal.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by the sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene or polyurethane foam, cylindrical and oversized a minimum of 30 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene or polyurethane with adhesive on one side as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter, which might impair adhesion of sealant.

C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare, clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primer only to the surfaces that will be covered by the sealant.

B. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge.

3.03 GENERAL

A. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install joint backing when joints exceed the depth requirements. Insert backing to provide the joint depth specified. Provide full-length sections without splices where possible. Minimize number of splices.

C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

D. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.


E. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints, miscellaneous penetrations and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Tool joints concave unless indicated otherwise.

3.04 POLYURETHANE SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated, use on expansion joints and construction joints: Use non-sag on vertical exposed joints. Use self-leveling on horizontal exposed joints.

B. Joint dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, construct joints to the following criteria: Width: Minimum 1/4 inch and maximum 1 inch. Depth: 1/2 the width of the joint, but in no case less than 1/4-inch deep. Measure sealant depth at

the point of smallest cross section.

3.05 BITUMINOUS SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Use at joints, which will be submerged under wastewater.

B. Joint Dimensions: 2 inches deep, 1 inch wide at the top, and 3/4 inch wide at the base.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of smears or other soiling resulting from sealant application.

B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from sealant application or cleaning.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 09 06 90 - 1 SCHEDULES FOR PAINTING AND COATING

SECTION 09 06 90

SCHEDULES FOR PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies finishes and colors for rooms, equipment and other items which are to bepainted, coated, or have other architectural finishes.


A. Referenced Standards: Federal Standard 595 Paint Specification.

B. General: Unless otherwise specified, all materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicablerequirements of Section 09 90 00.

C. The King County Project Representative reserves the right to reselect any color, from the manufacturesfull range of available colors, during the submittal process. In case of conflict between requirements ofthis section and the specified or listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. In the following schedule, the coating system for each specified surface shall comply with those listed inCOATSPEC, Section 09 90 00. Coat surfaces indicated on this schedule unless specifically notedotherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Color reference numbers are from the FederalStandard 595 Paint Spec.

B. Special Equipment Colors: Paint equipment and piping as indicated, except as itemized below:Fire Protection Equipment, Pipes and Apparatus: OSHA Red. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout devices, included but not limited to, electrical disconnects for equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines under pressure: OSHA Yellow.

C. Electrical conduit is not painted if coated with PVC or specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings or inthe Specifications.


3.02 FINISH SCHEDULES

Surfaces Service Environment Coating System

Color

Miscellaneous metal- equipment, exposed conduit, piping, utilities, etc.

Interior/Exterior non-immersed, moderate corrosive environment, not exposed to sunlight

B-1 East Division: # 35622

West Division: # 34089

Miscellaneous metal- equipment, exposed conduit, piping, utilities, handrails, roof flashing, exterior doors

Interior/Exterior non-immersed, moderate corrosive environment, exposed to sunlight, salt air, abrasion resistance.

C-1 East Division: # 36270


Concrete floors Interior, traffic area, some standing water.

J-4 East Division: # 33711


For Special Equipment Colors see 3.01B.


ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

BLDG RM FUNCTION

FLOOR WALLS CEILING DOORS

REMARKS

MAT'L FINISH COLOR MAT'L FINISH COLOR MAT'L FINISH COLOR METAL

710 001 Pump Room CONC J-4 Match

Existing N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 09 90 00 - 1 COATING SYSTEMS

SECTION 09 90 00

COATING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies coatings and their surface preparation for field and shop-applied coating systems.

B. Furnish all labor, equipment, including safety equipment, superintendence, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to prepare and coat the work as specified in this Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Coating systems: Includes surface description, surface preparation, required dry film thickness, and the number and application procedure of the prime and finish coatings. Systems are as specified within this Section on the Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC).

B. Field coating: The application of the coating system after installation of the surface at the work site.

C. Dry film thickness (DFT): The thickness of a fully cured coating or coating system.

D. Wet film thickness (WFT): The thickness of a coating while wet.

E. Volatile organic content (VOC): The portion of the coating that is a compound of carbon, is photo-chemically reactive and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter or pound per gallon as defined in ASTM D3960.

F. Shop coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to the site.

G. Lead containing: Any coating that contains any detectable amount of lead.

H. Stripe coat: A coat of the specified coating, applied prior to the final coat by brush to all edges (cut or fabricated) on steel shapes, crevices, projections, welds, nuts, bolts, pits, flanges, and splice plates.

I. Hard to reach: Areas that may not be accessible with spray equipment but can be reached by brush, mitt or roller.

J. Inaccessible areas: Areas such as back-to-back angles, skip welds, and other areas that a brush, mitt, or roller cannot contact the surface.

K. pH: A measure indicating whether a solution is acidic, neutral, or alkaline.




Reference Title

ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods to Measure Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM D3960 Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings

ASTM D4138 Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means

ASTM D 4258 Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

ASTM D 4259 Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete

ASTM D4263 Standard Test Method Indicating Moisture in the Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

ASTM D4285 Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air

ASTM D4417 Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel

ASTM D4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-off Adhesion

ASTM D7234 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers

ASTM E337 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Technical Guidelines

MIL-A-22262A (SH) Military Specification, Abrasive Blasting Media, Ship Hull Blast Clean

NACE SP0188-2006 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates

NACE SP0274-2011 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings

NAPF 500-03 Surface Preparation Standard For Ductile Iron Pipe And Fittings In Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings And/Or Special Internal Linings

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council, Volume 1 - Good Painting Practices

SSPC-Paint Application-PA-2

Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Type 2 Gauges

SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning

SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC-SP 7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC-SP 10 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning

SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete

SSPC-SP 16 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals

SSPC-VIS 1-67T Visual Plates Used to Determine Blasting Standards

SSPC Good Painting Practice Volume 1

SSPC - Guide 6 Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations

SSPC - Guide 15 Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Substrates

SSPC Publication 91-12 Coating and Lining Inspection Manual

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) FOR SHOP AND FIELD

A. General: 1. Manufacturer's printed instructions: Deviations from the manufacturer's printed instructions will not

be allowed unless approved in writing by the manufacturer's representative and the Project Representative before execution of said change.

2. In the event of a disagreement between the manufacturer's printed instructions and the provisions of Section 09 90 00 the provisions of Section 09 90 00 shall prevail.

3. Test result disagreement: In the event of a discrepancy between the Contractor and Project Representative's testing equipment, both parties shall check equipment in question for proper function and calibration.


4. Make available all locations and phases of the work for access for inspection by the Project Representative or the manufacturer's representative. Contractor shall provide ventilation, egress, staging and whatever other means are required to access the work area.

5. Contractor QC personnel shall be certified as National Association of Corrosion Engineers, (NACE) CIP, Level 1, for coating work performed at the project site. Contractor QC personnel shall be certified as National Association of Corrosion Engineers, (NACE) CIP, Level 3 with Peer Review, for coating work performed away from the project site.

6. The Project Representative may approve the application of coatings specified under this section by the Contractor’s fabricators and other suppliers without direct inspection by the County provided that the fabricators and suppliers meet the requirements of 1.04A.4 and 1.04B.

B. Contractor's responsibilities: Quality control: responsible for the quality control of the coatings applied and performing check

points as specified in this Section. Schedule: prepare a schedule that is updated weekly or as necessary to show QC and QA Check

Points as specified herein, and distribute to all parties related to installation of the coating system. The schedule shall allow time for remedial work to be completed as identified by inspection at the given checkpoints. The Project Representative shall be informed within 24 hours prior to the Contractor performing the tests specified.

Reports: prepare daily inspection reports when any work is performed on site. Project Representative may require ambient conditions to be recorded as often as needed to insure specified application conditions are met, but not less than twice daily. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E337 or surface temperature instrument and dew point instrument manufacturer's instructions. Use the “Daily Coating Inspection Report 09 90 00-A” form found in Section 01 33 10. Submit copies of this report within 24 hours of coating application to the Project Representative for signature to acknowledge the report was produced in a timely manner. Submit all reports in bound form at the completion of coating work.

Over coating: verify coating compatibility and primer quality to be equal to the specified primer when over-coating a primer or coating that was applied by others. Follow the coating manufacturer’s recommendations for over coating primers beyond the recoat window.

Provide testing equipment required in this Section and as required to verify compliance with the Specifications. Record of equipment calibration must also be provided.

C. Project Representative's responsibility: QA: determine acceptance or rejection of a coating based on the given specifications. Testing: may conduct tests on ambient conditions, surface temperature, coating(s) applied, target

mil thickness, coating type (i.e. stripe coat), and coating batch numbers in accordance with SSPC Publication 91-12.

D. Checkpoints: Contractor is responsible to perform the checkpoints specified below and as required in COATSPEC. The Project Representative may perform any or all of the checkpoints listed in addition to, but not replacement of, the requirement for the Contractor to perform the inspection checkpoints as specified below.

Blotter test: Upon start-up of abrasive blasting, compressed air shall be checked daily for oil and water by blotter test per ASTM D4285.

Anchor profile: Anchor profile of an abrasively blasted surface shall be tested using Testex tape per ASTM D4417 or with a calibrated digital surface profile gauge. Test shall be conducted on the start-up of the blasting operation to insure proper selection of blast media and prior to prime coat application.

Intermediate DFT readings: DFT readings shall be taken between coats to check consistency of the application and progress toward total system thickness.

Final DFT readings: DFT readings shall be taken per SSPC PA-2 on total system thickness as criteria for final acceptance of a coating. If recoat time has been exceeded or if recommended by the manufacturer, deficient areas shall be scarified prior to top coating. Dry film thickness measurements in excess of the amounts specified in SSPC PA-2 may be acceptable if approved by the Project Representative.


Holiday testing: Perform for the entire coating per NACE SP0188-2006 in the presence of the Project Representative except for coating system M-1 and M-2. Any holidays detected shall be repaired and retested after cure of the coating is complete. For coating system M-1 test for holidays in accordance with NACE SP0274-2011 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings and manufacturer’s instructions. In cases of conflicting holiday testing requirements for M-1, the manufacturer’s instructions shall prevail.

Surface preparation: Shall be accepted by the Project Representative prior to the application of a coating.

Ambient conditions: Perform tests for relative humidity, surface temperature, dew point and ambient temperature to ensure compliance for materials applied. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E337 or surface temperature instrument and dew point instrument manufacturer's instructions

Adhesion: perform adhesion tests per ASTM D4541, ASTM D3359 Test Method B, or ASTM D7234 depending upon the substrate. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to repair any damage to the coating resulting from adhesion testing. a. Minimum adhesion values for coating systems A-1, A-2, and A-3: 400 psi with 20 mm dolly or 64

psi with 50 mm dolly b. The minimum adhesion score for coating system L-1a using ASTM D3359 Test Method B shall

be Classification 2B. Test to Determine Salt Contamination: Using the Bresle Method, the Contractor shall take 3 tests

each day at randomly selected locations during surface preparation prior to coating application. For immersed surfaces, the reading shall not exceed 30 microsiemens/cm (30 us/cm). For non-immersed surfaces, the reading shall not exceed 70 microsiemens/cm (70 us/cm). If conductivity measurements exceed the respective values, the affected surfaces shall be cleaned until conductivity levels are acceptable. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with SSPC - Guide 15 or soluble salt test kit manufacturer's instructions. This test may be waived by the Project Representative if initial tests indicate low salt concentrations.

Moisture in Concrete: perform ASTM 4263-88, Standard Test Method Indicating Moisture in the Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. If the presence of moisture is indicated, dry the substrate prior to coating application. Perform this test once for every 200 square feet of area to be coated and more frequently at darkened concrete areas. Perform Calcium Chloride Moisture Vapor Emissions Tests in accordance with ASTM F-1869 for all floors, containment, below grade applications or any other moisture tests required by the manufacturer. The Project Representative may approve adhesion testing of a small coating test patch per ASTM D7234 in lieu of moisture testing.

11. Test for de-passivation of galvanized steel: After cleaning galvanized steel by pressure wash and soap or other manufacturer-approved method, test every 100 square feet by applying a drop of Copper Sulfate test solution. Black color indicates that the galvanized steel has been de-passivated. Refer to Section 09 90 00 3.01 B.5.

12. Pressure washing QA/QC: a. Wash water temperature verification: Dispense wash water into a 5 gallon bucket. Verify that

wash water is between 120F and 130F with a calibrated infrared thermometer. b. Pump flow rate- Spray wash water into a 5 gallon bucket. Water level shall rise to 3 gallon mark in

60 seconds or less. c. Pump pressure- For a 3,000 PSI rated machine, the pressure at spray gun inlet shall be not less

than 2,900 PSI with the trigger pulled and nozzle discharging water on a calibrated pressure gauge.

d. Nozzle orifice size: Example: A properly sized new #3.5 (.048”) pressure washing nozzle will pass a # 56 (.0465”) drill bit or drill blank but will not pass a # 55 (.052”) drill bit or drill blank. A nozzle shall be replaced when its orifice passes a drill bit or drill blank .004” larger than the original orifice diameter.

E. Disputes: If questions arise concerning the acceptability of an applied coating, Tooke, adhesion, and other destructive/non-destructive tests per ASTM D 4138 may be performed to aid in resolution of the dispute. If the coating is determined to be defective, the Contractor will be responsible for the cost of repairs resulting from testing. If the coating is shown to be properly applied, the County will be responsible for the cost of inspection repairs.


1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Contractor QC personnel

C. A list of materials shall be provided before materials are delivered to the worksite.

D. A Waste Disposal Plan.

E. For each primer and finish coating, provide the manufacturer's application instructions, which shall include the following: 1. Surface preparation recommendations. 2. Primer type, where required. 3. Maximum dry and wet mil thickness per coat. 4. Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for each. 5. Curing time before submergence in liquid. 6. Thinner to be used with each coating. 7. Ventilation requirements. 8. Allowable application methods. 9. Maximum storage life. 10. Material safety data sheets. 11. Interpretation of batch code numbers. 12. Minimum and maximum relative humidity requirements. 13. Minimum and maximum surface temperature requirements. 14. Minimum and maximum ambient temperature requirements. 15. Manufacturers recommended application procedure. 16. LEED Submittal. 17. When color is not specified, provide manufacturer's range of standard colors. 18. Contractor QC personnel qualifications.

F. Provide information on blasting media including coating manufacture's recommended grit/shot size for coating systems specified.

G. Field and/or draw-down samples may be requested by the Project Representative.

H. For Systems A-2 and C-3, submit manufacturer's details for construction joints, penetrations, crack repair, and details at floor penetrations, wall bases, equipment bolts, embedded angle frames, transitions and terminations of the system and all other details specific to the structure being coated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials for field application to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer's name brand, batch number, date of manufacture, and storage life.

B. Coatings shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold. Coatings, exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer or that have been visibly damaged shall be removed from the site. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes.

1.07 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Coatings shall be applied only to surfaces that are dry, and only under such combination of humidity and temperatures of the atmosphere and surfaces to be coated as will cause evaporation rather than condensation.


B. During coating and for a period of at least 8 hours after the coating has been applied, the temperature of the surface and the atmosphere shall be maintained at a minimum of 5 degrees above the dew point unless the curing schedule for the coating permits otherwise.

C. Provide environmental controls such as heaters and/or dehumidification if atmospheric requirements as specified in this Section are not met or workdays are lost due to weather.

D. Provide ventilation if the cure time of the coating is slowed by the presence of coating or solvent vapor.

1.08 CONTAINMENT

A. Containment shall conform to SSPC-Guide 6. Level of containment shall be as specified to capture debris, contain dust, protect from adverse weather, control overspray, and provide means to control ambient conditions, and shall be as specified for the material and service conditions in the COATSPEC.

B. Containment is required whenever abrasive blasting is performed. The Contractor is responsible for any damage resulting from surface preparation or painting operations.

SSPC-GUIDE 6 - TABLE A

COMBINATIONS OF CONTAINMENT AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS COMPONENTS

Containment

Classification

CONTAINMENT SYSTEM (5.3 of Guide) VENTILATION (5.4 of Guide)

5.3.1 Containment Materials

5.3.2 Penetrability

5.3.3 Support Structure

5.3.4 Joints

5.3.4 Joints

5.3.5 Entryway

5.4.1 Make-up

5.4.2 Input Air Flow

5.4.3 Air Pressure

5.4.4 Air Movement

5.4.5 Exhaust Dust Filtration

Class 1A B1-Air

Impenetrable

C1-Rigid

C2-Flexible

D1-Full

Seal

D1-Full

Seal

E1-Airlock

E2-Resealable

F1-

Controlled

G1-Forced

G2-Natural

H1-

Instrument Verification H2-Visual Verification

I1-Minimum

Specified

J1-Air

Filtration

Class 2A A1-Rigid 2-Flexible

B1-Air Impenetrable

C1-Rigid C2-Flexible

D1-Full Seal

D1-Full Seal

E2-Resealable E3-Overlap

F1-Controlled F2-Open

G1-Forced G2-Natural

H2-Visual Verification

I1-Minimum Specified

J1-Air Filtration

Class 3A A1-Rigid

A2-Flexible

B1-Air

Impenetrable B2-Air Penetrable

C1-Rigid

C2-Flexible

D1-Full

Seal D2-Partial Seal

D1-Full

Seal D2-Partial Seal

E4-Open

Seam

F1-

Controlled F2-Open

G1-Forced

G2-Natural

H3-Not

required

l2-Not

specified

J1-Air

Filtration

Class 4A A1-Rigid

A2-Flexible

B1-Air

Impenetrable B2-Air Penetrable

C3-

Minimal

D2-Partial

Seal

D2-Partial

Seal

E4-Open

Seam

F2-Open G2-Natural H3-Not

required

l2-Not

specified

J2-No

Controls on Exhaust

Note:

1. The information in this table is provided for guidance only and does not guarantee that any specific levels of containment will be achieved by following the suggestions. The type of structure, wind conditions, soundness of the materials of construction, and many other factors play a role in containing dust and debris.

2. The table occasionally identifies two options for a given component. For example, containment materials (5.3.1) are shown as being either rigid or flexible. If the specifier requires the use of rigid materials only, this restriction must be specified separately.

3. The design suggestions made in this table are based on the use of open abrasive blast cleaning inside containment. The classifications are ordered from the greatest degree of dust and debris containment (Class 1A). Normally, the higher the degree of containment, the higher the cost.

4. Many other combinations of the components beyond those suggested above can be used to provide similar results. The method preparation can also be adjusted to reduce or eliminate dust emissions.

5. Certain combinations of components within which each class may not be suitable when removing hazardous paints (e.g., forced air input in combination with penetrable containment materials in Class 3A).

6. When designing a ventilation system, care must be taken to balance the static pressure with the input air flow to avoid collapsing the containment due to high negative pressure.


1.09 WARRANTY

A. For the Work of this Section, provide all warranties as described in the General Conditions 00700, and special warranties as specified in the Technical Specifications

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Standardization: Materials, supplies, and articles provided shall be the standard products of manufacturers. Coatings

in a particular system shall be the products of a single manufacturer. The standard products of manufacturers other than those specified may be accepted when it is

demonstrated that they are equal in composition, durability, usefulness, and convenience for the purpose intended. Requests for substitutions will be considered when submitted per Section 01 33 00 provided the following minimum conditions are met: a. The proposed coating system shall use an equal or greater number of separate coats to

achieve the required dry film thickness. b. The proposed coating system shall use coatings of the same generic type. The directions for

application and descriptive literature which includes generic type, non-volatile content by volume, material safety data sheets, VOC's by grams per liter, and other information confirms that the substitution is equal to the specified coating system.

B. All coating materials shall be benzene and lead free and shall not, exceed 250 grams per liter of volatile organic compounds (VOC).

C. Blasting material shall meet MIL-A-22262A (SH) and shall be arsenic-free and contain no free silica. Blasting material shall not be reused. The Contractor is responsible for removing and legally disposing of the spent blasting material from the job site. The Contractor shall provide a copy of total characteristic leaching procedure (TCLP) results of the spent blast material to the Project Representative prior to Final Acceptance of the work.

D. Nonskid additive shall be 20 to 40 mesh alumina oxide, unless alternate nonskid media is recommended by the manufacturer.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all King County equipment including mechanical working parts and/or moving parts within the work area are protected from damage. Protection of equipment will be coordinated with the Project Representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. The surface preparation instructions Section 09 90 00-3.01 are general only and are not intended to

replace the specific requirements of the individual COATSPECS or coating manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean. Before applying coating, oil and grease shall be removed per SSPC-SP 1. All dirt, rust, loose mill scale, old weathered coatings, and other foreign substances shall be cleaned according to the SSPC standards specified in the COATSPEC. Oil and grease shall be removed before mechanical cleaning is started. Where mechanical cleaning is accomplished by blast cleaning, the abrasive used shall be washed, graded, and free of contaminants, which might interfere with the adhesion of the coatings.


3. Clean cloths and clean fluids shall be used in solvent cleaning. Cleaning and coating shall be scheduled so that dust and spray from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. Ensure that field coating is compatible with factory applied or existing coatings.

B. Metallic surfaces: Metallic surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with applicable portions of the NACE, SSPC, or

ASTM surface preparation specifications. Specific applicable standards are specified in each coating system. The solvent in solvent cleaning operations shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

Preparation of metallic surfaces shall be based upon comparison with SSPC-VIS-1-67T, or as described herein. To facilitate inspection on the first day of sandblasting operations, sandblast a sample area to the standards specified. Plates of light metal steel shall measure a minimum of 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches. The blasted sample area meeting the requirements of the Specifications shall be initialed by the Contractor and the Project Representative and covered with clear plastic and tape. One of these sample areas shall be prepared for each type of sandblasting and shall be used as the comparison standard throughout the work.

Profile of blasted surfaces of new steel or previously coated steel shall be per the manufacturer's recommendation for each coating system but be no less than two mils. Tightly adhered, existing coating remaining on surface following SSPC-SP-7, cleaning shall have a minimum surface profile of 2 mils.

Surface preparation for aluminum, copper, brass, and stainless steel shall be as specified for the coating in the COATSPEC.

Surface preparation for galvanized metal shall include a pressure wash with a cleaning solution recommended by the coating manufacturer, mixed and rinsed with 130-degree water and applied at 3000 psi, 2.8 GPM minimum. When the surface is dry, prepare for coating application by providing a cleaning per SSPC-SP 2 or 3. Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application. Perform de-passivation test listed in Section 09 90 00 1.04 D.11.

Areas not accessible or appropriate for blast cleaning may be hand or power tool cleaned with written approval of the Project Representative.

C. Concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces: Surfaces, which are to be coated shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days or longer, to dry to the

moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer. Moisture content shall be tested per ASTM D4263. The presence of moisture indicates additional cure time will be required. Retest as required until concrete is sufficiently dry for coating.

Muriatic acid solution shall not be used. Loose concrete and laitance shall be removed by blasting or chipping. Voids and cracks shall be

repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 or applicable COATSPEC. When repair work in Section 03 30 00 is complete, prepare the surface per the following: a. Concrete floors shall be prepared with “blast track” style equipment or an Approved Equal. b. All concrete surfaces shall be inspected per SSPC-SP 13 to ICRI Technical Guideline #310.2

and per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Surfaces shall be dry and clean and free from grit, loose plaster, and surface irregularities. Cracks and holes shall be repaired with acceptable patching materials, keyed to existing surfaces,

and sanded smooth. Surfaces may require additional repair to provide a smooth surface prior to application of final coat.

The pH of the surface shall register a '7', which indicates a neutral surface condition, before coating is applied. If indicator reads above '7', the alkali shall be neutralized.

Surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances.

Steam cleaning shall be used to clean wall surfaces of existing process channels, structures and tanks to be coated.

Surfaces to be coated shall be repaired as specified in the COATSPEC, and cleaned and finished to the standards as specified herein.


D. Ductile Iron Pipe: [NOT USED]

E. Plastic surfaces:Clean with solvent compatible with the specified primer and hand sanded with a medium grit sandpaper to provide sufficient profile for the coating system. Large areas may be power sanded or brush off blasted provided sufficient controls are employed so the surface is roughened without removing excess material.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Workmanship: Coating shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of SSPC, GoodPainting Practice Volume 1.

Coated surfaces shall be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps and brush marks. Coats shall be applied so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Coating equipment shall be designed for application of the materials specified. a. Compressors shall have traps and filters to remove water and oils.b. Spray equipment shall be equipped with mechanical agitators, pressure gages, and pressure

regulators, and spray nozzles of the proper sizes and functioning in a manner suitable toperform the work.

Each coat of paint shall be applied evenly and sharply cut to line.

B. Coating properties, mixing, and thinning:Coating shall provide a satisfactory film with smooth even surface. Glossy undercoats shall be lightly sanded to provide a surface suitable for the proper application and adhesion of subsequent coats. Orange Peel, overspray, pinholes and other surface defects shall be repaired. Coating shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Method of coating application:Prime coatings may be shop or field applied. Shop-applied primer shall be as specified in each system. Provide mechanical equipment, including, but not limited to, pumps, valves, pipe, blowers, fittings, and miscellaneous appurtenances, with shop-applied primer and shop-applied finish coats. If the shop coating meets the requirements of this Section, the field coating may consist of touching up the shop prime coat to achieve the film thickness, continuity, and coating specified in the COATSPEC. Damaged and poorly applied shop coatings that do not meet the specified requirements shall be removed, surface prepared, and then recoated in accordance with the COATSPEC. Where two or more coats are required, alternate coats shall contain sufficient compatible color additive, to act as indicator of coverage or the alternate coats shall be of contrasting colors. Mechanical equipment on which the manufacturer's shop-applied coating is acceptable shall be touch-up primed and coated with the specified coating system to match the color scheduled. Coating shall not be applied to a surface until it has been prepared as specified. A stripe coat shall be applied by brush to all edges (cut or fabricated), crevices, projections, nuts, bolts, pits, welds, flanges and splice plates. Subsequent coats may be either brush or spray applied. Where nonskid surface is scheduled, broadcast nonskid additive at 5 pounds per 30 square feet. Back-roll on horizontal surfaces.


D. Film thickness and continuity: Coating system thickness is the total thickness of primer and finish coats and does not include

sealers, patching mortars or galvanized coatings. Coatings shall be applied to the thickness specified. No less than two coats shall be applied.

E. Unsatisfactory Application: If an item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat with

specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer.

Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating manufacturer.

F. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather the edges.

Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required.

Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance.

3.03 CLEANUP AND WASTE DISPOSAL

A. At the end of each shift, remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish.

B. Thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any overspray or other paint-related damage when the work is complete.

C. All solvents, unused coatings and cleaning solutions shall be removed from the site and disposed of legally when coating work is complete or if directed by the Project Representative.

D. Prepare a Waste Disposal Plan to demonstrate all waste material is to be properly disposed; Include: Specify the Contractor is the generator of all waste materials generated by their business activities. Provide details on procedures to be used for properly managing and disposing of waste materials in

accordance all applicable laws and regulations. Procedures to document waste types and quantities generated and their disposition. Appoint an employee who is qualified and authorized to enforce proper waste disposal and

document the disposal.

E. Submit completed Waste Disposal Plan and supporting documentation to demonstrate quantities and proper disposal of wastes.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Where protection is provided for coated surfaces, such protection shall be preserved in place until the coating film has properly dried, and removal of the protection is authorized by the Project Representative. Items, which have been coated shall not be handled, worked on, or otherwise disturbed, until the coating is completely dry and hard.

B. Hardware, electrical fixtures, nameplates, shims and similar accessories shall be removed or masked during preparation and coating operations or shall otherwise be satisfactorily protected. Equipment adjacent to walls shall be disconnected and moved to permit cleaning and coating of equipment and walls and, following coating, shall be replaced and reconnected. Any removal or disconnecting of equipment shall be coordinated with the Project Representative.


3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. Coating manufacturer's representative shall be present at site as follows: Within 48 hours of first application of any coating system. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's product. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into immersion service.

3.06 COATING SYSTEMS

A. Surfaces to be coated, surfaces not to be coated, coating systems to be used, and required finishes and colors are specified in Section 09 06 90.

3.07 COATING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION SHEET - COATSPEC

A. Coating Systems specified for use appear on the following pages. Each of the Coating Systems and their requirements appear on individual pages.


Coating System Identification:

B-1

Coating Material: Surface Tolerant Epoxy, 8 mils DFT nominal, 250 g/l max VOC

Surfaces: Metal, concrete, masonry, previously painted surfaces

Available Colors: Gray, White, or Beige

Service Condition: Interior, mild corrosion service or washdown areas

Surface Preparation:

Ferrous Metal: Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or SP 3.

Galvanized Metal: Non-ferrous and galvanized metal shall be cleaned using a 3,000 PSI minimum, 2.8 GPM minimum, 110F minimum (130F maximum) hot water pressure washer using a new 15 degree or 25 degree fan tip held at 12” or less from the surface. Use a phosphate-free biodegradable cleaner in the wash water such as Simple Green House & Siding Cleaner Pressure Washer Concentrate, Hotsy Enviro-Clean, or Krud Kutter House & Siding Pressure Washer

Concentrate. Hard to reach areas shall be cleaned using a solvent

wipe or scrubbing with a firm bristle deck brush using 110F minimum wash water mixed with biodegradable cleaner. When the surface is dry, prepare for coating application by providing an SSPC-SP 7, 11, or 16. Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application.

Non-Ferrous Metal: Prepare surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 7, 11, or 16. Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application.

Concrete and masonry Prepare surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning of Concrete and ASTM D4259 Abrading Concrete. The prepared surface shall be as described in ASTM D 4259.

Previously painted surfaces

Previously painted surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or SP 3.

Inspection Check Points: Check points 6, 7, and 10-12.

Application: Shop or field.

General: Drying time between coats shall be specified by the manufacturer for the site conditions.

Inspection Check points: Check points 3, 4, and 7.

System Thickness: 8 mils dry film minimum.

Level of Containment: Refer to 1.08.


Coatings:

ALTERNATIVE 1

Primer: One coat of Carboline Carboguard 60 Epoxy

Finish: One or more coats of Carboline Carboguard 635 VOC Epoxy

ALTERNATIVE 2

Primer: One coat of Devoe Devran 203 Epoxy

Finish: One or more coats of Devoe Bar Rust 236 Multi-Purpose Epoxy

ALTERNATIVE 3

Primer: One coat of Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 920 Preprime

Finish: One or more coats of Sherwin Williams Macropoxy HS

ALTERNATIVE 4 Approved equal


Coating Systems Identification:

C-1

Coating Material: Epoxy primer, polyurethane finish

Surface: Metal

Service Condition: Non-immersed, exposure to moisture and sunlight, color required.


Ferrous Metal: 1. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP-10.

2. Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning all surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 2. Damaged shop coated areas shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP 11 and recoated with the primer specified. Previously coated surfaces shall be feathered in at the edges.

Nonferrous and Galvanized Metal:

Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application.

Inspection Check Points: Check points 1, 2, 6, 7, and 10-12.

Application: Shop or field.

General: Drying time between coats shall be as specified by the manufacturer for the site conditions.

Inspection Check Points: Check points 3, 4, 5, 7, and 8.

System Thickness: 8 mils dry film minimum.

Level of Containment: Refer to 1.08.


Coatings:

ALTERNATIVE 1

Primer: One coat of Carboline Carboguard 635 VOC Epoxy

Finish: One or more coats of Carboguard Carbothane 8845 Polyurethane

ALTERNATIVE 2

Primer: One coat of Devoe Devran 203 Epoxy

Finish: One or more coats of Devoe Devthane 379H Polyurethane

ALTERNATIVE 3

Primer: One coat of Sherwin Williams Macropoxy HS

Finish: One or more coats of Sherwin Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane 250

ALTERNATIVE 4 Approved equal


Coating System Identification:

J-4

Coating Material: Water reducible epoxy, Digester Pump Room floor repair

Surfaces: Concrete floors, interior.

Service Condition: Traffic area, some standing water.


New Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer. Moisture content shall be tested by the Contractor and witnessed by the Project Representative in accordance with ASTM D4263, or approved equal. Loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds and laitance shall be removed. Surface shall be cleaned by steam cleaning and abraded with a “blastrac”. Voids and cracks shall be repaired.

Existing Concrete: Loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds and laitance shall be removed. Surface shall be cleaned by steam cleaning and abraded with a “blastrac”. Voids and cracks shall be repaired.

Application: Field.

General: Follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing and "sweat-in" time.

Nonskid: Where nonskid surface is scheduled or required to match existing coating, broadcast nonskid additive and backroll as specified.

Inspection Check points: Checkpoints 6, 7, and 10 apply.

System Thickness: Two coats at 5 mils wet film each.

Color: As selected by Project Representative from manufacturer’s standard colors.

Coatings:

ALTERNATIVE 1

Two coats of Preservatives Envira-Poxy

ALTERNATIVE 2

Two coats of Tnemec Series 287 Enviro-Tread

ALTERNATIVE 3

Or Approved Equal as approved by the Project Representative

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 26 05 00 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items specified in other sections are subject to the requirements of this Section. The Electrical Drawings are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations.

B. All electrical Work included in this Contract including pre-fabricated assemblies shall conform to the requirements of this Section.



Reference Title

ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) and local amendments

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

IBC / IBO International Building Code

UL Underwriters Laboratories

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Catalog cuts of equipment, devices, and materials requested by the specification sections. Catalog information includes technical specifications and application information, including ratings,

range, weight, accuracy, etc. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which apply to

the submittal requirements. Catalog cuts shall be assembled in a folder. Each folder shall contain a cover sheet, indexed by

item, and cross-referenced to the appropriate specification paragraph.

C. Catalog data for the new circuit breaker installed in the existing MCC. Information to include: Operating handle type, interrupting rating, amp rating, circuit breaker manufacturer and model number.

D. Applicable operation and maintenance information on an item-by-item basis in accordance with Section 01 78 23. Operation and maintenance information shall be provided at the time of equipment, device, or material site delivery, or at a certain stage of project completion as required by Section 01 78 23, whichever is the earlier. Full-size drawings shall be reduced to 11 x 17 inches.

E. Test results for motors and electrical systems on the forms in Section 01 33 10. Maintain a file of the original test results and submit to the Project Representative prior to Final Acceptance.


F. Description of functional checkout procedures 30 days prior to performing functional checkout tests.

G. Electrical room plan and elevation drawings showing conformance with electrical working clearances and installation clearances required by selected manufacturer.


A. Identification of Listed Products: Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed and labeled for the purpose for which they are to

be used, by UL or equivalent NRTL agency approved lab as the independent testing laboratory. Independent testing laboratory shall meet the requirements of the local or state inspection authority having jurisdiction.

When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority to undergo a special inspection. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price.

When the product is an assemblage of individual parts, whether the individual parts are listed or not, the entire assemblage shall be listed and labeled as a complete unit for the purpose for which it is to be used.

B. Factory Tests: Where specified in the specification section, perform factory tests at the place of fabrication. Perform on completion of manufacture or assembly.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Elementary or Schematic Diagram: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts.

B. One-Line Diagram: Shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices, or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded.

C. Block Diagram: A diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines.

D. Wiring Diagram or Connection System: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be (a) in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram.

E. Interconnection Diagram: Show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors

and auxiliary devices. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection

diagrams. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires

clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable. Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical. All devices and equipment shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with

individual terminal identification. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection

diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams.


Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on the interconnection diagram.

Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown. Spare wires and cables shall be shown.

F. Arrangement, Layout, or Outline Drawings: An arrangement, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made.

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, size and derate equipment and materials for the ambient conditions, but not less than an ambient maximum temperature of 40 degrees C at an elevation ranging from sea level to 3000 feet without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances.

B. Classified Areas: 1. The following areas are designated as Class I Division 1:

a. Outside at the Sludge Storage Tank. The extent is depicted on drawings BW7100-E-001, BW7100-E-002, and BW7100-E-003.

b. Inside the Sludge Storage Tank. 2. The following areas are designated as Class I Division 2:

a. Outside at the Sludge Storage Tank. The extent is depicted on drawings BW7100-E-001, BW7100-E-002, and BW7100-E-003.

C. Corrosive Areas 1. The following areas are designated corrosive.

a. Outside areas above and around the Sludge Storage tank. This is all areas on drawings BW7103-E-118, and BW7109-E-204.

b. Inside the sludge storage tank.

D. Seismic: 1. Electrical equipment and supports: Braced per IBC requirements and Section 01 73 00. 2. Provide calculations for overturning moment and design of the embedded anchors for securing free-

standing equipment to the building structure. 3. Fasten equipment that is front-accessible only to the wall or ceiling as well as the floor.

1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Store materials and equipment per Section 01 67 00.

B. Store indoor equipment and materials to be permanently located indoors and seal with plastic film wrap.

1.08 INDICATING LAMP COLORS

A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment to follow with colored lenses in accordance with the following schedule:

Color Function Example

Red Run, open valve Equipment operating, motor running

Green Ready, closed valve Equipment ready, end of cycle

White/Clear Normal condition Control power on, status OK or clear

Amber/Yellow Abnormal condition Failure of equipment or status (yellow) abnormal, fault condition


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. General: Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer

throughout the work. Standard production materials shall be used wherever possible. Equipment Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, electrical equipment and materials shall be painted

by the manufacturer as specified per Section 09 90 00. Galvanizing: Per Section 05 50 00. Anchors: Per Section 05 05 19.

2.02 CONDUCTOR / WIRE MARKERS

A. Identify each power and control conductor at each end of each terminal to which it is connected.

B. Conductors size No. 10 AWG or smaller shall have identification sleeves.

C. Conductors: Identify each end as shown on the Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, identify conductor ends with the Equipment number, followed by -

Cxx, where xx is a unique number for that wire.

D. Machine print on sleeves with permanent black ink the letters and numbers that identify each wire.

E. Figures: 1/8-inch high.

F. Sleeves: Yellow or white tubing, sized to fit the conductor insulation.

G. Acceptable Manufacturer: TMS Thermofit Marker System by Raychem Co. Sleeve style wire marking system by W. H. Brady Co. Or Approved Equal.

H. Adhesive strips are not acceptable.

I. Use cable markers of the locking tab type for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger.

J. Tabs: white plastic with conductor identification number permanently embossed.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Laminated phenolic plastic.

B. Nominal Size: 3/4 inch high by 2 inches long.

C. Black backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters.

D. If abbreviations are required because of space limitations, submit to the Project Representative prior to manufacture.

E. Fastened using self-tapping stainless steel screws. The use of adhesives will not be permitted on the outside of enclosures.


2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, panhead strap screw type.

B. Terminals shall be provided with integral marking strips which shall be permanently identified with the connecting wire numbers as shown on the Drawings.

C. Terminal blocks for P-circuits (power 208-600 volts): Rated not less than the conductor current rating and less than 600 VAC.

D. Terminal blocks for C-circuits (control and/or power 120 volts or less power) and S-circuits (signal): Rated not less than 20 amperes and less than 600 VAC.

E. Terminals: Tin-plated.

F. Insulating material: Nylon.

2.05 PROGRAMMING AND SOFTWARE

A. The County will provide programing for the Ovation system. The Contractor will work with the County to verify that the VFD configuration works with the Ovation program.

B. Configuration and programming of the VFD shall be provided by the Contractor.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with other equipment and work. Make necessary minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment to avoid interferences

with other work prior to installation.

B. Housekeeping: Protect electrical equipment from dust, water and damage. Wipe motor control centers, switchgear, and buses free of dust and dirt on the outside keep dry and

vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of Substantial Completion. Touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in Section 09 90 00. During construction, allow no electrical equipment to be temporarily exposed to weather, debris,

liquids, or damage.

C. Dust Free Areas: Protect electrical, instrumentation and control equipment from dust by wrapping the equipment in

plastic film wrap until installed to prevent dust from entering the equipment. Once electrical, instrumentation and control equipment is installed, protect from dust. Rewrap the

equipment if necessary to keep the equipment dust free.


3.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01 78 39. Include the following schedules, lists, and drawings:

Interconnection diagrams (Section 26 05 00). Original submittal drawings (Section 26 05 00).

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 26 05 19 - 1 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 05 19

600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies conductors and cables rated 600 volts used for power, lighting, receptacle, signal, and control circuits.



Reference Title

ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM B33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

ASTM B189 Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy-Coated Soft Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire

IEEE 383 Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations

NEMA WC7 Cross-Linked-Thermosetting Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

NEMA WC57/ICEA S-73-532 Standard for Control Cables

NEMA WC70/ICEA S-95-658 Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 V or less

NEC 310-12 General Conductors Color Code


NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

UL 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 1277 Type TC Power and Control Tray Cable

UL 1581 Reference Standards for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Catalog cuts showing general information of the conductors and cable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unscheduled Conductors and Cables: With the exception of lighting, communication, paging, security and receptacle circuits, the type,

size and number of conductors shall be as specified on the Drawings.


Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors are not shown on the Drawings and shall be sized by the Contractor in accordance with the NEC to limit voltage drop to 3 percent.

Minimum size of lighting and receptacle circuits shall be 12 AWG. Number and types of communication, paging, and security cables shall be as required for the

particular equipment provided. Unless otherwise indicated, provide lighting and receptacle circuit conductors in accordance with

CABLESPEC "XHHW-2".

B. Cable Specification Sheets (CABLESPEC): General requirements for conductors and cables specified in this Section are listed on CABLESPEC sheets in this Section.

2.02 COLOR CODING

A. General: Multiconductor power and control cable colors shall be manufacturer's standard. Single conductor control conductor color shall be yellow, except for the grounded conductor which

shall be white.

B. Power Conductors: Single-conductor power conductors shall be color coded in accordance with the following:

Use Cable Color

Three-phase, 480-volt power or 480/277 Phase A Brown

Phase B Orange

Phase C Yellow

Ground Green

Neutral Gray

Three-phase, 120/208-volt power Phase A Black

Phase B Red

Phase C Blue

Neutral White

Ground Green

Single-phase, 120/240-volt power Line 1 Red

Line 2 Black

Neutral White

Ground Green

Cables sized No. 4 AWG and larger may be black with colored 3/4-inch vinyl plastic tape applied in

3-inch lengths around the cable at each end. Tag the cables at terminations and in pull boxes, handholes, and manholes.

C. Signal Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, cables shall be color coded black and white for pairs or black, red, and white for triads.

D. Control Conductors: Control conductors color coding shall be manufacturer's standard.

2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE, 600 VOLT

A. Single Conductor: Stranded and used in conduits for power and control circuits. Unless otherwise indicated, provide in accordance with CABLESPEC "XHHW-2".


B. Multiconductor Cable: Used for power and control circuits routed in cable tray. Cables shall be UL labeled, Type TC, designed for cable tray installation in accordance with

NEC 340. The type of insulation, number of conductors, and size of conductor shall be as specified. Unless otherwise indicated, provide multiconductor power and control cable in accordance with

CABLESPEC "MC". Power Cable: Containing three or four conductors, as specified, plus an equipment grounding

conductor. Control Cable: Unless otherwise indicated, shall be size 14 AWG. VFD Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, shall not be sized smaller than 12 AWG.

2.04 SIGNAL CABLES

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide single circuit signal cable in accordance with CABLESPEC

"SIC”.

2.05 PORTABLE CORD

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide portable cord in accordance with CABLESPEC "CORD”.

B. Cords shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2.06 SPLICING AND TERMINATING MATERIALS

A. Connectors: Tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application. Tin-plated high conductivity copper. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller: Nylon self-insulated, ring tongue or locking-spade

terminals. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger: One-hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole or four-

hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors are not acceptable.

B. Motor Connection Kits: Shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and a high

dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and contamination. Shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations. Shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances.

C. Splicing is not allowed without prior approval from the Project Representative.

2.07 MC AND SIC1 CABLE FITTINGS

A. Nonclassified Location: Terminates and seals jacketed metal clad cable NEMA 4X listed, suitable for wet locations, corrosion resistant Suitable for Class I Division 2 Group D Copper free aluminum Appleton, Cooper Crouse-Hinds TMC or approved equal.

B. Classified Location: Terminates and seals jacketed metal clad cable in Classified locations NEMA 4X listed, suitable for wet locations, corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant


Epoxy sealing compound Copper free Aluminum Explosion proof. Appleton, Cooper Crouse-Hinds TMCX or approved equal.

2.08 MC AND SIC1 CABLE SUPPORT CLAMPS

A. Clamp for electrical armored cable.

B. Plastic, UV resistant and corrosion resistant. 316 SS screw.

C. Temperature range -25 Degree C to 90 degree C.

D. UL Listed.

E. EFCO Fixing Technology LTD Clic or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Identify each power and control conductor at each terminal to which it is connected. The marking system shall comply with Section 26 05 00.

B. Wire Pulling: Complete the pulling of wire and cable into conduit or trays without damaging or putting undue

stress on the cable insulation. Soapstone, talc or UL listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and cable. Grease is not acceptable. Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before cable is

placed.

C. Whenever a cable leaves a raceway, provide a cable support.

D. When flat bus bar connections are made with unplated bar scratch-brush the contact areas. Torque bolts to the bus manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Provide and install yellow three-strand copolymer polyolefin pull string in all new conduits. String shall extend at least 1 foot beyond each end of the conduit and be tied off on bushing or in other manner acceptable to the Project Representative

F. Splicing is not allowed without prior approval from the Project Representative.

3.02 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE

A. Lacing and Bundling: Lace and bundle conductors in panels and electrical equipment, No. 6 AWG and smaller, at

intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties. Lacing is not necessary in plastic panel wiring duct. Bundle conductors crossing hinges into groups not exceeding 12 and arrange so that they will be

protected from chafing when the hinged member is moved.

B. Slack: Provide slack in junction and pull boxes, handholes and manholes. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls of the box.


Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the box. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for wire runs, lacing is not required. Do not use plastic panel wiring duct in manholes and handholes.

C. Stranded Conductors: Terminate as described in this Section, except where terminals will not accept such terminations. In these cases, terminate the conductors directly on the terminal block. Install compression lugs and connectors using manufacturer's recommended tools.

D. Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following: Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with derating

requirements of the NEC. However, lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power or control conductors.

E. Make terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices provided with pigtail leads using self-insulating tubular compression connectors.

3.03 SIGNAL CABLE

A. Circuits: Run as individually shielded twisted pairs or triads. Do not, in any case, make up a circuit using conductors from different pairs or triads. Use triads wherever 3-wire circuits are required. Unless otherwise indicated, provide terminal blocks at instrument cable junctions, and identify

circuits at such junctions. Run signal circuits without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.

B. Shields are not acceptable as a signal path, except for circuits operating at radio frequencies and utilizing coaxial cables.

C. Common grounded return conductors for two or more circuits are not acceptable.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, bond shields to the signal ground bus at the control panel and isolated from ground and other shields at other locations. Provide terminals for running signal leads and shield drain wires through junction boxes.

E. Shield Drain Wire: Terminate spare circuits and the shield drain wire on terminal blocks at both ends of the cable run

and cause to be electrically continuous through terminal boxes. Do not ground shield drain wires for spare circuits at either end of the cable run.

F. Terminal Boxes: Provide at instrument cable splices. If cable is buried or in raceway below grade at splice, provide an instrument stand as specified with

terminal box mounted approximately 3 feet above grade.

G. Install and terminate cable for telephone systems in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 PORTABLE CORD

A. Portable cord feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords, pumps, cranes, hoists, and portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to take the tension from the cable termination.


B. Connect portable cords to permanent wiring with the use of terminals.

C. Use in-line taps and splices only where specified.

3.05 TESTING

A. General: Test conductors and cable in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Section 26 08 00.

B. Signal Cable. For new or modified cables do the following: Test each signal pair or triad for electrical continuity. Test each shield drain conductor for continuity. Shield drain conductor resistance shall not exceed

the loop resistance of the pair or triad. Test each conductor (signal and shield drain) for insulation resistance with all other conductors in

the cable grounded. Instruments used for continuity measurements shall have a resolution of 0.1 ohms and an accuracy

of better than 0.1 percent of reading plus 0.3 ohms. Use a 500 volt megohmmeter for insulation resistance measurements.

Record and submit results on Form 40 61 13 A in Section 01 33 10

3.06 SCHEDULES

A. Cables are scheduled on the Drawings.

3.07 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC)

A. General: Conductor and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are

specified on individual cable specification sheets (CABLESPECS). Install scheduled and unscheduled conductors and cables in accordance with the CABLESPECS.

B. CABLESPEC SHEETS: CABLESPEC sheets follow.



Cable System Identification: MC

Description: Multiconductor power and control cable, No. 1/0 AWG and larger, approved for tray installation and in accordance with UL 1569.

Voltage: 600 volts.

Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with ASTM B8.

Insulation: XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet, crosslinked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA WC57 / ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA WC70 / ICEA S-95-658 (Power Cable), and UL 44.

Assembly: Individual conductors cabled together with nonhydroscopic fillers and binding tape.

Sheath: Impervious, continuous, corrugated aluminum welded over cable core. Sheath shall meet the grounding conductor requirements of NEC table 250-95.

Jacket: 50 mil minimum, polyvinylchloride (PVC) in accordance with UL 1277.

Flame Resistance: IEEE 383.

Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Houston Wire & Cable, or approved equal.

Uses Permitted: Cable tray, direct burial, encased in concrete in normal or Class 1, Division 2 atmospheres.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.

Testing: Test in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Section 26 08 00.



Cable System Identification: XHHW-2

Description: Single conductor Cross-linked polyethylene power and control cable for sizes No. 14 AWG through No. 600 kCMIL.

Voltage: 600 volts.

Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with ASTM B8.

Insulation: XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet, cross-linked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA WC57/ ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA WC70/ ICEA S-95-658 (power cable).

Jacket: None.

Flame Resistance: N/A.

Manufacturer(s): Okonite, X-Olene; Cablec, Durasheath XLP; or Approved Equal.


Testing: Test in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Section 26 08 00.



Cable System Identification: SIC

Description: Instrument Signal twisted shielded triad cable, PLTC, CM, MC-HL metallic sheath

Voltage: 600 volts.

Conductor Material: Bare copper,18 AWG, 7-strand.

Insulation: Flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, 90 degrees C

Lay: Twisted on a 2-inch lay.

Shield: Aluminum foil, polyester tape with tinned copper 20 AWG drain wire

Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

Flame Resistance: Vertical per IEEE 383 and IEEE 1202

Manufacturer(s): Okonite C-L-X Okoseal-N P-OS or approved equal.


Testing: Test in accordance with this Section.



Cable System Identification: DN1

Description: DeviceNet cable, OVDA Class 1 thick, PVC jacket, 75 degrees C, CMG, PLTC

Voltage: 600 volts.

Conductor Material: 2 pairs tinned copper. PR #1-Power, 15 AWG, 19 strands. PR #2 Data, 16 AWG, 19 strands

Insulation: Polyvinyl chloride/FPE

Shield: Inner – Aluminum foil, polyester tape, 100 percent coverage. Outer – Braided tinned copper with 18 AWG drain wire

Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 0.480-inch diameter

Electrical Characteristics: 1.0 MHz, 0.40 dB/100 feet, 4.90 ohms per 1000 feet

Flame Resistance: Flame Resistance: UL 1685

Manufacturer(s): Belden 7896A, Okonite, or approved equal.

Execution: Application: ODVA DeviceNet thick cable

Installation: Install in accordance with this Section and associated equipment manufacturer’s instruction.

Testing: DeviceNet networks shall be documented and tested following the ODVA Planning and Installation Manual – DeviceNet Cable System, Appendix C – DeviceNet Baseline and Test Report guidelines. Document the basic DeviceNet networks and report any problems following the form in Appendix C. In addition, provide and use a NetMeter, DeviceNet Detective, multi-meter and/or an oscilloscope to complete all of the Appendix C tests, and record the network baseline performance. For any subnets that did not meet the baseline performance requirements specified herein and by the manufacturers, complete the additional “per-node” testing and record the test results.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 26 05 33 - 1 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the electrical conduits, wireways, pull boxes, cable vault, cable trays, fittings, and supports.



Reference Title

ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated

ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated

ASTM A 48 REV A Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A193 REV C Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service

ASTM F512 Smooth-Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation

FEDSPEC WW-C-581E Conduit, Metal, Rigid and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple, Electrical Conduit; Zinc Coated

FEDSPEC W-C-1094A Conduit and Conduit Fitting Plastic, Rigid

NEC 500 Classified Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2

NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures

NEMA RN1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC 40 and EPC 80)

NEMA TC6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation

NEMA VE-1 Metal Cable Tray Systems

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery

UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit

UL 651 Rigid Nonmetal Electrical Conduit

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Include manufacturer’s catalog cuts as specified by Section 26 05 00. Include general information and detailed specifications for the products specified in this Section.

C. Certifications and calculations that raceway supports meet the seismic requirements specified in Sections 26 05 00, 01 73 00, and this Section.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAY

A. General requirements for raceway materials specified in this Section are listed in the RACESPECS sheets at the end of this Section. The type of raceway to be used for any given area and application shall conform to the requirements of Table A in this Section.

2.02 BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. Pull Boxes and Wiring Gutters: Device and junction boxes less than 6 inches square shall be Type FD galvanized cast ferrous.

Boxes larger than FD boxes shall be constructed of sheet steel, galvanized after fabrication, or NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.

Outdoor boxes and enclosures shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors or removable covers.

Conduit bodies shall be ferrous alloy with screw taps for fastening covers. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene.

Boxes and enclosures in corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic. Boxes in classified areas shall be NEMA Class 7 galvanized cast ferrous. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and grounding shall comply with the National Electrical

Code. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have a rigid

handle. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet shall be split.

B. Terminal Cabinets: Terminal cabinets located indoors shall be NEMA 4. Cabinets located outdoors and in corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X. Cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors. Adjustable terminal strip mounting accessories shall be provided. Cabinets shall be provided with channel mounted terminal blocks rated 30 A, 600 Vac. Terminals shall be No. 8 minimum strap-screw type, suitable for ring tongue or locking spade

terminals.

C. Conduit Seals: Install conduit seals in classified areas in conduit runs leaving the space. They shall be of the EYS

or EZS type with male and female hubs. Use PVC-coated fittings with urethane interior coating for PVC-coated GRS; use copper free cast

aluminum for rigid aluminum. The sealing compound shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer of the sealing conduit body. Use the sealant, such as Chico, in areas that are defined as classified and meet the NEC

requirements for Article 500.

2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. Conduit Supports: Provide hot-dip galvanized framing channel with end caps to support groups of conduit. Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with

galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Conduit supports for PVC-coated rigid steel and PVC conduit systems shall be one-hole PVC-

coated rigid steel or clamps conduit wall hangers.


B. Ceiling Hangers: Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable galvanized carbon steel rod hangers as specified. Straps or

hangers of plumber’s perforated tape are not acceptable. Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM

A193. Hanger rods in corrosive areas and those exposed to weather or moisture shall be stainless steel.

C. Suspended Raceway Supports (Racks): Suspended raceway supports shall consist of concrete inserts, galvanized carbon steel rod

hangers, and jamb nuts supporting hot-dip galvanized framing channel or lay-in pipe hangers as required.

Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193.

Brace all suspended raceway supports at 30-foot intervals (alternating from one side to the other) to meet specified seismic requirements.

D. Design by Professional Engineer: Raceway supporting systems, structures, and elements shall be designed to meet seismic and

other building structural requirements and to support the static and dynamic load of the wiring and raceways that they will carry. Systems to be installed shall be prepared by a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the state of Washington to ensure conformance with IBC seismic, building, and load requirements.

2.04 NAMEPLATES

A. Provide nameplates for all boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00. Nameplate wording shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Where no wording is specified, the Contractor shall provide the functional description of the device on the nameplate.

2.05 FIRESTOPS

A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M CP25WB+ Vimasco WC-5 FR Flamemastic 77 Or Approved Equal.

C. Products which are affected by water are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Specific raceway types and applications are indicated on the drawings and/or in the raceway schedule. When not indicated on the Drawings and/or in the schedule Table A specifies the type of raceway required for each location and application by RACESPEC sheet. Use fittings, hubs and boxes as specified by the raceway type in RACESPEC. Unless otherwise indicated, in Table A, unscheduled conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel, RACESPEC type GRS.


TABLE A

Location Application/Condition RACESPEC

Indoor noncorrosive Exposed GRS

Indoor corrosive Exposed PGRS

Outdoor Exposed PGRS

Concealed Embedded in concrete structure or beneath slab-on-grade GRS

Non-Classified Final connection to equipment and light fixtures LFS

All Locations Classified PGRS

3.02 RACEWAY NUMBERING SYSTEM

A. General:Identify each conduit; rack shall be identified by a unique number shown in the Drawings.

B. Conduit Identification:Pressure stamp conduit numbers into a non-corrosive metal tag. Fix a tag with number to each end of each conduit and at each manhole, pullbox and handhole with Type 304 Stainless Steel wire.

3.03 CONDUIT

A. GeneralThe number of directional changes of a conduit shall be limited to 270 degrees in any run between pull boxes. Conduit runs shall be limited to a maximum of 400 feet, less 100 feet or fraction thereof, for every 90 degrees of change in direction. Raceways shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, power, control, fire alarm, instrumentation, signaling, and grounding systems.

B. Indoor and Outdoor Conduit Systems:Unless otherwise indicated, in general, conduit inside structures shall be exposed. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining conduit routing that conforms to the installation requirements set forth herein. Install conduit to conform to the requirements of the RACESPEC sheets and the following: a. Install exposed conduit either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces.b. Two or more exposed conduits in the same general routing shall be in parallel with symmetrical

bends.c. Exposed conduit shall be run on supports spaced not more than 8 feet apart.d. Where three or more conduits are located in parallel run, space them out from the wall using

framing channel.e. Where conduits are suspended from the ceiling, support systems shall comply with the

requirements of this Section.f. Secure conduit rack supports to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast-in-place anchors

or framing channel concrete inserts.g. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues with

temperatures higher than 90 degrees C.h. Install conduits between the reinforcing steel in walls or slabs which have reinforcing in both

faces. In slabs which have only a single layer of reinforcing steel, place conduits under thereinforcement.

i. Route conduit clear of structural openings and indicate future openings.j. Flash and seal watertight those conduits which pass through roofs or metal walls.k. Neatly group conduit into any openings cut into concrete and masonry structures, and grout

using non-shrink type grout.l. During construction, cap conduits to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water.m. Terminate exposed conduit stubs for future use with galvanized pipe caps.n. Determine concealed conduit stubup locations from the manufacturer’s shop drawings.


o. Terminate concealed conduit for future use in equipment or by galvanized couplings pluggedflush with structural surfaces.

p. Where the Drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired hereunder, provideconcealed portions of conduits for future equipment.

q. Conduit installed horizontally shall allow headroom of at least 7 feet except where it may beinstalled along structures, piping, and equipment, or in other areas where headroom cannot bemaintained because of other considerations.

r. Terminate all conduits that enter enclosures by fittings that ensure that the NEMA rating of theenclosure is not affected or changed.

s. Connect underground metallic or nonmetallic conduit that turns out of concrete, masonry orearth to a 90-degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before emergence.

t. Transitions from concealed or underground or embedded locations to exposed or abovegroundor above-grade locations shall be made using type PGRS conduit for a distance of at least 12inches on either side of transition.

u. Conduit across structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall have an OZ-Gedney “Type DX” or Crouse-Hinds “Type XD,” bonded, weathertight expansion and deflectionfitting of that conduit size.

3.04 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION (RACESPEC) SHEETS

A. The following RACESPECS are included in this Section:

RACESPEC Symbol Raceway Description

GRS Galvanized rigid steel conduit

LFS Liquidtight flexible steel conduit

PGRS PVC coated rigid steel conduit

PVC8 Schedule 80 PVC conduit

WW Wireway and auxiliary gutter



Raceway Identification: GRS

Description: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6.

Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth finished surfaces.

Manufacturers: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., or Approved Equal.

Minimum Size: Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch for exposed, 1 inch for embedded, encased, or otherwise inaccessible.

Fittings: Hubs: Insulated throat with bonding locknut, hot-dip galvanized. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene O-ring and shall provide a watertight connection. O-Z Gedney, CHM-XXT, or Approved Equal.

Unions: Electrogalvanized ferrous alloy type Appleton UNF or UNY, Crouse-Hinds UNF or UNY, or equal. Threadless fittings are not acceptable.

Boxes:

Indoor: Type FD cast ferrous for all device boxes and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. NEMA 12 welded steel 6 inches square and larger. Door shall have hinges with clamp locks. Boxes in process areas shall be NEMA 4 watertight.

Conduit Bodies: Ferrous alloy type with screw taps for fastening covers. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene.

Outdoor and Wet Areas: Type FD cast ferrous for all devices and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic for 6 inches square and larger.

Corrosive: NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.

Classified: NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous.

Elbows:

3/4 through 1-1/2: Factory fabricated or field bent.

2 through 6: Factory fabricated only.

Conduit Bodies:

3/4 through 4: Malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted. Neoprene gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for all conduit entrances.

5 and 6: Electrogalvanized iron or cast iron box.

Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight and shall be provided with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall be neoprene and shall allow for 3/4-inch movement in any direction.

Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbel, O.Z. Gedney, Or Approved Equal.


Raceway Identification: GRS

Installation: Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive “coppershield” thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions. Steel conduit shall be supported away from the structures using hot-dip galvanized malleable iron straps with nesting backs.

Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub with a grounding bushing.

Exposed male threads on galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be coated with zinc-rich paint.



Raceway Identification: LFS

Description: Liquidtight flexible steel conduit.

Application: Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or adjustment.

Compliance: UL 360.

Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked and jacketed with liquidtight plastic cover.

Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

Fittings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut with cast-in lug, brass grounding ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral and O-ring seals around the conduit and box connection and insulated throat. Forty-five and 90-degree fittings shall be used where applicable.

Installation: The length of flexible liquidtight conduit shall not exceed 15 times the trade diameter of the conduit. The length of liquidtight conduit shall not exceed 36 inches.

Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive “coppershield” thread compound.



Raceway Identification: PGRS

Description: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, corrosion-resistant, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated.

Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN1.

Finish: PGRS shall be hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit. The inside and outside, as well as the threads shall be galvanized. A minimum 40-mil thick PVC coating shall be bonded to the outside of the conduitand the inside shall be coated with 2-mil urethane. Coating shall befree of pinholes. Bending of conduit shall not damage either theinterior or exterior coating. Bond strength shall exceed the tensilestrength of the PVC coat. Elbows shall be factory made and coated.

Minimum Size: Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch.

Fittings: Similarly coated to the same thickness as the conduit and provided with Type 304 stainless steel hardware. A 2-mil urethane coating shall be applied to the interior, and the threads of all fittings and couplings. Conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by the same company.

Hubs: Hubs for connection of conduit to junction, device, pull or terminal boxes shall be threaded and made of cast ferrous alloy. Hubs shall be galvanized steel and have insulating bushings with bonding locknuts. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene O-ring and shall provide a watertight connection.

Boxes:

Non-Classified: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.

Classified: NEMA 250, Type 7D cast ferrous.

Installation: PVC-coated conduit shall be supported away from the structure using PVC-coated conduit wall hangers. All conduit threads shall be covered by a plastic overlap which shall be coated and sealed per manufacturer’s recommendations. Plastic coated conduit shall be made tight with special wrenches and fittings designed for tightening PVC-coated conduit. All threads shall be protected against corrosion per NEC 300.6 (a) by liberally applying an approved electrically conductive, corrosion-resistant compound – “coppershield.” Pipe wrenches and channel locks shall not be used for tightening plastic coated conduits. Damaged areas shall be patched, using manufacturer’s recommended material. The area to be patched shall be built up to the full thickness of the coating. Painted fittings are not acceptable.



Raceway Identification: PVC8

Description: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, extra heavy wall thickness for all locations including direct bury under roadways and where exposed to physical damage.

Compliance: NEMA TC2, UL 651.

Construction: Schedule 80, high-impact, polyvinylchloride (PVC).

Minimum Size: 3/4 inch exposed; 1 inch embedded or encased.

Fittings: PVC solvent weld type.

Boxes:

Indoor: NEMA Class 4, nonmetallic.

Outdoor and Corrosive: NEMA Class 4X, nonmetallic.

Installation: Exposed PVC conduit shall be run on supports spaced not more than 3 feet apart for conduits up to 1 inch 5 feet apart for conduits 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches and 6 feet apart for conduits 2-1/2 inches andlarger. PVC conduit shall not be provided where it will be damaged byheat.

PVC conduit shall have bell ends where terminated at walls.



Raceway Identification: WW

Description: Wireway and auxiliary gutter, flanged, oiltight type with hinged covers.

Compliance: JIC EMP-1.

Minimum Size: 4-inch by 4-inch.

Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth finished surfaces.

Application: As indicated on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 26 08 00 - 1 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the acceptance testing of electrical materials, equipment, and systems.



Reference Title

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

NETA International Electrical Testing Association [NETA]

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Draft Test Plan and Procedures in accordance with the latest NETA requirements, 90 days prior toinitial functional checkout. Contractor shall use NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for all newequipment installed under this contract and NETA Maintenance Testing Specifications for all existingequipment reused under this contract unless otherwise requested by the Project Representative.

C. Completed test report Forms contained in Section 01 33 10. Including the following:26 05 00-A Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form 26 05 00-B Installed Motor Test Data Form 40 61 13-A Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form

D. Functional checkout procedures 45 days prior to performing initial functional checkout tests.

E. Final Test Report documenting test results and equipment and device settings.

F. NETA certification of Testing Contractor provided as part of test plan submittal.


A. Qualifications: Testing Contractor shall be NETA certified.

1.05 APPLICATION

A. Requirements for testing in accordance with this Section are specified in this and other sections ofDivisions 26 and 40. Where testing in accordance with this Section is required, the required tests,including correction of defects and retesting, shall be completed prior to energization of material,equipment, or systems.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 26 08 00 - 2 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.06 TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Institute of Standards andTesting Technology and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration, deviation fromstandard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date of recalibration.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING

A. General:Prior to energizing the electrical circuits, perform the following tests. Unless otherwise indicated, a 1,000 volt megohmmeter shall be used for resistance measurements. Record test measurements on the Forms 26 05 00-A. and 26 05 00-B. Submit a description of the proposed functional test procedures 45 days prior to the performance of functional checkout.

B. Insulation Resistance Measurements:General: a. Make general insulation resistance measurements on conductors and energized parts of

electrical equipment.b. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be in

accordance with the applicable ANSI, ICEA, NEMA, or NETA standards for the equipment ormaterial being tested.

c. Record the ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured on the test form.d. Record insulation resistance measurements on Form 26 05 00-A.e. Insulation with resistance of less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.f. Document checks and measurements.

C. Conductor and cable tests:Measure phase-to-ground insulation resistance for all circuits 120 volts and above, except lighting circuits. Make measurements with motors and other equipment disconnected, except that solid state equipment shall be disconnected unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC.

D. Motor Tests:Complete Form 26 05 00-B for each motor after installation. Measure insulation resistance for all motors before being connected. Motors 50 HP and larger: Make insulation resistance measurements at the time of delivery and when connected. Insulation resistance values less than 100 megohms are not acceptable. Verify motor phase rotation. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation. Measure current on each phase with motor running under load. Current imbalance shall be less than 5-percent difference between phases.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 26 29 23 - 1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies variable frequency drive (VFD) controllers. The controllers include converters,inverters, control functions, instrumentation, filters, harmonic analysis, protective equipment andaccessories necessary to provide the specified functions and features. The County has preselectedthis equipment. Refer to Part 2 for the requirements.

B. Equipment List:

EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT NO.

DIGESTER STORAGE

MIXING PUMP VFD

VFD 710,395

C. Shipment Monitoring:A recording accelerometer, designed to record the magnitude of sudden impacts in three directions (X, Y, Z) on continuous strip charts with both time and "g" force scales, shall be shipped with and fixed to each separately packed assembly or its packing crate. Upon arrival of each shipment, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Project Representative; the accelerometer shall be removed in the presence of representatives of the Project Representative and the Contractor. If the magnitude of the maximum acceleration exceeds 3.0 g, the assembly or subassembly shall be dismantled and inspected and tested for damage. All damage shall be corrected to the complete satisfaction of the Project Representative before the assembly is incorporated into the work. The Contractor shall bear all costs arising out of dismantling, inspection, testing, repair, and reassembly, even if no damage is found.

1.02 DEVICENET DATA

A. The VFD shall be provided and programmed to exchange the following data points over DeviceNet withthe plant control system. The Contractor shall program the points and work with the County to test thatthe data exchange is working.

1.03 UNIT RESPONSIBILITY

A. This equipment shall be supplied under unit responsibility requirements in Section 43 05 01. Thesystem is specified in section 43 51 25 Digester Pump Mixing System.

Network I/O Block Types: VFD

Program Description: Variable Frequency Drive

Program Function: To exchange desired data over DeviceNet networks between this device and the PLC.


Program Requirements:

Data Read Words: DeviceNet status word. Node status bits and counters

Data Write Words: Control Words

Start

Stop

Jog

Speed Setpoint

Clear Fault

_START

_STOP

_JOG

_SPEED_SP

_FLT_RSET

Datalinks – Data Reads: Datalinks

A1: Output Current (amps)

A2: Torque Current (amps)

A3: Power Factor

A4: Power (kW)

A5: Output Voltage VAC

A6: Runtime (hr)

A7: Drive Status

1. Ready

2. Active

3. Running

4. Jogging

5. Stopping

6. DC Braking

7. Auto Tuning

8. Auto Restart Status

9. Auto Restart Action

10. Current Limit

11. Bus Frequency Resolution

12. Motor Overload

A8: Digital Inputs

1. Jog PB

2. Auto

3. Drive CB

4. Autotransformer or Bridge Temp

5. Motor Temp High

6. Local Switch

_CURNT

_TORQUE

_PF

_POWER

_VOLTS

_RT_HRS

_DRIVE_RDY

_DRIVE_ACT

_DRIVE_RNG

_DRIVE_JOGNG

_DRIVE_STOPNG

_DRIVE_BRAKE

_DRIVE_A_TUNE

_DRIVE_RSTRT_STAT

_DRIVE_RSTRT_ACT

_DRIVE_CURNT_LIMIT

_DRIVE_BUS_FREQ

_DRIVE_OL

_JOG

_AUTO

_CB

_VFD_TSH

_MTR_TSH

_L_R

Datalinks – Data Writes: Datalinks

A1: Digital Outputs

A2: Spare

A3: Start User Mask

A4: Stop User Mask

A5: Reference User Mask

A6: Jog User Mask

_DO

_START_MASK

_STOP_MASK

_REF_MASK

_JOG_MASK




Reference Title

ANSI C37.90 Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

NEMA ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems

NEMA ST20 Dry Type Transformers for General Applications

NFPA National Electric Code (NEC)

IEEE 519 IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems

UL Standard 508 Industrial Control Equipment

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Catalog and technical data indicating the equipment meets the specifications.

C. Installation instructions outline dimensions and weights including filters and/or isolation transformers, front view drawing identifying control and monitoring devices, nameplate engravings, and wall mounting requirements for all assemblies.

D. External connection diagram showing function and identification of all terminals requiring field connections.

E. Operations and Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01 78 23.

F. Schematics and wiring diagrams.

G. Description of settings, wiring, configuration, output contact timing, and other details required to provide the specified Jog-Off-Auto function and restart after power failure.

H. Plan drawings showing conduit entry locations.

I. Efficiency and power factor calculations: Calculate efficiencies of the VFD controller including the auto-transformer, ventilation fans, control

power and all VFD losses. Calculate displacement and total power factor including filter. Perform calculations at 100, 75, and 50 percent speed. Include first 36 harmonics.

J. Calculations of cooling and ventilation requirements.

K. Seismic certificate.

L. Submit letter signed by an officer of the VFD manufacturer that the specific application has been reviewed and that the pump, motor and drive combination are compatible and will satisfy operating requirements under all conditions of operation without adverse impacts on either the pump, motor or VFD.

M. Certified final factory test procedure and results for each drive.

N. Location and description of service center and spare parts stock.


O. Recommended spare parts list.

P. Test procedures as specified in this Section

Q. Certified copies of all material test reports.

R. VFD training instructor qualifications.

S. Training schedule and materials.

T. Manufacturer's certification that the controller can withstand fault conditions on the load side based on the assumption that an infinite bus and 5 percent impedance on a 1000kVA delta-to-wye service transformer exists on the supply side of the controller.

U. Provide written verification to the Project Representative that the factory installed wiring, busing, metering, relaying, and related equipment are properly connected, aligned, phased and identified.

V. Test instruments used to perform factory testing, including documentation of calibration.

W. Test documentation from post installation field testing.

X. Mounting base design requirements

Y. Provide written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed and properly adjusted and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.


A. Qualifications: The VFD training instructor shall be factory-trained.

B. Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ETL, or Canadian Standards Association (CSA-US).

C. All upgrades to specified requirements per UL 508 or ETL.

D. Compatibility: VFD controller's performance shall be compatible with and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD controllers and not interfere with each other.

E. Harmonics: All line side harmonic suppression devices used to eliminate or deal with harmonics in any way

shall be contained within the VFD enclosure and shall be integral with the VFD controller. Use of input line filters external to the VFD shall not be permitted to meet the specified harmonic

levels contained in this specification. Output filters, used to protect motors from high voltage reflections, may be installed external to the

VFD. VFD controller's performance shall be in compliance with the latest version of IEEE 519.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The equipment in this section has been pre-selected by the County for system standardization. Contractor shall procure the items required in this section from a vendor authorized to supply products by the listed manufacturer.


2.02 ACCEPTABLE VFD MANUFACTURER

A. Rockwell Automation Powerflex 755 18 Pulse Drive.

B. No substitution for the above manufacturer.

2.03 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Minimum Continuous Current Ratings: 1.15 nameplate current of driven motor at full voltage,

torque and speed. Torque Requirements: Constant torque, Heavy Duty rated. The use of isolation transformers is not allowed.

2.04 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirements: Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) drive design suitable for use with NEMA design B squirrel-cage

induction motors rated for inverter duty at 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz with 1.15 service factor. Converters:

a. 18-Pulse, multiple full wave, 3 phase, solid state rectifier bridge to convert incoming fixed voltage and frequency to a fixed DC voltage. All components for converters shall be integral to the VFD enclosure.

Inverter: a. Output voltage: Adjustable and controlled by the value of output frequency to maintain a

constant ratio of Volts per Hertz throughout the operating range. The Volts per Hertz shall be internally field adjustable.

b. Capable of varying the speed of any standard NEMA B or NEMA E design, squirrel cage, induction motor with a 1.15 service factor.

c. A single unit, with no paralleling of smaller inverters. d. Suppresses output dV/dT high voltage spikes and shall be compatible with the pump motor.

General Features: a. Inverter output shall be conditioned to prevent high voltage ringing on motor leads. Output

filters are acceptable. b. Microprocessor controlled pulse width modulation output voltage control strategy. c. Utilize pulse width modulation control techniques such that the maximum root mean square

motor line current at rated voltage, torque and speed is less than 1.05 times that motor nameplate current.

d. Power transistor output circuitry shall use insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT). An essential 18-pulse design combining three 6-pulse inverters to achieve a 18-pulse output will not be accepted. Input phase shifting transformer shall be specifically designed for equal current sharing in VFD applications.

e. Power devices to have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line current. f. Input power devices shall have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line voltage. g. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.

Ratings: a. Rated Input Power: 480 Volt, plus 10 percent or minus 10 percent, 3 phase, 48 - 62 Hertz,

incoming voltage imbalance of plus or minus 0.5 percent. b. Rated Output Power: 0-480 Volt, plus or minus 1 percent, 3 phase, 1-90 Hertz. c. Frequency Drift: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. d. Voltage Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent rated value no load to full load. e. Speed Regulation: 3 percent. f. Ambient Temperature Range: 0-40 degrees Celsius. g. Atmosphere: Non-condensing relative humidity to 95 percent. h. VFD Efficiency: A minimum of 95 percent at 100-percent speed and torque at 40 degrees

Celsius ambient based upon measurement of input power versus output power with all specified components in system.


i. Displacement Power Factor: The minimum displacement power factor the VFD controller shall present to the AC system shall be 95 percent at all speeds. The unit shall be designed to inherently provide this minimum power factor.

j. Speed Range: 40:1. k. Input Speed Signal: A 4-20 mA DC from an external source and a remote pot. Circuitry shall

be isolated. l. Output Contacts: Three electrically isolated, programmable auxiliary status contacts, rated 5

amp at 120 VAC, for Ready, Run, and Fault. Frequency control and regulation:

a. Range: 4 mA DC at minimum equipment speed and 20 mA DC at maximum equipment speed. b. Accuracy: 1.0 percent of span. c. Deadband: 0.5 percent of span. d. Repeatability: 0.5 percent of span. e. Input signal impedance: 100 Ohms minimum, with isolated two-wire signal follower. f. Adjustable minimum and maximum output frequency limits. g. Independent timed linear acceleration and deceleration functions adjustable from 3 to 300

seconds. Provide program to prevent operation of the VFD at a minimum of two critical speeds. Disconnects:

a. Provide input fused disconnects or circuit breaker and current limiter combinations. b. Provide disconnects or circuit breakers with through-the-door or flange-mounted handle and

include door interlocks with defeater mechanisms. c. Provide these disconnect switch and circuit breakers as integral components of the factory built

assemblies. VFD overload capacity: 150 percent of continuous current rating for one minute.

B. Microprocessor Digital Control: Drive operating parameters programmable. Sealed keypad with pushbuttons or sealed membrane type keypad with LED or LCD display,

mounted on door when VFD is inside a NEMA 1 enclosure. Operating parameters, fault, and diagnostic data maintained in non-volatile memory with historic log

of fault and diagnostic data for a minimum of the four most recent events, and is accessible via keypad and RS232/RS422 serial port.

Utilize English messages and engineering units. Menu driven. Password security. Computer Interface via RS232/RS422 Serial Communication Port:

a. Adjust drive-operating parameter. b. Fault and diagnostic data accessible. c. Isolated from ground so that no connection of a computer powered by the facility power can

cause damage to the computer or the VFD serial communication ports. Display fault and diagnostic data. DeviceNet communication.

C. Basic Drive Features and Functions: Automatic Restart Feature:

a. Field selectable. b. Faults:

1) Overload. 2) Overvoltage. 3) Undervoltage. 4) Voltage imbalance.

c. Final fault, requiring manual reset, if restart is not successful after three attempts at 30-second intervals between restart attempts.

d. Provide drive with the ability to start into a motor that is spinning in the forward direction and assume normal operation upon auto restart of the drive.


Upon restoration of AC power after a loss of utility or standby power, the VFD controller shall not attempt to restart until an external start signal is received. The drive shall not require any type of reset command after a power outage.

30 percent voltage dip ride through capability for one cycle. Controllers shall be compatible and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD controllers and

shall not interfere with each other.

D. Adjustments: Maximum frequency: Adjustable 60-90 Hertz. Minimum frequency: Adjustable 6-40 Hertz. Speed: Frequency maximum and frequency minimum. Independent acceleration and deceleration rates: Field adjustable with minimum range of 3-300

seconds. Voltage parameters: Minimum and maximum voltage and Volts/Hertz. Current limit: 50 to 150 percent of drive limit for 1 minute. Inverse time overload: NEMA Class 10. Speed shedding: Automatic upon low voltage. Speed profile: Starting ramp, stopping ramp, minimum speed, and maximum speed.

Starting boost: 4%.

E. Protective Features and Functions: Current limiting fuses, regulators, or other techniques for both internal and external fault protection. Overvoltage protection on the incoming AC line. Ground fault protection. Single-phase fault or 3-phase short-circuit on VFD output terminals without damage to any power

component. Over-speed (over-frequency). Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip with inverse time overcurrent protection. Single phase and undervoltage trip. Power unit over-temperature. Electronic motor overload protection.

De-saturation circuit protection for the following conditions: a. VFD fault. b. Motor protection interlock. c. VFD stop.

DC bus discharge circuit for protection of operator and service personnel with indicator lamp. Transistor assembly overcurrent protection. Provides safe drive shutdown on following faults: a. Loss of input power. b. Sustained input undervoltage (minus 15 percent). c. Sustained gradual overload. d. Instantaneous severe overload. e. Power transistor over-temperature. f. Blown fuse. g. Logic power supply failure.

Voltage transients: Provide solid state line transient protection up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991.

Overcurrent protection: a. The VFD system shall provide adjustable electronic current limit. Current shall be accurate to

within 1.0 percent and shall smoothly limit motor speed at whatever value is necessary to limit motor current to that value.

b. The VFD shall provide motor running overcurrent protection in compliance with NFPA-70.


Short-circuit protection: a. The VFD shall be fully protected against load faults. b. Bolted, phase to phase, or phase to ground faults shall not damage the unit. c. Fault protection shall be based on a power source short circuit capacity of 65,000 Amps RMS

symmetrical at the VFD power input terminals. Any impedance or other current limiting necessary to meet this requirement shall be provided as part of the VFD system, and any losses caused by current limiting devices shall be included in efficiency calculations for the VFD system.

Line voltage: The VFD shall be protected against high and low line voltage on one or more phases. Internal faults: The VFD shall incorporate an internal fault monitoring system to detect malfunctions. This system shall be designed to protect the VFD from transient and sustained faults and to limit damage that may be caused by these faults.

Motor overtemperature: a. The VFD shall interface to motor temperature switches and shall shut down if the motor

becomes overheated. b. The VFD shall include all components necessary to sense a contact opening and shutdown the

affected motor if the motor winding temperature exceeds maximum rated operating temperature.

c. Drive must be manually reset after a motor over-temperature trip. d. Install and integrate motor protective relay for motor over temperature. Coordinate with the

pump motor. HIM Fault display: a. The HIM shall display VFD faults that shall describe the cause of any shutdown. b. Annunciation shall identify the first fault in those cases where multiple faults occur between

manual or automatic resets and shall be visible without opening the VFD cabinet. c. The language shall be English. d. As a minimum, the following faults shall be displayed:

1) Motor overtemperature. 2) Motor overcurrent. 3) VFD overtemperature. 4) Line over/under voltage. 5) VFD overvoltage.

HIM Data display: a. The HIM shall display the following data:

1) Elapsed time meter (non re-settable) 2) Indication of output voltage in volts 3) Indication of output currents in amps. 4) Indication of motor speed in RPM.

F. Special Features and Functions: Jog-Off-Auto via remote selector switch. In Off the drive cannot be turned on from DeviceNet or

from the HIM. In Auto, the speed is controlled from DeviceNet. In Jog the VFD output frequency is 5Hz.

An output contact is depicted on the Drawing in the Jog circuit so that the Jog input can be held off until the VFD detects the Off position, because that was required for previous Powerflex VFDs. The VFD manufacture shall submit data to confirm the required settings, wiring, and configuration for this VFD.

Control power transformer: a. 120 VAC secondary; 100 VA minimum. b. Two primary fuses and one secondary fuse with non-fused secondary leg grounded. c. Door mounted “Control Power On” pilot light. d. Independent transformer utilized for internal VFD electronic controls.

G. Noise Data: Free field noise generated by the VFD shall not exceed 85 dBA at 3 feet from any point of the VFD cabinet under any normal operating condition.


H. Enclosures: Pad mounted. NEMA 1 with fan and ventilation provisions that are necessary for equipment cooling. Painted parts:

a. To undergo phosphatizing, prepaint treatment for rust resistance and paint bond. b. Paint and process color: Manufacturer's color. c. Paint: Applied by electrostatic process and baked to a durable hard finish.

Nameplates: a. Provide laminate phenolic nameplates showing the controller designations as specified. b. Design: Black, with minimum 3/16-inch high white letters. Nominal size shall be 1 inch high by

3 inches long. c. Abbreviations: If required because of space limitations, abbreviations shall be submitted to the

Project Representative for approval. Seismic bracing: The entire assembly, including electronics and controls, shall be braced for the

site seismic criteria listed in Section 01 73 00. Audible noise requirements: Free field noise generated by the VFD shall not exceed 85 dBA at 3

feet from any point of the VFD cabinet under any normal operating condition. All components shall be accessible and removable from the front only. Doors:

a. Open at least 90 degrees and shall be provided with 4 point hinges. b. Door handles: Capable of accepting a padlock with a 3/8-inch shackle to lock the VFD

enclosure closed and the input breaker open. Drive enclosures:

a. Provided with external framework for housing the air filters. b. Access to the filter media for purposes of replacement or cleaning shall be possible from the

exterior of the drive without the need to open doors on the drive enclosure or otherwise gain interior access to the drive.

Ventilation: a. When required provide intake and exhaust ventilation in the door of the enclosure.

I. 18 pulse drive with auto transformer: 1. Provide drive with a single 18-pulse converter bridge:

a. The converter bridge shall be a parallel diode bridge assembly with DC snubber. Diodes shall be rated a minimum of 1600V and 100 degrees C.

b. The converter bridge shall incorporate a solid state phase loss relay. c. The converter bridge shall incorporate 1,000V three-phase block style MOV protection rated 85

degrees C. 2. The drive system shall incorporate an 18-pulse phase shifting auto transformer. The transformer

shall be wired into the drive enclosure where possible. 3. The auto transformer shall have the following minimum features:

a. Rated for input rectifier duty and matched to drive overload capability b. Copper wound c. Class 220 Insulation d. Power factor of 0.98 e. Open core construction f. One thermoswitch in each coil with one normally closed contact block g. Fed by open core input line reactor rated at 5 percent impedance. h. Hi-potential rating (one minute): 2,500 VAC line to ground and line to line. i. Transformer temperature rise: 80 degrees C.

J. The drive system shall meet IEEE 519 at the drive input terminals without analysis. This is based upon the input power phases being balanced within 1 percent.

K. Maintainability: VFD controller's parts shall be interchangeable and modular for all controllers.


2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Stand Alone Factory Test: The Project Representative will observe factory tests on the VFD controller at the Project Representative's option and expense.

2.06 SPARE PARTS


B. The VFD manufacturer shall provide one complete set of all plug-in controller components as standby components for the VFDs supplied.

C. Label standby components and package in a sturdy container suitable for storage.

D. As a minimum, the standby components include: One set of 3 of each type of power fuse. One set of 12 of each type of control fuse. One set of indicating lights. One complete VFD for each VFD frame size supplied on the project for replacement in an

enclosure. One HIM.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install equipment level and plumb and anchor on wall in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and as indicated herein.

C. Provide earthquake resistant attachments and supports for equipment.

D. Provide seismic anchorage and bracing per Section 01 73 00.

3.02 CONFIGURATION AND PROGRAMMING

A. Provided factory trained manufacture's representative to configure VFD and including: Network settings: Addressing, communication rates, loss of communication action, VFD settings: Ramp up and down limits, emergency function, protection settings, all VFD

configurations required for integration of VFD into plant control system via DevicNet for project required monitoring and control

3.03 HARMONIC ANALYSIS CALCULATIONS

A. Calculate total harmonic distortion at the common node Motor Control Center bus for the controller units based on the specified impedances and system configuration. Unless otherwise indicated, determine distortion in accordance with IEEE 519.


A. Employ and pay for services of the equipment manufacturer's field service representative to: Inspect equipment covered by these specifications. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks; provide a checklist of all

inspections.


3.05 TRAINING

A. Provide coordinated training course, approved by the Project Representative, to instruct ten County personnel on variable frequency drives. The training will be conducted at the Brightwater Treatment Plant, coordinate with the Project Representative for room location. The training shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

Conduct two hours of training to cover general variable frequency drive theory and operation. Conduct six hours of training on operation and maintenance of the variable frequency drives

specific to the supplied VFDs. Training may be split into two identical course covering the above material as directed by the

Project Representative.

3.06 FACTORY TEST

A. Perform standard factory tests on each drive provided.

B. Notify the Project Representative at least 4 weeks in advance of any test. Provide certified copies of the test reports.

3.07 TESTING AND STARTUP

A. Test Procedure: Prepare test procedure and conduct tests in accordance with the procedure to demonstrate to the

Project Representative the accuracy of the wiring, control, and proper functioning of the equipment. Submit proposed test procedure for approval at least two weeks prior to the demonstration. All equipment and systems shall be demonstrated as operating properly prior to acceptance of the

work. All protective devices shall be operative during the demonstration. If the demonstration indicates unsatisfactory operation as determined by the Project Representative

or inspecting authorities, correct defects and repeat the demonstration.

B. Phase Relationship Tests: Check connection to all equipment for proper phase relationship. During such check, disconnect all devices that could be damaged by the application of voltage of

reversed phase sequence.

C. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on conductors, cables, and equipment, signal circuits exempt. Make tests using 1,000-volt Biddle hand cranked megger insulation resistance tester. Disconnect all equipment that may be damaged by such tests before the tests are made. Tests shall measure insulation resistance from line to ground. Test conductors and cables after placement and the completion of the terminations, but before

connection to equipment. Test 600-volt class circuits and equipment. Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance of

circuits and equipment shall be 100 megohms. Provide test reports listing test equipment used, person or persons performing the tests, the date

tested, the circuits or equipment tested, and the results of all tests. These tests shall be witnessed by the Project Representative. The Contractor shall notify the Project Representative one week in advance of testing.

D. High Voltage Ringing on Motor Leads: The contract requires VFDs, or VFDs with output filters, which control the phenomenon of high

voltage reflected voltage waves on motor cable, produced by the high speed switching of PWM drives.

Use an oscilloscope with a 5,000-volt test probe at the motors with the longest length able to record the amplitude of the voltage at the motor.

Voltage spikes plus base 480 volts: Not exceed 1488 Volts peak, per NEMA.


E. Test Equipment: All test instrumentation equipment used during testing shall be NIST traceable and certified.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 01 - 1 PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 40 05 01

PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies:

Process piping and ducting, General requirements for piping systems associated with mechanical systems, Piping and ducting generally exposed within built spaces, and/or Piping and ducting closely associated with a treatment or pumping facility.

B. More detailed specifications for the components listed in the Piping System Specification Sheets (PIPESPEC) may be found in other sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23, 33, and 40. Use this Section in conjunction with those sections.

C. Conveyance piping and buried "yard piping" including irrigation, water supply, drainage, storm and sewer conveyance piping - not used.

D. Fitting and Coupling Compatibility: To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components, fittings and couplings for grooved end piping systems shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.



Reference Title

ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose

ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 260 and 800

ASME B16.3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300

ASME B16.4 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, NPS ½ – NPS 24

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.12 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

ASME B31.1 Power Piping

ASME B31.3 Process Piping

ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

ASTM A47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A105 Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Applications

ASTM A106 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings


Reference Title

ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron

ASTM A234 Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

ASTM A312 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A570 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality

ASTM A774 As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures

ASTM A778 Welded, Unannealed Stainless Steel Tubular Products

ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

ASTM C443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position

ASTM D1248 Poly ethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials

ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

ASTM D2513 Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2996 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe

ASTM D3034 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D3261 Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing

ASTM D4101 Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials

ASTM D4174 Cleaning, Flushing, and Purification of Petroleum Fluid Hydraulic Systems

ASTM F441 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-Inch Through 48-Inch, for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges

AWWA C150 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe

AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water or Other Liquids

AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe - 6 Inches and Larger

AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe—4 In. and Larger--Shop Applied

AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe

AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services--Sizes 4 Inches Through 144 Inches

AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings

AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines

AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines

AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines

AWWA C301 Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids


Reference Title

AWWA C303 Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, Pretensioned, for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints

AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches, for Water

AWWA M11 Steel Water Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation

CISPI 301 Specification Data for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary System with No-Hub Pipe and Fittings

EPA SDWA Section 1417(d)

Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act Requirements, Amendments to Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA), effective January 4, 2014

MIL-H-13528B Hydrochloric Acid, Inhibited, Rust Removing

MIL-STD-810 Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests

NACE RP-0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

NACE RP-0286 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines

NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code

NSF 61 Health effects criteria (Lead Content Compliance) for water system components

NSF 372 Lead Content Compliance Guidelines for water system components

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedure: Section 01 33 00.

B. Provide the following submittals: For each piping system, catalog cuts and other information for pipe, fittings, linings, coatings,

cathodic protection, and valving to be used for each pipe size category. Certification that each length of pipe has been pressure tested and has satisfactorily passed such

tests. Piping layouts and layout schedule showing pipeline locations for all piping systems in that area

with respect to structures, other piping and utilities (ductwork, conduits, etc.) and details and location of joints, anchors, supports, fittings, connections, penetrations, supports, valves, piping appurtenances, flexible couplings, thermal expansion, cathodic protection equipment, maintenance holes, and clean-outs as applicable. Drawings shall be original layouts by the Contractor; photocopies of contract drawings are not acceptable.

A copy of all related contract schematic, structural, and mechanical drawings with all piping, foundations, supports, and layout sizes and dimensions requiring Contractor confirmation marked.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Pressure terms used in Section 40 05 01 and elsewhere in the technical specifications are defined as follows:

Maximum: The greatest continuous pressure at which the piping system operates. Test: The hydrostatic pressure used to determine system acceptance. PSI: Pressure above atmospheric; gauge pressure (PSIG)


1.05 PIPING SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Design Professional:Contractor shall provide professional engineering services (“Design Professional”) for the design and inspection of piping systems work. The design of these systems shall be the product of a professional engineer retained by the Contractor and currently licensed to practice in the State of Washington. This requirement shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of overall responsibility for this portion of the work. The Design Professional shall have not less than ten years experience in the type of piping support and seismic restraint design work required for this project.

B. Piping System Design and Inspection:All pipe support details are provided for reference of existing piping support systems. The Design Professional shall provide the final design, inspection, and certification for piping supports and seismic restraints as specified in this Section and referenced Sections. The Design Professional shall coordinate pipe support design, seismic restraint design, and pipe expansion design with each other. The work of the Design Professional shall be complementary to the design elements specified in the Construction Documents, to provide complete piping system designs. The Design Professional’s inspection responsibilities also complement inspections by the County. The general division of responsibility for work is as follows:

Piping System Element (Specification)

Design Professional’s Responsibility

County’s Responsibility

Pipe material and thickness, test pressures and other properties (Section 40 05 01)

All piping

Fabrication / Layout Drawings (Section 40 05 01)

All Piping

Pipe Supports (Sections 40 05 41 and 01 73 00)

All Piping

Seismic Bracing (Sections 40 05 42 and 01 73 00)

All Piping

Expansion and Contraction Design (Section 40 05 44)

All Piping

Inspection – General, for design and specification conformance (Section 40 05 01, 40 05 41, 40 05 42, and related sections)

All Piping

The design standards for use by the Design Professional shall be as specified in each piping system. If no design standard is specified, use the design standard specified in the following list. Others may be used upon written request by Design Professional and justification, through Contractor, to the Project Representative. a. Process Piping, and piping not otherwise specified - ANSI/ASME B31.3.b. Building Services Piping – Uniform Plumbing Code.c. Steel water pipe - ANSI/ASME B31.3 (piping within the scope of AWWA M11 may be

designed in accordance with AWWA M11).The design professional is responsible for completing a design of expansion control for the piping specified on the Drawings and implementing engineering controls which allow the pipe to move and expand during normal process conditions without imparting damaging forces onto connecting pipes, equipment, structures, or other appurtenances.


Design of piping systems and appurtenances shall include, but not be limited to, consideration of and provisions for: a. Piping support and restraint independent of equipment and no equipment supported loads

exceeding equipment manufacturer’s requirements. Design Professional shall obtain maximum nozzle loads from the Contractor.

b. Piping shall be routed to provide access aisles free of obstruction and worker hazards. Unless otherwise noted or approved by the Project Representative, the minimum clear space between equipment shall be 3 feet horizontally. Minimum vertical clearance shall be 7-feet above the floor or local grade at access aisles and egress paths. Minimum vertical clearance shall be 8 feet above the floor in utilidors.

c. Electrical bonding for all gas, fuel and pneumatic conveyance systems. d. Dielectric separation, as specified. e. Settlement of new or existing structures.

Piping submittals by the Contractor shall include all elements of piping systems required for fabrication and construction, including those portions specified on the Drawings. Submittals shall depict couplings, restraint, anchorage, expansion control measures and other elements of the piping system.

Fitting angles and vertical and horizontal pipe locations shall be determined by Contractor and depicted on piping layout drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, provide piping materials listed in the PIPESPEC, including pipe, gaskets, fittings, joint assemblies, connections, linings and coatings, conforming to detailed specifications for each type of pipe and piping appurtenance specified in other sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23, 33, and 40.

B. Where temporary piping and valving are required, piping material and accessories shall be selected by the Contractor and submitted to the Project Representative for review. Such piping shall be suitable for operation at the test pressure and maximum range of operating service temperature of the permanent piping system which the temporary piping is replacing, as specified in the PIPESPEC. Plastic, steel, RCP, ductile iron, and polyethylene pipe may all be used at the Contractor's discretion in both buried and exposed service. Temporary piping shall be provided with supports at intervals which prevent sagging or liquid accumulation.

2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Coding Markers: Plastic markers for coding pipe shall comply with ASME A13.1. Markers shall be the precoiled type

that is easily removable. Markers shall be resistant to petroleum based oils and grease and shall meet criteria for humidity, solar radiation, rain, salt-fog, and fungus, as specified by MIL-STD-810 and shall withstand a continuous operating temperature range of - 40 to 250 degrees F. Markers shall not be the individual letter type but shall be manufactured and applied in one continuous length of plastic including directional arrows. Legends and arrows shall be subsurface printed on polyester and overlaminated with Tedlar. Marking Services Style MS-995, Brady Style B-915, or approved equal.


Minimum marker lengths and letter heights:

Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering

Minimum Length of Marker Minimum Height of Letters

Less than 1½ inch 8 inch ½ inch

1½ to 3 inch 8 inch 1⅛ inch

Greater than 3 inch 12 inch 2¼ inch

a. Outside diameter shall include insulation and protective wrapping. b. Pipe markers shall include uni- and bidirectional arrows in the same sizes and colors as the

legend. Color:

a. Background color shall match existing or shall be as specified in the PIPESPEC. b. Legends and arrow color shall match existing or shall be white on blue, black, or red

backgrounds; black on all other color backgrounds.

B. Tracer Tape for buried pipe: not used.

2.03 VALVES

A. Valves of the same size and service shall be provided by a single valve manufacturer. Packing shall be non-asbestos material. Actual length of valves shall be within 1/16 inch (plus or minus) of the manufacturer's specified length. Flanges shall meet the requirement of ASME B16.5. Push-on and mechanical joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111.

B. Valve operators: Section 40 05 57.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Location: Provide piping as specified except for adjustments to accommodate architectural and structural

features. Coordinate with electrical construction.

B. Potable Water Connections: not used.

C. Pipe Support, Anchorage and Bracing: Support piping by anchor brackets, guides, saddles or hangers. Seismic anchorage and bracing: See Section 01 73 00 for seismic criteria. Acceptable types of supports, guides, saddles, hangers and structure attachments for general pipe

support, seismic bracing, as well as anchorage details, and expansion/contraction are shown on the drawings and specified in Section 40 05 41, 40 05 42, and 40 05 44.

The Drawings do not attempt to show all required supports, hangers, seismic braces, or thermal expansion/contraction methods. These items are shown only where special requirements exist or where necessary to convey a special or particular design intent.

Where a specific type of support or anchorage is indicated on the Drawings, then only that type shall be used at that location.

Pipe hangers, guides, and saddles are generally not shown on the Drawings. Locations and type of rigid pipe anchorage generally are shown on the Drawings. Where not more specifically shown on the Drawings, minimum spacing and type of pipe support

shall be in accordance with Table A/150702 for general supports and Table C/151501 for seismic bracing, as shown on the mechanical standard details, drawings M-001, M-002 and M-003.

Provide supports on each run at each change of direction. Unless otherwise specified, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new piping.


Anchor piping with flexible connections and/or expansion joints such that the intended uses of these joints are maintained in the piping system.

Unless otherwise specified, pipe support and seismic restraint materials of construction shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in Section 40 05 41 and 40 05 42.

D. Anchorage for Buried Piping: not used.

E. Bedding and Backfill: not used.

F. Joint and Fitting Options:Pipe connection (joint and fitting) options for a particular piping system shall be as specified on the particular system PIPESPEC sheet. Takedown couplings shall be provided for all piping systems in accordance with Section 40 05 40. Takedown couplings shall be provided around equipment and at standard pipe lengths for all straight runs of pipe. Continuous welding for straight runs of pipe is acceptable only where the individual PIPESPEC sheet allows welding as a connection option. Where connections are shown, the connections shall be specifically where shown; however, if several connection options are allowed for the particular piping system on the PIPESPEC sheet, then any option may be consistently used, for example, if flanged or grooved are acceptable and grooved are shown, then flanged may be substituted. Integrity of rigid, non-rotating connections must be maintained at all valves and other equipment.

G. Connections to Existing Piping:Isolation valves, as specified in this Section, shall be installed at every location where new pipes connect to existing piping systems. Isolation valves shall be used to minimize existing system shutdowns and existing system interference with new pipeline testing.

3.02 PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Pipe Coding:After application of the specified coating and insulation systems, label all exposed piping, including piping in ceiling spaces, pipe trenches, pipe chases and valve boxes with plastic markers as specified. Locate legend markers and directional arrows at each side of walls, floors and ceilings, at one side of each piece of equipment, at piping intersections, inside valve boxes and vaults, and at approximately 20-foot centers as required in Part 3. Attach with stainless straps, plastic straps are not acceptable.

B. Plastic Tracer Tape: not used.

C. Magnetic Tracer Tape: not used.

D. Valves: Stainless steel tags or nameplates per Section 43 05 01 with the specified valve identification.Flanged valves: Install on valve flanges in a position visible from floor level. Flangeless valves 6 inches in diameter and smaller: Attach to the valve stem by 0.063-inch minimum stainless steel wire. Flangeless valves 8 inches in diameter and larger: Attach to the valve body by self-tapping corrosion resistant metal screws.

3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Work:Cover openings in piping, and temporarily seal to protect from contamination. Protect materials and equipment from damage due to environmental conditions. Use protective cover, and protect from surface water by using raised platforms.


Protect unfinished work at end of each workday from damage, contamination and moisture by use of plugs, caps or covers. Protect piping and valves from damage pending performance of system tests.

B. Installation:Install piping parallel to walls. Clear obstructions, preserve headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear. Should structural difficulties or other work prevent running of pipes or setting of equipment at locations indicated, necessary minor deviations will be allowed, as approved by the Project Representative. Expanding or swaging of tubing to fit IPS fitting sockets will not be permitted. Use reducing fittings where change in pipe size occurs. Use couplings only where required pipe runs between fittings are longer than standard length of pipe being used. Make exposed polished or enameled connections to fixtures or equipment with special care to avoid damage to finished surfaces. Make changes in direction only with fittings. Provide expansion loops or bends where indicated to allow for proper pipe expansion. Construct bends with long radius welded fittings. Use proper length bolts for each size flange on flanged connections. Bolts with excessive length of exposed threads will not be permitted. Minimum of 3 full threads shall be exposed beyond nut after tightening assembly.

Prevent entry of foreign matter during handling, assembling and installation. Use compressed air, wire brush, solvent and other acceptable means to remove residual scale, dirt and other foreign matter from interior of piping before final connections are made. Protect open ends of pipe by capping, plugging or other acceptable means.

Install piping with sufficient pitch to ensure adequate drainage and venting. Provide unions or flanges in piping connections to equipment. Electrically isolate connections between dissimilar metal piping with dielectric couplings or fittings. Install class of piping as indicated. Do not run water piping over electric switchboards, transformers or electric motor starters. Protect against external corrosion pipes which pass through, under or otherwise in contact with soil, cinders, concrete or other corrosive material. Protect by protective wrappings.

C. Sewer and Waste Piping: not used.

D. Cast Iron Soil Piping: not used.

E. Pipe Joints and Connections:Cut pipe with appropriate tool and deburr. Make joints tight. Test and remake leaky joints with new materials. Do not use thread cement or caulking to remake joints. Do not use sharp-toothed wrench in making up brass pipe or chrome-plated items. Provide thread forms and length in accordance with ASME standards. Use lubricant or sealant on male threads suitable for proposed pipe service. Clean joint before soldering. Use appropriate flux and alloy for operating temperature level as indicated. Apply standard rules for welding of pipe joints as contained in ASME Standard Code for pressure piping including welding procedures, qualification of welders and testing. Follow applicable local safety codes. Provide gasket coated with recommended lubricant between contact faces of flanges.

F. Unions, Flanges and Gaskets:Provide unions where indicated and at each threaded or soldered connection to equipment, tanks and valves with the following exceptions: a. Only 1 union is required at each manually operated threaded valve.b. None required at compression stops.


c. Locate unions so piping can be easily disconnected for removal of equipment or valve.d. Provide flanges at each flanged connection to equipment and valves. Provide matching flange

faces at each connection. Tighten fastener system to indicated torque.

G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:Provide piping systems with anchorages, sway braces, guides and supports as required by applicable portions of ASME B31. Provide support for vertical and horizontal loads, including vibration imposed loads. Necessary hangers and supports including beam and purlin clamps, rods, pipe rolls, angles, channels and plates as well as any changed from indicated design, shall have prior approval of the Project Representative. Use of building structural steel for supporting hangers will be permitted only where indicated or approved by Project Representative. Do not weld transversely across tension flange or any member under stress, use bracing, girts and other secondary members for support, nor burn or drill holes in building steel. Support vertical piping with approved steel brackets to prevent swaying, sagging, vibration and resonance. Allow for thermal expansion between supports or anchors. Do not use flat steel strap hangers. Do not support piping by wire, rope, strap, chain, wood or similar devices.

Provide pipe hangers of same size, or nearest commercial size available, as pipe or tubing on which they are to be used. Allow for thickness of insulation in sizing hangers.

Supporting structures, including supporting frames, anchors and guides common to mechanical and electrical work, shall be submitted and have the prior approval of the Project Representative.

Use adjustable iron hangers for 1¼-inch and smaller pipe, and clevis type for 1½-inch and larger pipe. Where copper tubing is directly supported, use copper-plated hangers.

Protect dissimilar metals by wrapping pipe with 1/16 inch thick neoprene

3.04 TESTING

A. General:Upon completion of piping, but prior to application of insulation on exposed piping, test the piping systems. Pressures, media and test durations shall be as specified in the PIPESPEC. Equipment which may be damaged by the specified test conditions shall be isolated. Testing shall be performed using calibrated test gages and calibrated volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Each test gage shall be selected so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's range. Unless otherwise specified, completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems. Notify the Project Representative at least 24 hours prior to each test. Unless otherwise specified, testing, as specified herein, shall include existing piping systems which connect with new pipe systems. Existing pipe shall be tested to the nearest existing valve. Any piping which fails the test shall be repaired. Repair of existing piping will be considered and paid for as extra work. Testing of the ribbon anode and electrical isolation effectiveness should include the following. After installation of electrical isolation equipment, effectiveness shall be judged in accordance with NACE RP-0286. The magnesium ribbon anode installation shall be judged in accordance with NACE RP-0169. No practical testing of the zinc ribbon anode is possible because the anode is isolated from the environment until the polyethylene wrap is compromised.


B. Gas and Air Systems:Testing medium and procedures for chlorine and sulfur dioxide systems: Not used The allowable leakage rate for hazardous gas systems, insulated systems, and systems tested with water shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified test period. Hazardous gas systems shall include sulfur dioxide, chlorine, propane, sludge gas and natural gas systems. Unless otherwise specified for each pipe system, the allowable leakage rate for other systems tested with air shall be based on a maximum pressure drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure for the duration of the period. Prior to starting a test interval using air, the air shall be at ambient temperature and specified test pressure.

C. Liquid Systems:Testing medium and procedures for chlorine and sulfur dioxide systems are specified in paragraph 3.04D. Testing medium and procedures for hydraulic and lube oil systems are specified inparagraph 3.04E. The allowable leakage rate for other systems shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified duration.

D. Hydraulic and Lube Oil Systems: not used.

E. Refrigerant Systems: not used.

F. Drains: Drain systems, other than pumped drain systems, shall be tested in accordance with UPC.

3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING

A. General:Piping systems shall be cleaned following completion of testing and prior to connection to operating, control, regulating, or instrumentation equipment. The Contractor may, at its option, clean and test sections of buried or exposed piping systems. Use of this procedure, however, will not waive the requirement for a full pressure test of the completed system. Unless specified otherwise, piping 24 inches in diameter and smaller shall first be cleaned by pulling a tightly fitting cleaning ball or swab through the system. Piping larger than 24 inches in diameter may be cleaned manually or with a cleaning ball or swab. Upon completion of the cleaning, connect the piping systems to related equipment and structures.

B. Temporary Screens:Upon completion of the cleaning, connect the piping systems to related process equipment and structures. Temporary screens, provided with locator tabs which remain visible from the outside when the screens are in place, shall be inserted in pipelines at the suction of pumps and compressors in accordance with the following table:

Equipment suction or piping size, inches Maximum screen opening, inches

0 to 1 1/16

1¼ to 3 ¼

3½ to 6 ½

over 6 1

Maintain the screens during testing, initial start-up, and initial operating phases of the commissioning process. In special cases, screens may be removed as required for performance tests. Remove the temporary screens and make the final piping connections after the screens have remained clean for at least 24 consecutive hours of operation. Systems handling solids are exempt.


C. Gas and Air Systems:Unless otherwise specified, gas and air system piping 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall be blown out, using air or the testing medium specified. Piping larger than 6 inches shall be cleaned by having a swab or "pig" drawn through the separate reaches of pipe. After connection to the equipment or structure, it shall then be blown out using the equipment. Upon completion of cleaning, the piping shall be drained and dried with an air stream. Sludge gas, natural gas and propane systems shall be purged with nitrogen and a nitrogen pad maintained at 10 psi until put in service.

D. Liquid Systems:After completion of cleaning, liquid systems, unless otherwise specified, shall be flushed with clean water. With temporary screens in place, the liquid shall be circulated through the piping system using connected equipment for a minimum period of 15 minutes and until no debris is collected on the screens.

E. Hydraulic and Fluid Power Oil Systems: not used.

F. Potable Water Systems: not used.

3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PIPESPEC)

A. Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes or types of service lines are specified onindividual piping specification sheets. Piping systems are grouped according to the chemical andphysical properties of the fluid conveyed and/or by the temperature or pressure requirements. Eachgrouping of systems is identified by a piping system number. Piping systems specified and shown onthe Drawings are arranged by designated symbols (abbreviations) as shown in paragraphs 3.07 (TableA and B). Tables also indicates the system number, fluid category, and pipe marker background colorof each service. The individual PIPESPECs are found in paragraph 3.07.

B. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or Drawing schedule, piping system materials, fittings andappurtenances are subject to requirements of specific piping specification sheets.

3.07 PIPESPEC SHEETS

A. Table A: Process and Facility Piping Systems

Symbol Service System Fluid Category Pipe Marker

DG Digester Gas 4 Flammable Yellow

DS Digested Sludge 15 Sludge/Scum Green

CS Circulating Sludge 15 Sludge/Scum Green

B. Table B: Utility Water Systems

Symbol Service System Fluid Category Pipe Marker

SW C2 Seal Water 7 Water Green


PIPING SYSTEM 4

Piping Symbol / Service: DG – Digester Gas

Test Requirements:

Medium: Air; ref. spec paragraph 3.04 Gas and Air systems.

Pressure: 30 PSI

Duration: 120 minutes

Gasket Requirements:

Flange: Nitrile or neoprene

Push-On/Mech Cpl: N/A

Exposed Pipes and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type)

(2 1/2" and smaller)

Pipe: Stainless steel: ASTM A312-TP316L, Schedule 40S. Reference Section 40 05 23.

Connections: taper threaded, ASME B1.20.1. See Remarks 2.

Fittings: ASTM A403, material, ends and wall thickness to match pipe.

Valves: Not used.

(3" through 24")

Pipe: Stainless steel: ASTM A778, type 316L or ASTM A409-TP316L. Ref. Section 40 05 23.

Connections: butt weld or flanged, couplings where specified. See Remarks 2.

Fittings: Butt weld ASTM A774; ends and wall thickness to match pipe.

Valves: None.

Remarks:

1. Slope all pipe to low point drain. Sags or slope reversal/inflections are not permitted.

2. To provide access for piping maintenance, provided threaded or flanged connections as applicable at amaximum space of 20 feet apart in all exposed piping.


PIPING SYSTEM 7

Piping Symbol / Service: C2 – Nonpotable City Water

C3 – Process Water

SW – Seal Water

Test Requirements:

Medium: Water. Ref. This Section.

Refrigerant. Ref. This Section

Pressure: 150 PSI. See Remarks for Seal Water



Flange: Nitrile or neoprene.

Push-On/Mech Cpl: EPDM or neoprene

Exposed Pipes and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type)

(3" and smaller)

Pipe: Copper tube: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn. Ref. Section 40 05 17.

Connections: solder with threaded or flanged adapters for valves as required. Brass compression fittings acceptable for ½” and less.

Fittings: wrought copper or bronze, ASME B16.22.

Valves: Ball: Nibco T-585-70-66, Apollo 77-140, Crane Fig. 93303-S, Jamesbury Fig. 351, or approved equal.

Gate: Nibco T-113, Crane Fig. 1701, or approved equal.

Globe: Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or approved equal.

Swing Check: Crane 137, Lunkenheimer 230, or approved equal.

(4" through 8") Not used.

(10" and larger) Not used.

Buried and Encased Pipes and Valves:

(3" and smaller) Not used.

(Valves 4" through 12") Not used.

Remarks:

Seal Water test pressure shall be 50 psi more than maximum system pressure of the process fluid pumped by the pump requiring seal water, but no less than 150 psi. Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and manual drains shall be provided at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in this Section and/or shown on the Drawings.


PIPING SYSTEM 15

Piping Symbol/Service: CS – Circulating Sludge

DS – Digested Sludge

Test Requirements:

Medium: Water. Ref. Section 40 05 01.

Pressure: 100 PSI



Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene binder.

Push-on/Mech Cpl: Nitrile or Neoprene

Exposed Pipe and Valves – outside DSST:

(See drawing for pipe size and valve type)

(3" and smaller)

Pipe: Steel: ASTM A53, galvanized. Ref. Section 40 05 24

Connections: taper threaded, ASME B1.20.1.

Fittings: malleable iron, ASTM A197, ASME B16.3, Class 150, galvanized.

Valves: Eccentric Plug: per Section 40 05 62. Install valve with seat upstream.

Swing Check: Lunkenheimer 230, Crane 137, or approved equal.

( 4" thru 8")

Pipe: Steel: ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B, black, with glass lining. Ref. Section 40 05 24.

Connections: butt weld, grooved mechanical pipe coupling or flanged.

Fittings: malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per Section 40 05 24; ends to match pipe.

Valves: Eccentric Plug: per Section 40 05 62. Install valve with seat upstream.

Swing Check: spring loaded per Section 40 05 65.23.

(10" thru 24")

Pipe: Steel: same as 8", or AWWA C200, 3/16 inch thick with glass lining. Ref. Section 40 05 24.

Connections: mech pipe coupling, or flanged. See Remarks 2.

Fittings: steel, ASTM A234, or fabricated steel, AWWA C208; lining and ends to match pipe.

Valves: Eccentric Plug: ref. Section 40 05 62. Install valve with seat upstream.

Swing Check: spring loaded per Section 40 05 65.23.


Exposed Pipe and Valves – inside DSST:

(See drawing for pipe size)

(4" thru 12”)

Pipe: Stainless Steel: ASMT A312-TP31LL, Schedule 10S. Ref. Section 40 05 23.

Connections: butt weld, Class 150 flanges or grooved mechanical couplings where specified. See Remarks 3.

Fittings: butt weld, Sch 10S,ASTM A403-WP316L or ASTM A774, ASME B16.9; flanged per Section 40 05 23.

Valves: None

Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:

None.

Remarks:

Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in Section 40 05 47. Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, 10 to 24 inch size, may be used with standard weight or heavier pipe. Grooved or shouldered mechanical pipe couplings are permitted with fabricated pipe if the rated working pressure of the coupling exceeds the specified test pressure. Butt weld connections are not permitted with lined pipe. All grooved mechanical couplings used for exposed piping inside the DSST to be 316 SS construction. All flanges used for exposed piping inside the DSST to be 316 SS, ANSI 150 lb. flanges with 316 SS bolts and nuts.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 17 - 1 COPPER PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING

SECTION 40 05 17

COPPER PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies copper pipe, tubing, and fittings.



Reference Title

ANSI B16.22 Wrought-Copper and Copper-Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ANSI B16.26 Cast-Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes


ASTM B32 Solder Metal

ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube

EPA SDWA Section 1417(d) Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act Requirements, Amendments to Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA), Effective January 4, 2014

NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Health effects criteria (Lead Content Compliance for water system components)

NSF/ANSI Standard 372 Lead Content Compliance Guideline for water system components

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's product data and catalog cuts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. Seamless copper tubing, ASTM B88. Unless otherwise specified, copper tubing shall be Type L,drawn, where used in exposed service and Type K, annealed or drawn for buried service.

B. All potable water system components shall utilize lead free materials in accordance with EPA’s SafeDrinking Water Act Section 1417 Requirements, effect January 4, 2014. All produces shall meetNSF/ANSI Standard 61 or NSF/ANSI Standard 372. Refer to product listed in Annex G of NSF/ANSIStandard 61 or NSF/ANSI Standard 372.

2.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Solder-type with taper threaded adapters for valves and other appurtenances. Taper threads shallcomply with ASME B1.20.1

B. Solder: 95-5 tin-antimony, ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. Do not use cored solder.


C. Thread Lubricant and Seal:Compressed air: Water: Teflon tape.

2.03 COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS

A. ½-inch and smaller nominal diameter: compression type, brass or bronze, capable of holding the fullbursting strength of the tubing complying with ANSI B16.26.

B. Larger than ½-inch nominal diameter: wrought copper or bronze, solder joint pressure fittings,complying with ANSI B16.22.

C. Piping reducers/enlargers shall be tapered. Bushing type adapters are not permitted.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers for ½-inch and smaller nominal diameter:Swagelok. Gyrolok. Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION

A. Solder Joints:Cut tubing square and remove burrs. Immediately before soldering, clean both inside of fittings and outside of tubing with steel wool until bright. After cleaning, a paste flux shall be evenly and sparingly applied to the surfaces to be joined prior to soldering. Apply solder and pass flame toward the center of the fitting until the solder disappears. Remove all excess solder while still plastic. Do not use acid flux or acid wipe in making solder joints. Take care to prevent overheating.

B. Takedown Couplings: screw union type.Where piping passes through walls or floors, takedown couplings shall be provided on both sides of the wall or floor and within two feet of the wall or floor. A takedown coupling shall be provided within two feet of each threaded end valve or appurtenance.

C. Dielectric Protection:Copper tubing or fittings shall not be permitted to come in contact with steel piping, reinforcing steel, or other steel at any location. Electrical checks shall be made to assure no contact is made between copper tubing and steel elements. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by such tests, provide dielectric connection per Section 40 05 40. Where copper pipe is supported, insulate the pipe system from the hangers or support; or provide dielectric wrap per Section 40 05 41.

3.02 REPAIR

A. Patching inserts, overlays, or pounding out of dents will not be permitted.

B. Remove damaged ends as a cylinder and the section end properly prepared.


3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean the interior of the pipe by swabbing.

3.04 TESTING

A. As specified in Section 40 05 01.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 STAINLESS STEEL Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 23 - 1 PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING

SECTION 40 05 23

STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPE AND TUBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies stainless steel pipe, tubing, and fittings for ordinary service.


A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the embedded standard referencedherein. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, therequirements of this Section shall prevail

Reference Title

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, 250, and 800

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, 250, and 800

ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded.

ANSI B31.1 Power Piping

ANSI B36.19M Stainless Steel Pipe

ASME BPVC Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing Qualifications

ASTM A182 Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A194 Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both

ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications


ASTM A312 Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A320 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service

ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

ASTM A409 Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High Temperature Service

ASTM A480 General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A774 As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures

ASTM A778 Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00: Procedure.

B. The following information shall be provided:Shop fabrication drawings showing: details of materials, piping, fittings, couplings, dielectric connections, joint locations and details, types and locations of supports. Other data necessary to show conformance of the complete piping system to these specifications. Mill certificates.


Certifications specified in the following documents: a. ASTM A403. b. ASTM A774. c. ASTM A778. d. ASTM A409.

Test results specified in paragraph 1.04. Names and qualification records of proposed welders.


A. Qualifications: All shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be provided by a single manufacturer who

is experienced and qualified in the manufacture and fabrication of the items to be provided. The pipe and fittings shall be shop-fabricated and field-installed in accordance with common industry wide practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications.

Only weld procedures which have been qualified under ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX and only welders who have successfully completed performance qualification tests per ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX on these qualified procedures shall be utilized.

1.05 MARKING, SHIPPING, AND STORAGE

A. All pipe, fittings, and fabrications shall be properly marked with type, gage, and heat number.

B. All fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges secured for storage and transport after fabrication.

C. All fabricated piping shall be piece-marked with identifying numbers or codes which correspond to the contractor's layout and installation drawings. The marks will be located on the spools at opposite ends and 180 degrees apart.

D. Pipe spools shall be loaded and blocked and lagged as necessary to ensure protection from damage during shipping.

E. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be stored per manufacturer's recommendation. Dents, gouges, and scratches in stainless steel pipe and fittings are not acceptable and are reason for rejecting pipe and fittings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. 2-1/2-inches and smaller: Type 316L, seamless, threaded joints conforming to ASTM A312. Minimum wall thickness: Schedule 40S.

B. 3-Inches and Larger: Unless otherwise indicated, manufactured from ASTM A240 annealed and pickled sheets and plates, Type 316L, in accordance with ASTM A778 or ASTM A409 HT-0. Pipe shall be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in ANSI B36.19M. Minimum wall thickness: Schedule 5S.

2.02 FITTINGS

A. 2½-inches and Smaller: Stainless steel, ASTM A403, of the same material and pressure rating as the pipe, threaded long radius with dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.11.


B. 3-Inches and Larger: Unless otherwise indicated, butt-weld type manufactured in accordance with ASTM A774 of the

same material and in the same thicknesses as the pipe. Long radius elbows up to 24 inches in diameter shall be smooth flow. All short radius, special

radius, and reducing elbows and long radius elbows greater than 24 inches in diameter shall be of mitered construction.

Reducers shall be straight tapered, cone type. Tees, crosses, laterals, and wyes shall be shop-fabricated from pipe.

2.03 JOINTS

A. General: Stainless steel pipe fabricated into spool pieces shall have shop-welded circumferential butt-weld joints or flanges.

B. Flanged Joints: Van Stone joints made up of stainless steel slip-on type rolled-angle face rings and ductile iron

back-up flanges: Not used. Angle face ring thickness: Not used. Angle leg shall not interfere with the flange bolt holes: Not used Back-up flanges:

a. Not used. Submerged joints:

a. Stainless steel flanges. b. Welded Forged Stainless Steel: Class 150, ASTM A182-F316L, FF, Dim. Per ASME B16.5,

Weld Neck or Slip-on c. Welded Fabricated Stainless Steel: Class SD, ASTM A240-316L, FF, Dim. Per AWWA C228,

Slip-on

2.04 COUPLINGS

A. General: Fabricated stainless steel piping shall be shop-prepared for pipe couplings where specified. Unless otherwise indicated, couplings shall be arched-band or grooved type.

B. Sleeve Type: Where specified, 316 stainless steel construction as specified in Section 40 05 40. Pipe: Plain-end with external weld beads ground smooth to ensure proper gasket seating. Pressure pipe lines: Sleeve coupling joints shall be restrained by the use of harness rods

connecting across the joint to flange lugs on adjacent flange joints. Where no adjacent flange joints exist, stainless steel harness lugs shall be welded to the pipe to receive the harness rods.

C. Arched-Band Type: Stainless steel of the same material and wall thickness as the pipe. Fixed--FxF, Expansion--ExE, or Fixed by Expansion--FxE as specified or as required. Pipe: Plain-end with external weld beads ground smooth and with S.S. restraining rings shop-

welded to the piping for fixed type couplings. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Victaulic, Bolted Split-Sleeve Coupling . b. Approved Equal.

D. Grooved-End (Split) Type: Malleable iron or ductile iron as specified in Section 40 05 40 except that submerged couplings

shall be the same material as the pipe. Pipe ends: Roll-grooved to the coupling manufacturer's specifications. Where roll grooving is

impractical, the pipe shall have heavy-wall machine-grooved pipe nipples or machined ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting.

Nipples: Taper-bored to the I.D. of the adjoining pipe to allow full-weld penetration, and made of the same alloy as the piping.

Collars: Welded on both sides to the piping, and made of the same alloy as the piping.


E. Expansion Type: Unless otherwise indicated, flanged rubber arch type as specified in Section 40 05 44. Provide pipe flanges for these couplings.

2.05 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Threaded pipe, gage, or instrument connections: Made using stainless steel, 150-pound, threaded half-couplings conforming to ASTM A182 or ASTM A276. Shop welded to the pipe at the locations specified.

2.06 GASKETS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, as specified in the PIPESPECS.

B. For air lines, gaskets shall be neoprene or EPDM suitable for use at temperatures to 240 degrees F.

2.07 BOLTS

A. Bolts, nuts, and washers for stainless steel flange assemblies and stainless steel couplings: Same material as pipe, conforming to ASTM A320 for low-temperature service and ASTM A193 and ASTM A194 for high-temperature service.

B. Bolts, nuts and washers for other couplings: As specified in referenced paragraphs for the couplings.

2.08 PIPE SUPPORT AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all hangers, rods, structural attachments, and other components of support and seismic restraint systems for stainless steel pipe shall be of the same materials as the pipe and conform to Section 40 05 41 and 40 05 42.

2.09 FINISH

A. After all shop operations have been completed, pipe and fittings shall be pickled and passivated in manufacturer's plant, and scrubbed and washed until discoloration and possible iron picked up from manufacturing process are removed.

B. Standard Finish: 16-gage through 8-gage material: No. 1 or 28 per ASTM A480. 3/16-inch and heavier plate material: No. 1 mill finish or better per ASTM A480.


A. Factory Testing: Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A312, ASTM A409 HT-0, or ASTM A778, depending on the size and type of stainless steel pipe provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING, AND JOINTING

A. Pipe cutting, threading, and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. Lubricate all pipe threads with Teflon tape.

3.02 WELDING

A. General: Piping with wall thickness up to 11-gage (0.120-inch): Weld using the TIG (GTAW) process. Heavier walls: Unless otherwise indicated, properly bevel and root pass using the TIG (GTAW)

process, followed by subsequent passes with the TIG (GTAW), MIG (GMAW), or Metallic Arc (SMAW) process.


Filler wire: Add only ELC grades only to all welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or greater than the parent metal.

Make weld deposit smooth and evenly distributed and with a crown of no more than 1/16-inch on the I.D. and 3/32-inch on the O.D. of the piping. Concavity, undercut, cracks, or crevices shall not be allowed.

Butt welds: Have full penetration to the interior surface. Provide inert gas shielding to the interior and exterior of the joint.

Remove excessive weld deposits, slag, spatter, and projections by grinding. Grind smooth welds on gasket surfaces.

B. Field Welding: Use couplings and prefabrication of pipe systems at the factory to minimize field welding to the

greatest extent possible. Pipe butt welds may be performed at the job site, providing the butt welds are performed only with an inert gas shielded process and that other applicable specified welding requirements are rigidly adhered to.

Remove all residue, oxide and heat stain from any type of field weld and the affected areas adjacent by the use of stainless steel wire brushes, followed by cleaning with an agent such as Eutectic Company's "Eucleen" or equal, followed by complete removal of the agent.

C. Preparation of Surfaces to be Welded: Make surfaces of joints to be welded free from mill scale, slag, grease, oil, paint, rust, and other

foreign material. Wire brush joints to be welded with stainless steel wire brushes and precisely fit before welding.

D. Weather Conditions: Perform welding only when the surfaces are completely free of any moisture. Do not weld the pipe during periods of high winds or rain unless the areas being welded are

properly shielded.

E. Tack Welds, Clips, and Other Attachments: Repair nicks, gouges, notches, and depressions in the base metal in the area of the before the joint

weld is made. Remove tack welds, clips, and other attachments and repair defects, except where the tack welds

occur within the weld area and these tack welds do not exceed the size of the completed weld. Cracked tack welds shall be removed.

Grind those areas to be repaired down to clean metal and then repair by building up with weld metal. Grind the repaired areas smooth to form a plane surface with the base metal.

F. Defects and Repairs: Remove welds with cracks, slag inclusions, porosity, undercutting, incomplete penetration, or which

are otherwise deficient in quality or made contrary to any provisions of these specifications, by chipping or grinding throughout their depth to clean base metal.

Do not perform calking or peening of welds to correct defects. Enlarge welds found deficient in dimension but not in quality by additional welding after thoroughly

cleaning the surface of previously deposited metal and the adjoining plate. Remove weld deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into the interior of the pipe by grinding.

3.03 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The piping supplier during manufacturing, fabricating and handling stages, and the contractor during handling and installation stages, shall use extreme care to avoid the contact of any ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. Contact with ferrous items may cause rusting of iron particles embedded in the piping walls.

B. All saws, drills, files, wire brushes, etc. shall be used for stainless steel piping only.

C. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be nonferrous or stainless steel or rubber-lined.


D. Use nylon slings or straps for handling stainless steel piping.

E. After installation, wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface.

F. Treat all welded joints with a pickling solution, brush with stainless steel wire brushes and rinse clean.

G. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS or equal, scrub with stainless steel brushes, and rinse clean.

3.04 COATINGS

A. After installation, paint all steel or iron flanges, couplings, and appurtenances in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

B. Painting of the stainless steel pipe is not required.

C. Be responsible for supplying and installing the stainless steel piping with a consistently clean surface.

D. Remove identifying spool piece marks with paint thinner or solvents and wash the entire stainless steel surface with detergent and hot water and rinse clean.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 24 - 1 STEEL PROCESS PIPE

SECTION 40 05 24

STEEL PROCESS PIPE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies steel pipe and fittings.



Reference Title

ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASTM A36 Structural Steel

ASTM A47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless

ASTM A105 Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components

ASTM A106 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron

ASTM A234 Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

ASTM A283 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars


ASTM A570 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality

ASTM A572 High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality

AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger

AWWA C205 Cement Mortar Protective Line and Coating For Steel Water Pipe 4 In (100Mm) and Larger Shop Applied


AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In.

AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings

AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coating for Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings

AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe

AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines

AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA M11 Steel Pipe--A Guide for Design and Installation

SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's product data, catalog cuts, or shop drawings describing construction, dimensions,

and materials. Indicate on the submittal each Piping System where the product will be used.


Affidavits of Compliance with AWWA C200, ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 as applicable. Contractor's layout drawings as specified in Section 40 05 01. Drawings showing cross-section of the pipe wall and joints for each size, pressure rating, and

loading and drawings showing details, dimensions, and piece numbers of all fabricated fittings. Calculations for fabricated fittings that indicate the adequacy of any required reinforcement.

Calculations shall be in accordance with the procedures presented in AWWA M11. Submit calculations and Drawings for proposed alternative thrust restraint or pipe anchorage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Provide steel pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM A53, ASTM A106, or AWWA C200 as specified in Section 40 05 01, Piping Systems.

Steel for ASTM A53 and ASTM A106 pipe shall be Grade B. Steel for pipe fabrication to meet requirements of AWWA C200 shall conform to the requirements of

ASTM A36; ASTM A572, Grade 42; ASTM A570, Grades 33 and 36; or ASTM A283, Grade D.

2.02 PIPE FABRICATION

A. ASTM A53 Pipe: Unless otherwise indicated: Type E, electric resistance welded or Type S, seamless pipe as indicated in Section 40 05 01. Minimum wall thickness for ASTM A53 or ASTM A106: Schedule 40 for pipe 10-inch diameter and

less and 3/8 inch for pipe 12 inch through 24-inch diameter.

B. AWWA C200 Pipe: Straight or spiral seam. Minimum wall thickness:

a. 16-inch and smaller: 1/4 inch b. 18-inch and larger: 3/8 inch

C. Increased shell thickness shall be provided where specified.

2.03 CONNECTIONS

A. As specified in Section 40 05 01 and in conformance with Section 40 05 40.

2.04 FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES

A. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings and Appurtenances: In conformance with the requirements of ASME B16.3 and either ASTM A47 or ASTM A197.

B. Steel Fittings and Appurtenances: Unless otherwise indicated, in conformance with the requirements of ASTM A234, ASTM A105, or

ASME B16.11. Fabricated steel fittings and appurtenances: In conformance with AWWA C208.

C. Fittings for Grooved-End Piping Systems: Full flow cast fittings, steel fittings, or segmentally welded fittings with grooves or shoulders

designed to accept grooved end couplings. Cast fittings: Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM

A47. Standard steel fittings, including large size elbows: Forged steel conforming to ASTM A106. Standard segmentally welded fittings: Fabricated of Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe.


D. Unless otherwise indicated, all fittings shall be rated for pressure and loadings equal to the pipe.

E. Pipes cut for groove coupling shall be as specified in the Section 40 05 40.

2.05 PIPE LINING

A. Glass Lining: Where specified, pipe and fittings shall be glass lined with a dual layer coating system of vitreous

material to a minimum thickness of 10 mils. Glass lining shall provide continuous coverage as tested by a low voltage holiday detector with only

isolated voids permitted due to casting anomalies. Voids, other than isolated pinholes, shall be cause for rejection.

Pipe and fittings shall have all internal welds ground smooth and any voids or slag holes ground out, re-welded and ground smooth.

Acceptable Manufacturer: a. CBGL911 b. Fast Fabricator MEH-32. c. Vitco SG-14. d. Approved equal.

2.06 PIPE COATING

A. Epoxy: Unless otherwise indicated, pipe and fittings shall be coated with a liquid epoxy as specified in

AWWA C210 with the following exceptions: a. No coal tar products shall be incorporated in the liquid epoxy. b. The curing agent may be an amidoamine as well as the other curing agents listed in AWWA

C210. The coating shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 16 mils in not less than two coats.

B. Polyethylene Tape: Not Used

2.07 FUSION EPOXY COATING AND LINING: NOT USED

2.08 JOINT GASKETS

A. Joint gaskets shall be as specified in Section 40 05 40.

2.09 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Where called for in Section 40 05 01 or on the Drawings, buried steel pipe shall be electrically isolated from existing buried steel pipes and from exposed pipe upon penetration through structural walls by installing an insulating union, insulating flange kit or insulating flexible sleeve type coupling, depending on the respective pipe size.

B. Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Project Representative, the electrical isolation fittings shall be installed on the exposed pipe as close to the wall penetrations as possible and prior to touching any pipe support or other pipes. The isolated pipe shall not touch reinforcing steel or wall sleeves at the pipe penetration.

C. Restraint harness assemblies or sleeve couplings shall also be equipped with insulating bushings and washers for electrical isolation



A. Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A53, ASTM A106, or AWWA C200 as applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipe in accordance with AWWA M11. Weld joints in accordance with AWWA C206 and

Section 40 05 40. Tie rods shall be used where required for thrust restraint. Provide sleeve-type mechanical pipe couplings in accordance with AWWA M11 and Section 40 05

40. Apply pipe lining and coatings at field joints per 40 05 24. Unless otherwise indicated, field coat buried mechanical couplings and valves as specified in

Section 40 05 40.

B. Anchorage: All couplings and fittings shall be restrained joint for thrust restraint. Provide concrete thrust blocks only where specified on the drawings. Submit calculations and drawings for proposed alternative thrust restraint or pipe anchorage in

accordance with Section 40 05 24.

3.02 TESTING

A. Hydrostatic testing shall be in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA C600 except that test pressures and allowable leakage shall be as listed in Section 40 05 01.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 40 - 1 PIPING CONNECTIONS

SECTION 40 05 40

PIPING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the following methods of connecting metallic piping: flanges, threading, mechanical couplings, dielectric unions, and welding.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for the scheduling and planning investigation of compatibility, providing and testing all connections, including coordinating rating, sizes, diameters, bolt sizes and drill circle, gasket and flange facing and material, plus the use of dielectric insulation for dissimilar metals including connecting to existing facilities and equipment.

C. Unless otherwise specified, connections of piping at equipment shall comply with the requirements of this Section.



Reference Title

ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series)

ASME B18.2.2 Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B31.1 Power Piping

ASME B31.3 Process Piping

ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing

ASTM F37 Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials

ASTM F104 Standard Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

ASTM F152 Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings


AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Size 4 in. through 144 in.

AWWA C219 Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe


AWWA M11 Steel Pipe-A Guide for Design and Installation

1.03 SUBMITTALS



B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's catalog data showing piping connection details for each piping system. Details for installation for each type of piping connection. A welder qualification certificate for each welder Statement by the supplier for each type of item that the materials provided are normally

recommended for the liquid and piping materials and pressures as well as the installation situation and environment.


A. Welding: Welding shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.3, Normal Fluid Service Category or

AWWA C206. Welding procedures shall be qualified by testing in accordance with ASME Section IX

requirements. Welders shall be qualified by the Contractor or Fabricator in accordance with ASME Section IX. Contractor’s shop and field welding inspectors shall hold current AWS QC1 CWI certification. Each welder's certificate shall be provided to the Project Representative prior to that welder working

on the job.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Pipe connections (joint and fitting) options for a particular piping system shall be as specified on the particular system PIPESPEC sheet in Section 40 05 01.

B. Takedown Couplings: provide for all piping systems in accordance with this section; provide both around equipment and at standard pipe lengths for all straight runs of pipe.

C. Continuous welding for straight runs of pipe is acceptable only where the individual PIPESPEC sheet allows welding as a connection option. Where connections are shown, then the connections shall be specifically where shown, however, if several connection options are allowed for the particular piping system on the PIPESPEC sheet, then any option may be consistently used, i.e., if flanged or rigid grooved connections are acceptable and grooved are shown, then flanged may be substituted. Integrity of rigid, non-rotating connections must be maintained at all valves and other equipment.

2.02 FLANGE ASSEMBLIES

A. Flanges: General:

a. Flanges shall either be flat flanges or convoluted ring flanges as specified in the following paragraphs.

b. Plain faced flanges shall not be bolted to raised-face flanges. Flat Flanges:

a. Ductile and Cast iron flanges: Faced in accordance with ASME B16.1. Where companion flanges are used, the flanges on pipe shall be refaced to be flush with the companion flange face.

b. Class 150 and Class 300 forged steel flanges: Raised face conforming to ASME B16.5. c. Lightweight slip-on flanges: Plain face conforming to AWWA C207, Class B and ASME B16.5. d. Steel flanges: Unless otherwise specified, ASME B16.5, Class 150 or AWWA C207, Class D.

Class E AWWA flanges shall be provided where test pressure exceeds 175 psi. Convoluted Ring Flanges:

a. Ductile iron, forged steel or cast stainless steel, designed to bear on hubs welded to the pipe. b. Flange joints: Rated for not less than 150 percent of the test pressures listed in Section 40 05

01 and in conformance with the requirements of ASME B 16.5 and AWWA C207. c. The flange manufacturer shall be prepared to demonstrate, by certified pressure test that the

flanges will meet these requirements.


B. Gaskets:Material: As specified in this section and Section 40 05 01. For plain faced flanges: a. Full face type.b. Thickness:

1) Pipe 10 inches and less in diameter: 1/16 inch.2) Pipe 12 inches and larger in diameter: 1/8 inch.

For raised face flanges: a. Unless otherwise indicated, shall match the raised face.b. Thickness:

1) Pipe 3½ inches and less in diameter: 1/16 inch2) Pipe 4 inches and larger: 1/8 inch

C. Bolts, Washers and Nuts:ASME B18.2.1 standard square or hexagon head bolts with ASME B18.2.2 standard hexagon nuts. Threads: ASME Bl.1, standard coarse thread series; bolts shall be Class 2A, nuts shall be Class 2B. Length: In conformance with ASME B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, carbon steel machined bolts with hot pressed hexagon nuts. Bolts, nuts, and washers: a. For submerged service, over open basins, and in tank headspaces: Made of Type 316

stainless steel in conformance with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, markings F593F and F594F.Use anti-seize compound for installation. Nuts for submerged service can be made of copper-silicon alloy bronze conforming to ASTM B98, alloy C65100 or C65500, designation H04.

b. For buried service, including for use in vaults: Made of noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloysteel having the characteristics specified in AWWA C111, regardless of any other protectivecoating. Provide factory applied fluoropolymer coating: FluoroKote#1, Xylan 1424, or ApprovedEqual.

2.03 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS

A. Sleeve-Type Couplings:Unless otherwise specified, use model as recommended by the manufacturer for the application Acceptable manufacturer a. Dresserb. Romacc. Smith-Blaird. Approved EqualBolts, nuts, and washers:a. For submerged service: Made of Type 316 stainless steel in conformance with ASTM F593 and

ASTM F594, markings F593F and F594F. Use anti-seize compound for installation. Nuts forsubmerged service can be made of copper-silicon alloy bronze conforming to ASTM B98, alloyC65100 or C65500, designation H04.

b. For buried service: Made of noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having thecharacteristics specified in AWWA C111, regardless of any other protective coating. Providefactory applied fluoropolymer coating: FluoroKote#1, Xylan 1424, or Approved Equal.

B. Grooved End (Split Ring) Couplings:Couplings shall conform to AWWA C606. Unless otherwise specified, use model as recommended by the manufacturer for the application Flexible-type couplings: all piping greater than 12 inches in diameter; pipe 12 inches in diameter and less in rack-mounted tunnel piping applications; and grooved joints adjacent to pump or blower suction and discharge where grooved couplings are used for noise and vibration control. All other applications for piping 12 inches in diameter and less: rigid-type couplings. Cut grooves are not permitted on fabricated or light wall pipe. Note that Ductile Iron pipe must meet minimum wall thickness for use of grooving, per AWWA C606. Housing: Ductile iron, ASTM A563


Gasket: flush seal type designed for ductile iron pipe Bolts, nuts, and washers:

a. Per AWWA C606. Bolts: ASTM A449 and ASTM A183. Nuts: ASTM A563. b. For submerged service: Type 316 stainless steel in conformance with ASTM F593 and ASTM

F594, markings F593F and F594F. c. For buried service: Made of noncorrosive high-strength, low-alloy steel having the

characteristics specified in AWWA C111, regardless of any other protective coating. Provide factory applied fluoropolymer coating: FluoroKote#1, Xylan 1424, or Approved Equal.

Unless otherwise specified, use model as recommended by the manufacturer for the application Grooved end flexible-type couplings:

a. Gruvlok Fig 7001. b. Victaulic 77/W77. c. Approved Equal.

Grooved end rigid-type couplings: a. Gruvlok Fig 7401. b. Victaulic 07/W07. c. Approved Equal.

2.04 GASKETS

A. Materials: EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer. Neoprene: Neoprene. Nitrile: Nitrile (Buna N). Viton.

B. Properties Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene binder; ASTM F104

(F712400), 2500 psi (ASTM F152), 0.2 ML/HR LEAKAGE FUEL A (ASTM F37). Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and SBR binder; ASTM F104

(F712400), 2500 PSI (ASTM F152), 0.1 ml/hr leakage Fuel A (ASTM F37). Gylon gasketing, Garlock Style 3500, 2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.22 ml/hr Fuel A (ASTM F37). Gylon gasketing, Garlock Style 3510, 2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.04 ml/hr Fuel A (ASTM F37). Gylon gasketing, Garlock Style 3504, 2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.12 ml/hr Fuel A (ASTM F37). TFE: Noncreeping tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) with insert filler. TFE bonded EPDM: TFE bonded to EPDM in full-face gasket having concentric-convex molded

rings.

2.05 THREAD

A. Pipe thread dimensions and size limits shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.

2.06 UNIONS

A. 2 inches and smaller: Ground joint screwed pattern unions.

B. 2½ inches and larger: Ground joint flange unions.

C. Dielectric unions: Match the pipe material except bronze may be used with copper piping. EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, or approved equal.

D. Hydraulic power and petroleum conveying piping shall use flat-faced O-ring style unions, for both regular and dielectric unions. O-ring material shall be suitable for piped fluid.


2.07 COATINGS

A. Unless otherwise specified, flange assemblies and mechanical type couplings for buried installationshall be field coated as specified in Section 09 90 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING AND JOINTING

A. Pipe cutting, threading and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1.

3.02 GROOVE COUPLING

A. Groove coupling pipe cuts or roll shall be per the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All pipe groove cuts shall be implemented from outside surface of the pipe. No pipe groove cuttingequipment shall touch interior finish surface of pipes neither for alignment or support. No damages tothe original interior surface of the pipes during groove coupling cuts or rolls.

3.03 PIPE WELDING

A. Pipe shall be welded by ASME-certified welders using shielded metal arc, gas shielded arc orsubmerged arc welding methods. Provide welding certification for each welder working on pipingfabrication.

B. Make welds in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1 for piping Systems 8, 26, and 28specified in Section 40 05 01. Make welds in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3 forpiping System 20 specified in Section 40 05 01.

C. All welding shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the applicable, individual steel pipespecifications. Welds for piping systems not specified above shall be in accordance with AWWA C206.

3.04 TAKEDOWN COUPLINGS AND DISMANTLING CONNECTIONS

A. Screw unions, flanged, or grooved end mechanical coupling type joints and provided as specified.

B. Where piping passes through walls, provide takedown couplings within 3 feet of the wall.

C. Provide a union or flanged connection within 2 feet of each threaded end valve.

D. Provide Restrained Sleeve Coupling or Equipment Connection Fitting for suction and discharge of allpumps.

E. Provide Flexible Vibration reduction couplings on the suction and discharge of all air compressors andblowers, restrained.

3.05 FLEXIBILITY

A. For piping 2 inches in diameter and larger passing from concrete to earth, provide two pipe couplings orflexible joints as specified. The first coupling or joint shall be within 2 feet of the structure. The second coupling or joint shall be located at a sufficient distance from the first coupling or joint to accommodate the maximum expected differential settlement taking into account the maximum allowable deflection of each coupling or joint. If specific couplings or joints and a separation distance are indicated on the drawings, Contractor shall provide these as shown on the drawings.


B. Where required for resistance to pressure, restrain mechanical couplings in accordance with AWWAM11.

C. Restrain all flexible joints used on pressurized ductile iron pipe. Lugs for restraint on ductile iron pipe tobe factory installed.

3.06 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Provide dielectric unions or an insulating section of rubber or plastic pipe where a copper pipe isconnected to steel or cast iron pipe. The insulating section shall have a minimum length of 12 pipediameters.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 41 - 1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 40 05 41

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies requirements for design, selection, and installation of hangers and supports forall piping systems specified in Section 40 05 01.

B. This Section does not specify pipe supports for fire sprinkler systems or seismic restraints.

C. This Section specifies requirements for design, selection, and installation of expansion control systemsfor select piping systems.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Longitudinal: parallel to the pipe axis.

B. Lateral: perpendicular to the pipe axis.

C. Design Professional: Contractor’s Design Professional responsible for piping system design andinspection in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 01.


A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the followingdocuments. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflictbetween the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of thisSection shall prevail.

Reference Title

ANSI A58.1-82 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

AISC Manual of Steel American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design- 9th Edition

FEDSPEC WW-H-171e-78 Hangers and Supports, Pipe

MFMA-2 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

SMACNA, PPIC Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's catalog data on pipe supports and components including data on load capacity.

C. Hanger and support locations and components indicated on the piping layout drawings required bySection 40 05 01.

D. Fabrication drawings for fabricated components.

E. Stamped drawings and design calculations for all supports per requirements in Section 40 05 01.


F. Monthly inspection reports authored, signed, and sealed by the Design Professional.

G. Final inspection report authored, signed, and sealed by the Design Professional.

1.05 OPERATING CONDITIONS

A. The hangers and supports specified in this Section are provided to resist pipe vertical and horizontal gravity and seismic loads.

B. For the purpose of pipe hanger and support selection, this Section establishes pipe support classifications based on the operating temperatures of the piping contents. Pipe support classifications are as follows:

Hot Systems a. 120 degrees F to 450 degrees F b. 451 degrees F to 750 degrees F c. Over 750 degrees F

Ambient Systems a. 60 degrees F to 119 degrees F

Cold Systems a. 33 degrees F to 59 degrees F b. 20 degrees F to 32 degrees F

C. For the purpose of material selection, spaces are classified as: Corrosive Service Environment:

a. Digester Building b. DSST Interior Piping c. DSST Outdoor Piping

D. Preliminary pipe support types and locations have been identified on the drawings; additional supports that have not been identified will be required. The Design Professional is responsible for completing a study of pipe expansion and implementing engineering controls to accommodate forces associated with expanding pipes. The drawings are not a complete pipe support design and do not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of this Section.

1.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT SELECTION

A. The Design Professional is responsible for the design of hanger and support systems design and design of seismic restraints. Applicable design criteria include the design standards specified in Section 40 05 01, Section 01 73 00, and Section 40 05 42. Base selections upon the pipe support classifications specified in this Section and the piping insulation thickness specified in Section 40 42 00, and any special requirements which may be specified. Materials will be based on the service environment.

B. Review the piping layout in relation to the surrounding structure and adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the support to be used at each hanger point.

C. Insure hangers and supports are sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe, tubing, or, where specified, the outside diameter of insulation.

D. Use rod hangers where negligible pipe movement occurs and for suspended lines, wherever practical. Use bases, brackets or structural cross for piping supported from below.

E. Hangers for the suspension of 2-1/2 inches and larger pipe and tubing shall be capable of vertical hanger component adjustment under load.

F. The supporting systems shall provide for and control the free or intended movement of the piping including its movement in relation to that of connected equipment.


G. Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location, hanger components shall be allowed for swing. The vertical angle of the hanger rod shall not, at any time, exceed 4 degrees.

H. There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component of dissimilar metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when supporting copper tubing by use of copper-plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel hanger and support components.

I. Unless otherwise indicated, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new piping.

J. Stock hanger and support components shall be used wherever practical and be compatible with any existing hanger hardware for system standardization.

K. As the systems must work together, show hanger and support locations, details of seismic restraints, details of expansion control systems, and pipe layout drawings on the drawings specified in Section 40 05 01, regardless of design responsibility. The design drawings and calculations must be prepared, sealed, and signed by the Design Professional.

L. Design hangers and support to withstand all static and specified dynamic conditions of loading to which the piping and associated equipment may be subjected. At a minimum, consider the following:

Weight of pipe, valves, fittings, insulation materials, hanger components, and normal fluid contents. Weight of hydrostatic test fluid or cleaning fluid, if normal operating fluid contents are lighter. Reaction forces due to the operation of relief valves. Wind, snow, and ice loadings on outdoor piping, as specified in Section 01 73 00. Reaction forces due to operating conditions and testing conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Pipe support components shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-69 and FEDSPEC WW-H-171e.

B. Pipe support materials shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-58.

C. Metal framing system components shall conform to the Metal Framing Manufacturer's Association standard MFMA-2.

D. For system compatibility, support clips and attachments shall be compatible with Unistrut or B-Line

E. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper B-Line. Unistrut. Anvil International. Or Approved Equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Select materials for pipe hangers, supports, structural attachments, fittings, accessories, nuts, bolts, washers, and fasteners according to the exposure of the support:

Indoor, Dry Service Environment: Steel, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Outdoor, Wet, or Corrosive Environment: type 316 stainless steel, nuts, bolts and washers.


2.03 TYPICAL DETAILS

A. The drawings include a typical set of pipe support details. The Design Professional may choose to use the typical set as a starting point for their design. Use of a typical detail shown on the Contract Drawings does not relieve the Design Professional of the responsibility to produce drawings and calculations for all supports to be installed. Acceptable products to be used with the typical details shown on the Contract Drawings are specified in this paragraph.

B. Hangers and Supports: Type 1 – Clevis Pipe Hanger: Carbon steel with configuration and components equivalent to MSS

and FEDSPEC Type 1. a. Steel pipe (uninsulated):

1) B-Line B3100. 2) Anvil Fig. 260. 3) Or Approved Equal.

b. Steel pipe (insulated): 1) Clevis pipe hanger shall be as described in Section 40 05 41, with insulation shield.

c. Cast and ductile iron pipe: 1) B-Line B3102. 2) Anvil Fig. 590. 3) Or Approved Equal.

d. Copper pipe (uninsulated): 1) B-Line B3104. 2) Anvil Fig. CT-65. 3) Or Approved Equal.

e. Copper pipe (insulated). 1) Clevis pipe hanger shall be as described in Section 40 05 41, with insulation shield.

f. Plastic pipe: 1) B-Line B3100C. 2) Carpenter & Paterson Fig. 100 PVC. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type 4 – Adjustable Roller Hanger: Rollers shall be cast iron. Yoke and cross bolt shall be carbon steel. Configuration and components shall be equivalent to MSS Type 43 and FEDSPEC Type 44. a. Steel pipe (uninsulated):


b. Steel pipe (insulated): 1) Adjustable roller hanger shall be as described in Section 40 05 41, with insulation shield.

c. Copper pipe (insulated only): 1) Adjustable roller hanger shall be as described in Section 40 05 41, with insulation shield.

d. Plastic pipe: 1) B-Line B3110. 2) Anvil Fig. 181. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type 5 – Single Pipe Roll: Rollers and sockets shall be cast iron. Cross rod shall be steel. Configuration and components shall be equivalent to MSS Type 41 and FEDSPEC Type 42. a. Steel pipe (uninsulated):


b. Steel pipe (insulated): 1) Single pipe roll shall be as described in Section 40 05 41, with insulation shield.

c. Plastic pipe: 1) B-Line B3114. 2) Anvil Fig. 171. 3) Or Approved Equal.


Type 6 – Framing Channel Pipe Clamp: Pipe clamps shall be steel with galvanized finish. a. Steel pipe (uninsulated):

1) Material thickness:

Pipe size Material thickness

3/8 inch and 1/2 inch 16 gage

3/4 inch through 1-1/4 inches 14 gage

1-1/2 inches through 3 inches 12 gage

3-1/2 inches through 5 inches 11 gage

6 inches and 8 inches 10 gage

2) Acceptable manufacturer: a) Power-strut PS 1100. b) Unistrut P 1109 series. c) Or Approved Equal.

b. Steel pipe (insulated): 1) Pipe clamp shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield.

c. Copper (uninsulated) and plastic pipe: 1) Material thickness:

Pipe size Material thickness

3/8 inch and 1 inch 16 gage

1-1/4 inches and 1-1/2 inches 14 gage

2 inches through 3 inches 12 gage

4 inches 11 gage

2) Clamp shall be copper-plated, plastic coated or lined with dielectric material. 3) Acceptable manufacturers:

a) Power-strut PS 1200. b) Unistrut P 2024CC and P 2024PC series. c) Or Approved Equal.

d. Copper pipe (insulated): 1) Pipe clamp shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield.

Type 8 – Adjustable Pipe Roll Support: Rollers and sockets shall be cast iron. Cross rod and support rods shall be carbon steel. a. Steel pipe (uninsulated):


b. Steel pipe (insulated): 1) Adjustable pipe roll support shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield.

c. Copper pipe (insulated only): 1) Adjustable pipe roll support shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield.

d. Plastic pipe: 1) B-Line B3122. 2) Anvil Fig. 177. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type 10 – Pipe Stanchion Saddle: Saddles and yokes shall be carbon steel and comply with MSS Type 37 and FEDSPEC Type 38. a. Steel pipe (uninsulated):

1) Carpenter & Paterson Fig. 125. 2) B-Line B3090. 3) Or Approved Equal.

b. Steel pipe (insulated): 1) Pipe stanchion saddle shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield.


c. Cast and ductile iron pipe: 1) Carpenter & Paterson Fig. 125. 2) B-Line B3090. 3) Or Approved Equal.

d. Copper pipe (uninsulated): 1) Pipe stanchion saddle shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield or

lined with dielectric material. e. Copper pipe (insulated):

1) Pipe stanchion saddle shall be as described in Section 40 05 41 with insulation shield. f. Plastic pipe:

1) Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125. 2) B-Line B3090. 3) Or Approved Equal.

C. Rack and Trapeze Supports: General: Unless otherwise indicated, trapeze and pipe rack components shall have a minimum

steel thickness of 12 gage, or a minimum fiberglass thickness of 0.200 inch, with a maximum deflection 1/240 of the span.

Type 20 – Trapeze Pipe Support: Trapeze pipe support cross members shall be framing channel, or fiberglass where specified, as specified in Section 40 05 41-2.02 E.5. Flat plate fittings shall be 1-5/8 inch square carbon steel of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer. a. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Unistrut P2471. 2) B-Line B202-2. 3) Aickinstrut 2000 series. 4) Or Approved Equal.

Types 21 and 22 – Pipe Rack Supports: Post and cross members shall be framing channel as specified in Section 40 05 41. Pipe rack fittings shall be carbon steel, of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer. Ninety-degree fittings shall be gusseted. Post base fittings shall be as specified in Section 40 05 41. a. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Unistrut P2484. 2) B-Line B844. 3) Or Approved Equal.

D. Structural Attachments: Type A - Malleable Iron Concrete Insert: Concrete inserts shall be malleable iron and comply with

MSS and FEDSPEC Type 18. a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Anvil Fig. 282. 2) Carpenter & Paterson Fig. 108. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type B - Side Beam Bracket: Bracket shall be malleable iron and comply with MSS Type 34 and FEDSPEC Type 35. a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Anvil Fig. 202. 2) B-Line B3062. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type C - Malleable Beam Clamp with Extension Piece: Clamp and extension piece shall be malleable iron. Tie rod shall be steel. Beam clamp shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 30. a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Anvil Fig. 218 with Fig. 157 extension piece. 2) B-Line B3054. 3) Or Approved Equal.


Type D - Steel Beam Clamp with Eye Nut: Beam clamp and eye nut shall be forged steel. Configuration and components shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 28. a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Anvil Fig. 292. 2) Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 297. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type E - Framing Channel Post Base: Post bases shall be carbon steel, and of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer. a. Single channels:

1) Unistrut P2072A. 2) B-Line B280. 3) Or Approved Equal.

b. Double channels: 1) Unistrut P2073A. 2) B-Line B281. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type F - Welded Beam Attachment: Beam attachment shall be carbon steel and comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 22. a. Acceptable manufacturer:


Type G - Welded Steel Bracket: a. Bracket shall be carbon steel. b. Medium welded bracket shall comply with MSS Type 32 and FEDSPEC Type 33. c. Heavy welded bracket shall comply with MSS Type 33 and FEDSPEC Type 34.

Type H – Wall Bracket: a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Carpenter & Paterson Fig. 49. 2) Anvil Fig 194. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type J - Adjustable Beam Attachment: Beam attachment shall be carbon steel. a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 151. 2) B-Line B3082. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Type k - double channel bracket: a. Wall channel shall be single framing channel, or fiberglass where specified, as specified in

Section 40 05 41. b. Cantilever bracket shall be a carbon steel double framing channel assembly.

1) Acceptable manufacturers: a) Unistrut P2542 through P2546. b) B-Line B297-12 through B297-36. c) Aickinstrut 2000 series. d) Or Approved Equal.

Type L - Single Channel Bracket: a. Wall channel shall be single framing channel, or fiberglass where specified, as specified in

Section 40 05 41. b. Cantilever bracket shall be a carbon steel single framing channel assembly.

1) Acceptable manufacturers: a) Unistrut P2231 through P2234. b) B-Line B198-6, B198-12, B196-18 and B196-24. c) Aickinstrut 2000 series. d) Or Approved Equal.

Type M - Wall Mounted Channel: Wall channel shall be single framing channel, or fiberglass where specified, as specified in Section 40 05 41.

Type N - Pipe Stanchion Floor Attachment: Baseplate shall be carbon steel with 1/2 inch minimum thickness. Anchor bolt holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than the anchor bolt diameter. The space between the baseplate and the floor shall be filled with non-shrink grout.


E. Accessories: Hanger Rods: Rods shall be carbon steel or as specified on the drawings, threaded on both ends

or continuous threaded and sized as specified. Weldless Eye Nut: Eye nut shall be forged steel and shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type

17. a. Acceptable manufacturers:


Welded Eye Rod: Eye rod shall be carbon steel or as specified on the drawings with eye welded closed. Inside diameter of eye shall accommodate a bolt diameter 1/8 inch larger than the rod diameter. a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Anvil Fig. 278L. 2) B-Line B3211. 3) Or Approved Equal.

Turnbuckle: Turnbuckle shall be forged steel or as specified on the drawings and shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 15. a. Acceptable manufacturers:


Framing Channel: a. Framing channel shall be 1-5/8 inches square, roll formed, 12-gage carbon steel or as specified

on the drawings. Channel shall have a continuous slot along one side with in-turned clamping ridges. 1) Single channel:

a) Unistrut P1000. b) B-Line B22. c) Or Approved Equal.

2) Double channel: a) Unistrut P1001. b) B-Line B22A. c) Or Approved Equal.

3) Triple channel: a) Unistrut P1004A. b) B-Line B22X. c) Or Approved Equal.

b. Embedded concrete insert framing channel shall be 1-5/8 inch wide by 1-3/8 inch deep. Provide end caps or end anchors as recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Embedded concrete insert framing channel:

a) Unistrut P3200 series. b) B-Line B32I series. c) Or Approved Equal.

2) End caps or end anchors: a) Unistrut P3280 or P 3704. b) B-Line B206 or B3332. c) Or Approved Equal.

F. Fiberglass Framing Channel: Framing channel shall be 1-5/8 inches square, pultrusion formed, fiberglass reinforced plastic with 0.200-inch wall thickness. Channel shall have a continuous slot along one side with in-turned clamping ridges, as manufactured by Aickin Corporation, Aickinstrut 2000 series or approved equal.

2.04 THERMAL PIPE HANGER SHIELD [NOT USED]


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS

A. Install structural attachments for pipe hangers to beams, structural framing, girders, or embedded framing channel. Structural attachments for pipe hangers in roof decking are not acceptable without review and written approval by the Project Representative.

B. Pipe hangers hung below elevated slabs shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 6 feet, when structural attachments for pipe hangers are set in the slab between beams (hung between beams, structural framing, girders, or embedded framing channel).

C. Locate hangers and supports as near as possible to concentrated loads such as valves, flanges, etc. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within the maximum span lengths specified in the Drawings to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loads.

D. Locate at least one hanger or support within 2 feet from a pipe change in direction.

E. For any valve 6 inches in size and greater, locate at least one hanger or support within 2 feet in either direction of the valve.

F. Locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment, tanks, etc., are substantially free from loads transmitted by the piping.

G. Where piping is connected to equipment, a valve, piping assembly, etc., which will require removal for maintenance, the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary supports are not necessary for this procedure.

H. Pipe shall not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings.

I. Support spacing shall not exceed 6 feet for HDPE or other plastic pipe. Support spacing shall not exceed 8 feet for copper pipe. Support spacing shall not exceed 10 feet for FRP ductwork. Support spacing shall not exceed 12 feet for all other piping unless otherwise authorized by the County’s review of the proposed deviation noted in the Contractor’s piping layout drawing submittal.

J. The Contractor’s pipe support system shall not interfere with the function of pipe system flexibility and expansion components or features specified on the drawings.

K. Precast walls cannot be used to support pipe. Pipe may be supported from the floor or roof in these facilities.

L. Pipe and cable tray supports shall not obstruct operation and maintenance access to equipment, valves, and other appurtenances.

M. Maximum loads imposed on structures from Contractor-designed supports for pipe, ductwork, cable trays and conduits, and associated appurtenances shall conform to the following table and Section 01 73 00, whichever is greater. In some instances, greater point loads may be applied to beams and girders. Consult the Project Representative to ascertain the maximum allowable point load in circumstances where the proposed load would exceed the values in the following table.


Foundation, Slab On Grade

Roof

GENERAL PROCESS AREA: Pipe, foul air duct, cable tray and conduit loads1, maximum, pounds per square foot

300 20, Not to exceed concentrated OWJ Panel Point loads described herein

TUNNEL: Pipe, foul air duct, cable tray and conduit loads1, maximum, pounds per square foot

300 100

Load at any one roof OWJ Panel Point, pounds

- 1,000

Load distributed across multiple roof OWJ Panel Points. Total load on any single OWJ panel not to exceed, pounds

- 1,000

1Uniform Loads based on design allowance for pipe, duct, cable tray, and conduit loads

N. Moments applied to walls and columns from cantilevered pipe supports and cable tray shall not exceed 200 foot pounds per lineal foot of wall or column.

O. Maximum allowable pipe and cable tray loads applied to walls and columns shall not exceed 200 pounds per lineal foot of wall or column.

P. Maximum allowable pipe, conduit, and cable tray vertical loads applied at the outdoor gas upgrading canopy structure are 1,000 pounds in the vertical direction and 500 pounds in the horizontal direction per horizontal brace arm. Excess loads require additional support at the structure, to be designed by the Design Professional.

Q. All pump suction piping and equipment connections less than 6 feet above the floor or local grade shall be provided with stanchion-type supports.

R. Pipe supports shall not span across structure expansion joints.

S. Provide pipe supports to support the termination of any pipe that is truncated for future connection not within the Contract.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC M011. Unless otherwise indicated, do not drill or burn holes in the building structural steel.

B. Do not use hanger components for purposes other than that for which they were designed. Do not use them for rigging and erection purposes.

C. Install items to be embedded before concrete is poured. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is poured.

D. Use embedded anchor bolts instead of concrete inserts for support installations in areas below water surface or areas normally subject to submerging.

E. Install thermal pipe hanger shields on insulated piping at required locations during hanger and support installation. Make butt joint connections to pipe insulation at the time of insulation installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp edges.

G. Rollers shall roll freely without binding.


H. Prior to grouting, rough finished floor beneath Type N structural attachments and framing channel post bases. Grout between base plate and floor shall be free of voids and foreign material.

I. Cut and drill baseplates to specified dimensions prior to welding stanchions or other attachments and prior to setting anchor bolts.

J. Provide plastic or rubber end caps at the exposed ends of all framing channels that are located up to 7 feet above the floor.

K. Structural attachments for pipe and cable tray hangers that extend above roof decks or floors are not acceptable. Provide through bolt structural attachments where specified for reinforced concrete slab construction.

L. Repair damaged galvanizing on pipe supports after installation of piping, support brackets, bolts, and other appurtenances.

3.03 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation. Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Adjust stanchions prior to grouting their baseplates.

3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Anchor bolt material and installation requirements shall conform to Specification Section 05 05 19.

3.05 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

A. The Design Professional shall inspect installation of supports, anchorage, seismic restraints, and expansion control systems, whether or not designed by the Design Professional. The Design Professional shall be at the project site during the installation work, at not less than monthly intervals, and shall provide the Project Representative with reports on work constructed in accordance with this section. Reports shall describe deficient work, if any, correction plans and confirmation that the Work was successfully completed.

B. Prior to commissioning the Design Professional shall conduct a detailed final inspection and furnish the Project Representative with a written final report and certification that the work was constructed in accordance with this section.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 42 - 1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR PIPING

SECTION 40 05 42

SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies seismic restraints for bracing all piping systems specified in Section 40 05 01. This section does not include seismic restraints for fire sprinkler systems.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Longitudinal direction: direction parallel to the pipe axis.

B. Lateral direction: direction perpendicular to the pipe axis.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS


Reference Title

AISC 325 American Institute of Steel Construction, Steel Construction Manual

ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturer’s Association

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

SMACNA Seismic Restraints Manual

1.04 OPERATING CONDITIONS

A. The seismic restraints specified in this section are provided to resist pipe movements and loads occurring as a result of an earthquake or other seismic event in accordance with the project drawings.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all piping shall have bracing to resist seismic loading caused by forces applied at the individual pipe's center of gravity.

C. Seismic loading: Section 01 73 00.

1.05 RESTRAINT SELECTION

A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall select, locate and provide seismic restraints for piping.

B. The Contractor shall review the piping layout in relation to the surrounding structure and adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the restraint to be used at each point.

C. Seismic restraints may be omitted from the following installations: Gas piping less than 1-inch inside diameter. Piping in boiler and mechanical rooms less than 1¼-inch inside diameter. All other piping less than 2½-inch inside diameter. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the pipe to

the bottom of the support for the hanger.


D. Piping systems shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building or to dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: wall and a roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill.

E. Restraints shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of the pipe, tubing, or, where specified, the outside diameter of insulation.

F. There shall be no contact between a pipe and restraint component of dissimilar metals. The contractor shall prevent contact between dissimilar metals when restraining copper tubing by the use of copper-plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel restraint components.

G. Branch lines shall not be used to brace main lines.

H. Seismic bracing shall not limit the expansion and contraction of the piping system.

1.06 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's catalog data on pipe attachments, restraints, braces, fittings and accessories

including load capacities. Drawings showing location and type of seismic bracing to be installed. For each seismic restraint location, provide calculations substantiating the loads, in all directions,

that the seismic restraint system must withstand. Calculations must be stamped, dated, and signed by a currently registered professional structural engineer in the State of Washington.

A legend to the piping layout drawings required by Section 40 05 01 that gives load information and restraint component selection at each restraint location.

Fabrication drawings for fabricated components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Carpenter & Patterson. B-Line. Kin-Line. Anvil. Pipe Shields Incorporated. Superstrut. Unistrut. Approved equal.

B. Pipe restraints shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-58 and MFMA.

C. Copper pipe shall be provided with dielectric wrap (see Section 40 05 17)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Service Environment: Pipe hangers and supports, structural attachments, fittings and accessories: Dry Service Environment: Zinc plated or mechanically galvanized after fabrication. Nuts, bolts and

washers: galvanized or zinc-plated Wet or Corrosive Environment: type 304 or 316 stainless steel, nuts, bolts and washers stainless.


2.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS

A. Type 1s: Clevis Restraint Attachment: Type 1, clevis pipe hanger, as specified in Section 40 05 41.

B. Type 3s: Double Bolt Restraint Clamp: Type 3, double bolt pipe clamp, as specified in Section 40 05 41.

C. Type 4s: Roller Restraint Attachment: Type 4, adjustable roller hanger, as specified in Section 40 05 41. Hold down strap shall be carbon steel and sized as follows:

Pipe size (in.) Hold down strap (in.) Hold down strap thickness (in.)

1 to 2 1 1/8

2½ to 4 1¼ 3/16

6 2 3/16

8 2½ 3/16

10 to 16 2½ 1/4

20 3 1/4

24 3 3/8

D. Type 7s: U-Bolt Restraint: Type 7, U-bolt, as specified in Section 40 05 41.

E. Type 13s: Framing Channel Strap Restraint: Type 13, framing channel pipe strap, as specified in Section 40 05 41.

F. Type 14s: Pipe Clamp Restraint: Carbon steel, with configuration and components equivalent to MSS Type 4. Rod attachment and longitudinal brace connection stud shall be carbon steel, fabricated and

welded by the manufacturer. Steel pipe (uninsulated):

a. Superstrut No. S-720. b. Kin-Line No. S475. c. Approved Equal.

2.04 TRAPEZE RESTRAINTS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, trapeze members shall have a minimum steel thickness of 12 gage, with a maximum deflection 1/240 of the span.

B. Pipe attachments shall be Type 7s or 13s as specified in this section

C. Rod stiffeners, longitudinal and lateral braces shall be as specified in this section

D. Type 20s: Single Channel Lateral Restraint: Cross member shall be 1-5/8 inch square carbon steel framing channel. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Unistrut P1000 b. B-Line B22 c. Superstrut A-1200. d. Approved Equal.


E. Type 21s: Double Channel Lateral Restraint: Cross member shall be double channel manufactured assembly. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Unistrut P1001. b. B-Line B22A. c. Superstrut A-1202. d. Approved Equal.

F. Type 22s: Double Channel Longitudinal Restraint: Cross member shall be a double channel manufactured assembly. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Unistrut P1001. b. B-Line B22A. c. Superstrut A-1202. d. Approved Equal.

2.05 BRACES AND FITTINGS

A. Seismic Brace Fitting: Manufactured for use with industry standard framing channel. Carbon steel, welded construction, two-piece linked fitting. Provide a means to reduce noise and vibration transmission between the linked fitting parts. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Superstrut C-749N series seismic brace. b. Kin-Line No. 633 seismic connector fitting. c. Approved Equal.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffener Assembly: Rod stiffener channel shall be 1-5/8 inch square carbon steel framing channel. Rod stiffener channel shall be:

a. Unistrut P1000. b. B-Line B-22. c. Superstrut A-1200. d. Approved Equal.

Rod stiffener clamps shall be complete with channel nut. Rod stiffener clamps shall be:

a. Superstrut ES-142. b. Kin-Line No. 635. c. Approved Equal.

C. Type A1 Seismic Brace: Shall be 1-5/8 inch square carbon steel framing channel. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Unistrut P1000. b. B-Line B22. c. Superstrut A-1200. d. Kin-Line No. 4112. e. Approved Equal.

D. Type A2 Seismic Brace: Shall be 1-5/8 inch wide by 3-1/4 inch deep carbon steel framing channel. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Unistrut P 5000. b. B-Line B-11. c. Superstrut H-1200. d. Kin-Line No. 8212. e. Approved Equal.


2.06 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rod structural attachments shall be as specified in Section 40

05 41. Structural attachments for longitudinal and lateral seismic braces shall be as specified in paragraph

40 05 41 2.03 D.

B. Type SA-1 Attachment: Brace fitting shall be as specified in this section. Concrete anchors shall be as specified in Section 05 05 19 with embedment and location

dimensions as specified.

C. Type SA-2 Attachment: Brace fitting shall be as specified in this section. Concrete anchors shall be as specified in Section 05 05 19 with embedment and location

dimensions as specified. Framing channel shall be as specified in this section.

D. Type SA-3 Attachment: Brace fitting shall be as specified in this section. Cap screw, lockwasher and hex nut materials and finish shall be compatible with structural steel

material.

E. Type SA-4 Attachment: Brace fitting shall be as specified in this section.

F. Type SA-5 Attachment: Brace fitting shall be as specified in this section. Four-inch x 3-inch x 3/8-inch angle shall be carbon steel.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Carbon steel, threaded on both ends or continuous threaded and sized as specified.

B. Framing Channel: Shall conform to MFMA standard. Roll formed, 12-gage carbon steel. Continuous slot along one side with in-turned clamping ridges. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Unistrut P1000 series. b. B-Line B22 series. c. Superstrut A-1200 series. d. Approved Equal.

C. Rod Coupling: Carbon steel, with sight hole in center of coupling body. Acceptable manufacturer:

a. Anvil Fig. 135. b. Superstrut H-119. c. Approved Equal.

D. Thermal Pipe Hanger Shield: Not Used


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE RESTRAINT LOCATIONS

A. Locate the first seismic restraint on a piping system not more than 10 feet from the main riser, from an entrance to a building, or from a piece of equipment.

B. Brace cast iron pipe on each side of a change in direction of 90 degrees or more. Brace or stabilize joints in risers between floors.

C. Brace no-hub and bell and spigot cast iron soil pipe longitudinally every 20 feet and laterally every 10 feet.

D. Lateral bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 24 inches of the elbow or tee of the same size.

E. Seismic restraint locations and components shall be indicated on the piping layout drawings required by Section 40 05 01.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Use rod stiffener assemblies at seismic restraints for hanger rods over 6 inches in length. Use a minimum of two rod stiffener clamps on any rod stiffener assembly.

B. Install lateral and longitudinal bracing between 45 degrees above and 45 degrees below horizontal, inclusive, relative to the horizontal centerline of the pipe.

C. Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC 325. Do not drill or burn holes in the building structural steel without approval of the Project Representative.

D. Use embedded anchor bolts instead of concrete inserts for seismic brace installations in areas below water surface or normally subject to submerging.

E. Install thermal pipe hanger shields on insulated piping at required locations during restraint installation. Make butt joint connections to pipe insulation at the time of insulation installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Restraint components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp edges.

G. Rollers shall roll freely without binding.

H. Provide plastic or rubber end caps at the exposed ends of all framing channels that are located up to 8 feet above the floor.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 EXPANSION JOINTS AND Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 44 - 1 FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE

SECTION 40 05 44

EXPANSION JOINTS AND FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies piping expansion joints and flexible metal hose.



Reference Title

ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes

EJMA Standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers' Association

1.03 PERFORMANCE AND SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Expansion joints shall be designed in accordance with EJMA Standards for pressure, temperature and service as specified in PIPESPEC.

B. Flexible metal hose shall be suitable for a line pressure equal to the test pressure listed in the PIPESPEC.

C. Design Requirements: Flexible Metal Hose: Live lengths for flexible metal hose shall be based upon the service

conditions listed in this Section and have a design life of 1,000,000 full displacement cycles. Expansion Joints: Corrugated type expansion joints shall be suitable for a minimum of 10,000

pressure, temperature and deflection cycles (non-concurrent).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00: Procedure.

B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's catalog data, including dimensions, materials of construction and allowable

deflection. Product data. Design and construction details of formed metal bellows type expansion joints. Pressure thrust force and spring rate data for formed bellows expansion joints. Details for installation of all expansion joints. Certificate from manufacture for sewer application (where expansion joint or flexible hose is used

for raw sewage).


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal Construction: Formed Bellows Type:

a. Medium Temperature (up to 800 degrees F): 1) Having 300 series stainless steel multi-ply bellows rated for the specified design

temperature and pressure. 2) Test pressures: Specified in Section 40 05 01. Each expansion joint shall be factory tested

at the test pressure. 3) Ductwork expansion joints: May be rated at less than 50 psig but must be rated equal to

the design pressure and, in no case, less than 2 psig. 4) Design: Determined by the amount and kind of movement specified (axial, lateral, angular). 5) End connections: Unless otherwise specified, flanged. 6) Acceptable manufacturers:

a) Flexonics, Inc. b) Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. c) American BOA Inc. d) Approved Equal.

b. High Temperature (up to 2000 degrees F): 1) Engine and gas turbine exhaust expansion joints: Multi-ply bellows type designed for 15

psig. 2) Bellows: Constructed of 300 series stainless steel. 3) End connections: Unless otherwise specified, either the fixed flange or Vanstone flange

configuration. 4) Flange material: Carbon steel for temperatures up to 1000 degrees F and stainless steel

for temperatures above 1000 degrees F. Vanstone materials and flow liners, where specified, shall be the same as bellows material.

5) Acceptable manufacturers: a) GT Exhaust System. b) Flexonics DEX Series. c) Hyspan Series 2500. d) American BOA Series 025E e) Approved Equal.

Steel Expansion Compensator Type: a. Having 2-ply stainless steel bellows and carbon steel shroud and end fittings. b. Rated for 175 psi maximum working pressure and 750 degrees F. c. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Flexonics Model H Expansion Compensator. 2) Hyspan Series 8500. 3) Keflex 7Q. 4) Approved Equal.

Bronze Expansion Compensator Type: a. Having multi-ply phosphor bronze or stainless steel bellows and copper tube end fittings. b. Rated for 150 psi maximum working pressure and 400 degrees F. c. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Flexonics Model HB Expansion Compensator. 2) Hyspan Series 8500. 3) Keflex 70. 4) American BOA Inc. 5) Approved Equal.


B. Elastomer and Fabric Construction: General:

a. Standard spool arch type or the precision molded spherical design type as indicated or specified.

b. Expansion joint connectors: Having control units (restraints) to prevent excessive axial elongation and to accept the static pressure thrust in the piping system. Number and sizes of control rods or restraints shall be as determined by the manufacturer.

c. Single arch and sphere type expansion joints: Unless otherwise indicated, have 6-inch face-to-face dimension for pipe up to 8 inches and 8-inch face-to-face dimension for pipe 10 and 12 inches. For use with larger diameters, Contractor must obtain approval from the Project Representative.

d. Cover elastomer: Chlorobutyl, neoprene, or EPDM. e. Tube elastomer: For temperatures between 180 and 240 degrees F, chlorobutyl or EPDM.

Neoprene or Buna N liners are acceptable for temperatures to 180 degrees F. f. For raw sewer system the expansion joints material shall be compatible for sewer application.

Provide certificate from the manufacturer for sewer application. Spool Type:

a. Resilient arch type and standard or tapered as specified. Unless otherwise specified, all tapered connectors shall be eccentric.

b. Constructed of multiple plies of woven fabric impregnated with elastomer and reinforced with steel rings or wire embedded in the body.

c. Retaining rings or backup rings: 1) Provide for standard arch type expansion joints suitable for the specified temperature and

pressure. 2) 3/8-inch thick steel, split, either galvanized, zinc shield coated, or as specified on the

drawings. d. Filled arch type shall be used on all piping systems carrying fluids containing solids. e. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Single, multiple, or filled arch: a) Mason Style EJBN. b) Garlock Style 204. c) Mercer Style 500. d) Goodall Style E-1462. e) General Style 1025. f) Approved Equal.

2) High pressure couplings suitable for 240 degree F operating temperatures: a) Mason Style EJBN-HD. b) Mercer Style 510. c) Garlock Style 204-HP. d) Goodall Style E-1489. e) General Style 1015. f) Approved Equal.

Spherical Molded Type: a. Precision molded of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and elastomer suitable for specified

temperature and pressure. b. Having steel or ductile iron floating flanges, and no metal parts shall come in contact with the

fluid. c. Acceptable manufacturer (single sphere molded connectors):

1) Mason Type MFNC. 2) Mercer Type 5500. 3) Goodall Type E-611. 4) General Type 1010. 5) Garlock Style 8100. 6) Approved Equal.

d. Double sphere or triple sphere connectors shall be provided where required to provide for the specified movement.


C. Other Constructions: Polyvinylchloride:

a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Celanese "Chemtrol" CPVC slip type having Teflon impregnated seal rings. 2) Certain-teed Fluid Tite PVC. 3) Johns-Manville PVC double bell expansion joint. 4) Approved Equal.

Teflon: a. Molded TFE bellows. b. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Metraflex T-2. 2) Garlock Style 215. 3) Resistoflex R-6905. 4) EGG Style M-150. 5) Approved Equal.

2.02 FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, corrugated type 321 stainless steel with stainless steel fittings and

provided with stainless steel single braid. End connections: Attached by the heliarc welding process using stainless steel welding rod. Bronze flexible metal hose shall be provided for copper and brass systems.

B. Braided Type: Type A:

a. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) Flexonics Series 401M/402M. 2) Flexweld USFWSS-31/32. 3) American BOA Series B. 4) Approved Equal.

Type B: a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Flexonics Series 301. 2) Flexweld USFWB-31. 3) American BOA Series B. 4) Approved Equal.

2.03 TEFLON FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Consist of molded Teflon bellows and 150-pound ductile iron flanges.

B. Flanges: Completely isolated from the chemical by the molded Teflon bellows.

C. Integral steel limit bolts and Monel reinforcing rings shall be provided on the connectors.

D. Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

E. The connectors shall allow for an axial transverse movement of at least ½-inch, and an offset of at least 3/8-inch.

F. Rated for a pressure of 130 psi at a temperature of 70 degrees F.

G. Acceptable manufacturers: Metraflex Teflon Expansion Joint. Garlock, modified as necessary to provide the specified features. Approved Equal.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Locate expansion joints and anchors as specified. Location and number of guides shall be determined from EJMA Standards.

B. Do not install expansion joints during times of extreme temperature or in a fully compressed or fully expanded condition.

C. Thrust control shackles/rods shall be required for expansion joints 4 inches and larger to control distortion from pressure expansion.

3.02 ALIGNMENT

A. Align piping systems prior to installation of expansion joints.

B. Do not use expansion joints to correct piping misalignment during installations.

C. Expansion joints shall be preset at the factory for rated axial compression and expansion. Install the expansion joints at the factory preset condition.

3.03 EXPANSION JOINT AND CONNECTOR SERVICE AND USE

A. The piping systems expansion joints shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and/or as required for isolation vibration system Section 43 05 50.

B. The expansion joints shall be provided to meet the piping system and equipment installation requirements and design criteria, including temperature, pressure and movement for each joint, are specified on the Drawings.

C. Expansion joints and/or flexible metal hose connectors provided for specific equipment items or piping systems are specified on the following table.

TYPE OF EXPANSION JOINT CONNECTOR TYPE OF SERVICE/USE

Metal Construction Formed Bellows Type; Medium temperature (2.01A1a)

Hot and chilled water, jacket water, steam, high pressure air, and gas and steel pipe lines subjected to ambient temperature differentials sufficient to require expansion joints.

Metal Construction Formed Bellows Type; High temperature (2.01A1b)

Engine and gas turbine exhaust to meet the engine temperature and sufficient for the required vibration and expansion.

Metal Construction Steel Expansion Compensator Type (2.01A2)

Same type service/use as for "Formed Metal Bellow Type medium Temperature expansion joint" except size of piping is limited to 3-inch diameter or less.

Metal Construction Bronze Expansion Compensator Type (2.01A3)

Medium temperature copper piping

Elastomer and Fabric Construction Spool arch Type (2.01B2)

Pump/blower connectors and expansion joints for piping 14 inch diameter and larger. Except for steam and chemical lines.

Elastomer and Fabric Construction Elastomer Spherical Molded Type (2.01B3)

Pump/blower connectors and expansion joints for piping 12 inch diameter and less. Except for steam and chemical lines.

PVC Construction (2.01C1) PVC piping.

Teflon Construction (2.01C2) FRP containment piping.

Flexible Metal Hose Stainless Steel Braided Hose (2.02)

Air and gas compressor discharge connections.


TYPE OF EXPANSION JOINT CONNECTOR TYPE OF SERVICE/USE

Flexible Metal Hose Bronze Braided Hose (2.02)

Air compressor discharge and pump connectors for copper lines.

Teflon Flexible Connector (2.03) Connection of PVC piping to polyethylene chemical storage tanks.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 47 - 1 PIPING APPURTENANCES

SECTION 40 05 47

PIPING APPURTENANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies pipeline thermometers, flow and level gages, pressure devices, strainers, sight glasses, vents, and drains.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Appurtenances shall be located on the piping layout drawings by plant area submitted in

accordance with Section 40 05 01. Manufacturer's product data A list of any deviations or substitutions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings: All equipment shall be the same size as the adjoining pipe. Body material of equipment shall match pipeline material. Pressure rating of equipment shall be no less than 150 PSI. Electrical housings shall be NEMA 4.

B. All units shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the unit cast on the body or shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters.

C. All equipment provided shall be equipped with flanges, integral unions, or other functional take-a-parts.

2.02 PIPELINE THERMOMETERS [NOT USED]

2.03 FLOW AND LEVEL GAGES [NOT USED]

2.04 PRESSURE DEVICES

A. Gage Cocks: The exposed threads of each gage cock shall be protected by a brass plug. Unless otherwise indicated, acceptable manufacturers:

a. Robertshaw 1303. b. Ashcroft 1095. c. Approved Equal.

B. Pressure Gages: Unless otherwise indicated, pressure gage scales shall be selected so that the normal operating

pressure falls between 50 and 80 percent of full scale. Diameter: 4½ inch. Movement: 270 degrees. Accuracy: 0.5 percent. Case: non-metallic case with a ½-inch NPT bottom connection.


Type: premium grade, heavy duty Type 316 stainless steel bourdon tube units with plastic bushings and pinion, and stainless steel sector. Internal pulsation dampening system consisting of either a glycerin fill or a silicone fluid fill; snubbers or orifices are not acceptable.

All gauges shall be vertically oriented. Bleed-off valves shall be bronze gage cocks pressure rated for 150 psi. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Ashcroft Duragage 1279. b. Ametek 198 IL. c. Approved Equal.

C. Diaphragm Seals: Type 1:

a. Body and diaphragm material: Type 316 or Type 316L stainless steel. b. Flushing connection: ¼-inch c. Process connection: ½-inch d. Unless otherwise indicated, fill fluid shall be Silicone DC200. e. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Ashcroft Type 101. 2) Ametek. 3) Approved Equal.

Type 2: a. Type: flexible sleeve type. b. Size: 1-inch, unless otherwise indicated. c. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeve shall be Buna-N. d. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Red Valve Series 742. 2) Ashcroft Type 85 3) Approved Equal.

D. Flexible Sleeve Pressure Sensors: Type: in-line full stream captive sensing liquid type. Materials:

a. Metal parts, wetted: 316 stainless steel b. Sleeve: Buna-N, unless otherwise indicated c. Capillary tubing: armored stainless steel

Seals: a. Rated for 200 psi with 5-inch SC hysteresis. b. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Ronningen-Petter. 2) Red Valve. 3) Approved Equal.

Fill fluid shall be rated for a temperature range of -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Vacuum filling: Fittings shall be provided for vacuum filling of system. Systems that are not factory

filled shall be vacuum filled in the field. Filling connections shall be soldered shut after vacuum evacuation and filling.

2.05 STRAINERS

A. Air and Gas Strainers: Not Used

B. Water Strainers: Unless otherwise indicated, water strainers shall be Y-pattern. Bronze bodies shall be provided with copper piping. Cast iron bodies shall be provided with steel

piping. Strainers shall have 304 stainless steel screens and tapped and plugged blowoff connections. Screen perforations shall be 0.040 inch or less.


Acceptable manufacturers: a. Mueller. b. Armstrong. c. Approved Equal.

C. Fuel Oil Strainers: Not Used

D. Chemical Strainer: Not Used

2.06 QUICK CONNECT FITTINGS

A. Air and water utility station quick connect fittings: Not used

B. All other quick connect fittings: Type: Coupler type, with cam arms. Capable of connecting to a hose adapter without the use of

tools. Size: The same size as the pipeline. Materials: PVDF with Teflon gaskets. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Kamlock. b. Chicago Pneumatic. c. Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPELINE THERMOMETERS [NOT USED]

3.02 GAGE TAPS

A. Provide gage taps on the suction and discharge of pumps, fans, compressors, vacuum pumps and blowers.

B. Gage taps shall consist of a ¼-inch gage cock attached by a threaded nipple to the pipeline, duct or equipment.

3.03 VENTS AND DRAINS

A. Vents: Provide manual air vents at the high points of each reach of pipeline shown on the drawings, and

provide additional manual drains as required and specified by the Project Representative after completion of piping installation.

Air vents shall be 1-inch and shall consist of full port ball valve and copper tubing return. Air vents shall be taken to the nearest floor with ball valve mounted 4 feet above the floor. Fit vents in piping systems for fluids containing solids with quick couplers.

B. Drains: Pipe each drain to a sump, gutter, floor drain or other collection point with a valve mounted 4 feet

above the floor. Drain valves in piping systems for fluids containing solids shall be threaded end full port plug valves

of the size specified, fitted with quick couplers. All other drain valves shall be threaded end gate valves of the size specified, fitted with quick couplers.

When a drain cannot be run to a collection point, route the drain to a point of easy access and install a valve, of the type and size specified, fitted with a male threaded nipple suitable for connection to a hose.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 57 - 1 VALVES AND GATES

SECTION 40 05 57

ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies manual actuators for valves.



Reference Title

ASTM A519 Seamless Carbon and Alloy-Steel Mechanical Tubing

ASTM B584 Copper-Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

AWWA C500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

AWWA C542 Standard for Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates

IP International Protection Rating

NAMUR User Association of Automation Technology in Process Industries

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Affidavits of compliance, as required by AWWA C500. Materials of construction Operations and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01 78 23. Product data for specified actuators. Catalog cuts of all furnished components and equipment, including dimensions and weight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATORS

A. General: Actuator to be factory-mounted on the valve or gate and provided as a unit. Factory-mounting by

either the actuator or valve manufacturer. Each valve body or actuator shall have cast thereon the word OPEN, an arrow indicating the

direction to open, and flow direction arrows. Materials of construction shall be suitable for the installed environment.

2.02 MANUAL ACTUATORS

A. General: Manual operators shall have operating torques less than 80 foot-pounds. Unless otherwise indicated, each manual operator shall be provided with an operating wheel. Unless otherwise indicated, the direction of rotation of the operator shall be counterclockwise for

opening.


Provide lever actuators for plug valves, butterfly valves, and ball valves 3-inch diameter and smaller. a. Lever actuators for butterfly valves shall have a minimum of 5 intermediate lock positions

between full open and full close. b. Provide a minimum of (2) levers for each type and size of valve furnished.

Wrench nuts: Wrench nuts shall comply with AWWA C500. A minimum of 2 operating keys, but no less than 1 key per every 10 valves, shall be provided for operation of the wrench nut operated valves.

Gear actuators required for plug valves, butterfly valves, and ball valves 4-inch diameter and larger. a. Gear actuators are to be totally enclosed, permanently lubricated with sealed bearings. b. For plug-type valves 8 inches and larger, the actuator shall be provided with a hammer blow

wheel. Chain wheels:

a. Chain wheels for interior locations shall be ductile iron, unless otherwise specified or required by the manufacturer to be suitable for the installed environment.

b. Operating chains for interior locations shall be galvanized. c. Chain wheels and operating chains for exterior locations shall be 304 stainless steel. Chain

wheels and operating chains for corrosive locations shall be 316 stainless steel. Provide chain wheel actuators for any valve over 7 feet above the floor or deck.

2.03 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS [NOT USED]

2.04 POWERED ACTUATORS [NOT USED]

2.05 ACTUATOR CONTROL DEVICES [NOT USED]

2.06 ACTUATOR APPURTENANCES [NOT USED]

2.07 SPARE PARTS

A. Section 43 05 01.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Manual Actuators General: Unless otherwise indicated, valves and gates shall be provided with manual actuators.

Manual actuators shall be positioned so that they can be readily operated. Wrench nuts: Wrench nuts shall be provided on buried valves, on valves which are to be operated

through floor boxes, and where specified. Extended wrench nuts shall be provided if necessary so that the nut will be within 6 inches of the valve box cover.

Chain wheels: Unless otherwise indicated, valves with centerlines more than 6 ft above the specified operating

level shall be provided with chain wheels and operating chains. a. Chain wheel operated valves shall be provided with a chain guide. b. Operating chains shall be looped to extend within 4 feet of the specified operating level below

the valve. c. Hooks on adjacent piping shall be provided for chain storage where chain hangs in foot traffic.

B. Powered Actuators: not used.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings.



A. Field Tests Section 01 80 00. Include testing to the manufacturers’ testing requirements. Test each valve/actuator as a combined unit, including its responses to the control system

requirements and functions. Each valve, after installation and connection to the piping system, shall be cycled three times

manually or utilizing the manual override to demonstrate proper operation. Each valve, upon completion of installation of the piping system, shall be cycled to fully

demonstrate proper operation and confirm that operating times, under both normal operating, and emergency closure conditions, are as specified.

Be responsible for all adjustments necessary to bring the equipment into conformance with the specifications.

3.03 ACTUATOR APPURTENANCES [NOT USED]

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 62 - 1 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

SECTION 40 05 62

ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies eccentric plug valves.

B. Valve List:

VALVE NO. SIZE ACTUATOR

PLV710396A 12” Manual – Gear

PLV710395A 10” Manual – Gear

PLV710395D 10” Manual – Gear

PLV710396 10” Manual – Gear with Chain Operator

PLV710397 10” Manual – Gear with Chain Operator

PLV710300Z 8” Manual - Gear



Reference Title

ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800

ASME B16.10 Face-to Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves



AWWA C517 Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves


1.03 VALVE DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, valves shall have the following minimum pressure ratings:

Valve Size Working Pressure

12 inches and smaller 175 psi

14 inches through 36 inches 150 psi

42 inches and larger 125 psi

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's product data, catalog cuts, and shop drawings detailing materials of fabrication,

assembly, dimensions, and flow capacity. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Proof of design tests.


Certified Cv value test results from an approved laboratory for all valve sizes. Certified drawings for spherical solid passage.


A. Design Tests: Three certified copies of a report from an independent testing laboratory certifying successful

completion of proof-of-design testing conducted in accordance with AWWA C517. In lieu of testing the valves at an independent testing laboratory, proof-of-design testing may be performed at the valve manufacturer's laboratory, and witnessed by a representative of a qualified independent testing laboratory.

All test reports shall be certified by the laboratory representative. Perform proof-of-design testing on at least one valve of each size and class, with all test units

demonstrating full compliance with the test standards. Failure to satisfactorily complete the test shall be deemed sufficient evidence to reject all valves of

the proposed make or manufacturer's model number.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: Dezurik PEC / PEF. Milliken Millcentric. Pratt Ballcentric. Approved Equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials specified are acceptable for the application. Contractor may propose alternative materials, subject to review and approval or rejection by the County.

B. Materials of construction:

Component Material

Body Cast Iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or Ductile Iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12

Plug

3” – 20” Ductile iron, ASTM A536

24” and larger Cast Iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or Ductile Iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12

Plug facing Neoprene or Buna-N

Body seats

Less than 3 inches Epoxy coated cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B

3 inches and larger Welded-in overlay of not less than 90 percent nickel

Packing Buna or PTFE

Bearings

Less than 20 inches Permanently lubricated (oil impregnated) stainless steel

24 inches and larger Permanently lubricated (oil impregnated) bronze

Buried valves Buried valves shall be epoxy coated for corrosion protection, all flange or mechanical connection bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel 316.

2.03 VALVE FEATURES AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Straight-flow, non-lubricated, resilient plug type suitable for drip-tight, bi-directional shutoff at the

specified valve design pressure.


Unless otherwise indicated, port areas for valves shall be at least 100 percent of the adjacent full pipe area.

Port area shall be round for valve sizes 14 inches and smaller; rectangular ports are not acceptable. Rectangular ports are acceptable for 16 inches and above.

Valves shall be capable of passing spherical solids which are at least 85 percent of the pipe size for valves 12 inches and smaller and at least 50 percent the pipe size for valves 14 inches and larger.

Valve body seats consisting of nickel for valves 3 inches and larger shall be fabricated of a welded-in overlay of not less than 90 percent pure nickel.

For valves 20 inches and smaller, upper and lower bearings shall be replaceable sleeve type, permanently.

For valves 24 inches and larger, upper and lower journal shall be replaceable, sleeve-type, permanently lubricated bronze. Aluminum bronze bearings are not acceptable.

Each valve body shall be plainly marked to indicate seat end. Bearings shall be protected at both the top and bottom with PTFE grit seals.

Shaft seals shall be self-adjusting chevron type packing, or "U" cup with "O" ring, replaceable without removing the plug.

Plug valve manufacturers shall provide certified test results by verifying that the minimum Cv values specified below have been met for valves of the same model and size. Large plug valves shall have the following minimum Cv values:

Plug valve size Cv value (minimum)

14-inch 8,500

24-inch 21,300

B. End Connections: Valves 3 inches and smaller: threaded ends. Valve 4 inches and larger: flanged, ASME B16.1, Class 125. Grooved-end per AWWA C606 valves may be provided with grooved-end piping systems.

C. Lay Length: Flanged valves and grooved end valves equipped with manufacturer’s standard flange adapters shall conform to ASME B16.10 Table 1, for short pattern Class 125 cast iron plug valves

D. Manual Operators: Valves 4 inches and smaller: lever type manual operator. Valves larger than 4 inches: totally enclosed worm gear operator sized for bidirectional shutoff at

design pressure in accordance with AWWA C517 or 40 05 01, whichever is greater. Where indicated, manual operators shall have an adjustable stop. Comply with applicable portions of Section 40 05 57.

2.04 LIMIT SWITCHES

A. When required, valves shall be equipped with limit switches: Limit switches shall be designed and installed to determine if the valve plug is fully closed and not

fully closed. Limit switches shall be heavy-duty, snap action, over-center switch mechanisms contained in a die

cast metallic NEMA 4 enclosure with chemical resistant Viton gaskets and seals. Switches shall include one normally-open and one normally-closed fine silver contacts rated NEMA

A600, 120 VAC, 10 amp continuous with wiping action operation. Contacts shall be replaceable without disconnecting the external wiring. Wiring terminals shall accommodate AWG #22-12 stranded copper wire and shall be identified on a

permanently attached nameplate.

B. Limit switches shall be securely installed to the valve as required to determine valve position.


2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide the following spare parts: Valve rebuild kits for each size. The quantity of rebuild kits shall be one minimum or five percent of

the total of each size valve installed, rounded up.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Exterior: per AWWA C550.


A. Hydrostatic Test: per AWWA C517.

B. Cycle Test: per AWWA C517.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install valves with the seat upstream into flow.

C. Install valves at tank connections with seat away from tank.

D. Install valves on pump discharge lines with seat adjacent to the pump.


A. After installation and connection to the piping system, each valve shall be Cycled three times manually or utilizing the manual override to demonstrate proper operation. Cycled to fully demonstrate proper operation and confirm that operating times are as specified

under both normal operating and emergency closure conditions.

B. Be responsible for all adjustments necessary to bring the equipment into conformance with the specifications.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 65.20 - 1 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVE

SECTION 40 05 65.20

RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES

GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies rubber flapper check valves.

B. Valve List:

Valve Valve No.

DIG SLUDGE STORAGE TANK MIXING PUMP DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE

CHV710395


A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the embedded standard referenced herein. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail

Reference Title




ASTM A564 Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A582 Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars

ASTM B62 Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

AWWA C508 Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-In. Through 48-In.

AWWS C550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

1.03 VALVE DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements Unless otherwise indicated, valves shall have the following minimum pressure ratings:

Valve Size Working Pressure Hydrostatic Test Pressure

12 inches and smaller 175 psi 350 psi

14 inches and larger 150 psi 300 psi

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Manufacturer's product data detailing materials, construction, and flow capacity. Manufacturer's product data detailing limit switch system, materials, and wiring diagram. Operation and maintenance information in accordance with Section 01 78 23.


A. Check valves shall comply with AWWA C508.


PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Val-Matic Surgebuster. APCO CRF 100. Pratt PSI Surge Inhibitor Check Valve. Approved Equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials specified are acceptable for the application. Contractor may propose alternative materials, subject to review and approval or rejection by the County.

B. Materials of construction shall be as follows:

Component Material

Body and Cover Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12

Disc Buna-N, ASTM D2000-BG

Disc Assist Type 301 or 302 Stainless Steel

Valve Position Indicator 17-4 Stainless Steel

Interior Coating Fusion Bonded Epoxy

Bolts, nuts, and washers Type 316 Stainless Steel

2.03 VALVE FEATURES AND COMPONENTS

A. General Valves shall be drip-tight shutoff. Provide tapped and plugged drain and vent holes in valve body and cover. All internal components shall be field replaceable without use of special tools.

B. End Connections: Valve 4 inches and larger: flanged, ASME B16.1, Class 125.

C. Valve Disk: One-piece construction. The disc shall be of one-piece construction with an integral O-ring type sealing surface. The flex portion of the disc shall contain nylon reinforcement.

D. Disc Assist: Provide rapid closure of disc under high head. One-piece construction. Fully enclosed within valve. Field replaceable and adjustable without removal of valve from line.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Limit Switches. Valves shall be equipped with limit switches: Designed to determine fully open to fully closed position, securely attached to check valve as

required to determine position. A pre-wired limit switch shall be provided to indicate open/closed position to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the mechanical indicator. The switch shall be rated for NEMA 6P and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp, 125 or 250 VAC contacts.


B. Valve Position Indicator: Mechanical position indicator to show disc position. Position indicator shall have continuous contact with disc in all disc positions.

C. Backflow Actuator: Screw-type actuator to allow opening of valve under no-flow conditions. Rising stem. Stainless steel stem and T-handle. Buna-N seal on stem.

2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. Per Section 01 78 43.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Interior and exterior: per AWWA C550.


A. Hydrostatic Test: per AWWA C508.

EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings.


A. After installation and connection to the piping system, each valve shall be Cycled three times manually or utilizing the manual override to demonstrate proper operation. Cycled to fully demonstrate proper operation and confirm that operating times are as specified

under both normal operating and emergency closure conditions.

B. Be responsible for all adjustments necessary to bring the equipment into conformance with the specifications.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 ELECTRIC MOTORS Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 05 93 - 1 FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT

SECTION 40 05 93

ELECTRIC MOTORS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies low-voltage alternating current induction motors, 500 horsepower or less. This Section does not specify specialty motors such as submersible motors, hoist motors, valve operator motors or torque rated motors.

B. Equipment List: Motors are part of the equipment and listed in the individual equipment sections.



Reference Title

IEEE 112 Method B Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

IEEE 841 Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry – Premium-Efficiency, Severe-Duty, Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors – Up to and including 370 kW (500 hp)

NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators


UL 674 Motors and Generators, Electric, for Use in Hazardous Locations, Class I, Groups C and D, Class II, Groups E, F and G

UL 1004 Motors, Electric

WAC 51-11 Washington State Energy Code

WAC 296-46B-430 Electrical Safety Standards, Administration, and Installation – Motors, Motor Circuits and Controllers

B. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the embedded standard referenced herein. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of the listed document shall prevail.

Reference Title


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. The submittals for Section 40 05 93 and the submittal for the driven unit: combined into one submittal. Failure to provide and combine both submittals shall result in rejection of the submittals without further review.

C. Provide the following submittals: Motor Data Form No. 40 05 93-A in Section 01 33 10. Separate the motor data for each motor of

1/2-horsepower and greater. Motor outline, dimensions and weight. Manufacturer's general descriptive information relative to motor features.


Where a winding over-temperature device is specified for motors 100 horsepower or larger, provide a response curve for the temperature device.

For VFD driven equipment, provide a letter of certification from both the VFD and motor manufacturer that the specific application has been reviewed and that the motor and VFD are compatible and that the motor and VFD combination will satisfy the requirements under all conditions of operation without adverse impacts on either the motor or VFD.

Motor Part Load Efficiency Curve or Table.


A. All motors: Built in accordance with NEMA MG 1, UL 674, UL 1004, and to the requirements specified. Listed

and labeled for the purpose for which they are used by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or equivalent nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industry and to the local administrative authority.

Where one of these listings is required but not available, obtain written permission for a variance from King County.

This requirement supersedes the listing and labeling requirements of Division 26.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated, motors: factory-mounted to the equipment as practicable.

B. Motors shall, as a minimum, comply with the requirements of this Section and the manufacturer's standard industrial product. Additional or better features which are not specifically prohibited by the specifications, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard industrial product to be included in the motor being furnished. A standard industrial product is a product that has been or will be sold on the market through advertisement or manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures, and represents the latest production model(s).

C. All equipment: designed and built for industrial service and be capable of delivering rated horsepower under the following applicable conditions:

100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. 100 percent relative humidity. Voltage variations to ±10 percent of nameplate rating. Frequency variations to ±5 percent of nameplate rating. Combined voltage and frequency variations to ±10 percent total, as long as frequency does not

exceed ±5 percent.

D. Motor enclosures will be identified as follows: ODP: Open Drip-Proof; NEMA MG1.25.1. WP: Weather Protected, Type I and II; NEMA MG1.25.8.1. TENV: Totally Enclosed, Nonventilated; NEMA MG1.26.1. TEFC: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled; NEMA MG1.26.2. EP: Explosion-Proof; NEMA MG1.26.3.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical requirements shall be as follows: Service factor:

a. Single-phase motors: 1.0. b. Three-phase motors: 1.15.

Time rating: All motors shall have continuous time ratings in conformance with NEMA MG 1-10.35. Torques: Motors shall meet, or exceed, the locked rotor and breakdown torques specified for

NEMA Design B. Currents: Locked rotor currents shall not exceed the values for NEMA Design B. Protection: Current density and heating characteristics to be such that the motors will not burn out if

subjected to a maximum of 20-second stall at 6 times full-load current.


Rating: Motors shall not be submitted or provided that are required to operate at greater than their nameplate horsepower. Use of the service factor will not be allowed under conditions of rated voltage and frequency.

Insulation: Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall have non-hydroscopic insulation systems conforming to the requirements for NEMA Class B or higher.

Conduit box: Minimum one size larger than standard and with two openings for connection of two MC fittings. One MC fitting for a power cable and one MC fitting for the control cable.

Motor efficiencies for all motors to comply with WAC 51-11, Chapters 14 and 15. Determine efficiency by the dynamometer test method, IEEE 112, Method B.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, mechanical requirements shall be as follows: Frame sizes: Conforming to latest NEMA Standard MG1-11.31 for "T" frames, and all dimensions

meeting NEMA Standards insofar as they apply. Shafts:

a. In accordance with NEMA "T" or "TS" dimensions. b. Long shafts: Suitable for belt, chain, or gear drive, within limits established by good industrial

practice and documented by NEMA Standards MG1-14.42 and MG1-14.07. c. Short shafts: Used for direct connection.

Connection diagrams: Permanently attached to the motor, either inside the conduit box or on the motor frame, in a location readable from the conduit box side.

External finish: Corrosion resistant for outdoor operation. All bolts, screws, and other external hardware: treated for resistance to corrosion.

G. Nameplates: Of corrosion resistant metal such as stainless steel or brass. Engraved or stamped and: permanently fastened to the motor frame with screws or drive pins of

the same material. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all the items of information enumerated in NEMA MG1. The Contractor shall coordinate the motor nameplate location so it is readily visible for inspection in

the completed machine.

H. Construction: All motors provided under this specification shall have the following features of construction:

Frames: a. Cast iron frames for motors ½ horsepower and larger. b. Steel frames for motors smaller than ½ horsepower. c. Aluminum frame motors will not be permitted.

Cast metal fan blades and shrouds. Stainless steel hardware. Nonhygroscopic leads. Class B temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient. NEMA design B unless otherwise specified.

I. Protective Coating: Before shipment, coat the shaft extension and any other external bare exposed metal parts of each motor with an easily removable rust preventive.

J. Packaging: All loose motors: packed in Styrofoam or securely fastened to a hardwood skid or pallet for fork-truck handling and: covered for protection against dirt and moisture during transit and for short-time outdoor storage.

2.02 MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HORSEPOWER

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, motors less than 1/2 horsepower: single-phase, squirrel cage,

capacitor start induction run type designed for 115 volt, 60 Hz operation. Dual voltage (115/230) rated motors are acceptable if all leads are brought out to the conduit box.


B. Enclosures: Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall have open drip-proof enclosures. Explosion-proof motors: where specified UL label for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous locations. An over-temperature device in the

enclosure: provided to detect and automatically de-energize the motor if the enclosure surface temperature exceeds 280 degrees C.

The nameplate: marked with the UL frame temperature code T2A.

2.03 MOTORS 1/2-HORSEPOWER THROUGH 250 HORSEPOWER

A. General: Motors 1/2-horsepower through 250 horsepower: 3-phase, squirrel cage, induction motors

designed for 460-volt, 60-Hz operation. Dual voltage (230/460) rated motors are acceptable if all leads are brought out to the conduit box. Motor enclosure, rpm, horsepower, and modifications (if any) are specified in the specific

equipment specification section. Two speed motors: single winding.

B. Drip-Proof Motors: Unless otherwise indicated, drip-proof motors shall have a Class B insulation with a service factor of 1.15.

C. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors (TEFC): General:

a. With frame sizes 182 and larger: Having cast-iron frames and end shields. b. Smaller frames:

1) Constructed of rolled steel with cast-metal end shields. 2) Provided with condensation drain holes. 3) Frame sizes 286 and larger: Having an automatic breather/drain device provided in the

drain hole. Severe duty and Inverter Duty Motors:

a. Both severe duty and inverter duty b. Other criteria specified in the equipment section. c. Having a Class F insulation with a service factor of 1.15 sine wave power and 1.0 with inverter

power. d. Internal surfaces coated with a corrosion-resistant epoxy paint. e. IEEE 841 f. NEMA Premium Efficiency. The efficiency: as determined by the dynamometer test method,

IEEE 112, Method B g. Inverter Duty requirements

1) The motors controlled by variable frequency drives (VFD): rated for inverter duty and must include a stainless steel nameplate showing "Inverter Duty Motor."

2) Nameplate shall also show that motor is suitable for variable torque operation on VFD power from 6 to 60 Hz, and show rated torque in lb-ft on inverter power in addition to the standard nameplate data specified in NEMA standards.

3) Supply certification with submittals that the motors meet all requirements of NEMA MG1-2004, Part 31. a) Inverter duty motors: specifically certified by the motor manufacturer to be compatible

with the adjustable frequency controller to be used with the motor. b) Motor to be designed to operate over the speed or frequency range specified.

4) Motors shall include an 'inverter grade' insulation system using not less than triple insulation layer wire and other features necessary to meet the voltage spike specifications of NEMA MG1-2004, Paragraph 31.4.4.2. Complete insulation of the slot, cell, and phase groups is required. The system: rated for Class F temperature rise or better at a service factor of 1.0.

5) Inverter duty motors shall include a normally closed winding over-temperature thermostat suitable to be wired to the VFD for drive shutdown.


6) Equip inverter duty motors with a shaft grounding unit mounted on the fan housing with stub shaft extended from the motor shaft. Grounding unit: equipped with two brushes, totally enclosed and sealed against environmental contamination.

7) The maximum permissible noise level for inverter duty motors not to exceed 85 dBA at 3 feet.

8) Field test inverter duty motors for sound output when running with their designated VFD. h. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Westinghouse Advantage Plus IEEE 841 2) ABB Reliance IEEE 841 3) Approved Equal.

D. Conduit Boxes: Provided with threaded hubs. Motors provided with neoprene gaskets at the base of the conduit box and between the halves of

the conduit box. Motors having a grounding lug located within the box for the raceway ground connection.

E. Rotors: Die cast aluminum or brazed copper construction, epoxy protected corrosion on external surfaces. Free from inherent axial thrust and be balanced to within NEMA Standard MG 1-12.05 vibration

limits. If balancing weights are required they: permanently secured by welding or other approved method.

F. Constant Torque Motors: Certain motors must provide constant torque over their speed range when used with variable

frequency type variable speed controllers. The most common application is variable speed pumping of positive displacement pumps. Motors: suitable for these applications; specifically, the submittal data for each such motor must

include a letter of certification from the variable frequency supplier that the motor is suitable for the application and compatible with the variable frequency controller.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING

A. Insulation Check: King County may test the insulation resistance of the motor at any time after delivery of the motor to

the jobsite or at any time during the warranty period. Tests for acceptability will be made using a 1,000-volt megohm meter (megger). Interpretations of test results for minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance will be made in

accordance with IEEE No. 43. All deficiencies: corrected by the Contractor at no cost to King County.

B. Load Testing: King County may test a motor at any time after delivery of the motor to the jobsite or at any time

during the warranty period to determine its ability to operate at nameplate current or less and meet the load test requirements.

All deficiencies: corrected by the Contractor at no cost to King County.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 06 70 - 1 SCHEDULES

SECTION 40 06 70

SCHEDULES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the purpose and content of the following schedules contained in Sections 40 06 71 through 40 06 73.

Section 40 06 71: Instrument Schedule Section 40 06 72: Alarm Schedule Section 40 06 73: PLC/DCS I/O Schedule

B. Information on equipment with identification numbers and other attributes which may relate to and may require coordination with items in these schedules is found in Section 01 78 40 and on the drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SCHEDULES

A. General: These schedules briefly describe major discrete devices required by the control system. Scheduled

devices shall be provided as described in the schedules and in the referenced specification paragraph. Each instrument is located by a panel reference or electrical or mechanical plan drawing reference (if field mounted).

These schedules shall not be interpreted as a set of complete data sheets for the devices but only as a listing of instruments with certain salient features described. Additional elements such as power supplies, current repeaters or isolators, mounting hardware, cord sets, and other such elements as may be required by a particular vendor in order to complete the system shall be provided even though not listed. The Contractor shall create complete ordering information for all instruments and shall submit this information to the Project Representative for review prior to manufacture.

B. Schedule column descriptions: Function code number: These are instrument tag numbers which include the 3-digit instrument loop

(IL) numbers and individual instrument prefixes and suffixes, or component name or circuit designation

Description: Defines application of the loop or identifies the type of individual instrument within the loop.

Specification number: Numbers refer to specification requirements for new instruments which shall be provided.

Process drawing: Numbers refer to basic process flow drawings showing the schematic locations of primary measuring elements and final control devices within the process.

Mechanical drawing: Numbers refer to mechanical drawings showing locations or installation details for individual field mounted instruments.

Electrical drawing: Numbers refer to electrical drawings showing field instrument locations and interconnecting raceway numbers and conductors. The raceway schedule in Division 26 defines the actual raceway and conductors required.

Instrument drawing: Used for loop headings only, the numbers refer to instrument drawings showing the functional diagrams.


END OF SECTION

May 2020


Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 06 71 - 1 INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE

SECTION 40 06 71

INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCHEDULE

Tag Description P&ID Sheet Instrument

Sheet Location Field Power via...


Specification Symbol

Calibration Range

Initial Setpoint

Zero Suppression

Input/ Output Application Notes

ZSO710090 DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE TANK OVERFLOW HATCH POSITION SWITCH

BW7100-P-509 BW-7100-I-592 BW7103-E-118

43 13 48

PIT 710,091 DIGESTED SLUDGE CENTRIFUGE FEED LOOP PUMP PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTER

BW7100-P-509 BW-7100-I-583 BW7101-E-104

NA

0-40 PSIG

EXISTING

TIT 710 098 DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE TANK FEED LOOP SUPPLY TEMPERATURE

BW7100-P-509 BW-7100-I-583 BW7101-E-104

NA

40-160 DEGF

EXISTING



END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 06 72 - 1 ALARM SCHEDULE

SECTION 40 06 72

ALARM SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCHEDULE

Tag Description P&ID Sheet Inst. Sheet Application Notes

ZA710090 Digested Sludge Storage Tank Overflow Hatch Open

BW7100-P-509 BW7100-I-592 Ovation

TAH710,395 Digested Sludge Pump Motor Temperature High

BW7100-P-509 BW-EL710,395 Ovation, Existing

VFD_TSH Autotransformer or Diode Bridge Temp

BW7100-P-509 BW-EL710,395 Ovation, VFD DeviceNet, Loop VFD 710,395, Section 26 29 23



END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 06 73 - 1 DCS I/O SCHEDULE

SECTION 40 06 73

DCS I/O SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Existing I/O connected to new instruments as follows: Tag Number

a. ZSO710390 Description

a. Digested Sludge Storage Tank Overflow Hatch Open P&ID Drawing Number

a. BW7100-P-509 Instrument Drawing Number

a. BW-7100-I-592 Physical Location

a. BW7103-E-118 Specification Number

a. 43 13 48 I/O Type

a. See the Instrument drawing Module Type

a. See the Instrument drawing Rack

a. See the Instrument drawing Slot a. See the Instrument drawing

Point a. See the Instrument drawing

Application Notes a. None



END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 61 13 - 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 40 61 13

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies work to relocate instruments and work to integrate a new variable frequency controlled pump into an existing Ovation control system. Section 40 70 20 specifies work to calibrate the existing instruments. Section CS 710-07 specifies the control strategy.

B. This Section specifies requirements for process instrumentation and control, which consists of hardware, software, and services necessary to provide the control functions specified.

C. The required control system uses information and requirements in other Contract Drawings and Narrative/Specifications. The Drawings and Schedules depict application dependent data while the Narrative/Specifications define broader requirements such as overall quality and performance.



Reference Title

API RP 551 Process Measurement Instrumentation

API RP 552 Transmission Systems

ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves

ISA S5.1 Instrumentation symbols and Identification

ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology

ISA S5.3 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic and Computer systems

ISA RP12.2.02 Recommendations for the Preparation, Content and Organization of Intrinsic Safety Control Drawings


NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery


IBC 1632 International Building Code

UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment

UL 508A Industrial Control Panels

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Catalog cuts of all furnished components and equipment.

C. Fabrication drawings with keyed Bills of Materials. Furnish hard copy as well as electronic format.

D. Seismic design information including a list of equipment weighing 400 pounds or more.


E. Certifications.

F. Field test schedule and procedure including all test forms.

G. Test Reports.

H. Operation and maintenance data per Section 01 78 23. Provide both paper copy and electronic copy of the as-built Control Strategies in the Operation and Maintenance manual.


A. Labeling: New and modified electrical control panels shall be in conformance with UL 508A and shall bear the UL label. Equipment and instruments shall have a label acceptable to Washington State L&I (for example UL).

B. Perform detailed design for all interconnected components. Interconnected components shall include new and existing mechanical and electrical equipment specified in other sections of the Contract Documents, as well as new and existing process control system equipment.

C. Calibrate, configure, test, and start up the complete process instrumentation and control system.

D. Place the completed system in operation including tuning loops and making final adjustments to instruments and control parameters as required during plant system and Facility start-up.

E. Provide the services of skilled instrument technicians or engineers for testing, calibration, and adjustment activities under direct on site supervision of the Electrical or Control Systems engineer.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified, the definitions of terminology used in Division 40 shall be as defined in ISA S51.1.

B. Electronic Format: Drawings shall be provided according to the requirements of Section 01 78 39. Tabular data shall be submitted in electronic format compatible with Microsoft Excel 2010®. Text data shall be submitted in electronic format compatible with Microsoft Word 2010®.

1.06 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Clean the instruments in accordance with the level transmitter factory representative's directions.

B. Calibrate the instruments as specified in Section 40 70 20.

C. The County will provide Ovation programming. The Contractor will provide services to help the County's programmer verify that the Ovation program works with the new VFD, the re-located instruments, and the hatch overflow switch contact.

1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine the Contract Document Drawings and Specifications to determine actual locations, sizes, materials and ratings of process connections.

B. Any "as-built" or record drawings of existing work presented in these Contract Documents are for information only and may not accurately represent existing conditions. Field-investigate all existing facilities modifications to ascertain the exact physical and electrical conditions in each case. After field investigation, revise as required installation and interface wiring drawings to conform to actual conditions and comply with codes and Contract requirements. Submit revisions to the Project Representative. Provide a detailed design and implement the proper method for physical installation and interface wiring for the required modifications.


1.08 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Configuration Records: 1. Configuration parameters shall be saved to electronic media and submitted with the Operation and

Maintenance manual. 2. Configuration parameters shall be saved to electronic media and locally stored at the facility. The

location shall be coordinated with the Project Representative.

B. Control Strategies: 1. Obtain individual Control Strategies in electronic format from King County. 2. Revise electronic and hardcopy files to match the as-built Control Strategies.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: The Contractor shall supervise and coordinate all activities related to requirements of the process

instrumentation and controls. Provide instrument tags for all field instruments engraved with the equipment number as identified

on the Process and Instrument Diagrams. Tags shall be stainless steel and affixed to the field equipment with stainless steel screws or stainless steel wire. Engraved text shall be not less than 0.125 inches high.

Use API RP 551 and PR 552 as a guide where installation procedures that are not specified herein. Coordinate installation with other work to avoid interference with normal operation of on-line

equipment and processes. Provide the services of skilled instrument technicians for testing, calibration, and adjustment

activities. Unless otherwise specified, instrumentation support systems shall be constructed of stainless steel. Instrument supports shall not be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment

unless required in order to perform the measurement function. No instrument shall be mounted directly flush to walls without a minimum of 5/8” spacing. Anchor and brace equipment per Section 01 73 00.

3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. General Requirements: Meet Section 01 80 00 requirements. All required tests beginning with the Factory Test, will be witnessed by the Project Representative

or County-designated person unless a written exemption is provided. Notify the Project Representative of the test date seven days prior to the test. Submit a detailed step-by-step test procedure, complete with forms for the recording of test results,

testing equipment used, and identification of the technician performing and witnessing the test. Test reports: Conform to the requirements of Forms below per Section 01 33 10 and ISA S20.

B. Test Equipment: Unless specified otherwise, provide all test equipment to complete all specified tests. Test equipment used to simulate inputs and read outputs shall have a rated accuracy at the point of

measurement at least three times greater than the component under test. Each test instrument shall be calibrated prior to the commencement of a testing activity and

checked after the completion of a testing activity. Submit dated and certified calibration reports traceable to the National Institute of Standards and

Technology (NIST) with the test report. Calibration certification date shall be within three months of date of use on this Contract.

Provide buffer solutions and reference fluids for tests of analytical equipment.


C. Test Stages: General:

a. Test each instrument loop in the following sequence:

Form Testing Sequence

40 61 13 - A Loop wiring and insulation resistance test data form

40 61 13 - H Transmitter calibration test data form

40 61 13 – J Individual loop test data form

Testing of piping, wiring, and individual components shall be completed with certified test reports

completed, which shall be provided to the Project Representative prior to commencement of individual loop testing.

Individual component calibration and test: a. Each instrument and final element shall be field calibrated in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommended procedure. Instruments shall then be tested in compliance with ISA S51.1 and the data entered on the applicable test form.

b. This test is to be witnessed by the Project Representative. c. Final elements shall be checked for range, dead-band, and speed of response. d. Notify the Project Representative if a component fails to meet the required tolerances. e. Repeat above tests until the component is within tolerance.

Loop test: a. Test each instrument loop as an integrated system. This test shall check operation from

transmitter to signal receiving components. This test is to be witnessed by the Project Representative.

b. Inject signals at the field terminations to simulate primary measuring elements. c. Output of each auto/manual station shall be manually varied from 0 to 100 percent, and correct

operation of final control element verified. d. Each alarm circuit shall be manually actuated at the field sensor. e. Verify correct operation of the applicable screen.

SCADA system test: a. Coordinate with the Project Representative for the requirements of these tests. b. Test systems end-to-end from the field sensor location to the Ovation System. c. Provide the services of a qualified technician to assist in this test. d. Check that the equipment is functioning correctly and as specified.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 70 20 - 1 TRANSMITTERS

SECTION 40 70 20

TRANSMITTERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies services to remove, re-install, inspect, calibrate and test existing instruments.

B. The inspection and calibration shall be performed by a factory authorized representative.

C. Equipment List:

Item

Equipment

No.

Calibration

Notes

DIGESTED SLUDGE CENTRIFUGE

FEED LOOP PUMP PRESSURE

INDICATING TRANSMITTER

PIT 710,091 0-40 PSIG Existing-Relocated,

Foundation Fieldbus

DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE

TANK FEED LOOP SUPPLY

TEMPERATURE

TE/TIT

710,098

40 - 160 DEG F Existing-Relocated,

Foundation Fieldbus



Reference Title

ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

API RP551 Process Measurement Instrumentation


NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

ANSI/UL913 Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus

ANSI/UL60079-11 Explosive Atmospheres – Part 11: Equipment Protection by Intrinsic Safety “I”

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Experience and qualification of the factory representatives proposed to inspect and calibrate instruments.

C. Inspection and calibration plan.

D. Calibration data per Section 40 61 13. Data shall include the existing instrument calibration data and the new calibration data.

E. Test data.

F. Test data shall include the level displayed on Ovation at the following levels: 0, 25%, 50%, and 100%.

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 40 70 20 - 2 TRANSMITTERS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND TESTING

A. The existing instruments shall be moved from the existing location to the new location, as depicted on the drawings.

B. A factory authorized representative shall do the following: 1. Direct the Contractor's work cleaning equipment that is in contact with process fluids. 2. Coordinate with the County's programmer to determine the correct range so that the Ovation level is

correct. 3. Submit the displayed Ovation levels. 4. Calibrate the instrument for the new location. Supply equipment needed to simulate the measured

variable and to record the instrument's response. 5. A handheld programmer is not available on site. Bring a handheld programmer with up to date

calibration label to the site to provide calibration. 6. Test that the range in Ovation is correct over the range of the instrument.

C. The following are minimum hours to allocate for this work at each instrument: 1. 4 hours coordinating with the County and taking measurements. 2. 8 hours for inspecting and calibrating each instrument. 3. 4 hours for testing Ovation.

3.02 TESTING

A. Testing requirements per Section 01 80 00.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 CONTROL STRATEGY Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System CS 710-07 - 1 DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE

CS 710-07

CONTROL STRATEGY DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE

1.01 PURPOSE

A. This strategy explains the control philosophy for the operation of the digester storage mixing pump.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Process and Instrumentation Diagrams:

Dwg No. Process and Instrumentation Diagram Description

BW7100-P-509 Digested Sludge Storage Tank

B. Wiring Diagrams:

Dwg No. Wiring Diagram Description

BW7100-I-501 Digester 1 Level/Pressure Interlocks LSH 710,118B and PSH 710,108B Interconnection Diagram



BW7100-I-506 Digester Cleaning Pump Interlocks ZSC 710,144B, 244B and 344B Interconnection Diagram

BW7100-I-507 Digester Transfer Pump Interlocks and Power Distribution Interconnection Diagram

BW7100-I-508 Sludge Storage and Transfer Relay Panel ICP 710,371 Schematic Diagram

BW-7100-I-517 Devicenet Linking MCC 710,912 Interconnection Diagram

BW-7100-I-524 Digester 1 Field Panel ICP 710,961A Interconnection Diagram

BW-7100-I-528 Digester 1 Field Panel ICP 710,961E Interconnection Diagram





BW-7100-I-583 Digester Common Field Panel ICP 710,964A Interconnection Diagram

BW-7100-I-584 Digester Common Field Panel ICP 710,964B Interconnection Diagram

BW-7100-I-592 Digestion Control Panel ICP 710,964 Drop 044/104 Branch: 01 Position: 1 Interconnection Diagram

BW-EL710,395 Digested Sludge Storage Mixing Pump Devicenet Motor Control Schematic Wiring Diagram


C. Control Strategies:

CS No. Control Strategy Description

CS 100-01 Plant Shutdown and Restart

CS 710-01 Digester Sludge Feed

CS 710-02 Digester Sludge Mixing

CS 710-03 Digester Gas Dome Spray

CS 710-04 Digester Sludge Circulation Heating

CS 710-05 Digester Sludge Withdrawal

CS 710-06 Digester Cleaning

CS 710-08 Dewatering Feed Loop

CS 710-09 Digester Hot Water System

D. Supporting Documentation: Core supporting documentation references are listed in the References

paragraph in Section CS 710-07. Additional supporting documents for this control strategy are listed as follows: 1. Section 46 51 25: Digester Sludge Storage Tank Pump Mixing System


A. The digested sludge storage tank is the same diameter as the anaerobic digesters, but it has a shorter sidewall depth and no heating capabilities. External pump mixing, rather than draft tube mixers, is employed to accommodate a wide range of sludge levels.

B. The mixing pump draws from the bottom cone of the digested sludge storage tank. It then discharges

through two dual-floor mounted nozzles, two single wall mounted nozzles, and two foam-suppressing nozzles positioned at the top of the tank. The nozzles are directed at an angle to provide a swirling pattern at the bottom cone of the tank and the top nozzle will provide foam suppression.

C. The digested sludge storage mixing pump is a centrifugal chopper-type with a capacity of 3000 gpm.

It is a direct drive by a variable speed drive and the pump speed is automatically controlled according to tank level.

1.04 EQUIPMENT

A. Process Equipment:

Equipment No. Equipment Description

BW-P 710,395 Digested Sludge Storage Mixing Pump

B. Control Valves:

Valve No. Valve Description

None

C. Solenoid Valves:

Valve No. Valve Description

None


D. Instruments:

Tag No. Instrument Description

BW-PIT 710,086 Digested Sludge Storage Tank Pressure Indicating Transmitter

BW-ZSO 710,090 Digested Sludge Storage Tank Overflow Hatch Position Switch

BW-PIT 710,091 Digested Sludge Storage Mixing Pump Pressure Indicating Transmitter

BW-TE/TIT 710,098 Digested Sludge Storage Tank Feed Loop Supply Temperature Indicating Transmitter

BW-PIT 710,119 Digester 1 Pressure Indicating Transmitter



BW-LIT 710,120A Digester 1 Level Indicating Transmitter



BW-LIT 710,082A Digested Sludge Storage Level Indicating Transmitter

BW-LSH 710,118A Digester 1 High-High Gas Dome Level Switch

BW-PSH 710,108A Digester 1 High-High Gas Dome Pressure Switch





BW-ZSC 710,144A Digester 1 Cleaning Transfer Pump Valve Position Switch



1.05 ALARMS

A. General description of alarms to be configured in the operator console graphics alarm log for all analog and fieldbus networked points are defined in the alarm portion of Section 17500.

B. The following are alarm tags to be configured in the operator console graphics alarm log for discrete

switches:

Tag No. Alarm Description

BW-ZA 710,090 Digested Sludge Storage Tank Overflow Hatch Open

BW-LAH 710,118A Digester 1 High-High Gas Dome Level

BW-PAH 710,108A Digester 1 High-High Gas Dome Pressure





BW-TAH 710,395 Digested Sludge Storage Mixing Pump Motor Temperature High


1.06 OPERATION – DIGESTED SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP CONTROL A. General:

1. The digested sludge storage mixing pump is typically controlled automatically to mix the contents of the digested sludge storage tank by withdrawing sludge from the bottom cone and discharging back through set of mixing nozzles in the tank. This sludge mixing normally takes place continuously.

2. The mixing pump discharge location(s) must be valved manually. Flow rates at discharge locations generally depend on the sludge level in the storage tank.

3. Valves can be changed manually to allow transfer of digested sludge storage from the mixing pump to the dewatering feed loop.

B. Manual Control:

1. SPCS/Regional: None 2. SPCS/Site: None 3. SPCS/Field Level Control: The digested sludge storage mixing pump can be started and stopped

from the SPCS. The speed may be adjusted from the SPCS. 4. Local: The digested sludge storage mixing pump can be jogged and stopped from it's JOA

switch. A "Not in Auto" alarm will be generated when the switch is not in the Auto position.

C. Automatic Control: 1. SPCS/Regional: None 2. SPCS/Site: None 3. SPCS/Field Level Control:

a. The mixing pump speed will be adjusted based on tank level with a linear speed to level relationship.

b. The pump will begin at minimum speed at 270.5 feet, and ramp up to full speed at 295 feet. Preliminary minimum speed is 85% speed. Mixing pump manufacturer shall provide their allowable minimum pump speed.

c. The pump will remain at full speed for any level above 295.0 feet. 4. Local: None

D. Interlocks:

1. SPCS/Regional: None 2. SPCS/Site: None 3. SPCS/Field Level Control:

a. When the digested sludge storage tank level drops below 270.5 feet, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

b. When the digester 1 high level alarm is active and the PSC transfer valve to digester 1 is open, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

c. When the digester 2 high level alarm is active and the PSC transfer valve to digester 2 is open, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

d. When the digester 3 high level alarm is active and the PSC transfer valve to digester 3 is open, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

e. When the digester 1 high pressure alarm is active and the PSC transfer valve to digester 1 is open, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

f. When the digester 2 high pressure alarm is active and the PSC transfer valve to digester 2 is open, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

g. When the digester 3 high pressure alarm is active and the PSC transfer valve to digester 3 is open, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.

h. When digested sludge storage tank low pressure alarm is active, the digested sludge storage mixing pump is shut down.


4. Local (Hardwired): a. When digester 1 high-high pressure of level switch is active or digester 1 cleaning transfer

pump valve is open, the digester storage mixing pump is shut down. The pump shutdown continues until the associated manual reset button is pressed.

b. When digester 2 high-high pressure of level switch is active or digester 2 cleaning transfer pump valve is open, the digester storage mixing pump is shut down. The pump shutdown continues until the associated manual reset button is pressed.

c. When digester 3 high-high pressure of level switch is active or digester 3 cleaning transfer pump valve is open, the digester storage mixing pump is shut down. The pump shutdown continues until the associated manual reset button is pressed.

d. When the cleaning transfer pump valves to digesters 1, 2 and 3 are not all closed, the digester storage mixing pump is shut down.

E. Shutdown:

1. SPCS/Regional: None 2. SPCS/Site:

a. CS 100-01 commands the equipment associated with this control strategy to shut down and electrically actuated valves to hold their last position.

b. The equipment is prevented from restarting after a shutdown or loss of power until the CS 100-01 restart command is received.

3. SPCS/Field Level Control: Upon receipt of CS 100-01 shutdown command: a. The equipment controlled by this control strategy is shut down regardless of auto or manual

mode at the time of shutdown command. b. Electronic valves remain in the last position.

4. Local: Regardless of a CS 100-01 shutdown command: a. When jogged, the equipment will re-engage and run at a predetermined speed as long as the

JOA is in the jog position and power is present.

F. Restart after Short-Term Outage: 1. SPCS/Regional: None 2. SPCS/Site: The equipment is prevented from restarting after a shutdown or loss of power until the

CS 100-01 restart command is received. 3. SPCS/Field Level Control:

a. Upon receipt of CS 100-01 restart command with equipment in manual control mode: 1) The operator can restart equipment and modulate the speed for variable speed driven

equipment. 2) The operator can manually modulate, open, or close electronic valves.

b. Upon receipt of CS 100-01 restart command with equipment in auto control mode: 1) The equipment that was running at the time of shutdown is restarted and variable speed

(frequency) driven equipment has its speed ramped back up to the speed it was operating at prior to shutdown and continues modulation from that point based on process requirements.

2) Electronic valves resume opening and closing based on process requirements. 4. Local: Upon resumption of power (regardless of CS 100-01 restart command):

a. When jogged, the equipment re-engages and runs at a predetermined speed as long as the JOA is in the jog position.

G. Restart after Long-Term Outage:

1. SPCS/Regional: None 2. SPCS/Site: The equipment is prevented from restarting after a shutdown or loss of power until

the CS 100-01 restart command is received. 3. SPCS/Field Level Control:

a. Upon receipt of CS 100-01 restart command with equipment in manual control mode: 1) The operator can restart equipment and modulate the speed for variable speed driven

equipment. 2) The operator can manually modulate, open, or close electronic valves.


b. Upon receipt of CS 100-01 restart command with equipment in auto control mode: 1) Control strategy sequences are reset to their default steps. 2) Equipment is shut down regardless of whether it was running at the time of the outage or

not. 3) Equipment is then restarted based on the process conditions and control strategy

automatic mode control under normal operations. 4) Electronic valves are opened, closed or modulated based on process conditions and

control strategy requirements. 4. Local: Upon resumption of power (regardless of CS 100-01 restart command):

a. When jogged, the equipment re-engages and runs at a predetermined speed as long as the JOA is in the jog position.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 43 05 01 - 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

SECTION 43 05 01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general requirements which are applicable to all mechanical equipment and the electrical equipment driving the mechanical equipment.

B. Additional specific requirements are listed in other Sections of the Contract Specifications and Drawings.

C. Equipment under this Division includes providing and testing the equipment described in the sections listed in Divisions 11, 22, 23, 26, 40, 41, 42 43, 44, and 46.



Reference Title

ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ABMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roll Bearings

ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads


ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800

ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws

ASME B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts


IFC International Fire Code

IMC International Mechanical Code

ISO 1940 Mechanical Vibration- Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submittals: made as specified for each equipment item or group of related equipment items. Identify the equipment by the number listed in the Specification section, by manufacturer and by type designation.



A. Arrangement: The arrangement of equipment shown on the Drawings is based upon information available at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions for a specific manufacturer. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment installation may require revision to meet actual equipment installation requirements. Structural supports, foundations, connected piping and valves, electrical and instrument equipment connections shown may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be made for such revisions and alterations. Substantiating calculations and drawings: submitted prior to beginning the work.

B. Unit Responsibility: Equipment systems (operating units) made up of two or more components that require the

contractor to assume Unit Responsibility are identified in their respective Specification Sections. Coordinate, assemble, install and test the system as an operating unit.

Coordinate equipment selection with the manufacturer(s) or supplier(s) of each component to ensure its compatibility with other system components. Ensure listed system components fit together and will function properly as an operating unit to achieve the performance requirements specified.

Where the system specification requires a certificate of System Responsibility, such certificates shall conform to the content, form and style of Form 43 05 01-C included in Section 01 33 10, signed and certified by the Contractor that the components are compatible as specified.

Submittals for components of a listed system will not be processed until a Certificate of Unit Responsibility for that system has been received and has been found to be satisfactory. Owner approval of individual component submittals will not relieve the Contractor of its System Responsibility.

Systems are as follows:

System Components

Digested Sludge Storage Tank Mixing System Section 43 51 25

Pump, motor, variable frequency drive, mounting supports, nozzles

C. Balance: Unless specified otherwise, all rotating elements in motors, pumps, blowers and centrifugal

compressors: fully assembled, including coupling hubs, before being statically and dynamically balanced. All rotating elements: balanced to G 2.5 as specified in ISO 1940, Parts 1 and 2.

Where specified, balancing reports, demonstrating compliance with this requirement, submitted as product data.

1.05 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE

A. Shipment, protection, and storage: Section 01 67 00.

1.06 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Anchor and brace equipment: Section 01 73 00.

1.07 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Starters: Except for starters specifically included in Division 26, furnish all starters for motors in this Division.

B. Disconnects: Except for factory-supplied disconnects mounted on mechanical equipment or in combination with starters, motor disconnects: in accordance with Division 26.

C. Power and control wiring: Except for factory wiring on mechanical equipment, power and control wiring under this Section: in accordance with Division 26.


D. Provide controls, controllers, transformers, and switches required by the work of this Section.

E. Factory-wired assemblies and panels: prewired to numbered terminal strips for connection to field wiring.

F. Provide disconnect switch for each control circuit connection to prewired assemblies and control panels.

G. Provide approved wiring diagrams for work furnished under this Section.

H. Provide weatherproof devices and installations for outdoor applications or as specified in Division 26.

I. Install wiring as specified in Division 26.

J. Equipment devices and wiring shall comply with NEC.

K. See Section 26 05 00 for listing and labeling requirements

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all flanges on equipment and appurtenances: flat faced and shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ASME B16.1, Class 125.

B. Flange assembly bolts: heavy pattern, hexagonal head, carbon steel machine bolts with heavy pattern, hot pressed, hexagonal nuts conforming to ASME B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Threads: Unified Screw Threads, Standard Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A and 2B, ASME B1.1.

C. All pipe threads shall conform in dimension and limits of size to ASME B1.20.1, Class 2 NPT, Taper Pipe Thread.

2.02 BEARINGS

A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings: oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. Each bearing: rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours. The rating life: determined using the maximum equipment operating speed.

B. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated, fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes: used when necessary. Grease supply fittings: standard hydraulic alemite type.

C. Oil lubricated bearings: equipped with either a pressure lubricating system or a separate oil reservoir type system. Each oil lubrication system: of sufficient size to safely absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees C and: equipped with a filler pipe and an external level indicator gage. Provide extension pipes, plugs, and valves for oil drain to allow drainage of oil into a container.

2.03 V-BELT ASSEMBLIES

A. V-belt assemblies: Dodge Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Dodge Taper-lock bushings, Wood's Super V-belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Wood's Sure-Grip bushings, Approved Equal.


B. Where stationary control variable pitch sheaves are specified, they: dry lubricated, and shall have locking collars to clamp all movable parts securely in place to eliminate relative motion between sheave parts. The sheaves: adjustable only when the unit is stopped and the sheaves are unloaded.

C. Sheaves and bushings: statically balanced. Additionally, sheaves and bushings which operate at a peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute: dynamically balanced. Sheaves: separately mounted on their bushings by means of 3 pull-up grab or cap tightening screws. Bushings: key seated to the drive shaft.

D. Belts: selected for not less than 150 percent of rated driver horsepower and, where two sheaves sized are specified, capable of operating with either set of sheaves. Belts: of the anti-static type where explosion-proof equipment is specified. Multiple belts: in matched sets.

2.04 SHAFT SEALS

A. General: Seals for water and wastewater pump shafts: mechanical seals or packing. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals shall be the split type. Unless specified otherwise, mechanical seals and packing shall conform to the requirements set forth in this paragraph.

B. Mechanical Seals: Unless otherwise specified, provide split mechanical seals for rotating shafts. Self-aligning, and self-centering, single seals. Nondestructive (nonfretting) type. Factory installed. Seal: external, single seal, split-type for removal without disassembly of the pump. Balanced seals: provided when operating pressure, shaft size, and operating speed dictate this

requirement. Factory provided seals: installed solid but be built to split. All replacement seal components: split in

half including the elastomer, gland, rotary and stationary seal faces and rotary holder. The non-shaft elastomer shall incorporate a ball and socket to ease installation.

The seal shall provide positive sealing under system surge pressure (1.5 times operating head) and momentary vacuum up to 25 inches of mercury.

Stationary seal face: multiple springs to maintain the sealing function. Spring system: isolated from the pumpage to eliminate corrosion and clogging.

Seal: install over a stainless steel shaft sleeve. Shaft sleeve: alloyed per the pump section specification without heat treatment so set screws can properly anchor.

Seal gland: a universal adjustable gland drilled with two standard NPT flushing connections. Seal chambers: provided with vented solids removal restriction bushings except for enclosed line shaft pumps where the seal barrier fluid is used for line shaft bearing lubrication. Bushing: split design and shall control the amount of flushing water flow and restrict solids and gas accumulation from the seal face area.

Materials of construction components: a. Gland and rotary holder: 316 Stainless Steel b. Springs: Elgiloy, Hastelloy C, or duplex stainless steel for resistance to chlorides. c. Rotary Seal Face: Tungsten Carbide or Silicon Carbide d. Stationary Seal Face: Solid Silicon Carbide e. Elastomer: Viton

Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals: a. Chesterton 442 with SpiralTrac™. b. AESSEAL RDS with throat bushing. c. John Crane 3740 seals with Type 24SL bushing. d. Approved Equal.

C. Cartridge Seals: Where specified, provide cartridge seals for rotating shafts. Meet all the requirements of the mechanical seals, except for split features.


D. Packing Where specified, provide shaft packing for rotating shafts with stuffing boxes. Stuffing boxes: tapped to permit introduction of seal liquid and shall hold a minimum of 5 rows of

packing and a bronze lantern ring. Packing: die-molded packing rings of material suitable for the intended service and as

recommended by the manufacturer (non-asbestos). Lantern rings: of 2-piece construction and provided with tapped holes to facilitate removal. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical seals:

a. Pack-Ryt system with SpiralTrac™ b. Approved Equal.

2.05 COUPLINGS

A. Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment sections, equipment with a driver greater than 1/2-HP, and where the input shaft of a driven unit is directly connected to the output shaft of the driver, shall have its two shafts connected by a flexible coupling which can accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment and end float, and which cushions shock loads and dampens torsional vibrations. The flexible member shall consist of a tire with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber. The flexible member: attached to flanges by means of clamping rings and cap screws, and the flanges: attached to the stub shaft by means of taperlock bushings which shall give the equivalent of a shrunk-on fit. There: no metal-to-metal contact between the driver and the driven unit. Each coupling: sized and provided as recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service.

B. Where torque or horsepower capacities of couplings of the foregoing type is exceeded, Thomas-Rex, Falk Steel Flex, or approved equal, couplings will be acceptable, provided they are sized in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and sizing data are submitted. Install in conformance to the coupling manufacturer's instructions.

2.06 GUARDS

A. Exposed moving parts: provided with guards which meet the requirements of WISHA. Guards: fabricated of flattened expanded metal screen to provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard. Guards: designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. Guards: provided with reinforced holes. Provisions: made to extend lube fittings through guards.

B. Unless otherwise specified, guard materials: Class 1, Div 1 or 2 areas: Aluminum, 5005-H34, 3/4-.125 Corrosive atmosphere areas: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4-13 All other areas: To match the material of the equipment.

2.07 CAUTION SIGNS

A. Equipment with guarded moving parts which operate automatically or by remote control: identified by signs reading "CAUTION - AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT MAY START AT ANY TIME". Signs: constructed of fiberglass material, minimum 1/8 inch thick, rigid, suitable for post or wall mounting, in accordance with Section 10 14 00. Letters: white on a red background. The sign size and pattern: as shown on the Drawings. Signs: installed near guarded moving parts.

2.08 GAGE TAPS, TEST PLUGS, DRAINS, AND GAGES

A. Unless otherwise specified, 1/2-inch threaded pressure taps with full port ball valve isolation cocks: provided on the suction and discharge sides of all pumps, blowers and compressors.

B. Permanent pressure devices (gages, sensors, switches, etc.): provided only where shown or specified, and installed in accordance with the standard details shown on the Drawings.


C. Gage taps, test plugs, and gages: as specified in Division 40.

D. Air release taps on pump discharge and suction lines: 1-inch minimum; larger where shown on theDrawings.

2.09 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: provided on each item of equipment and shall contain the specified equipment name andequipment number. Equipment nameplates: laser etched on 1/16-inch thick Type 316 stainless steelwith 3/16-inch letters. The normal size of nameplates: 3/4-inch high by 2-inch long

B. Equipment titles: spelled out on the nameplates. If abbreviations are required because of spacelimitations, abbreviations: submitted to the Project Representative and approved prior to manufacture.

C. Nameplates: fastened to the equipment in an accessible and easily visible location with No. 4 or largeroval head self-tapping stainless steel screws or drive pins. The use of adhesives shall not bepermitted.

2.10 LUBRICANTS

A. Provide for each item of mechanical equipment a supply of the lubricant required for the commissioningperiod. Lubricants: of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Limit the various typesof lubricants by consolidating them, with the equipment manufacturer's approval, into the least numberof different types, consistent with the County's current supplier. Not less than 90 days before the dateshown in construction schedule for starting, testing and adjusting equipment, provide the ProjectRepresentative with three copies of a list showing the required lubricants, after consolidation, for eachitem of mechanical equipment. The list shall show estimated quantity of lubricant needed for a fullyear's operation, assuming the equipment will be operating continuously.

2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Anchor bolts: designed for lateral forces for both pullout and shear in accordance with the provisions ofSection 43 05 62. Drilled-in epoxy or expansion anchor bolts will not be permitted for permanent application where subject to pull-out forces. Unless otherwise stated in the specifications, anchor bolt materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel and conform to the provisions of Section 43 05 62 and 05 05 23.

2.12 ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A. All motors, starters, controls, instruments, and other electrical components and devices furnished withmechanical systems: listed and labeled for the purpose for which it is used by UnderwritersLaboratories (UL) or equivalent nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the WashingtonState Department of Labor and Industry and to the local administrative authority. Where one of theselistings is required but not available, Contractor shall obtain written permission for a variance from theauthorities having Jurisdiction. In addition, electrical components and devices shall comply withDivision 26 of these Specifications.

2.13 CONTROL PANELS

A. All control panels, factory, shop or field assembled, labeled as a unit in accordance with UL 508. TheUL 508 label: affixed to the inside of the door or cover, adjacent to the data pocket.

2.14 MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS

A. Provide under Divisions 11, 22, 23, 26, 40, 41, 42 43, 44, and 46 all motors for all equipment specifiedherein and all controllers other than those specifically indicated as being furnished under other sections;all equipment and wiring shall conform to applicable sections of Division 26.


B. Power wiring for all motors and associated controllers other than wiring for automatic controls will be furnished under Division 26. Unless otherwise noted, power supply will be 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz for motors. Control voltages: 120 volts or lower, single phase, 60 hertz, or direct current, 30 volts or lower. Disconnect switches for roof exhaust fans or other equipment installed remote from its controller: furnished as an integral part of the equipment.

C. The horsepower ratings of electrical motors shown on the Drawings and Specifications are based on engineering design calculations and the selection of specific manufacturer's catalog items of mechanical equipment. If the actual equipment to be furnished requires a different motor horsepower, any resulting changes in motor branch circuits and associated circuiting must be included in the original contract bid.

D. Alignment of all motors to equipment: in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements.

E. All equipment: designed and built for industrial service and be capable of delivering rated horsepower under the following applicable conditions:

100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. Voltage variations to +/-10 percent of nameplate rating. Frequency variations to+/-5 percent of nameplate rating. Combined voltage and frequency variations to +/-l0 percent total, as long as frequency does not

exceed+/-5 percent.

F. Unless otherwise specified, motors: TEFC.

2.15 SPARE PARTS

A. See specified equipment or device.

B. Spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections, stored in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parts: tagged by project equipment number and identified as to part number, equipment manufacturer, and subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical components: properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches high, or 3 feet in length: stored in a wooden box with a hinged wooden cover and locking hasp. Hinges: strap type. The box: painted and identified with stenciled lettering stating the name of the equipment, equipment numbers, and the words "spare parts." A neatly typed inventory of spare parts: taped to the underside of the cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Locate and install sleeves, inserts, and supports as required at proper stage of construction.

B. Basis for equipment and material installation is the published recommendations of manufacturer. Submit recommendations for review.

C. Protection of equipment: 01 67 00.


3.02 TESTING

A. Equipment: provided and tested within the tolerances recommended by the equipment manufacturer where indicated in the individual mechanical specification sections. Certain sections may also require that equipment additionally be installed and tested under the direction of installers who have been factory trained by the equipment manufacturer. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of the work. Forms 43 05 01-A and 43 05 01-B specified in Section 01 33 10, completed and submitted.

B. System-wide, station-wide, and plant-wide process testing: in accordance with Section 01 80 00.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 VIBRATION AND CRITICAL Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 43 05 50 - 1 SPEED LIMITATIONS

SECTION 43 05 50

VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies vibration and critical speed limitations for rotating equipment. Individual equipment Specifications Sections may specify more stringent requirements which shall then govern over this specification.

B. This specification outlines the basic standards for acceptance of equipment. Any equipment demonstrating levels above these limits shall be repaired, modified or replaced at the Contractor's expense as determined by the Project Representative.

C. This specification covers requirements for calculating expected vibration resonances.

D. This specification covers requirements for on-site field testing of vibration of the installed equipment and reporting the test results. Submittals for field-testing are only required when specified in the individual equipment Specifications.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The following definitions shall apply: Peak to Peak Displacement: Root Mean Square (RMS) average of the peak to peak displacement

multiplied by the square root of 2 for sinusoidal signals. Peak Velocity: RMS average of the peak velocity multiplied by the square root of 2 for sinusoidal

signals. Peak Acceleration: RMS average of the peak acceleration multiplied by the square root of 2 for

sinusoidal signals. High Frequency Enveloping: A process to extract very short duration time domain signals

associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectra of acceleration versus frequency. Typical manufacturers' notation is “Spike Energy” by IRD Mechanalysis or “PeakVue” by CSI.

Low Speed Equipment: Equipment or components rotating at less than 600 rpm. Convert velocity to displacement:

D = 19,100 * V / F

D is the peak-to-peak displacement in mils.

V is the peak velocity in inches per second.

F is the frequency in cycles per minute.



Reference Title

AGMA 6000-B96 American Gear Manufacturers Association Specification for Measurement of Linear Vibration of Gear Units

ANSI/HI 9.6.4 American National Standard for Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable Values


Reference Title

AMCA Std. 204 Air Movement and Control Association Standard for Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans

HI Hydraulic Institute

ISO 1940/1 International Organization for Standardization Standard for Mechanical vibration — Balance quality requirements for rotors in a constant (rigid) state —Part 1: Specification and verification of balance tolerances

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01 33 00

B. The following information shall be provided when specified in the individual equipment Specification Sections:

Test plan as outlined in Section 01 80 00. Test data report sheets for each piece of equipment showing mounting location of test instruments. Manufacturer's certified calculations and data showing location of critical speeds in relation to the

operating speeds. Any deviation from the vibration or critical speed standards shall be noted on the submittal cover

sheet and approved prior to release for manufacture. Test equipment calibration certificates.


A. Instrumentation: Provide necessary test instrumentation which has been calibrated within one year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology, Washington DC, or approved source.

B. Testing Qualifications: Tests shall be performed by an experienced vibration analysis expert who shall interpret the results against this Specification and provide recommended acceptance or modification requirements to the Project Representative.

1.06 VIBRATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A. Vibration Limits - Pumps: Unless otherwise specified, pumping equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4.

B. Vibration Limits - Fans: Unless otherwise specified, fans shall meet the vibration limits of AMCA Std. 204, fan application category BV-3.

RPM AMCA 204, BV-3

Max Mil, peak to peak

Peak Velocity (in/sec)

Filter In Filter Out

500 or Below 4.8 0.15** 0.25**

501-700 4.0 0.15** 0.25**

701-900 3.0 0.15** 0.25**

901-1200 2.4* 0.15 0.25

1201-1500 1.7* 0.15 0.25

1501-1800 1.4* 0.15 0.25

1801-3000 1.0* 0.15 0.25

*The peak to peak displacement values for RPM >900 are for reference only.

**The peak velocity levels for RPM < 900 are for reference only


C. Other Equipment Vibration Velocity Limits: Unless otherwise specified, other equipment shall not exceed the following peak velocities (inches/second).

Equipment Unfiltered Overall Limit Any Filtered Peak Limit

Motors 0.25 0.20

Steady Bearings 0.25 0.20

Centrifugal Blowers 0.15 0.10

Gear Reducers < AGMA 6000-B96 limits

Other Equipment, Radial 0.16 0.10

Other Equipment, Axial 0.10 0.10

1.07 CRITICAL SPEED REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirement: Narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or

synchronous multiple of running speed, are not to exceed 40% of synchronous vibration amplitude. The presence of discernible vibration amplitude peaks or vibration spectra at a bearing inner or

outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection.

B. Electric Motors: Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency (7200 CPM,

120 Hz) that is more than 40% of the peak at rotational frequency. Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side

bands at the rotational frequency around the line frequency peak (i.e., 7200 CPM +/- 1800 CPM for a 4-pole motor).

C. Unless otherwise specified, rotating mechanical equipment shall satisfy the following: First critical speed of the constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment is to be at least 25%

above the maximum operating speed or 25% below the minimum operating speed. Second critical speed of any 2-speed or variable speed equipment is to be at least 25% above the

maximum operating speed or 25% below the minimum operating speed.

D. Critical speeds for equipment with flexible shaft-rotor systems shall be at least 15% below the minimum operating speed and 20% above maximum operating speed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST VIBRATION INSTRUMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter, 12 bit A/D converter, Fast

Fourier Transform (FFT) software, phase measurement capability, time wave form data storage capability, high frequency enveloping capabilities, FFT frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles per minute, adjustable FFT resolution from 400 to 6400 lines, storage for up to 100 3200 line frequency spectra, RS232C or Ethernet data output port, circuitry for integration of acceleration signal to velocity or double integration to displacement.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. IRD 306 Vibration Meter or IRD811 Vibration Meter with spike energy detector. b. Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Electric, Model 2140, Machinery

Health/Analyzer with applicable analysis software. c. Approved Equal


B. Analyzer Settings: Units: English, inches/second, mils and g's. Fast Fourier Transform Lines: Most equipment 1600 lines minimum. Motors require enough lines

to distinguish motor current frequencies from rotational frequencies. Use 3200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of 3600 rpm, 3200 lines minimum for High Frequency Enveloping and 1600 lines minimum for low speed equipment.

Sample Averages: 4 minimum Maximum Frequency (Fmax):

a. 40 times rotational frequency for rolling element bearings. b. 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings.

Amplitude Range: Auto Select. Full scale shall not be more than twice the acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower.

Fast Fourier Transform Windowing: Hanning Window. High Pass Filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high-speed equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21

cycles per minute for low speed equipment.

C. Accelerometers: Low Speed Equipment:

a. Low frequency, shear mode accelerometer, 500 millivolts per g sensitivity, 10 g range, +/- 5% frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850 hertz, magnetic mount.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Wilcoxon Research, model 797L 2) PCB, Model 393C 3) Approved Equal.

High Speed Equipment: a. General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts per g sensitivity, 50g range, +/- 2 dB. Frequency

response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud mounted or magnetic mount. b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793 2) IRD Model 943 3) Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD VIBRATION TESTING

A. General: Equipment testing for vibration and natural frequencies shall be conducted with equipment,

installed, grouted and operational. Test instrumentation shall be portable, temporarily mounted or permanently installed components if

suitably calibrated for the test measuring and recording instruments.

B. Test Requirements: Measure filtered vibration spectra for peak velocity, peak to peak displacement versus frequency

and measure vibration phase in three perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, gear or clutch assembly and the driver. One plane of measurement shall be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component. Measure rotational speeds using a photometric or other tachometer with input directly to the vibration data collector.

Fixed speed equipment shall be operated at the design operating condition during the test recording. Variable speed equipment shall be tested to establish performance over the entire speed range.

Field test for natural frequency: Excite the installed equipment and support system in three perpendicular planes. Use the same locations as used for vibration tests above. Determine the natural resonant frequency of the driver, clutch or gear, driven equipment and supports.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 43 05 62 - 1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

SECTION 43 05 62

GENERAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies equipment mounting for all equipment over 25 Horsepower. It specifies equipment bases, supports, anchorage, and accessories.



Reference Title


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the following submittals: Shop drawings for all equipment bases and anchorage details. No less than 4 weeks in advance of equipment installation, submit anchorage and bracing drawings

and calculations bearing the stamp of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington. Drawings and calculations shall include and clearly show the criteria used to determine seismic coefficients and forces applied to the equipment, including seismic zone, soil profile type, and importance factors.

1.04 MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide all supports, anchorage, and mounting of all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, the IBC, and industry standards requirements.

B. Provide all elements required to resist the calculated forces described herein or required by the equipment manufacturer.

C. Design anchorage for all equipment bases, supports, and foundations in accordance with IBC and Section 01 73 00.

D. All anchorage of equipment shall be made of poured-in-place concrete elements; it is imperative that anchorage be coordinated with the concrete work so that anchorage may be installed at time of pouring. If calculations and anchorage details are not approved prior to pouring of concrete, Contractor shall become responsible for any strengthening of concrete elements.

E. For belt driven equipment shown as in-line and piggyback, the base shall be rectangular and the motor shall always be behind and above the driven equipment and never over the driven equipment unless approved by the Project Representative or indicates as such in the equipment specification. Motor mounting hardware for any belt driven configuration shall allow for belt tension adjustment.

F. For equipment 15 horsepower and larger, anchor bolt calculations showing adequacy of bolt sizing and anchor embedment shall be performed, stamped, dated, and signed by a State of Washington Structural Engineer.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise specified, rigidly mount equipment and driver on a common cast iron or fabricated steel baseplate.

B. All equipment located on floor slabs shall be mounted on concrete pads.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, hot-dip galvanized the bases after fabrication, except cast iron bases.

2.02 CONCRETE PADS

A. Provide concrete pads, for equipment and associated floor penetrations that are at least 2 inches larger than the steel or cast base and not less than 6 inches above the finished floor elevation.

B. Shape to drain away from the base.

C. Enclose all conduits, piping connections, or drains. Unless otherwise indicated, no fixtures that rise directly from the floor, including conduits, piping connections, or drains, will be accepted.

2.03 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Curb Mounted Bases: Curb mounted equipment where vibration isolation is required, principally roof top heating,

ventilating and air conditioning equipment, shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the curb and under the isolated equipment.

The extruded aluminum top and bottom members shall contain cadmium-plated springs having a 1-inch minimum deflection with 50 percent additional travel to solid.

Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum

clearance of 1/4 inch so as not to interfere with spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible neoprene connection duct joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum.

B. Type I Bases: Type I bases shall be structural steel bases with thickened pads for doweling. The bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration

machines and pump bases, which may be "T" or "L" shaped to accommodate the equipment drive and accessories.

Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 of the longest

dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 1 inch.

C. Type II Bases: Type II bases shall be steel members used to cradle machines having legs or bases that do not

require a complete supplementary base. All members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. Height saving brackets

shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a clearance of 1-inch below the base.


D. Type III Bases: Type III bases shall be rectangular foundations consisting of concrete filled structural steel beam or

channel forms. Bases for split case pumps shall be of sufficient size to provide support for suction and discharge

base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12 inches unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer or required for mass or rigidity.

In general, base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 inches.

Forms shall include, as a minimum, concrete reinforcement consisting of ½-inch bars or angles welded in place on 6-inch centers each way in a layer 1½ inches above the bottom or additional steel as required by structural conditions.

Forms shall be provided with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in concrete locations.

Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1-inch clearance below the base.

E. Type IV Bases: Type IV bases shall be cast iron. Cast iron bases located within a building, vault, tunnels, or galleries do not require galvanizing but

shall be sealed in accordance with the requirements for bleeding surfaces specified in Section 09 90 00 prior to grouting.

All fasteners requiring connections to the base shall be terminated by nuts welded to the bottom side of the base and plugged with cork, plastic plugs or grease, or acorn nuts. In no case shall the fastener terminate only into the metal base.

Bases for pumps shall be provided with perimeter drip rims plumbed to the equipment drain.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Anchor each piece of equipment to resist the minimum lateral force required by code, the IBC or by the manufacturer of the equipment, whichever is greater. Consider this force acting at the center of gravity of the piece under consideration.

B. Anchor no equipment to vertical structural elements.

C. Equipment which is not vibration isolated shall be anchored directly to the supporting floor system. In addition to the anchorage, all such equipment shall be internally designed so that all static and moving parts are anchored to the supporting framework to resist the imposed seismic forces. All forces must be transmitted to the base in order to be anchored as required. Vibration isolated equipment shall be specially designed to meet these same requirements.

D. Piping and Conduit: 1. Connecting piping with flexible connections and/or expansion joints shall be anchored such that the

intended uses of these joints are maintained in the piping system without imposing strain on the equipment connections.

2. Cap flush conduit and piping for future equipment with the floor or concrete pad in such a manner to allow future connection.

3. Coordinate location of electrical conduit and piping penetrations within the concrete pad and equipment base.

4. Stub up all penetrations on the same side of the equipment as required for connection to the equipment.

5. Locate equipment drains as required for drainage from equipment.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated, place steel blocks 4 inches square and 1½-inches thick with a hole drilled in the center for the stud under the base at every mounting stud.

B. Leveling: Level equipment by using precut stainless steel shims between the base and the steel blocks at the

mounting studs. Place the shims so the tabs on the shims are easily accessible. Use a minimum of 4 shims per stud. The total shim thickness at each stud shall be at least 0.015 inches. Leveling nuts may be used for mounting equipment less than 10 horsepower. Wedges: not allowed.

C. Mounting: Unless otherwise indicated, mounting bases for equipment 20 horsepower and larger shall be a

minimum of 1-inch thick. Drill and do not burn out mounting holes in the bases. The holes shall not be open slots. Use mounting studs that are 316 stainless steel. Use a non-seize or non-galling compound on the

threads Use mounting studs that are the "L" shaped type and go through any concrete pad into the floor.

D. Manufacturer specifications for mounting: The equipment manufacturer shall recommend the size of the mounting studs for the motor and

equipment and shall also furnish the recommended tightening torque for the nuts. Regardless, the minimum size stud shall be:

a. ¾-inch for 20 to 100 horsepower. b. 1-inch for over 100 to 300 horsepower. c. 1¼-inch for 300 to 500 horsepower. d. Over 500 horsepower shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.

E. Grout: Equipment per Section 03 60 00. Use non-shrink cementitious and non-ferrous grout. No less than 7/8-inch thick and no more than 1-5/8 inches thick.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 DIGESTER GAS HANDLING AND Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 43 13 48 - 1 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES

SECTION 43 13 48

DIGESTER GAS HANDLING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies gas handling and safety equipment for the digester gas conveyance and utilization system, specifically emergency hatch covers.

B. The general requirements applicable to all mechanical equipment, as specified in Section 43 05 01, are applicable to the equipment specified in this Section.

C. Performance Requirements: Emergency relief manhole covers provide emergency venting and while also allowing access for

tank inspection and maintenance.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this Section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the Contractor shall point out the conflict to the Project Representative; lacking a definitive answer otherwise, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail.

Reference Title

NFPA 820 Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Items to be Submitted for This Specification: Manufacturer's catalog information confirming rated capacity, pressure drops, materials of

construction, and specified features. Drawings showing construction details. Parts list. Seismic design and engineering calculations for anchorage and bracing systems for equipment

shall be in accordance with Section 01 73 00. For the limit switch submit the following: 1) Data depicting the specified features and the

dimensions, 2) Thread type for connection MC cable and conduit.

1.04 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Service Conditions: Composition: The wastewater digester gas will be water-saturated and will contain small amounts

of organic silicone compounds (siloxanes) of fine particulate matter, oil, and grease. The expected dry-gas composition of the digester gas is as follows:

Composition Range

Carbon dioxide (CO2), percent by volume 35 to 45

Methane (CH4), percent by volume 55 to 65


Other physical characteristics: Other physical characteristics of the digester gas are as follows:

Characteristics Range

Temperature, degrees F 40 to 90

Specific gravity, at 70 degrees F (air = 1.0) 0.8

Relative humidity, percent 100

1.05 WARRANTY

A. For the work of this Section, provide all warranties as described in the General Conditions, Section 00700, Subsection 7.9B, and provide all normal commercial warranties available as described in the General Conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. The listed manufacturers are believed to have the capability of producing equipment and/or materials meeting the requirements specified in this Section. Although a particular manufacturer model number is named, it does not relieve manufacturer from complying with specification. The manufacturer's standard models or products may require modifications to conform to specified requirements.

Pressure Relief Manhole cover: Varec 400W or approved equal.

2.02 FEATURES

A. Emergency Relief Hatch: The replacement manhole cover requires one 36-inch diameter emergency pressure relief hinged

manhole cover with a set pressure of 48 inches of W.C Materials:

a. Cover/arm/base/seat: stainless steel Type 316L b. Gasket: neoprene c. Diaphragm: PTFE

Design Requirements: a. Mounting type: ANSI 150 lb. flange b. Flange facing: flat face c. Confirm flange drilling, facing and gasket compatibility type with new 316 SS hatch flange

Limit switch for monitoring of pressure relief. a. Contact opens when hatch is not closed b. No touch sensing c. 300 series stainless steel housing d. Vacuum sealed contact e. Contact ratings: 3 amps at 120 VAC, 2 amps at 24 VDC f. NEMA 7 Class I Division 1.

Cable and box support: Provide cable and box support as shown on the drawings. Manufacturer

a. Varec Biogas 400W series Emergency Relief Manhole cover or approved equal.

2.03 SPARE PARTS [NOT USED]


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All gas handling equipment shall be installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 COATINGS


B. Products: Prime and finish coatings on CS components in accordance with Section 09 90 00.


A. Seismic Anchorage and Bracing: Special inspection in accordance with Section 01 15 00. Special inspection will be provided by the County.

3.04 TESTING

A. In addition to any testing herein, perform all testing for this product or system consistent with the requirements of Section 01 80 00, the applicable codes, and the manufacturers' current quality assurance program.

3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. On-Site Inspection and Training: Provide factory-trained manufacturer's representative at the site for the following activities. Specified durations do not include travel time to or from the project site.

Training Sessions: Procedures Section 01 80 00. Provide two 4-hour training sessions with a minimum of 4 hours of classroom training, each, on vacuum/pressure relief assemblies. Certify completion of training on Form 43 05 01-B, Section 01 33 10.

END OF SECTION

May 2020 Contract No. C01465C20 DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE Brightwater Storage Tank Foam Spray System 46 51 25 - 1 TANK PUMP MIXING SYSTEM

SECTION 46 51 25

DIGESTER SLUDGE STORAGE TANK PUMP MIXING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers the supply and installation of Digested Sludge Storage Tank (DSST) mechanical mixing system complete with pumps; motors; mixing nozzle assemblies, scum suppression nozzle assemblies; complete with all required piping within a DSST and connections to pumps; valves as required complete with all accessories and appurtenances; instrumentation and controls; and ancillaries required for complete installed system.

B. This section also includes requirements for computational fluid dynamics (CFD) modeling the mixing system manufacturer must complete to validate the mixing system design. The CFD model will aid in validating the recommended placement of mixing nozzles by the mixing manufacture in the tank and demonstrate the mixing manufacturers’ validation and ownership of the efficacy of the mixing system.

1.02 REFERENCES

This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ABMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A148 Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes

ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A278 Gray Iron Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures of up to 650 Degrees F

ASTM A322 Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades

ASTM A532 Abrasion-Resistant Cast Iron


ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A743 Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistance for General Application

HI Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, 14th Edition

NEC National Electric Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA 820 National Fire Protection Association

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration



A. Performance Requirements: General: The Digested Sludge Storage Tank Mixing Pump shall be installed in a horizontal

configuration to provide complete mixing in the storage tank. The pump mixing manifold, supports, mixing pump, and all other equipment shall be suitable for operation in wastewater made up of municipal digested sludge as specified in the following paragraph. Sludge will be pumped through the mixing header and nozzles in the DSST in order to maintain solids in suspension. The nozzles shall be designed and positioned to produce rotation within the process, which effectively suspends organic and inorganic material and entrains surface foam. The vendor shall be responsible for determining mixing assembly, quantity, location and appropriate nozzle angles. a. Materials shall be macerated and conditioned by the pump as an integral part of the pumping

action. The pump must have demonstrated the ability to chop through, mix and pump high concentrations of solids such as plastics, heavy rags, grease and hair balls, wood, paper products and stringy materials without plugging the pump or associated mixing nozzles.

Operating Conditions: The equipment provided under this section shall be designed for the following operating conditions: a. The liquid media to be mixed and the gaseous space in the tank will be corrosive. The digested

sludge will have a pH between 5-10. The nozzles inside the DSST will be exposed to digester gas which will contain hydrogen sulfide which, coupled with the saturated atmosphere, will produce surface condensate that will contain sulfuric acid. The proposed system should include materials of construction that are appropriate for this application. This includes all in-tank nozzle assemblies.

b. The digested sludge will be in the mesophilic or thermophilic range (85-140 degrees Fahrenheit) following anaerobic digestion. The sludge can have a total solids concentration as high as 3.5%. The sludge contains grease and small fibrous material, and grit.

c. Refer to the contract drawings for dimensions and details of the DSST, including HDPE lining, mixing system suction and discharge connections through the wall, and influent and effluent connections. 1) The maximum water surface elevation is 307.00 (1 foot below the overflow). The design

intent is to homogenize the contents of the tank and entrain/reincorporate surface scum/foam/grease layer back into the bulk liquid. The mixing system supplier is to specify the maximum water surface elevation that will work for their proposed mixing system.

The key threats to long-term operation of the storage tank is the accumulation of foam in the tank. The proposed mixing system should ensure adequate agitation to reincorporate the foam into the bulk media and provide two surface nozzles that suppress surface foam.

B. Design Requirements: General: Pumps shall be severe-duty, non-clogging, chopper-type slurry pumping design capable

of pumping their respective contents, which may contain rags, hair, grease, abrasive grit, and metal salts. The pumps shall be specifically designed to pump digested sludge and shall operate without clogging or fouling caused by material in the pumped fluid at any operating condition within the range of service specified. The pump and the driver shall be designed to operate without cavitation or damaging vibration over the entire specified range of flow and head conditions. The pumping unit shall not be subject to or a source of undue noise or vibration.

The complete pumping unit shall be designed to operate without overload on any component at any point along the pump's entire operating curve.

Nozzles shall be compatible with the pumping system design hydraulics and function with the pumps as a system.

Manufacturer shall confirm that the motor is non-overloading within the selection criteria set forth in Section 40 05 93. Pump selections shall not require a motor exceeding 60 hp.

C. CFD Modeling Purpose: CFD modeling shall be performed by the System manufacturer to confirm that adequate

mixing conditions are achieved throughout the tank volume. The recommended placement of the nozzles by the manufacturer will be confirmed by the model.


Mixing system supplier shall provide a dynamic CFD analysis which demonstrates the system’s ability to meet the performance requirements outlined in paragraph 1.03.A.

Model Requirements a. Model Domain/Inputs

Tank Diameter 58.75 ft

Side water depth 39.5 ft

Cone depth 6 ft

Sludge Circulation Rate 3000 gpm

Sludge Feed Digested Sludge

Operating Solids Concentration 3%

Operating Temperature 98-degree F

Mixing Pump Variable Speed

b. Tank Conditions: Tank shall be assumed filled full. Solid characteristics are described in the

system description in paragraph 1.03.A. 1) The fluid to be used for the simulation shall be based on a realistic non-Newtonian sludge

consistent with the project specifications. The CFD report shall document the sludge rheology used and why it is appropriate for this analysis.

c. Model Accuracy: U, V and W RMS momentum residuals be demonstrated to be below 1.0 E-04. The mixing system supplier shall supply a copy of the CFD analysis summary file, readable by Microsoft WORD, as verification of acceptably lower errors in the analysis. 1) Global mass and momentum imbalance throughout the system shall be less than 0.1%.

3-D Geometry Files: The mixer manufacturer shall develop the 3-D geometry files necessary for the modeling effort. Dimensioned drawings and 3-D renderings of the computational domain and a detailed model setup/methodology in PDF format shall be submitted. The numerical domain of one reactor will be modeled by a mesh of at least 2,000,000 cells.

CFD Model a. The system manufacturer shall use commercially available and widely-used CFD modeling

package such as STAR-CCM, FLOW-3D, FLUENT, or AutoDesk CFD for performing the modeling.

b. The CFD simulations will be performed to reach a Steady-State solution. A plot of volume average velocity vs. number of iterations shall be provided as part of the CFD report to verify that the simulation is reliably solved, having achieved a fully converged, steady-state solution.

c. Provide a CFD simulation in transient (time dependent) regime showing the residence time distribution of a tracer pulse using the frozen flow field of the previously obtained Steady-State solution. The tracer pulse will be injected at the inlet for 5 seconds and the tracer concentration will be recorded at the outlets all time required until the tracer completely disappears from the basin.

Test Reporting a. Upon completion of modeling, a draft report of the study shall be prepared for review and

comment. The report shall include an introduction; a description of model development; a discussion of model results; conclusions and recommendations; tabulated test data; drawings of the modeled test geometry; drawings of recommended design revisions; and color images of pertinent flow phenomena.

b. Graphical presentations of the flow field through these facilities at three elevations and at three transects through each of the operating unit processes shall be prepared and presented. General flow patterns, flow vectors, and general circulation pattern shall be reported.

c. An electronic copy of the draft report in PDF format shall be provided for review. d. Upon receipt and resolution of comments on the draft report, a final report shall be prepared

and submitted.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

The following information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. Action Submittals:A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. Unit Responsibility Certification form in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 43 05 01-1.04 B Unit Responsibility. No other submittal material will be reviewed until the certificate has been received and found to be in conformance with these requirements. Unit responsibility is for this Section, and for Section 26 29 23. Submit letter signed by an officer of the pump manufacturer that the specific application has been reviewed and that the pump, motor and drive combination are compatible and will satisfy operating requirements under all conditions of operation without adverse impacts on either the pump, motor or VFD.

Manufacturer's data including materials of fabrication and equipment weight. Shop drawings including dimensions and cross sectional views of equipment showing details of fabrication. Motor data as specified in Section 40 05 93. Predicted performance curves (head, capacity, efficiency, power and NPSH). Motor operation and maintenance information. Pump operation and maintenance information in accordance with Section 01 78 23.

Test plan for the factory testing as described in Paragraph 3.01. Certified copies of factory test logs and performance curves as specified in Paragraph 3.01. Spare Parts list Mounting drawings and product information showing baseplate, anchor bolt locations and sizes, and anchor bolt calculations.

Equipment mounting submittals in accordance with Section 43 05 62. Manufacturer’s Installation Certification Form – Form 43 05 01-A Calculations of critical speeds and mass elastic system analysis. Calculations shall be signed by a registered mechanical, civil, or structural engineer in the state of Washington.

CFD modeling draft and final reports Factory performance testing results and reports, certified by an officer of the manufacturing corporation.


A. This section contains specific references to the following related sections. Additional related sectionsmay apply that are not specifically listed below.

Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures Section 01 67 00: Shipment Protection and Storage Section 01 78 23: Operation and Maintenance Data Section 01 80 00: Equipment Testing, Training and Commissioning Section 05 05 19: Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Section 26 29 23: Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Section 40 05 93 Electric Motors for Process Equipment


Section 43 05 62: General Equipment Mounting Section 43 05 50: Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations

B. Factory Tests: See Paragraph 3.01.

C. Unit Responsibility:This system shall be supplied under Unit Responsibility requirements in section 43 05 01. A unit responsibility certification form shall be provided for this system.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The equipment shall be protected during shipment, handling and storage as specified in Section 01 6700.

1.07 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. General:Operating conditions as specified describe the range of operating requirements for each pumping system. Pump curves shall continuously rise towards the shutoff head.

B. Rated operating capacity and head:The rated conditions provided in this section shall be used as the basis for pump selection and bidding. The rated conditions shall be refined with input from the mixing system manufacturer and from the Computational Fluid Dynamic modeling results. The pump shall be selected such that the rated condition is to the right of the maximum efficiency point on the head capacity curve. Other specified operating points are estimates defined by the expected operating characteristics of the pumping system. These estimates describe conditions at which the pumping system may operate, such as maximum capacity, maximum head and minimum capacity.

C. Operating requirements:

Condition Rated Capacity (gpm)

Rated Head (ft)

Maximum Motor Size (HP)

NPSHA (ft)

Condition A 2900 50 60 flooded

Condition B Per HQ Curve 44 60 flooded

Condition C 1750 27 60 flooded

Condition A: taken as the rated, continuous-duty operating condition. Performance at the rated condition shall be guaranteed in accordance with tolerances set forth in the Test Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, expect that any increase in head of capacity or both which results in a power requirement greater than the pump motor’s nameplate rating will be cause for rejection. Condition A to be located in the Preferable Operating Region as established by the pump manufacturer in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.3. Condition B: presented to indicate operating conditions when the pump is operating at maximum speed against minimum anticipated system head. Under this condition it is assumed the pumped liquid will behave more like water than sludge. Pumps with head-capacity curves steeper than that assumed will produce slightly less flow at slightly lower head. The reverse will occur with pumps having a flatter head-capacity curve. Condition B to be located in the Preferable Operating Region as established by the pump manufacturer in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.3.


Condition C: the anticipated continuous duty, reduced-speed condition. Pumps shall be capable of sustained (24 hours per day) operation at this condition with no damage to bearings, shafts, shaft sleeves or other stationary or rotating parts. Condition C to be located in the Preferable Operating Region as established by the pump manufacturer in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.3. Total head in the above tabulation is the algebraic difference between the discharge head and suction head as defined in the standards of the Hydraulic Institute. Net positive suction head available (NPSHA) in the above tabulation is referred to pump centerline and is calculated in accordance with Hydraulic Institute standards for the worst anticipation combination of fluid temperature and barometric pressure. A pump with a power requirement greater than 92% of the motor nameplate rating anywhere along the pump's full speed curve will be cause for rejection. Test operating conditions at pump design speed.

D. Pump Design Requirements:

Minimum efficiency at Condition A 65%

Suction Size 10”

Discharge Size 8”

Maximum Speed 1200

E. Mass Elastic and Critical SpeedsEach pumping system, comprising pump, driver, the entire rotating group and related frames, supports, enclosures, housings, and casings and all appurtenances, shall have no dangerous critical or resonant frequencies at multiples of the speed required by the pump to meet the specified operating conditions. Analysis shall be at least equal to the techniques developed by Dunkerly and Holzer. A dangerous critical speed shall be defined as one which produces a torsional stress exceeding 3,500 psi. Each pumping system shall meet vibration and critical speed limitations as specified in Section 43 05 50.

F. Motor. Section 40 05 93 and the following:

Type Severe Duty and Inverter Duty

Nominal Speed 1200

Horsepower, nameplate 60

Voltage/cycle/phase 460/60/3

Service Factor 1.0 on VFD

NEMA Nominal Efficiency 94.5

1.08 WARRANTY

A. For the Work of this Section, provide all warranties as described in the General Conditions 00700, andprovide all normal commercial warranties available, as described in the General Conditions.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Supply all products from a single manufacturer.

B. Established and reputable manufacturers who have experience in the manufacture and installation ofthe equipment specified are acceptable. Manufacturers included hereinafter, or a submittal as an “orequal” manufacturer not listed, must comply with the requirements of this specification in its entirety.Acceptable manufacturers of chopper-type pumps and mixing systems include the following.

Rotamix Process Mixing System with Vaughan Chopper pumps by Vaughan Co., Inc., Montesano, Washington. HydroMix Mixing System with ChopX pumps by Hayward Gordon, Mississauga, Ontario

2.02 GENERAL

A. The equipment covered by this section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven abilityas manufactured by reputable concerns having long experience in the production of such equipment.The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the bestpractices and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.

B. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength and stiffness and to beespecially adapted for the work to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection,repairs, and adjustment.

2.03 MATERIALS

Component Material

Nozzles, pipe and assembly fittings 304 stainless steel glass lined

Nozzle assembly floor bases and wall mounting brackets

Type 316 stainless steel; anchor bolts/washers Type 316 stainless steel.

Pump casing ASTM A536 cast ductile iron

Impeller ASTM A148 cast alloy steel; case hardened to minimum Rockwell C 60.

Cutter Bar ASTM A148 alloy steel; hardened to minimum Rockwell C 60.

Pump shaft ASTM A389 heated treated alloy steel.

Mechanical seals Flushed; AISI Type 316 stainless steel; Viton O-rings; tungsten or carbide faces

A. Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, andresistance to erosion and corrosion. The manufacturer may propose alternative materials for thepurpose of providing greater strength, corrosion resistance, or to meet required stress limitations.However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for thepurpose

2.04 NOZZLE CONSTRUCTION

A. Design the mixing nozzles, including location, direction of discharge, and outlet velocity, tailored for thespecified design in order to optimize mixing effectiveness and efficiency.

B. Supply all nozzle assemblies with 316 Stainless Steel grooved joint fittings and couplings or lap jointANSI flanges to permit easy disassembly for cleaning. Select couplings that prevent nozzles fromrotating out of position Assembly Fittings.


C. Supply single or dual directional nozzles as required by the manufacturer.

D. Glass lining to be a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm; hardness exceeding 5 (Mohs Scale) and minimum density of 2.5 g/cm3.

2.05 PUMP CONSTRUCTION

A. Pump Pumps to be horizontal, centrifugal, end suction chopper type impeller with all appurtenances as

specified. The pumps to be specifically designed to pump digesting sludge solids and mixed sludge solids at

consistencies ranging from 1.9 to 3.5 percent. Digested sludge solids feed into a DSST to be macerated and conditioned by the pump as an

integral part of the pumping action. The pump must have demonstrated the ability to chop through and pump high concentrations of solids such as plastics, heavy rags, grease and hair balls, wood, paper products and stringy materials without plugging, both in tests and field applications.

Minimum NPSH available: flooded suction. Motor size to be determined by the manufacturer; maximum motor size 60 hp. Direct Drive.

B. Casing and Back Pull-Out Plate The pump casing shall be of volute design, spiraling outward to the Class 125 flanged centerline

discharge. Back pull-out design shall incorporate jacking bolts for accurate adjustment of impeller-to-cutter bar clearance and shall allow removal of pump components without requiring disconnection of casing from inlet or discharge piping. Casing & backplate shall be ductile cast iron with all water passages to be smooth, and free of blowholes and imperfections for good flow characteristics. A pressure tap shall be included on or near the discharge flange. Backplate shall include a replaceable Rockwell C 60 alloy steel cutter adjustable for 0.005-0.050" clearance to cut against the rotating impeller pump vanes for removing fiber and debris. Alternatively, back plates for pumps with open type impellers shall have spiral grooves across which the sharpened impeller vanes will rotate cutting and expelling solids.

C. Impeller: Shall be open or semi-open type with pump out vanes to reduce seal area pressure and to draw

lubricant down from the reservoir should seal leakage occur. Chopping/ maceration of materials shall be accomplished by the action of the cupped and

sharpened leading edges of the impeller blades moving across the cutter bar at the intake openings, with a maximum set clearance between the impeller and cutter bar of 0.010” and 0.015".

Impeller to be cast from ASTM Al48 alloy steel, case hardened to minimum Rockwell C 60 and dynamically balanced.

Semi Open Impeller to be threaded to the shaft and have no axial adjustments and no set screws. Open impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and the axal clearance at the front and rear of the impeller shall be externally adjustable.

D. Cutter Bar: Cutter bar to be recessed into the pump bowl, with a funnel shaped inlet opening, and extend

diametrically across entire pump suction opening. Cutter bar to be cast from ASTM A148 alloy steel, hardened to minimum Rockwell C 50.

Replaceable shear bars to be AISI 8620, case hardened to minimum Rockwell C 60. Upper cutter to be threaded into the back pull-out adapter plate above the impeller, designed to cut

against the pump-out vanes and the impeller hub, reducing and removing stringy materials from the mechanical seal area. Upper cutter to be AISI 8620 alloy steel case hardened to minimum Rockwell C 60. Pumps with open impeller do not require an upper cutter, the area behind the impeller shall be protected from fouling by the cutting and expulsion action of sharpened vane edges sweeping across spiral grooves in the casing backplate.


E. Shaft: The pump shaft and impeller to be supported by ball/roller bearings . All shafting to be AISI 4140

heat treated

F. Mechanical Seal: Shall be specifically designed to require flushing. The mechanical seal shall be made of 316

stainless steel and shall be a cartridge-type mechanical seal with Viton® O-rings and silicon carbide (or optional tungsten carbide) faces. This cartridge seal shall be pre-assembled and pre-tested so that no seal settings or adjustments are required from the installer. Any springs used to push the seal faces together must be shielded from the fluid to be pumped. The cartridge shall also include a 17-4PH, heat-treated seal sleeve and a ductile iron seal gland, 8”-12” pumps may use 316SS gland as an option.

G. Bearings: Shaft thrust in both directions shall be taken up by either a double-row angular contact ball bearing

or two back-to-back mounted single-row angular contact ball bearings. Two single-row radial bearings shall also be provided. Bearings shall be rated with a minimum L10 bearing life of 100,000 hours.

Shall be ductile cast iron, and machined with piloted bearing fits for concentricity of all components. Bearing housing shall have oil bath lubrication using ISO Gr. 100 turbine oil and a side mounted site glass to provide a permanently lubricated assembly. Viton® double lip seals riding on stainless steel shaft sleeves are to provide sealing at each end of the bearing housing.

H. Baseplate: Mount pump and motor on a common base with a drain pan, drain connection, and grout holes.

I. Motor: In accordance with Section 40 05 93. Motor nameplate horsepower must not be exceeded at any head capacity point on the pump curve. Size motors for full speed run-out condition of pump performance curve. Motor size for each chopper pump shall not exceed 60 HP. The motor shall be a direct drive configuration.

2.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide the following spare parts: Thrust bearing tool, upper cutter tool, cartridge cap and any other special tools necessary for the

maintenance and operation of the pump. Special tools are defined as those tools not normally found in a tool supplier's catalogue, or which are normally used only on pumps of this type.

Pump impeller (trimmed to specified conditions) All gaskets, O-rings and grease seals. Pump bearings. Mechanical seal identical to that installed. Cutter bar. Five tubes of coupling lubricant as recommended by coupling manufacturer.

2.07 COATING

A. The pump unit shall be SSPC-SP5 sandblasted then prime coated with Tnemec Perma-Shield PL Series 431 Epoxy (or equal) and finish coated with Tnemec Perma-Shield PL Series 431 Epoxy, or equal (for a total minimum thickness of 25-30 MDFT).

B. See 09 90 00 for motor coating requirements.

C. In tank nozzles shall be designed by the manufacturer to include surface preparation and/or coating to protect against the specified corrosive and abrasive conditions


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTING

A. Each pump shall be tested for performance at the factory to determine head versus capacity, efficiencies, and kilowatt draw required for the operating points that are specified. All tests shall be run in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

B. Witnessed Tests: The County shall have the option of attending a witnessed performance test of the pumps in

accordance with ANSI/HI 14.6. Failure to achieve guaranteed performance shall be cause for rejection. The Contractor shall furnish the Project Representative with not less than 60 days advance written

notice of the date and place of the witnessed tests. If the County opts to attend the witnessed test, the Contractor shall pay all travel expenses to

witness the factory tests for the pumps. Travel expenses are to include airfare, hotel accommodations, and per diem costs. Contractor shall assume one County personnel will attend witness testing.

All test results, including test logs and generated curves, shall be certified correct by an officer of the pump manufacturer’s corporation.

Prepare a plan which shall include: detailed procedures of how the tests will be completed; diagrams showing test setup and instrument locations; submittals for testing instruments and equipment including accuracy tolerances; and calibrations of measuring instruments.

Testing shall be at a designated location by the pump manufacturer with factory-calibrated motor to verify hydraulic performance to demonstrate that the pumps meet the acceptance criteria specified. a. Hydraulic Performance Test:

1) Pumps’ hydraulic performance tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ HI 14.6, acceptance level “1U” and NPSH3 testing per Hydraulic Institute Standards.

2) Prepare pump curve showing head, flow, BHP, and efficiency results. Verify NHSH margin. 3) All units of measure shall be converted to English Units.

All motors and VFDs shall be tested at their respective factories in accordance with the test procedures specified in Sections 40 05 93 and 26 29 23, respectively.

In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the requirements, make necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements in order to conform to the specified requirements and re-test the pump until found satisfactory.

C. Provide a certified written report stating the tests have been successfully completed.

D. Calculations of critical speeds and mass elastic system analysis with 20-hp motors or larger. Calculations shall be signed by a registered mechanical, civil, or structural engineer in the state of Washington.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Each pumping unit shall be aligned, connected, and installed in accordance with the drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Equipment Mounting: The Contractor shall install pumps on equipment pads per Section 43 05 62 and the Standard

Details. Equipment anchors shall be per standard details. The Contractor shall provide anchor bolts per the

manufacturer’s instructions and calculations. The Contractor shall locate and install inserts and supports as required at proper stage of construction in accordance with Section 43 05 62.

Procedures: Section 43 05 62. a. Position equipment pad and equipment anchors for final placement of equipment. b. Use a bolting template to position equipment anchors, prior to pouring equipment pad.


c. Level pump base using shims. d. Pour grout bed supporting each pump base. e. Eliminate grout voids below pump base. f. Tension equipment anchors. g. The installation shall be certified on Form 43 05 01-A as specified in Section 01 33 10.

C. The offset, or misalignment, between motor output and pump input shafts shall not exceed 1-1/2 degrees.

D. Certified on Form 43 05 01-A per Section 01 33 10.

E. Nozzle Alignment: Nozzle positioning and alignment shall be determined by the mixing system manufacturer and shall

be based on CFD modeling validated by actual installations.

3.03 FIELD TESTING

A. Each pumping unit shall be field tested to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements as specified.

B. Provide a complete test report.

C. The equipment provided under this Section shall be started and tested only under the supervision of factory-trained startup personnel provided by the manufacturer. This provision, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of overall responsibility for this work.

D. Field testing: per Section 01 80 00.

E. Vibration testing: per Section 43 05 50.

F. Field testing shall be performed to verify the control strategy specified in CS 710-07. Testing shall include demonstrating that pumps operate in accordance with the specified control strategy.

G. Provide all materials and equipment necessary for testing of the pumps.

3.04 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide a vendor representative onsite a for minimum of three days during the commissioning period conforming to the requirements of Section 01 80 00.

3.05 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of two 4-hour of training sessions conforming to the requirements of Section 01 80 00.

B. Training to be certified on Form 43 05 01-B per Section 01 33 10.

END OF SECTION